initial commit of ebook 12067HEADmain

7 files changed, 21827 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/old/12067-8.txt b/old/12067-8.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..128ab9f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/12067-8.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,6552 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Bee-Man of Orn and Other Fanciful Tales
+by Frank R. Stockton
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: The Bee-Man of Orn and Other Fanciful Tales
+
+Author: Frank R. Stockton
+
+Release Date: April 17, 2004 [EBook #12067]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BEE-MAN OF ORN AND OTHERS ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Suzanne Shell, Kevin Field and PG Distributed Proofreaders
+
+
+
+
+[Transcriber's note:  Italics and bold markup only occurred in the
+ads for other books at the beginning and end, and using the standard
+_italics_ or *bold* just made it hard to read, so this markup has
+been removed in the plain-text version.]
+
+
+
+
+FRANK R. STOCKTON'S WRITINGS.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+New Uniform Edition.
+
+THE BEE-MAN OF ORN, and Other Fanciful Tales.
+THE LADY OR THE TIGER? and Other Stories.
+THE CHRISTMAS WRECK, and Other Stories.
+THE LATE MRS NULL.
+RUDDER GRANGE.
+
+The set, five vols., $6.25; each, $1.25.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+RUDDER GRANGE. New Illustrated Edition. With over 100 Illustrations
+by A.B. Frost. Square 12mo, $2.00.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+THE LADY OR THE TIGER? and Other Stories. 12mo, paper, 50 cents.
+
+THE CHRISTMAS WRECK, and Other Stories. 12mo, paper, 50 cents.
+
+RUDDER GRANGE. 12mo, paper, 60 cents.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A JOLLY FRIENDSHIP. Illustrated, 12mo, $1.50.
+
+THE STORY OF VITEAU. Illustrated, 12mo, $1.50.
+
+THE TING-A-LING TALES. Illustrated, 12mo, $1.00.
+
+THE FLOATING PRINCE, and Other Fairy Tales. Illustrated, 4to, cloth,
+$2.50; boards, $1.50.
+
+ROUNDABOUT RAMBLERS IN LANDS OF FACT AND FANCY. Illustrated. 4to,
+boards, $1.50.
+
+TALES OUT OF SCHOOL. Illustrated. 4to, boards, $1.50.
+
+
+
+
+
+THE BEE-MAN OF ORN
+
+AND
+
+OTHER FANCIFUL TALES
+
+BY
+
+FRANK R. STOCKTON
+
+
+
+
+
+New York
+1887
+Charles Scribner's Sons.
+
+Rand Avery Company,
+Electrotypers and Printers,
+Boston.
+
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+     I. THE BEE-MAN OF ORN
+
+    II. THE GRIFFIN AND THE MINOR CANON
+
+   III. OLD PIPES AND THE DRYAD
+
+    IV. THE QUEEN'S MUSEUM
+
+     V. CHRISTMAS BEFORE LAST; OR, THE FRUIT OF THE FRAGILE PALM
+
+    VI. PRINCE HASSAK'S MARCH
+
+   VII. THE BATTLE OF THE THIRD COUSINS
+
+  VIII. THE BANISHED KING
+
+    IX. THE PHILOPENA
+
+
+
+
+
+THE BEE-MAN OF ORN.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+In the ancient country of Orn, there lived an old man who was called
+the Bee-man, because his whole time was spent in the company of bees.
+He lived in a small hut, which was nothing more than an immense
+bee-hive, for these little creatures had built their honeycombs in
+every corner of the one room it contained, on the shelves, under the
+little table, all about the rough bench on which the old man sat, and
+even about the head-board and along the sides of his low bed. All day
+the air of the room was thick with buzzing insects, but this did not
+interfere in any way with the old Bee-man, who walked in among them,
+ate his meals, and went to sleep, without the slightest fear of being
+stung. He had lived with the bees so long, they had become so
+accustomed to him, and his skin was so tough and hard, that the bees
+no more thought of stinging him than they would of stinging a tree or
+a stone. A swarm of bees had made their hive in a pocket of his old
+leathern doublet; and when he put on this coat to take one of his
+long walks in the forest in search of wild bees' nests, he was very
+glad to have this hive with him, for, if he did not find any wild
+honey, he would put his hand in his pocket and take out a piece of a
+comb for a luncheon. The bees in his pocket worked very
+industriously, and he was always certain of having something to eat
+with him wherever he went. He lived principally upon honey; and when
+he needed bread or meat, he carried some fine combs to a village not
+far away and bartered them for other food. He was ugly, untidy,
+shrivelled, and brown. He was poor, and the bees seemed to be his
+only friends. But, for all that, he was happy and contented; he had
+all the honey he wanted, and his bees, whom he considered the best
+company in the world, were as friendly and sociable as they could be,
+and seemed to increase in number every day.
+
+One day, there stopped at the hut of the Bee-man a Junior Sorcerer.
+This young person, who was a student of magic, necromancy, and the
+kindred arts, was much interested in the Bee-man, whom he had
+frequently noticed in his wanderings, and he considered him an
+admirable subject for study. He had got a great deal of useful
+practice by endeavoring to find out, by the various rules and laws of
+sorcery, exactly why the old Bee-man did not happen to be something
+that he was not, and why he was what he happened to be. He had
+studied a long time at this matter, and had found out something.
+
+"Do you know," he said, when the Bee-man came out of his hut, "that
+you have been transformed?"
+
+"What do you mean by that?" said the other, much surprised.
+
+"You have surely heard of animals and human beings who have been
+magically transformed into different kinds of creatures?"
+
+"Yes, I have heard of these things," said the Bee-man; "but what have
+I been transformed from?"
+
+"That is more than I know," said the Junior Sorcerer. "But one thing
+is certain--you ought to be changed back. If you will find out what
+you have been transformed from, I will see that you are made all
+right again. Nothing would please me better than to attend to such a
+case."
+
+And, having a great many things to study and investigate, the Junior
+Sorcerer went his way.
+
+This information greatly disturbed the mind of the Bee-man. If he had
+been changed from something else, he ought to be that other thing,
+whatever it was. He ran after the young man, and overtook him.
+
+"If you know, kind sir," he said, "that I have been transformed, you
+surely are able to tell me what it is that I was."
+
+"No," said the Junior Sorcerer, "my studies have not proceeded far
+enough for that. When I become a senior I can tell you all about it.
+But, in the meantime, it will be well for you to try to discover for
+yourself your original form, and when you have done that, I will get
+some of the learned masters of my art to restore you to it. It will
+be easy enough to do that, but you could not expect them to take the
+time and trouble to find out what it was."
+
+And, with these words, he hurried away, and was soon lost to view.
+
+Greatly disquieted, the Bee-man retraced his steps, and went to his
+hut. Never before had he heard any thing which had so troubled him.
+
+"I wonder what I was transformed from?" he thought, seating himself
+on his rough bench. "Could it have been a giant, or a powerful
+prince, or some gorgeous being whom the magicians or the fairies
+wished to punish? It may be that I was a dog or a horse, or perhaps a
+fiery dragon or a horrid snake. I hope it was not one of these. But,
+whatever it was, every one has certainly a right to his original
+form, and I am resolved to find out mine. I will start early
+to-morrow morning, and I am sorry now that I have not more pockets to
+my old doublet, so that I might carry more bees and more honey for my
+journey."
+
+He spent the rest of the day in making a hive of twigs and straw,
+and, having transferred to this a number of honey-combs and a colony
+of bees which had just swarmed, he rose before sunrise the next day,
+and having put on his leathern doublet, and having bound his new hive
+to his back, he set forth on his quest; the bees who were to
+accompany him buzzing around him like a cloud.
+
+As the Bee-man passed through the little village the people greatly
+wondered at his queer appearance, with the hive upon his back. "The
+Bee-man is going on a long expedition this time," they said; but no
+one imagined the strange business on which he was bent. About noon he
+sat down under a tree, near a beautiful meadow covered with blossoms,
+and ate a little honey. Then he untied his hive and stretched himself
+out on the grass to rest. As he gazed upon his bees hovering about
+him, some going out to the blossoms in the sunshine, and some
+returning laden with the sweet pollen, he said to himself, "They know
+just what they have to do, and they do it; but alas for me! I know
+not what I may have to do. And yet, whatever it may be, I am
+determined to do it. In some way or other I will find out what was my
+original form, and then I will have myself changed back to it."
+
+And now the thought came to him that perhaps his original form might
+have been something very disagreeable, or even horrid.
+
+"But it does not matter," he said sturdily. "Whatever I was that
+shall I be again. It is not right for any one to retain a form which
+does not properly belong to him. I have no doubt I shall discover my
+original form in the same way that I find the trees in which the wild
+bees hive. When I first catch sight of a bee-tree I am drawn towards
+it, I know not how. Something says to me: 'That is what you are
+looking for.' In the same way I believe that I shall find my original
+form. When I see it, I shall be drawn towards it. Something will say
+to me: 'That is it.'"
+
+When the Bee-man was rested he started off again, and in about an
+hour he entered a fair domain. Around him were beautiful lawns, grand
+trees, and lovely gardens; while at a little distance stood the
+stately palace of the Lord of the Domain. Richly dressed people were
+walking about or sitting in the shade of the trees and arbors;
+splendidly caparisoned horses were waiting for their riders; and
+everywhere were seen signs of opulence and gayety.
+
+"I think," said the Bee-man to himself, "that I should like to stop
+here for a time. If it should happen that I was originally like any
+of these happy creatures it would please me much."
+
+He untied his hive, and hid it behind some bushes, and taking off his
+old doublet, laid that beside it. It would not do to have his bees
+flying about him if he wished to go among the inhabitants of this
+fair domain.
+
+For two days the Bee-man wandered about the palace and its grounds,
+avoiding notice as much as possible, but looking at every thing. He
+saw handsome men and lovely ladies; the finest horses, dogs, and
+cattle that were ever known; beautiful birds in cages, and fishes in
+crystal globes, and it seemed to him that the best of all living
+things were here collected.
+
+At the close of the second day, the Bee-man said to himself: "There
+is one being here toward whom I feel very much drawn, and that is the
+Lord of the Domain. I cannot feel certain that I was once like him,
+but it would be a very fine thing if it were so; and it seems
+impossible for me to be drawn toward any other being in the domain
+when I look upon him, so handsome, rich, and powerful. But I must
+observe him more closely, and feel more sure of the matter, before
+applying to the sorcerers to change me back into a lord of a fair
+domain."
+
+The next morning, the Bee-man saw the Lord of the Domain walking in
+his gardens. He slipped along the shady paths, and followed him so as
+to observe him closely, and find out if he were really drawn toward
+this noble and handsome being. The Lord of the Domain walked on for
+some time, not noticing that the Bee-man was behind him. But suddenly
+turning, he saw the little old man.
+
+"What are you doing here, you vile beggar?" he cried; and he gave him
+a kick that sent him into some bushes that grew by the side of the
+path.
+
+The Bee-man scrambled to his feet, and ran as fast as he could to the
+place where he had hidden his hive and his old doublet.
+
+"If I am certain of any thing," he thought, "it is that I was never a
+person who would kick a poor old man. I will leave this place. I was
+transformed from nothing that I see here."
+
+He now travelled for a day or two longer, and then he came to a great
+black mountain, near the bottom of which was an opening like the
+mouth of a cave.
+
+This mountain he had heard was filled with caverns and under-ground
+passages, which were the abodes of dragons, evil spirits, horrid
+creatures of all kinds.
+
+"Ah me!" said the Bee-man with a sigh, "I suppose I ought to visit
+this place. If I am going to do this thing properly, I should look on
+all sides of the subject, and I may have been one of those horrid
+creatures myself."
+
+Thereupon he went to the mountain, and as he approached the opening
+of the passage which led into its inmost recesses he saw, sitting
+upon the ground, and leaning his back against a tree, a Languid
+Youth.
+
+"Good-day," said this individual when he saw the Bee-man. "Are you
+going inside?"
+
+"Yes," said the Bee-man, "that is what I intend to do."
+
+"Then," said the Languid Youth, slowly rising to his feet, "I think I
+will go with you. I was told that if I went in there I should get my
+energies toned up, and they need it very much; but I did not feel
+equal to entering by myself, and I thought I would wait until some
+one came along. I am very glad to see you, and we will go in
+together."
+
+So the two went into the cave, and they had proceeded but a short
+distance when they met a very little creature, whom it was easy to
+recognize as a Very Imp. He was about two feet high, and resembled in
+color a freshly polished pair of boots. He was extremely lively and
+active, and came bounding toward them.
+
+"What did you two people come here for?" he asked.
+
+"I came," said the Languid Youth, "to have my energies toned up."
+
+"You have come to the right place," said the Very Imp. "We will tone
+you up. And what does that old Bee-man want?"
+
+"He has been transformed from something, and wants to find out what
+it is. He thinks he may have been one of the things in here."
+
+"I should not wonder if that were so," said the Very Imp, rolling his
+head on one side, and eying the Bee-man with a critical gaze.
+
+"All right," said the Very Imp; "he can go around, and pick out his
+previous existence. We have here all sorts of vile creepers,
+crawlers, hissers, and snorters. I suppose he thinks any thing will
+be better than a Bee-man."
+
+"It is not because I want to be better than I am," said the Bee-man,
+"that I started out on this search. I have simply an honest desire to
+become what I originally was."
+
+"Oh! that is it, is it?" said the other. "There is an idiotic
+moon-calf here with a clam head, which must be just like what you
+used to be."
+
+"Nonsense," said the Bee-man. "You have not the least idea what an
+honest purpose is. I shall go about, and see for myself."
+
+"Go ahead," said the Very Imp, "and I will attend to this fellow who
+wants to be toned up." So saying he joined the Languid Youth.
+
+"Look here," said that individual, regarding him with interest, "do
+you black and shine yourself every morning?"
+
+"No," said the other, "it is water-proof varnish. You want to be
+invigorated, don't you? Well, I will tell you a splendid way to
+begin. You see that Bee-man has put down his hive and his coat with
+the bees in it. Just wait till he gets out of sight, and then catch a
+lot of those bees, and squeeze them flat. If you spread them on a
+sticky rag, and make a plaster, and put it on the small of your back,
+it will invigorate you like every thing, especially if some of the
+bees are not quite dead."
+
+"Yes," said the Languid Youth, looking at him with his mild eyes,
+"but if I had energy enough to catch a bee I would be satisfied.
+Suppose you catch a lot for me."
+
+"The subject is changed," said the Very Imp. "We are now about to
+visit the spacious chamber of the King of the Snap-dragons."
+
+"That is a flower," said the Languid Youth.
+
+"You will find him a gay old blossom," said the other. "When he has
+chased you round his room, and has blown sparks at you, and has
+snorted and howled, and cracked his tail, and snapped his jaws like a
+pair of anvils, your energies will be toned up higher than ever
+before in your life."
+
+"No doubt of it," said the Languid Youth; "but I think I will begin
+with something a little milder."
+
+"Well then," said other, "there is a flat-tailed Demon of the Gorge
+in here. He is generally asleep, and, if you say so, you can slip
+into the farthest corner of his cave, and I'll solder his tail to the
+opposite wall. Then he will rage and roar, but he can't get at you,
+for he doesn't reach all the way across his cave; I have measured
+him. It will tone you up wonderfully to sit there and watch him."
+
+"Very likely," said the Languid Youth; "but I would rather stay
+outside and let you go up in the corner. The performance in that way
+will be more interesting to me."
+
+"You are dreadfully hard to please," said the Very Imp. "I have
+offered them to you loose, and I have offered them fastened to a
+wall, and now the best thing I can do is to give you a chance at one
+of them that can't move at all. It is the Ghastly Griffin and is
+enchanted. He can't stir so much as the tip of his whiskers for a
+thousand years. You can go to his cave and examine him just as if he
+were stuffed, and then you can sit on his back and think how it would
+be if you should live to be a thousand years old, and he should wake
+up while you are sitting there. It would be easy to imagine a lot of
+horrible things he would do to you when you look at his open mouth
+with its awful fangs, his dreadful claws, and his horrible wings all
+covered with spikes."
+
+"I think that might suit me," said the Languid Youth. "I would much
+rather imagine the exercises of these monsters than to see them
+really going on."
+
+"Come on, then," said the Very Imp, and he led the way to the cave of
+the Ghastly Griffin.
+
+The Bee-man went by himself through a great part of the mountain, and
+looked into many of its gloomy caves and recesses, recoiling in
+horror from most of the dreadful monsters who met his eyes. While he
+was wandering about, an awful roar was heard resounding through the
+passages of the mountain, and soon there came flapping along an
+enormous dragon, with body black as night, and wings and tail of
+fiery red. In his great fore-claws he bore a little baby.
+
+"Horrible!" exclaimed the Bee-man. "He is taking that little creature
+to his cave to devour it."
+
+He saw the dragon enter a cave not far away, and following looked in.
+The dragon was crouched upon the ground with the little baby lying
+before him. It did not seem to be hurt, but was frightened and
+crying. The monster was looking upon it with delight, as if he
+intended to make a dainty meal of it as soon as his appetite should
+be a little stronger.
+
+"It is too bad!" thought the Bee-man. "Somebody ought to do
+something." And turning around, he ran away as fast as he could.
+
+He ran through various passages until he came to the spot where he
+had left his bee-hive. Picking it up, he hurried back, carrying the
+hive in his two hands before him. When he reached the cave of the
+dragon, he looked in and saw the monster still crouched over the
+weeping child. Without a moment's hesitation, the Bee-man rushed into
+the cave and threw his hive straight into the face of the dragon. The
+bees, enraged by the shock, rushed out in an angry crowd and
+immediately fell upon the head, mouth, eyes, and nose of the dragon.
+The great monster, astounded by this sudden attack, and driven almost
+wild by the numberless stings of the bees, sprang back to the
+farthest portion of his cave, still followed by his relentless
+enemies, at whom he flapped wildly with his great wings and struck
+with his paws. While the dragon was thus engaged with the bees, the
+Bee-man rushed forward, and, seizing the child, he hurried away. He
+did not stop to pick up his doublet, but kept on until he reached the
+entrance of the caves. There he saw the Very Imp hopping along on one
+leg, and rubbing his back and shoulders with his hands, and stopped
+to inquire what was the matter, and what had become of the Languid
+Youth.
+
+"He is no kind of a fellow," said the Very Imp. "He disappointed me
+dreadfully. I took him up to the Ghastly Griffin, and told him the
+thing was enchanted, and that he might sit on its back and think
+about what it could do if it was awake; and when he came near it the
+wretched creature opened its eyes, and raised its head, and then you
+ought to have seen how mad that simpleton was. He made a dash at me
+and seized me by the ears; he kicked and beat me till I can scarcely
+move."
+
+"His energies must have been toned up a good deal," said the Bee-man.
+
+"Toned up! I should say so!" cried the other. "I raised a howl, and a
+Scissor-jawed Clipper came out of his hole, and got after him; but
+that lazy fool ran so fast that he could not be caught."
+
+The Bee-man now ran on and soon overtook the Languid Youth.
+
+"You need not be in a hurry now," said the latter, "for the rules of
+this institution don't allow the creatures inside to come out of this
+opening, or to hang around it. If they did, they would frighten away
+visitors. They go in and out of holes in the upper part of the
+mountain."
+
+The two proceeded on their way.
+
+"What are you going to do with that baby?" said the Languid Youth.
+
+"I shall carry it along with me," said the Bee-man, "as I go on with
+my search, and perhaps I may find its mother. If I do not, I shall
+give it to somebody in that little village yonder. Any thing would be
+better than leaving it to be devoured by that horrid dragon."
+
+"Let me carry it. I feel quite strong enough now to carry a baby."
+
+"Thank you," said the Bee-man, "but I can take it myself. I like to
+carry something, and I have now neither my hive nor my doublet."
+
+"It is very well that you had to leave them behind," said the Youth,
+"for the bees would have stung the baby."
+
+"My bees never sting babies," said the other.
+
+"They probably never had a chance," remarked his companion.
+
+They soon entered the village, and after walking a short distance the
+youth exclaimed: "Do you see that woman over there sitting at the
+door of her house? She has beautiful hair and she is tearing it all
+to pieces. She should not be allowed to do that."
+
+"No," said the Bee-man. "Her friends should tie her hands."
+
+"Perhaps she is the mother of this child," said the Youth, "and if
+you give it to her she will no longer think of tearing her hair."
+
+"But," said the Bee-man, "you don't really think this is her child?"
+
+"Suppose you go over and see," said the other.
+
+The Bee-man hesitated a moment, and then he walked toward the woman.
+Hearing him coming, she raised her head, and when she saw the child
+she rushed towards it, snatched it into her arms, and screaming with
+joy she covered it with kisses. Then with happy tears she begged to
+know the story of the rescue of her child, whom she never expected to
+see again; and she loaded the Bee-man with thanks and blessings. The
+friends and neighbors gathered around and there was great rejoicing.
+The mother urged the Bee-man and the Youth to stay with her, and rest
+and refresh themselves, which they were glad to do as they were tired
+and hungry.
+
+They remained at the cottage all night, and in the afternoon of the
+next day the Bee-man said to the Youth: "It may seem an odd thing to
+you, but never in all my life have I felt myself drawn towards any
+living being as I am drawn towards this baby. Therefore I believe
+that I have been transformed from a baby."
+
+"Good!" cried the Youth. "It is my opinion that you have hit the
+truth. And now would you like to be changed back to your original
+form?"
+
+"Indeed I would!" said the Bee-man, "I have the strongest yearning to
+be what I originally was."
+
+The Youth, who had now lost every trace of languid feeling, took a
+great interest in the matter, and early the next morning started off
+to inform the Junior Sorcerer that the Bee-man had discovered what he
+had been transformed from, and desired to be changed back to it.
+
+The Junior Sorcerer and his learned Masters were filled with
+enthusiasm when they heard this report, and they at once set out for
+the mother's cottage. And there by magic arts the Bee-man was changed
+back into a baby. The mother was so grateful for what the Bee-man had
+done for her that she agreed to take charge of this baby, and to
+bring it up as her own.
+
+"It will be a grand thing for him," said the Junior Sorcerer, "and I
+am glad that I studied his case. He will now have a fresh start in
+life, and will have a chance to become something better than a
+miserable old man living in a wretched hut with no friends or
+companions but buzzing bees."
+
+The Junior Sorcerer and his Masters then returned to their homes,
+happy in the success of their great performance; and the Youth went
+back to his home anxious to begin a life of activity and energy.
+
+Years and years afterward, when the Junior Sorcerer had become a
+Senior and was very old indeed, he passed through the country of Orn,
+and noticed a small hut about which swarms of bees were flying. He
+approached it, and looking in at the door he saw an old man in a
+leathern doublet, sitting at a table, eating honey. By his magic art
+he knew this was the baby which had been transformed from the
+Bee-man.
+
+"Upon my word!" exclaimed the Sorcerer, "He has grown into the same
+thing again!"
+
+
+
+
+
+ THE GRIFFIN AND THE MINOR CANON.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Over the great door of an old, old church which stood in a quiet town
+of a far-away land there was carved in stone the figure of a large
+griffin. The old-time sculptor had done his work with great care, but
+the image he had made was not a pleasant one to look at. It had a
+large head, with enormous open mouth and savage teeth; from its back
+arose great wings, armed with sharp hooks and prongs; it had stout
+legs in front, with projecting claws; but there were no legs
+behind,--the body running out into a long and powerful tail, finished
+off at the end with a barbed point. This tail was coiled up under
+him, the end sticking up just back of his wings.
+
+The sculptor, or the people who had ordered this stone figure, had
+evidently been very much pleased with it, for little copies of it,
+also in stone, had been placed here and there along the sides of the
+church, not very far from the ground, so that people could easily
+look at them, and ponder on their curious forms. There were a great
+many other sculptures on the outside of this church,--saints,
+martyrs, grotesque heads of men, beasts, and birds, as well as those
+of other creatures which cannot be named, because nobody knows
+exactly what they were; but none were so curious and interesting as
+the great griffin over the door, and the little griffins on the sides
+of the church.
+
+A long, long distance from the town, in the midst of dreadful wilds
+scarcely known to man, there dwelt the Griffin whose image had been
+put up over the church-door. In some way or other, the old-time
+sculptor had seen him, and afterward, to the best of his memory, had
+copied his figure in stone. The Griffin had never known this, until,
+hundreds of years afterward, he heard from a bird, from a wild
+animal, or in some manner which it is not now easy to find out, that
+there was a likeness of him on the old church in the distant town.
+Now, this Griffin had no idea how he looked. He had never seen a
+mirror, and the streams where he lived were so turbulent and violent
+that a quiet piece of water, which would reflect the image of any
+thing looking into it, could not be found. Being, as far as could be
+ascertained, the very last of his race, he had never seen another
+griffin. Therefore it was, that, when he heard of this stone image of
+himself, he became very anxious to know what he looked like, and at
+last he determined to go to the old church, and see for himself what
+manner of being he was. So he started off from the dreadful wilds,
+and flew on and on until he came to the countries inhabited by men,
+where his appearance in the air created great consternation; but he
+alighted nowhere, keeping up a steady flight until he reached the
+suburbs of the town which had his image on its church. Here, late in
+the afternoon, he alighted in a green meadow by the side of a brook,
+and stretched himself on the grass to rest. His great wings were
+tired, for he had not made such a long flight in a century, or more.
+
+The news of his coming spread quickly over the town, and the people,
+frightened nearly out of their wits by the arrival of so
+extraordinary a visitor, fled into their houses, and shut themselves
+up. The Griffin called loudly for some one to come to him, but the
+more he called, the more afraid the people were to show themselves.
+At length he saw two laborers hurrying to their homes through the
+fields, and in a terrible voice he commanded them to stop. Not daring
+to disobey, the men stood, trembling.
+
+"What is the matter with you all?" cried the Griffin. "Is there not a
+man in your town who is brave enough to speak to me?"
+
+"I think," said one of the laborers, his voice shaking so that his
+words could hardly be understood, "that--perhaps--the Minor
+Canon--would come."
+
+"Go, call him, then!" said the Griffin; "I want to see him."
+
+The Minor Canon, who filled a subordinate position in the old church,
+had just finished the afternoon services, and was coming out of a
+side door, with three aged women who had formed the week-day
+congregation. He was a young man of a kind disposition, and very
+anxious to do good to the people of the town. Apart from his duties
+in the church, where he conducted services every week-day, he visited
+the sick and the poor, counselled and assisted persons who were in
+trouble, and taught a school composed entirely of the bad children in
+the town with whom nobody else would have any thing to do. Whenever
+the people wanted something difficult done for them, they always went
+to the Minor Canon. Thus it was that the laborer thought of the young
+priest when he found that some one must come and speak to the
+Griffin.
+
+The Minor Canon had not heard of the strange event, which was known
+to the whole town except himself and the three old women, and when he
+was informed of it, and was told that the Griffin had asked to see
+him, he was greatly amazed, and frightened.
+
+"Me!" he exclaimed. "He has never heard of me! What should he want
+with me?"
+
+"Oh! you must go instantly!" cried the two men. "He is very angry now
+because he has been kept waiting so long; and nobody knows what may
+happen if you don't hurry to him."
+
+The poor Minor Canon would rather have had his hand cut off than go
+out to meet an angry griffin; but he felt that it was his duty to go,
+for it would be a woful thing if injury should come to the people of
+the town because he was not brave enough to obey the summons of the
+Griffin. So, pale and frightened, he started off.
+
+"Well," said the Griffin, as soon as the young man came near, "I am
+glad to see that there is some one who has the courage to come to
+me."
+
+The Minor Canon did not feel very courageous, but he bowed his head.
+
+"Is this the town," said the Griffin, "where there is a church with a
+likeness of myself over one of the doors?"
+
+The Minor Canon looked at the frightful creature before him and saw
+that it was, without doubt, exactly like the stone image on the
+church. "Yes," he said, "you are right."
+
+"Well, then," said the Griffin, "will you take me to it? I wish very
+much to see it."
+
+The Minor Canon instantly thought that if the Griffin entered the
+town without the people knowing what he came for, some of them would
+probably be frightened to death, and so he sought to gain time to
+prepare their minds.
+
+"It is growing dark, now," he said, very much afraid, as he spoke,
+that his words might enrage the Griffin, "and objects on the front of
+the church can not be seen clearly. It will be better to wait until
+morning, if you wish to get a good view of the stone image of
+yourself."
+
+"That will suit me very well," said the Griffin. "I see you are a man
+of good sense. I am tired, and I will take a nap here on this soft
+grass, while I cool my tail in the little stream that runs near me.
+The end of my tail gets red-hot when I am angry or excited, and it is
+quite warm now. So you may go, but be sure and come early to-morrow
+morning, and show me the way to the church."
+
+The Minor Canon was glad enough to take his leave, and hurried into
+the town. In front of the church he found a great many people
+assembled to hear his report of his interview with the Griffin. When
+they found that he had not come to spread ruin and devastation, but
+simply to see his stony likeness on the church, they showed neither
+relief nor gratification, but began to upbraid the Minor Canon for
+consenting to conduct the creature into the town.
+
+"What could I do?" cried the young man. "If I should not bring him he
+would come himself and, perhaps, end by setting fire to the town with
+his red-hot tail."
+
+Still the people were not satisfied, and a great many plans were
+proposed to prevent the Griffin from coming into the town. Some
+elderly persons urged that the young men should go out and kill him;
+but the young men scoffed at such a ridiculous idea. Then some one
+said that it would be a good thing to destroy the stone image so that
+the Griffin would have no excuse for entering the town; and this
+proposal was received with such favor that many of the people ran for
+hammers, chisels, and crowbars, with which to tear down and break up
+the stone griffin. But the Minor Canon resisted this plan with all
+the strength of his mind and body. He assured the people that this
+action would enrage the Griffin beyond measure, for it would be
+impossible to conceal from him that his image had been destroyed
+during the night. But the people were so determined to break up the
+stone griffin that the Minor Canon saw that there was nothing for him
+to do but to stay there and protect it. All night he walked up and
+down in front of the church-door, keeping away the men who brought
+ladders, by which they might mount to the great stone griffin, and
+knock it to pieces with their hammers and crowbars. After many hours
+the people were obliged to give up their attempts, and went home to
+sleep; but the Minor Canon remained at his post till early morning,
+and then he hurried away to the field where he had left the Griffin.
+
+The monster had just awakened, and rising to his fore-legs and
+shaking himself, he said that he was ready to go into the town. The
+Minor Canon, therefore, walked back, the Griffin flying slowly
+through the air, at a short distance above the head of his guide. Not
+a person was to be seen in the streets, and they proceeded directly
+to the front of the church, where the Minor Canon pointed out the
+stone griffin.
+
+The real Griffin settled down in the little square before the church
+and gazed earnestly at his sculptured likeness. For a long time he
+looked at it. First he put his head on one side, and then he put it
+on the other; then he shut his right eye and gazed with his left,
+after which he shut his left eye and gazed with his right. Then he
+moved a little to one side and looked at the image, then he moved the
+other way. After a while he said to the Minor Canon, who had been
+standing by all this time:
+
+"It is, it must be, an excellent likeness! That breadth between the
+eyes, that expansive forehead, those massive jaws! I feel that it
+must resemble me. If there is any fault to find with it, it is that
+the neck seems a little stiff. But that is nothing. It is an
+admirable likeness,--admirable!"
+
+The Griffin sat looking at his image all the morning and all the
+afternoon. The Minor Canon had been afraid to go away and leave him,
+and had hoped all through the day that he would soon be satisfied
+with his inspection and fly away home. But by evening the poor young
+man was utterly exhausted, and felt that he must eat and sleep. He
+frankly admitted this fact to the Griffin, and asked him if he would
+not like something to eat. He said this because he felt obliged in
+politeness to do so, but as soon as he had spoken the words, he was
+seized with dread lest the monster should demand half a dozen babies,
+or some tempting repast of that kind.
+
+"Oh, no," said the Griffin, "I never eat between the equinoxes. At
+the vernal and at the autumnal equinox I take a good meal, and that
+lasts me for half a year. I am extremely regular in my habits, and do
+not think it healthful to eat at odd times. But if you need food, go
+and get it, and I will return to the soft grass where I slept last
+night and take another nap."
+
+The next day the Griffin came again to the little square before the
+church, and remained there until evening, steadfastly regarding the
+stone griffin over the door. The Minor Canon came once or twice to
+look at him, and the Griffin seemed very glad to see him; but the
+young clergyman could not stay as he had done before, for he had many
+duties to perform. Nobody went to the church, but the people came to
+the Minor Canon's house, and anxiously asked him how long the Griffin
+was going to stay.
+
+"I do not know," he answered, "but I think he will soon be satisfied
+with regarding his stone likeness, and then he will go away."
+
+But the Griffin did not go away. Morning after morning he came to the
+church, but after a time he did not stay there all day. He seemed to
+have taken a great fancy to the Minor Canon, and followed him about
+as he pursued his various avocations. He would wait for him at the
+side door of the church, for the Minor Canon held services every day,
+morning and evening, though nobody came now. "If any one should
+come," he said to himself, "I must be found at my post." When the
+young man came out, the Griffin would accompany him in his visits to
+the sick and the poor, and would often look into the windows of the
+school-house where the Minor Canon was teaching his unruly scholars.
+All the other schools were closed, but the parents of the Minor
+Canon's scholars forced them to go to school, because they were so
+bad they could not endure them all day at home,--griffin or no
+griffin. But it must be said they generally behaved very well when
+that great monster sat up on his tail and looked in at the
+school-room window.
+
+When it was perceived that the Griffin showed no sign of going away,
+all the people who were able to do so left the town. The canons and
+the higher officers of the church had fled away during the first day
+of the Griffin's visit, leaving behind only the Minor Canon and some
+of the men who opened the doors and swept the church. All the
+citizens who could afford it shut up their houses and travelled to
+distant parts, and only the working people and the poor were left
+behind. After some days these ventured to go about and attend to
+their business, for if they did not work they would starve. They were
+getting a little used to seeing the Griffin, and having been told
+that he did not eat between equinoxes, they did not feel so much
+afraid of him as before.
+
+Day by day the Griffin became more and more attached to the Minor
+Canon. He kept near him a great part of the time, and often spent the
+night in front of the little house where the young clergyman lived
+alone. This strange companionship was often burdensome to the Minor
+Canon; but, on the other hand, he could not deny that he derived a
+great deal of benefit and instruction from it. The Griffin had lived
+for hundreds of years, and had seen much; and he told the Minor Canon
+many wonderful things.
+
+"It is like reading an old book," said the young clergyman to
+himself; "but how many books I would have had to read before I would
+have found out what the Griffin has told me about the earth, the air,
+the water, about minerals, and metals, and growing things, and all
+the wonders of the world!"
+
+Thus the summer went on, and drew toward its close. And now the
+people of the town began to be very much troubled again.
+
+"It will not be long," they said, "before the autumnal equinox is
+here, and then that monster will want to eat. He will be dreadfully
+hungry, for he has taken so much exercise since his last meal. He
+will devour our children. Without doubt, he will eat them all. What
+is to be done?"
+
+To this question no one could give an answer, but all agreed that the
+Griffin must not be allowed to remain until the approaching equinox.
+After talking over the matter a great deal, a crowd of the people
+went to the Minor Canon, at a time when the Griffin was not with him.
+
+"It is all your fault," they said, "that that monster is among us.
+You brought him here, and you ought to see that he goes away. It is
+only on your account that he stays here at all, for, although he
+visits his image every day, he is with you the greater part of the
+time. If you were not here, he would not stay. It is your duty to go
+away and then he will follow you, and we shall be free from the
+dreadful danger which hangs over us."
+
+"Go away!" cried the Minor Canon, greatly grieved at being spoken to
+in such a way. "Where shall I go? If I go to some other town, shall I
+not take this trouble there? Have I a right to do that?"
+
+"No," said the people, "you must not go to any other town. There is
+no town far enough away. You must go to the dreadful wilds where the
+Griffin lives; and then he will follow you and stay there."
+
+They did not say whether or not they expected the Minor Canon to stay
+there also, and he did not ask them any thing about it. He bowed his
+head, and went into his house, to think. The more he thought, the
+more clear it became to his mind that it was his duty to go away, and
+thus free the town from the presence of the Griffin.
+
+That evening he packed a leathern bag full of bread and meat, and
+early the next morning he set out on his journey to the dreadful
+wilds. It was a long, weary, and doleful journey, especially after he
+had gone beyond the habitations of men, but the Minor Canon kept on
+bravely, and never faltered. The way was longer than he had expected,
+and his provisions soon grew so scanty that he was obliged to eat but
+a little every day, but he kept up his courage, and pressed on, and,
+after many days of toilsome travel, he reached the dreadful wilds.
+
+When the Griffin found that the Minor Canon had left the town he
+seemed sorry, but showed no disposition to go and look for him. After
+a few days had passed, he became much annoyed, and asked some of the
+people where the Minor Canon had gone. But, although the citizens had
+been so anxious that the young clergyman should go to the dreadful
+wilds, thinking that the Griffin would immediately follow him, they
+were now afraid to mention the Minor Canon's destination, for the
+monster seemed angry already, and, if he should suspect their trick
+he would, doubtless, become very much enraged. So every one said he
+did not know, and the Griffin wandered about disconsolate. One
+morning he looked into the Minor Canon's school-house, which was
+always empty now, and thought that it was a shame that every thing
+should suffer on account of the young man's absence.
+
+"It does not matter so much about the church," he said, "for nobody
+went there; but it is a pity about the school. I think I will teach
+it myself until he returns."
+
+It was the hour for opening the school, and the Griffin went inside
+and pulled the rope which rang the school-bell. Some of the children
+who heard the bell ran in to see what was the matter, supposing it to
+be a joke of one of their companions; but when they saw the Griffin
+they stood astonished, and scared.
+
+"Go tell the other scholars," said the monster, "that school is about
+to open, and that if they are not all here in ten minutes, I shall
+come after them."
+
+In seven minutes every scholar was in place.
+
+Never was seen such an orderly school. Not a boy or girl moved, or
+uttered a whisper. The Griffin climbed into the master's seat, his
+wide wings spread on each side of him, because he could not lean back
+in his chair while they stuck out behind, and his great tail coiled
+around, in front of the desk, the barbed end sticking up, ready to
+tap any boy or girl who might misbehave. The Griffin now addressed
+the scholars, telling them that he intended to teach them while their
+master was away. In speaking he endeavored to imitate, as far as
+possible, the mild and gentle tones of the Minor Canon, but it must
+be admitted that in this he was not very successful. He had paid a
+good deal of attention to the studies of the school, and he
+determined not to attempt to teach them any thing new, but to review
+them in what they had been studying; so he called up the various
+classes, and questioned them upon their previous lessons. The
+children racked their brains to remember what they had learned. They
+were so afraid of the Griffin's displeasure that they recited as they
+had never recited before. One of the boys, far down in his class,
+answered so well that the Griffin was astonished.
+
+"I should think you would be at the head," said he. "I am sure you
+have never been in the habit of reciting so well. Why is this?"
+
+"Because I did not choose to take the trouble," said the boy,
+trembling in his boots. He felt obliged to speak the truth, for all
+the children thought that the great eyes of the Griffin could see
+right through them, and that he would know when they told a
+falsehood.
+
+"You ought to be ashamed of yourself," said the Griffin. "Go down to
+the very tail of the class, and if you are not at the head in two
+days, I shall know the reason why."
+
+The next afternoon this boy was number one.
+
+It was astonishing how much these children now learned of what they
+had been studying. It was as if they had been educated over again.
+The Griffin used no severity toward them, but there was a look about
+him which made them unwilling to go to bed until they were sure they
+knew their lessons for the next day.
+
+The Griffin now thought that he ought to visit the sick and the poor;
+and he began to go about the town for this purpose. The effect upon
+the sick was miraculous. All, except those who were very ill indeed,
+jumped from their beds when they heard he was coming, and declared
+themselves quite well. To those who could not get up, he gave herbs
+and roots, which none of them had ever before thought of as
+medicines, but which the Griffin had seen used in various parts of
+the world; and most of them recovered. But, for all that, they
+afterward said that no matter what happened to them, they hoped that
+they should never again have such a doctor coming to their bed-sides,
+feeling their pulses and looking at their tongues.
+
+As for the poor, they seemed to have utterly disappeared. All those
+who had depended upon charity for their daily bread were now at work
+in some way or other; many of them offering to do odd jobs for their
+neighbors just for the sake of their meals,--a thing which before had
+been seldom heard of in the town. The Griffin could find no one who
+needed his assistance.
+
+The summer had now passed, and the autumnal equinox was rapidly
+approaching. The citizens were in a state of great alarm and anxiety.
+The Griffin showed no signs of going away, but seemed to have settled
+himself permanently among them. In a short time, the day for his
+semi-annual meal would arrive, and then what would happen? The
+monster would certainly be very hungry, and would devour all their
+children.
+
+Now they greatly regretted and lamented that they had sent away the
+Minor Canon; he was the only one on whom they could have depended in
+this trouble, for he could talk freely with the Griffin, and so find
+out what could be done. But it would not do to be inactive. Some step
+must be taken immediately. A meeting of the citizens was called, and
+two old men were appointed to go and talk to the Griffin. They were
+instructed to offer to prepare a splendid dinner for him on equinox
+day,--one which would entirely satisfy his hunger. They would offer
+him the fattest mutton, the most tender beef, fish, and game of
+various sorts, and any thing of the kind that he might fancy. If none
+of these suited, they were to mention that there was an orphan asylum
+in the next town.
+
+"Anything would be better," said the citizens, "than to have our dear
+children devoured."
+
+The old men went to the Griffin, but their propositions were not
+received with favor.
+
+"From what I have seen of the people of this town," said the monster,
+"I do not think I could relish any thing which was prepared by them.
+They appear to be all cowards, and, therefore, mean and selfish. As
+for eating one of them, old or young, I could not think of it for a
+moment. In fact, there was only one creature in the whole place for
+whom I could have had any appetite, and that is the Minor Canon, who
+has gone away. He was brave, and good, and honest, and I think I
+should have relished him."
+
+"Ah!" said one of the old men very politely, "in that case I wish we
+had not sent him to the dreadful wilds!"
+
+"What!" cried the Griffin. "What do you mean? Explain instantly what
+you are talking about!"
+
+The old man, terribly frightened at what he had said, was obliged to
+tell how the Minor Canon had been sent away by the people, in the
+hope that the Griffin might be induced to follow him.
+
+When the monster heard this, he became furiously angry. He dashed
+away from the old men and, spreading his wings, flew backward and
+forward over the town. He was so much excited that his tail became
+red-hot, and glowed like a meteor against the evening sky. When at
+last he settled down in the little field where he usually rested, and
+thrust his tail into the brook, the steam arose like a cloud, and the
+water of the stream ran hot through the town. The citizens were
+greatly frightened, and bitterly blamed the old man for telling about
+the Minor Canon.
+
+"It is plain," they said, "that the Griffin intended at last to go
+and look for him, and we should have been saved. Now who can tell
+what misery you have brought upon us."
+
+The Griffin did not remain long in the little field. As soon as his
+tail was cool he flew to the town-hall and rang the bell. The
+citizens knew that they were expected to come there, and although
+they were afraid to go, they were still more afraid to stay away; and
+they crowded into the hall. The Griffin was on the platform at one
+end, flapping his wings and walking up and down, and the end of his
+tail was still so warm that it slightly scorched the boards as he
+dragged it after him.
+
+When everybody who was able to come was there, the Griffin stood
+still and addressed the meeting.
+
+"I have had a contemptible opinion of you," he said, "ever since I
+discovered what cowards you are, but I had no idea that you were so
+ungrateful, selfish, and cruel, as I now find you to be. Here was
+your Minor Canon, who labored day and night for your good, and
+thought of nothing else but how he might benefit you and make you
+happy; and as soon as you imagine yourselves threatened with a
+danger,--for well I know you are dreadfully afraid of me,--you send
+him off, caring not whether he returns or perishes, hoping thereby to
+save yourselves. Now, I had conceived a great liking for that young
+man, and had intended, in a day or two, to go and look him up. But I
+have changed my mind about him. I shall go and find him, but I shall
+send him back here to live among you, and I intend that he shall
+enjoy the reward of his labor and his sacrifices. Go, some of you, to
+the officers of the church, who so cowardly ran away when I first
+came here, and tell them never to return to this town under penalty
+of death. And if, when your Minor Canon comes back to you, you do not
+bow yourselves before him, put him in the highest place among you,
+and serve and honor him all his life, beware of my terrible
+vengeance! There were only two good things in this town: the Minor
+Canon and the stone image of myself over your church-door. One of
+these you have sent away, and the other I shall carry away myself."
+
+With these words he dismissed the meeting, and it was time, for the
+end of his tail had become so hot that there was danger of its
+setting fire to the building.
+
+The next morning, the Griffin came to the church, and tearing the
+stone image of himself from its fastenings over the great door, he
+grasped it with his powerful fore-legs and flew up into the air.
+Then, after hovering over the town for a moment, he gave his tail an
+angry shake and took up his flight to the dreadful wilds. When he
+reached this desolate region, he set the stone Griffin upon a ledge
+of a rock which rose in front of the dismal cave he called his home.
+There the image occupied a position somewhat similar to that it had
+had over the church-door; and the Griffin, panting with the exertion
+of carrying such an enormous load to so great a distance, lay down
+upon the ground, and regarded it with much satisfaction. When he felt
+somewhat rested he went to look for the Minor Canon. He found the
+young man, weak and half starved, lying under the shadow of a rock.
+After picking him up and carrying him to his cave, the Griffin flew
+away to a distant marsh, where he procured some roots and herbs which
+he well knew were strengthening and beneficial to man, though he had
+never tasted them himself. After eating these the Minor Canon was
+greatly revived, and sat up and listened while the Griffin told him
+what had happened in the town.
+
+"Do you know," said the monster, when he had finished, "that I have
+had, and still have, a great liking for you?"
+
+"I am very glad to hear it," said the Minor Canon, with his usual
+politeness.
+
+"I am not at all sure that you would be," said the Griffin, "if you
+thoroughly understood the state of the case, but we will not consider
+that now. If some things were different, other things would be
+otherwise. I have been so enraged by discovering the manner in which
+you have been treated that I have determined that you shall at last
+enjoy the rewards and honors to which you are entitled. Lie down and
+have a good sleep, and then I will take you back to the town."
+
+As he heard these words, a look of trouble came over the young man's
+face.
+
+"You need not give yourself any anxiety," said the Griffin, "about my
+return to the town. I shall not remain there. Now that I have that
+admirable likeness of myself in front of my cave, where I can sit at
+my leisure, and gaze upon its noble features and magnificent
+proportions, I have no wish to see that abode of cowardly and selfish
+people."
+
+The Minor Canon, relieved from his fears, lay back, and dropped into
+a doze; and when he was sound asleep the Griffin took him up, and
+carried him back to the town. He arrived just before daybreak, and
+putting the young man gently on the grass in the little field where
+he himself used to rest, the monster, without having been seen by any
+of the people, flew back to his home.
+
+When the Minor Canon made his appearance in the morning among the
+citizens, the enthusiasm and cordiality with which he was received
+were truly wonderful. He was taken to a house which had been occupied
+by one of the banished high officers of the place, and every one was
+anxious to do all that could be done for his health and comfort. The
+people crowded into the church when he held services, so that the
+three old women who used to be his week-day congregation could not
+get to the best seats, which they had always been in the habit of
+taking; and the parents of the bad children determined to reform them
+at home, in order that he might be spared the trouble of keeping up
+his former school. The Minor Canon was appointed to the highest
+office of the old church, and before he died, he became a bishop.
+
+During the first years after his return from the dreadful wilds, the
+people of the town looked up to him as a man to whom they were bound
+to do honor and reverence; but they often, also, looked up to the sky
+to see if there were any signs of the Griffin coming back. However,
+in the course of time, they learned to honor and reverence their
+former Minor Canon without the fear of being punished if they did not
+do so.
+
+But they need never have been afraid of the Griffin. The autumnal
+equinox day came round, and the monster ate nothing. If he could not
+have the Minor Canon, he did not care for any thing. So, lying down,
+with his eyes fixed upon the great stone griffin, he gradually
+declined, and died. It was a good thing for some of the people of the
+town that they did not know this.
+
+If you should ever visit the old town, you would still see the little
+griffins on the sides of the church; but the great stone griffin that
+was over the door is gone.
+
+
+
+
+
+ OLD PIPES AND THE DRYAD.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A mountain brook ran through a little village. Over the brook there
+was a narrow bridge, and from the bridge a foot-path led out from the
+village and up the hill-side, to the cottage of Old Pipes and his
+mother. For many, many years, Old Pipes had been employed by the
+villagers to pipe the cattle down from the hills. Every afternoon, an
+hour before sunset, he would sit on a rock in front of his cottage
+and play on his pipes. Then all the flocks and herds that were
+grazing on the mountains would hear him, wherever they might happen
+to be, and would come down to the village--the cows by the easiest
+paths, the sheep by those not quite so easy, and the goats by the
+steep and rocky ways that were hardest of all.
+
+But now, for a year or more, Old Pipes had not piped the cattle home.
+It is true that every afternoon he sat upon the rock and played upon
+his familiar instrument; but the cattle did not hear him. He had
+grown old, and his breath was feeble. The echoes of his cheerful
+notes, which used to come from the rocky hill on the other side of
+the valley, were heard no more; and twenty yards from Old Pipes one
+could scarcely tell what tune he was playing. He had become somewhat
+deaf, and did not know that the sound of his pipes was so thin and
+weak, and that the cattle did not hear him. The cows, the sheep, and
+the goats came down every afternoon as before, but this was because
+two boys and a girl were sent up after them. The villagers did not
+wish the good old man to know that his piping was no longer of any
+use, so they paid him his little salary every month, and said nothing
+about the two boys and the girl.
+
+Old Pipes's mother was, of course, a great deal older then he was,
+and was as deaf as a gate,--posts, latch, hinges, and all,--and she
+never knew that the sound of her son's pipe did not spread over all
+the mountainside, and echo back strong and clear from the opposite
+hills. She was very fond of Old Pipes, and proud of his piping; and
+as he was so much younger than she was, she never thought of him as
+being very old. She cooked for him, and made his bed, and mended his
+clothes; and they lived very comfortably on his little salary.
+
+One afternoon, at the end of the month, when Old Pipes had finished
+his piping, he took his stout staff and went down the hill to the
+village to receive the money for his month's work. The path seemed a
+great deal steeper and more difficult than it used to be; and Old
+Pipes thought that it must have been washed by the rains and greatly
+damaged. He remembered it as a path that was quite easy to traverse
+either up or down. But Old Pipes had been a very active man, and as
+his mother was so much older than he was, he never thought of himself
+as aged and infirm.
+
+When the Chief Villager had paid him, and he had talked a little with
+some of his friends, Old Pipes started to go home. But when he had
+crossed the bridge over the brook, and gone a short distance up the
+hill-side, he became very tired, and sat down upon a stone. He had
+not been sitting there half a minute, when along came two boys and a
+girl.
+
+"Children," said Old Pipes, "I'm very tired tonight, and I don't
+believe I can climb up this steep path to my home. I think I shall
+have to ask you to help me."
+
+"We will do that," said the boys and the girl, quite cheerfully; and
+one boy took him by the right hand, and the other by the left, while
+the girl pushed him in the back. In this way he went up the hill
+quite easily, and soon reached his cottage door. Old Pipes gave each
+of the three children a copper coin, and then they sat down for a few
+minutes' rest before starting back to the village.
+
+"I'm sorry that I tired you so much," said Old Pipes.
+
+"Oh, that would not have tired us," said one of the boys, "if we had
+not been so far to-day after the cows, the sheep, and the goats. They
+rambled high up on the mountain, and we never before had such a time
+in finding them."
+
+"Had to go after the cows, the sheep, and the goats!" exclaimed Old
+Pipes. "What do you mean by that?"
+
+The girl, who stood behind the old man, shook her head, put her hand
+on her mouth, and made all sorts of signs to the boy to stop talking
+on this subject; but he did not notice her, and promptly answered Old
+Pipes.
+
+"Why, you see, good sir," said he, "that as the cattle can't hear
+your pipes now, somebody has to go after them every evening to drive
+them down from the mountain, and the Chief Villager has hired us
+three to do it. Generally it is not very hard work, but to-night the
+cattle had wandered far."
+
+"How long have you been doing this?" asked the old man.
+
+The girl shook her head and clapped her hand on her mouth more
+vigorously than before, but the boy went on.
+
+"I think it is about a year now," he said, "since the people first
+felt sure that the cattle could not hear your pipes; and from that
+time we've been driving them down. But we are rested now, and will go
+home. Good-night, sir."
+
+The three children then went down the hill, the girl scolding the boy
+all the way home. Old Pipes stood silent a few moments, and then he
+went into his cottage.
+
+"Mother," he shouted; "did you hear what those children said?"
+
+"Children!" exclaimed the old woman; "I did not hear them. I did not
+know there were any children here."
+
+Then Old Pipes told his mother, shouting very loudly to make her
+hear, how the two boys and the girl had helped him up the hill, and
+what he had heard about his piping and the cattle.
+
+"They can't hear you?" cried his mother. "Why, what's the matter with
+the cattle?"
+
+"Ah, me!" said Old Pipes; "I don't believe there's any thing the
+matter with the cattle. It must be with me and my pipes that there is
+something the matter. But one thing is certain, if I do not earn the
+wages the Chief Villager pays me, I shall not take them. I shall go
+straight down to the village and give back the money I received
+to-day."
+
+"Nonsense!" cried his mother. "I'm sure you've piped as well as you
+could, and no more can be expected. And what are we to do without the
+money?"
+
+"I don't know," said Old Pipes; "but I'm going down to the village to
+pay it back."
+
+The sun had now set; but the moon was shining very brightly on the
+hill-side, and Old Pipes could see his way very well. He did not take
+the same path by which he had gone before, but followed another,
+which led among the trees upon the hill-side, and, though longer, was
+not so steep.
+
+When he had gone about half-way, the old man sat down to rest,
+leaning his back against a great oak-tree. As he did so, he heard a
+sound like knocking inside the tree, and then a voice distinctly
+said:
+
+"Let me out! let me out!"
+
+Old Pipes instantly forgot that he was tired, and sprang to his feet.
+"This must be a Dryad-tree!" he exclaimed. "If it is, I'll let her
+out."
+
+Old Pipes had never, to his knowledge, seen a Dryad-tree, but he knew
+there were such trees on the hill-sides and the mountains, and that
+Dryads lived in them. He knew, too, that in the summer-time, on those
+days when the moon rose before the sun went down, a Dryad could come
+out of her tree if any one could find the key which locked her in,
+and turn it. Old Pipes closely examined the trunk of the tree, which
+stood in the full moonlight. "If I see that key," he said, "I shall
+surely turn it." Before long he perceived a piece of bark standing
+out from the tree, which appeared to him very much like the handle of
+a key. He took hold of it, and found he could turn it quite around.
+As he did so, a large part of the side of the tree was pushed open,
+and a beautiful Dryad stepped quickly out.
+
+For a moment she stood motionless, gazing on the scene before
+her,--the tranquil valley, the hills, the forest, and the
+mountain-side, all lying in the soft clear light of the moon. "Oh,
+lovely! lovely!" she exclaimed. "How long it is since I have seen any
+thing like this!" And then, turning to Old Pipes, she said: "How good
+of you to let me out! I am so happy and so thankful, that I must kiss
+you, you dear old man!" And she threw her arms around the neck of Old
+Pipes, and kissed him on both cheeks. "You don't know," she then went
+on to say, "how doleful it is to be shut up so long in a tree. I
+don't mind it in the winter, for then I am glad to be sheltered, but
+in summer it is a rueful thing not to be able to see all the beauties
+of the world. And it's ever so long since I've been let out. People
+so seldom come this way; and when they do come at the right time they
+either don't hear me, or they are frightened, and run away. But you,
+you dear old man, you were not frightened, and you looked and looked
+for the key, and you let me out, and now I shall not have to go back
+till winter has come, and the air grows cold. Oh, it is glorious!
+What can I do for you, to show you how grateful I am?"
+
+"I am very glad," said Old Pipes, "that I let you out, since I see
+that it makes you so happy; but I must admit that I tried to find the
+key because I had a great desire to see a Dryad. But if you wish to
+do something for me, you can, if you happen to be going down toward
+the village."
+
+"To the village!" exclaimed the Dryad. "I will go anywhere for you,
+my kind old benefactor."
+
+"Well, then," said Old Pipes, "I wish you would take this little bag
+of money to the Chief Villager and tell him that Old Pipes cannot
+receive pay for the services which he does not perform. It is now
+more than a year that I have not been able to make the cattle hear
+me, when I piped to call them home. I did not know this until
+to-night; but now that I know it, I cannot keep the money, and so I
+send it back." And, handing the little bag to the Dryad, he bade her
+good-night, and turned toward his cottage.
+
+"Good-night," said the Dryad. "And I thank you over, and over, and
+over again, you good old man!"
+
+Old Pipes walked toward his home, very glad to be saved the fatigue
+of going all the way down to the village and back again. "To be
+sure," he said to himself, "this path does not seem at all steep, and
+I can walk along it very easily; but it would have tired me
+dreadfully to come up all the way from the village, especially as I
+could not have expected those children to help me again." When he
+reached home, his mother was surprised to see him returning so soon.
+
+"What!" she exclaimed; "have you already come back? What did the
+Chief Villager say? Did he take the money?"
+
+Old Pipes was just about to tell her that he had sent the money to
+the village by a Dryad, when he suddenly reflected that his mother
+would be sure to disapprove such a proceeding, and so he merely said
+he had sent it by a person whom he had met.
+
+"And how do you know that the person will ever take it to the Chief
+Villager?" cried his mother. "You will lose it, and the villagers
+will never get it. Oh, Pipes! Pipes! when will you be old enough to
+have ordinary common sense?"
+
+Old Pipes considered that as he was already seventy years of age he
+could scarcely expect to grow any wiser, but he made no remark on
+this subject; and, saying that he doubted not that the money would go
+safely to its destination, he sat down to his supper. His mother
+scolded him roundly, but he did not mind it; and after supper he went
+out and sat on a rustic chair in front of the cottage to look at the
+moonlit village, and to wonder whether or not the Chief Villager
+really received the money. While he was doing these two things, he
+went fast asleep.
+
+When Old Pipes left the Dryad, she did not go down to the village
+with the little bag of money. She held it in her hand, and thought
+about what she had heard. "This is a good and honest old man," she
+said; "and it is a shame that he should lose this money. He looked as
+if he needed it, and I don't believe the people in the village will
+take it from one who has served them so long. Often, when in my tree,
+have I heard the sweet notes of his pipes. I am going to take the
+money back to him." She did not start immediately, because there were
+so many beautiful things to look at; but after a while she went up to
+the cottage, and, finding Old Pipes asleep in his chair, she slipped
+the little bag into his coat-pocket, and silently sped away.
+
+The next day, Old Pipes told his mother that he would go up the
+mountain and cut some wood. He had a right to get wood from the
+mountain, but for a long time he had been content to pick up the dead
+branches which lay about his cottage. To-day, however, he felt so
+strong and vigorous that he thought he would go and cut some fuel
+that would be better than this. He worked all the morning, and when
+he came back he did not feel at all tired, and he had a very good
+appetite for his dinner.
+
+Now, Old Pipes knew a good deal about Dryads, but there was one thing
+which, although he had heard, he had forgotten. This was, that a kiss
+from a Dryad made a person ten years younger. The people of the
+village knew this, and they were very careful not to let any child of
+ten years or younger, go into the woods where the Dryads were
+supposed to be; for, if they should chance to be kissed by one of
+these tree-nymphs, they would be set back so far that they would
+cease to exist. A story was told in the village that a very bad boy
+of eleven once ran away into the woods, and had an adventure of this
+kind; and when his mother found him he was a little baby of one year
+old. Taking advantage of her opportunity, she brought him up more
+carefully than she had done before; and he grew to be a very good boy
+indeed.
+
+Now, Old Pipes had been kissed twice by the Dryad, once on each
+cheek, and he therefore felt as vigorous and active as when he was a
+hale man of fifty. His mother noticed how much work he was doing, and
+told him that he need not try in that way to make up for the loss of
+his piping wages; for he would only tire himself out, and get sick.
+But her son answered that he had not felt so well for years, and that
+he was quite able to work. In the course of the afternoon, Old Pipes,
+for the first time that day, put his hand in his coat-pocket, and
+there, to his amazement, he found the little bag of money. "Well,
+well!" he exclaimed, "I am stupid, indeed! I really thought that I
+had seen a Dryad; but when I sat down by that big oak-tree I must
+have gone to sleep and dreamed it all; and then I came home thinking
+I had given the money to a Dryad, when it was in my pocket all the
+time. But the Chief Villager shall have the money. I shall not take
+it to him to-day, but to-morrow I wish to go to the village to see
+some of my old friends; and then I shall give up the money."
+
+Toward the close of the afternoon, Old Pipes, as had been his custom
+for so many years, took his pipes from the shelf on which they lay,
+and went out to the rock in front of the cottage.
+
+"What are you going to do?" cried his mother. "If you will not
+consent to be paid, why do you pipe?"
+
+"I am going to pipe for my own pleasure," said her son. "I am used to
+it, and I do not wish to give it up. It does not matter now whether
+the cattle hear me or not, and I am sure that my piping will injure
+no one."
+
+When the good man began to play upon his favorite instrument he was
+astonished at the sound that came from it. The beautiful notes of the
+pipes sounded clear and strong down into the valley, and spread over
+the hills, and up the sides of the mountain beyond, while, after a
+little interval, an echo came back from the rocky hill on the other
+side of the valley.
+
+"Ha! ha!" he cried, "what has happened to my pipes? They must have
+been stopped up of late, but now they are as clear and good as ever."
+
+Again the merry notes went sounding far and wide. The cattle on the
+mountain heard them, and those that were old enough remembered how
+these notes had called them from their pastures every evening, and so
+they started down the mountain-side, the others following.
+
+The merry notes were heard in the village below, and the people were
+much astonished thereby. "Why, who can be blowing the pipes of Old
+Pipes?" they said. But, as they were all very busy, no one went up to
+see. One thing, however, was plain enough: the cattle were coming
+down the mountain. And so the two boys and the girl did not have to
+go after them, and had an hour for play, for which they were very
+glad.
+
+The next morning Old Pipes started down to the village with his
+money, and on the way he met the Dryad. "Oh, ho!" he cried, "is that
+you? Why, I thought my letting you out of the tree was nothing but a
+dream."
+
+"A dream!" cried the Dryad; "if you only knew how happy you have made
+me, you would not think it merely a dream. And has it not benefited
+you? Do you not feel happier? Yesterday I heard you playing
+beautifully on your pipes."
+
+"Yes, yes," cried he. "I did not understand it before, but I see it
+all now. I have really grown younger. I thank you, I thank you, good
+Dryad, from the bottom of my heart. It was the finding of the money
+in my pocket that made me think it was a dream."
+
+"Oh, I put it in when you were asleep," she said, laughing, "because
+I thought you ought to keep it. Good-by, kind, honest man. May you
+live long, and be as happy as I am now."
+
+Old Pipes was greatly delighted when he understood that he was really
+a younger man; but that made no difference about the money, and he
+kept on his way to the village. As soon as he reached it, he was
+eagerly questioned as to who had been playing his pipes the evening
+before, and when the people heard that it was himself, they were very
+much surprised. Thereupon, Old Pipes told what had happened to him,
+and then there was greater wonder, with hearty congratulations and
+hand-shakes; for Old Pipes was liked by every one. The Chief Villager
+refused to take his money, and, although Old Pipes said that he had
+not earned it, every one present insisted that, as he would now play
+on his pipes as before, he should lose nothing, because, for a time,
+he was unable to perform his duty.
+
+So Old Pipes was obliged to keep his money, and after an hour or two
+spent in conversation with his friends, he returned to his cottage.
+
+There was one individual, however, who was not at all pleased with
+what had happened to Old Pipes. This was an Echo-dwarf, who lived on
+the hills on the other side of the valley, and whose duty it was to
+echo back the notes of the pipes whenever they could be heard. There
+were a great many other Echo-dwarfs on these hills, some of whom
+echoed back the songs of maidens, some the shouts of children, and
+others the music that was often heard in the village. But there was
+only one who could send back the strong notes of the pipes of Old
+Pipes, and this had been his sole duty for many years. But when the
+old man grew feeble, and the notes of his pipes could not be heard on
+the opposite hills, this Echo-dwarf had nothing to do, and he spent
+his time in delightful idleness; and he slept so much and grew so fat
+that it made his companions laugh to see him walk.
+
+On the afternoon on which, after so long an interval, the sound of
+the pipes was heard on the echo hills, this dwarf was fast asleep
+behind a rock. As soon as the first notes reached them, some of his
+companions ran to wake him. Rolling to his feet, he echoed back the
+merry tune of Old Pipes. Naturally, he was very much annoyed and
+indignant at being thus obliged to give up his life of comfortable
+leisure, and he hoped very much that this pipe-playing would not
+occur again. The next afternoon he was awake and listening, and, sure
+enough, at the usual hour, along came the notes of the pipes as clear
+and strong as they ever had been; and he was obliged to work as long
+as Old Pipes played. The Echo-dwarf was very angry. He had supposed,
+of course, that the pipe-playing had ceased forever, and he felt that
+he had a right to be indignant at being thus deceived. He was so much
+disturbed that he made up his mind to go and try to find out whether
+this was to be a temporary matter or not. He had plenty of time, as
+the pipes were played but once a day, and he set off early in the
+morning for the hill on which Old Pipes lived. It was hard work for
+the fat little fellow, and when he had crossed the valley and had
+gone some distance into the woods on the hill-side, he stopped to
+rest, and, in a few minutes, the Dryad came tripping along.
+
+"Ho, ho!" exclaimed the dwarf; "what are you doing here? and how did
+you get out of your tree?"
+
+"Doing!" cried the Dryad; "I am being happy; that's what I am doing.
+And I was let out of my tree by the good old man who plays the pipes
+to call the cattle down from the mountain. And it makes me happier to
+think that I have been of service to him. I gave him two kisses of
+gratitude, and now he is young enough to play his pipes as well as
+ever."
+
+The Echo-dwarf stepped forward, his face pale with passion. "Am I to
+believe," he said, "that you are the cause of this great evil that
+has come upon me? and that you are the wicked creature who has again
+started this old man upon his career of pipe-playing? What have I
+ever done to you that you should have condemned me for years and
+years to echo back the notes of those wretched pipes?"
+
+At this the Dryad laughed loudly.
+
+"What a funny little fellow you are!" she said. "Any one would think
+you had been condemned to toil from morning till night; while what
+you really have to do is merely to imitate for half an hour every day
+the merry notes of Old Pipes's piping. Fie upon you, Echo-dwarf! You
+are lazy and selfish; and that is what is the matter with you.
+Instead of grumbling at being obliged to do a little wholesome work,
+which is less, I am sure, than that of any other echo-dwarf upon the
+rocky hill-side, you should rejoice at the good fortune of the old
+man who has regained so much of his strength and vigor. Go home and
+learn to be just and generous; and then, perhaps, you may be happy.
+Good-by."
+
+"Insolent creature!" shouted the dwarf, as he shook his fat little
+fist at her. "I'll make you suffer for this. You shall find out what
+it is to heap injury and insult upon one like me, and to snatch from
+him the repose that he has earned by long years of toil." And,
+shaking his head savagely, he hurried back to the rocky hill-side.
+
+Every afternoon the merry notes of the pipes of Old Pipes sounded
+down into the valley and over the hills and up the mountain-side; and
+every afternoon when he had echoed them back, the little dwarf grew
+more and more angry with the Dryad. Each day, from early morning till
+it was time for him to go back to his duties upon the rocky
+hill-side, he searched the woods for her. He intended, if he met her,
+to pretend to be very sorry for what he had said, and he thought he
+might be able to play a trick upon her which would avenge him well.
+One day, while thus wandering among the trees, he met Old Pipes. The
+Echo-dwarf did not generally care to see or speak to ordinary people;
+but now he was so anxious to find the object of his search, that he
+stopped and asked Old Pipes if he had seen the Dryad. The piper had
+not noticed the little fellow, and he looked down on him with some
+surprise.
+
+"No," he said; "I have not seen her, and I have been looking
+everywhere for her."
+
+"You!" cried the dwarf, "what do you wish with her?"
+
+Old Pipes then sat down on a stone, so that he should be nearer the
+ear of his small companion, and he told what the Dryad had done for
+him.
+
+When the Echo-dwarf heard that this was the man whose pipes he was
+obliged to echo back every day, he would have slain him on the spot
+had he been able; but, as he was not able, he merely ground his teeth
+and listened to the rest of the story.
+
+"I am looking for the Dryad now," Old Pipes continued, "on account of
+my aged mother. When I was old myself, I did not notice how very old
+my mother was; but now it shocks me to see how feeble and decrepit
+her years have caused her to become; and I am looking for the Dryad
+to ask her to make my mother younger, as she made me."
+
+The eyes of the Echo-dwarf glistened. Here was a man who might help
+him in his plans.
+
+"Your idea is a good one," he said to Old Pipes, "and it does you
+honor. But you should know that a Dryad can make no person younger
+but one who lets her out of her tree. However, you can manage the
+affair very easily. All you need do is to find the Dryad, tell her
+what you want, and request her to step into her tree and be shut up
+for a short time. Then you will go and bring your mother to the tree;
+she will open it, and every thing will be as you wish. Is not this a
+good plan?"
+
+"Excellent!" cried Old Pipes; "and I will go instantly and search
+more diligently for the Dryad."
+
+"Take me with you," said the Echo-dwarf. "You can easily carry me on
+your strong shoulders; and I shall be glad to help you in any way
+that I can."
+
+"Now, then," said the little fellow to himself, as Old Pipes carried
+him rapidly along, "if he persuades the Dryad to get into a
+tree,--and she is quite foolish enough to do it,--and then goes away
+to bring his mother, I shall take a stone or a club and I will break
+off the key of that tree, so that nobody can ever turn it again. Then
+Mistress Dryad will see what she has brought upon herself by her
+behavior to me."
+
+Before long they came to the great oak-tree in which the Dryad had
+lived, and, at a distance, they saw that beautiful creature herself
+coming toward them.
+
+"How excellently well every thing happens!" said the dwarf. "Put me
+down, and I will go. Your business with the Dryad is more important
+than mine; and you need not say any thing about my having suggested
+your plan to you. I am willing that you should have all the credit of
+it yourself."
+
+Old Pipes put the Echo-dwarf upon the ground, but the little rogue
+did not go away. He concealed himself between some low, mossy rocks,
+and he was so much of their color that you would not have noticed him
+if you had been looking straight at him.
+
+When the Dryad came up, Old Pipes lost no time in telling her about
+his mother, and what he wished her to do. At first, the Dryad
+answered nothing, but stood looking very sadly at Old Pipes.
+
+"Do you really wish me to go into my tree again?" she said. "I should
+dreadfully dislike to do it, for I don't know what might happen. It
+is not at all necessary, for I could make your mother younger at any
+time if she would give me the opportunity. I had already thought of
+making you still happier in this way, and several times I have waited
+about your cottage, hoping to meet your aged mother, but she never
+comes outside, and you know a Dryad cannot enter a house. I cannot
+imagine what put this idea into your head. Did you think of it
+yourself?"
+
+"No, I cannot say that I did," answered Old Pipes. "A little dwarf
+whom I met in the woods proposed it to me."
+
+"Oh!" cried the Dryad; "now I see through it all. It is the scheme of
+that vile Echo-dwarf--your enemy and mine. Where is he? I should like
+to see him."
+
+"I think he has gone away," said Old Pipes.
+
+"No he has not," said the Dryad, whose quick eyes perceived the
+Echo-dwarf among the rocks. "There he is. Seize him and drag him out,
+I beg of you."
+
+Old Pipes perceived the dwarf as soon as he was pointed out to him,
+and, running to the rocks, he caught the little fellow by the arm and
+pulled him out.
+
+"Now, then," cried the Dryad, who had opened the door of the great
+oak, "just stick him in there, and we will shut him up. Then I shall
+be safe from his mischief for the rest of the time I am free."
+
+Old Pipes thrust the Echo-dwarf into the tree; the Dryad pushed the
+door shut; there was a clicking sound of bark and wood, and no one
+would have noticed that the big oak had ever had an opening in it.
+
+"There," said the Dryad; "now we need not be afraid of him. And I
+assure you, my good piper, that I shall be very glad to make your
+mother younger as soon as I can. Will you not ask her to come out and
+meet me?"
+
+"Of course I will," cried Old Pipes; "and I will do it without
+delay."
+
+And then, the Dryad by his side, he hurried to his cottage. But when
+he mentioned the matter to his mother, the old woman became very
+angry indeed. She did not believe in Dryads; and, if they really did
+exist, she knew they must be witches and sorceresses, and she would
+have nothing to do with them. If her son had ever allowed himself to
+be kissed by one of them, he ought to be ashamed of himself. As to
+its doing him the least bit of good, she did not believe a word of
+it. He felt better than he used to feel, but that was very common.
+She had sometimes felt that way herself, and she forbade him ever to
+mention a Dryad to her again.
+
+That afternoon, Old Pipes, feeling very sad that his plan in regard
+to his mother had failed, sat down upon the rock and played upon his
+pipes. The pleasant sounds went down the valley and up the hills and
+mountain, but, to the great surprise of some persons who happened to
+notice the fact, the notes were not echoed back from the rocky
+hill-side, but from the woods on the side of the valley on which Old
+Pipes lived. The next day many of the villagers stopped in their work
+to listen to the echo of the pipes coming from the woods. The sound
+was not as clear and strong as it used to be when it was sent back
+from the rocky hill-side, but it certainly came from among the trees.
+Such a thing as an echo changing its place in this way had never been
+heard of before, and nobody was able to explain how it could have
+happened. Old Pipes, however, knew very well that the sound came from
+the Echo-dwarf shut up in the great oak-tree. The sides of the tree
+were thin, and the sound of the pipes could be heard through them,
+and the dwarf was obliged by the laws of his being to echo back those
+notes whenever they came to him. But Old Pipes thought he might get
+the Dryad in trouble if he let any one know that the Echo-dwarf was
+shut up in the tree, and so he wisely said nothing about it.
+
+One day the two boys and the girl who had helped Old Pipes up the
+hill were playing in the woods. Stopping near the great oak-tree,
+they heard a sound of knocking within it, and then a voice plainly
+said:
+
+"Let me out! let me out!"
+
+For a moment the children stood still in astonishment, and then one
+of the boys exclaimed:
+
+"Oh, it is a Dryad, like the one Old Pipes found! Let's let her out!"
+
+"What are you thinking of?" cried the girl. "I am the oldest of all,
+and I am only thirteen. Do you wish to be turned into crawling
+babies? Run! run! run!"
+
+And the two boys and the girl dashed down into the valley as fast as
+their legs could carry them. There was no desire in their youthful
+hearts to be made younger than they were. And for fear that their
+parents might think it well that they should commence their careers
+anew, they never said a word about finding the Dryad-tree.
+
+As the summer days went on, Old Pipes's mother grew feebler and
+feebler. One day when her son was away, for he now frequently went
+into the woods to hunt or fish, or down into the valley to work, she
+arose from her knitting to prepare the simple dinner. But she felt so
+weak and tired that she was not able to do the work to which she had
+been so long accustomed. "Alas! alas!" she said, "the time has come
+when I am too old to work. My son will have to hire some one to come
+here and cook his meals, make his bed, and mend his clothes. Alas!
+alas! I had hoped that as long as I lived I should be able to do
+these things. But it is not so. I have grown utterly worthless, and
+some one else must prepare the dinner for my son. I wonder where he
+is." And tottering to the door, she went outside to look for him. She
+did not feel able to stand, and reaching the rustic chair, she sank
+into it, quite exhausted, and soon fell asleep.
+
+The Dryad, who had often come to the cottage to see if she could find
+an opportunity of carrying out old Pipes's affectionate design, now
+happened by; and seeing that the much-desired occasion had come, she
+stepped up quietly behind the old woman and gently kissed her on each
+cheek, and then as quietly disappeared.
+
+In a few minutes the mother of old Pipes awoke, and looking up at the
+sun, she exclaimed: "Why, it is almost dinner-time! My son will be
+here directly, and I am not ready for him." And rising to her feet,
+she hurried into the house, made the fire, set the meat and
+vegetables to cook, laid the cloth, and by the time her son arrived
+the meal was on the table.
+
+"How a little sleep does refresh one," she said to herself, as she
+was bustling about. She was a woman of very vigorous constitution,
+and at seventy had been a great deal stronger and more active than
+her son was at that age. The moment Old Pipes saw his mother, he knew
+that the Dryad had been there; but, while he felt as happy as a king,
+he was too wise to say any thing about her.
+
+"It is astonishing how well I feel to-day," said his mother; "and
+either my hearing has improved or you speak much more plainly than
+you have done of late."
+
+The summer days went on and passed away, the leaves were falling from
+the trees, and the air was becoming cold.
+
+"Nature has ceased to be lovely," said the Dryad, "and the
+night-winds chill me. It is time for me to go back into my
+comfortable quarters in the great oak. But first I must pay another
+visit to the cottage of Old Pipes."
+
+She found the piper and his mother sitting side by side on the rock
+in front of the door. The cattle were not to go to the mountain any
+more that season, and he was piping them down for the last time. Loud
+and merrily sounded the pipes of Old Pipes, and down the
+mountain-side came the cattle, the cows by the easiest paths, the
+sheep by those not quite so easy, and the goats by the most difficult
+ones among the rocks; while from the great oak-tree were heard the
+echoes of the cheerful music.
+
+"How happy they look, sitting there together," said the Dryad; "and I
+don't believe it will do them a bit of harm to be still younger." And
+moving quietly up behind them, she first kissed Old Pipes on his
+cheek and then his mother.
+
+Old Pipes, who had stopped playing, knew what it was, but he did not
+move, and said nothing. His mother, thinking that her son had kissed
+her, turned to him with a smile and kissed him in return. And then
+she arose and went into the cottage, a vigorous woman of sixty,
+followed by her son, erect and happy, and twenty years younger than
+herself.
+
+The Dryad sped away to the woods, shrugging her shoulders as she felt
+the cool evening wind.
+
+When she reached the great oak, she turned the key and opened the
+door. "Come out," she said to the Echo-dwarf, who sat blinking
+within. "Winter is coming on, and I want the comfortable shelter of
+my tree for myself. The cattle have come down from the mountain for
+the last time this year, the pipes will no longer sound, and you can
+go to your rocks and have a holiday until next spring."
+
+Upon hearing these words the dwarf skipped quickly out, and the Dryad
+entered the tree and pulled the door shut after her. "Now, then," she
+said to herself, "he can break off the key if he likes. It does not
+matter to me. Another will grow out next spring. And although the
+good piper made me no promise, I know that when the warm days arrive
+next year, he will come and let me out again."
+
+The Echo-dwarf did not stop to break the key of the tree. He was too
+happy to be released to think of any thing else, and he hastened as
+fast as he could to his home on the rocky hill-side.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The Dryad was not mistaken when she trusted in the piper. When the
+warm days came again he went to the oak-tree to let her out. But, to
+his sorrow and surprise, he found the great tree lying upon the
+ground. A winter storm had blown it down, and it lay with its trunk
+shattered and split. And what became of the Dryad, no one ever knew.
+
+
+
+
+
+ THE QUEEN'S MUSEUM.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+There was once a Queen who founded, in her capital city, a grand
+museum. This institution was the pride of her heart, and she devoted
+nearly all her time to overseeing the collection of objects for it,
+and their arrangement in the spacious halls. This museum was intended
+to elevate the intelligence of her people, but the result was quite
+disappointing to the Queen. For some reason, and what it was she
+could not imagine, the people were not interested in her museum. She
+considered it the most delightful place in the world, and spent hours
+every day in examining and studying the thousands of objects it
+contained; but although here and there in the city there was a person
+who cared to visit the collection, the great body of the people found
+it impossible to feel the slightest interest in it. At first this
+grieved the Queen, and she tried to make her museum better; but as
+this did no good, she became very angry, and she issued a decree that
+all persons of mature age who were not interested in her museum
+should be sent to prison.
+
+This decree produced a great sensation in the city. The people
+crowded to the building, and did their very best to be interested;
+but, in the majority of cases, the attempt was an utter failure. They
+could not feel any interest whatever. The consequence was that
+hundreds and thousands of the people were sent to prison, and as
+there was not room enough for them in the ordinary jails, large
+temporary prisons were erected in various parts of the city. Those
+persons who were actually needed for work or service which no one
+else could do were allowed to come out in the day-time on parole; but
+at night they had to return to their prisons.
+
+It was during this deplorable state of affairs that a stranger
+entered the city one day. He was surprised at seeing so many prisons,
+and approaching the window in one of them, behind the bars of which
+he saw a very respectable-looking citizen, he asked what all this
+meant. The citizen informed him how matters stood, and then, with
+tears mounting to his eyes, he added:
+
+"Oh, sir, I have tried my best to be interested in that museum; but
+it is impossible; I cannot make myself care for it in the slightest
+degree! And, what is more, I know I shall never be able to do so; and
+I shall languish here for the rest of my days."
+
+Passing on, the Stranger met a mother coming out of her house. Her
+face was pale, and she was weeping bitterly. Filled with pity, he
+stopped and asked her what was the matter. "Oh, sir," she said, "for
+a week I have been trying, for the sake of my dear children, to take
+an interest in that museum. For a time I thought I might do it, but
+the hopes proved false. It is impossible. I must leave my little
+ones, and go to prison."
+
+The Stranger was deeply affected by these cases and many others of a
+similar character, which he soon met with. "It is too bad! too bad!"
+he said to himself. "I never saw a city in so much trouble. There is
+scarcely a family, I am told, in which there is not some uninterested
+person--I must see the Queen and talk to her about it," and with this
+he wended his way to the palace.
+
+He met the Queen just starting out on her morning visit to the
+museum. When he made it known that he was a stranger, and desired a
+short audience, she stopped and spoke to him.
+
+"Have you visited my museum yet?" she said. "There is nothing in the
+city so well worth your attention as that. You should go there before
+seeing any thing else. You have a high forehead, and an intelligent
+expression, and I have no doubt that it will interest you greatly. I
+am going there myself, and I shall be glad to see what effect that
+fine collection has upon a stranger."
+
+This did not suit the Stranger at all. From what he had heard he felt
+quite sure that if he went to the museum, he would soon be in jail;
+and so he hurried to propose a plan which had occurred to him while
+on his way to the palace.
+
+"I came to see your Majesty on the subject of the museum," he said,
+"and to crave permission to contribute to the collection some objects
+which shall be interesting to every one. I understand that it is
+highly desirable that every one should be interested."
+
+"Of course it is," said the Queen, "and although I think that there
+is not the slightest reason why every one should not feel the keenest
+interest in what the museum already contains, I am willing to add to
+it whatever may make it of greater value."
+
+"In that case," said the Stranger, "no time should be lost in
+securing what I wish to present."
+
+"Go at once," said the Queen. "But how soon can you return?"
+
+"It will take some days, at least," said the Stranger.
+
+"Give me your parole to return in a week," said the Queen, "and start
+immediately."
+
+The Stranger gave his parole and left the palace. Having filled a
+leathern bag with provisions from a cook's shop, he went out of the
+city gates. As he walked into the open country, he said to himself:
+
+"I have certainly undertaken a very difficult enterprise. Where I am
+to find any thing that will interest all the people in that city, I
+am sure I do not know; but my heart is so filled with pity for the
+great number of unfortunate persons who are torn from their homes and
+shut up in prison, that I am determined to do something for them, if
+I possibly can. There must be some objects to be found in this vast
+country that will interest every one."
+
+About noon he came to a great mountain-side covered with a forest.
+Thinking that he was as likely to find what he sought in one place as
+another, and preferring the shade to the sun, he entered the forest,
+and walked for some distance along a path which gradually led up the
+mountain. Having crossed a brook with its edges lined with
+water-cresses, he soon perceived a large cave, at the entrance of
+which sat an aged hermit. "Ah," said the Stranger to himself, "this
+is indeed fortunate! This good and venerable man, who passes his life
+amid the secrets of nature, can surely tell me what I wish to know."
+Saluting the Hermit, he sat down and told the old man the object of
+his quest.
+
+"I am afraid you are looking for what you will not find," said the
+Hermit. "Most people are too silly to be truly interested in any
+thing. They herd together like cattle, and do not know what is good
+for them. There are now on this mountain-side many commodious and
+comfortable caves, all of which would be tenanted if people only knew
+how improving and interesting it is to live apart from their
+fellow-men. But, so far as it can be done, I will help you in your
+quest, which I think is a worthy one. I can do nothing for you
+myself, but I have a pupil who is very much given to wandering about,
+and looking for curious things. He may tell you where you will be
+able to find something that will interest everybody, though I doubt
+it. You may go and see him, if you like, and I will excuse him from
+his studies for a time, so that he may aid you in your search."
+
+The Hermit then wrote an excuse upon a piece of parchment, and,
+giving it to the Stranger, he directed him to the cave of his pupil.
+
+This was situated at some distance, and higher up the mountain, and
+when the Stranger reached it, he found the Pupil fast asleep upon the
+ground. This individual was a long-legged youth, with long arms, long
+hair, a long nose, and a long face. When the Stranger awakened him,
+told him why he had come, and gave him the hermit's excuse, the
+sleepy eyes of the Pupil brightened, and his face grew less long.
+
+"That's delightful!" he said, "to be let off on a Monday; for I
+generally have to be satisfied with a half-holiday, Wednesdays and
+Saturdays."
+
+"Is the Hermit very strict with you?" asked the Stranger.
+
+"Yes," said the Pupil, "I have to stick closely to the cave; though I
+have been known to go fishing on days when there was no holiday. I
+have never seen the old man but once, and that was when he first took
+me. You know it wouldn't do for us to be too sociable. That wouldn't
+be hermit-like. He comes up here on the afternoons I am out, and
+writes down what I am to do for the next half-week."
+
+"And do you always do it?" asked the Stranger.
+
+"Oh, I get some of it done," said the Pupil; "but there have been
+times when I have wondered whether it wouldn't have been better for
+me to have been something else. But I have chosen my profession, and
+I suppose I must be faithful to it. We will start immediately on our
+search; but first I must put the cave in order, for the old man will
+be sure to come up while I am gone."
+
+So saying, the Pupil opened an old parchment book at a marked page,
+and laid it on a flat stone, which served as a table, and then placed
+a skull and a couple of bones in a proper position near by.
+
+The two now started off, the Pupil first putting a line and hook in
+his pocket, and pulling out a fishing-rod from under some bushes.
+
+"What do you want with that?" asked the Stranger, "we are not going
+to fish!"
+
+"Why not?" said the Pupil; "if we come to a good place, we might
+catch something that would be a real curiosity."
+
+Before long they came to a mountain brook, and here the Pupil
+insisted on trying his luck. The Stranger was a little tired and
+hungry, and so was quite willing to sit down for a time and eat
+something from his bag. The Pupil ran off to find some bait, and he
+staid away so long that the Stranger had quite finished his meal
+before he returned. He came back at last, however, in a state of
+great excitement.
+
+"Come with me! come with me!" he cried. "I have found something that
+is truly astonishing! Come quickly!"
+
+The Stranger arose and hurried after the Pupil, whose long legs
+carried him rapidly over the mountain-side. Reaching a large hole at
+the bottom of a precipitous rock, the Pupil stopped, and exclaiming:
+"Come in here and I will show you something that will amaze you!" he
+immediately entered the hole.
+
+The Stranger, who was very anxious to see what curiosity he had
+found, followed him some distance along a narrow and winding
+under-ground passage. The two suddenly emerged into a high and
+spacious cavern, which was lighted by openings in the roof; on the
+floor, in various places, were strongly fastened boxes, and packages
+of many sorts, bales and bundles of silks and rich cloths, with
+handsome caskets, and many other articles of value.
+
+"What kind of a place is this?" exclaimed the Stranger, in great
+surprise.
+
+"Don't you know?" cried the Pupil, his eyes fairly sparkling with
+delight. "It is a robber's den! Isn't it a great thing to find a
+place like this?"
+
+"A robber's den!" exclaimed the Stranger in alarm; "let us get out of
+it as quickly as we can, or the robbers will return, and we shall be
+cut to pieces."
+
+"I don't believe they are coming back very soon," said the Pupil,
+"and we ought to stop and take a look at some of these things."
+
+"Fly, you foolish youth!" cried the Stranger; "you do not know what
+danger you are in." And, so saying, he turned to hasten away from the
+place.
+
+But he was too late. At that moment the robber captain and his band
+entered the cave. When these men perceived the Stranger and the
+Hermit's Pupil, they drew their swords and were about to rush upon
+them, when the Pupil sprang forward and, throwing up his long arms,
+exclaimed:
+
+"Stop! it is a mistake!"
+
+At these words, the robber captain lowered his sword, and motioned to
+his men to halt. "A mistake!" he said; "what do you mean by that?"
+
+"I mean," said the Pupil, "that I was out looking for curiosities,
+and wandered into this place by accident. We haven't taken a thing.
+You may count your goods, and you will find nothing missing. We have
+not even opened a box, although I very much wanted to see what was in
+some of them."
+
+"Are his statements correct?" said the Captain, turning to the
+Stranger.
+
+"Entirely so," was the answer.
+
+"You have truthful features, and an honest expression," said the
+Captain, "and I do not believe you would be so dishonorable as to
+creep in here during our absence and steal our possessions. Your
+lives shall be spared, but you will be obliged to remain with us; for
+we cannot allow any one who knows our secret to leave us. You shall
+be treated well, and shall accompany us in our expeditions; and if
+your conduct merits it, you shall in time be made full members."
+
+Bitterly the Stranger now regretted his unfortunate position. He
+strode up and down one side of the cave, vowing inwardly that never
+again would he allow himself to be led by a Hermit's Pupil. That
+individual, however, was in a state of high delight. He ran about
+from box to bale, looking at the rare treasures which some of the
+robbers showed him.
+
+The two captives were fed and lodged very well; and the next day the
+Captain called them and the band together, and addressed them.
+
+"We are now twenty-nine in number," he said; "twenty-seven full
+members, and two on probation. To-night we are about to undertake a
+very important expedition, in which we shall all join. We shall
+fasten up the door of the cave, and at the proper time I shall tell
+you to what place we are going."
+
+An hour or two before midnight the band set out, accompanied by the
+Stranger and the Hermit's Pupil; and when they had gone some miles
+the Captain halted them to inform them of the object of the
+expedition. "We are going," he said, "to rob the Queen's museum. It
+is the most important business we have ever undertaken."
+
+At these words the Stranger stepped forward and made a protest. "I
+left the city yesterday," he said, "commissioned by the Queen to
+obtain one or more objects of interest for her museum; and to return
+now to rob an institution which I have promised to enrich will be
+simply impossible."
+
+"You are right," said the Captain, after a moment's reflection, "such
+an action would be highly dishonorable on your part. If you will give
+me your word of honor that you will remain by this stone until our
+return, the expedition will proceed without you."
+
+The Stranger gave his word, and having been left sitting upon the
+stone, soon dropped asleep, and so remained until he was awakened by
+the return of the band, a little before daylight. They came slowly
+toiling along, each man carrying an enormous bundle upon his back.
+Near the end of the line was the Hermit's Pupil, bearing a load as
+heavy as any of the others. The Stranger offered to relieve him for a
+time of his burden, but the Pupil would not allow it.
+
+"I don't wish these men to think I can't do as much as they can," he
+said. "You ought to have been along. We had a fine time! We swept
+that museum clean, I tell you! We didn't leave a thing on a shelf or
+in a case."
+
+"What sort of things are they," asked the Stranger.
+
+"I don't know," replied the Pupil, "we didn't have any light for fear
+people would notice it, but the moon shone in bright enough for us to
+see all the shelves and the cases; and our orders were not to try and
+examine any thing, but to take all that was there. The cases had
+great cloth covers on them, and we spread these on the floor and made
+bundles of the curiosities. We are going to examine them carefully as
+soon as we get to the den."
+
+It was broad daylight when the robbers reached their cave. The
+bundles were laid in a great circle on the floor, and, at a given
+signal, they were opened. For a moment each robber gazed blankly at
+the contents of his bundle, and then they all began to fumble and
+search among the piles of articles upon the cloths; but after a few
+minutes, they arose, looking blanker and more disappointed than
+before.
+
+"So far as I can see," said the Captain, "there is nothing in the
+whole collection that I care for. I do not like a thing here!"
+
+"Nor I!" "Nor I!" "Nor I!" cried each one of his band.
+
+"I suppose," said the Captain, after musing for a moment, "that as
+these things are of no use to us, we are bound in honor to take them
+back."
+
+"Hold!" said the Stranger, stepping forward; "do not be in too great
+a hurry to do that." He then told the Captain of the state of affairs
+in the city, and explained in full the nature of the expedition he
+had undertaken for the Queen. "I think it would be better," he said,
+"if these things were not taken back for the present. If you have a
+safe place where you can put them, I will in due time tell the Queen
+where they are, and if she chooses she can send for them."
+
+"Good!" said the Captain, "it is but right that she should bear part
+of the labor of transportation. There is a disused cave, a mile or so
+away, and we will tie up these bundles and carry them there; and then
+we shall leave the matter to you. We take no further interest in it.
+And if you have given your parole to the Queen to return in a week,"
+the Captain further continued, "of course you'll have to keep it. Did
+you give your parole also?" he asked, turning to the Pupil.
+
+"Oh, no!" cried that youth; "there was no time fixed for my return.
+And I am sure that I like a robber's life much better than that of a
+hermit. There is ever so much more spice and dash in it."
+
+"The Stranger was then told that if he would promise not to betray
+the robbers he might depart. He gave the promise; but added sadly
+that he had lost so much time that he was afraid he would not now be
+able to attain the object of his search and return within the week.
+
+"If that is the case," said the Captain, "we will gladly assist you."
+"Comrades!" he cried, addressing his band, "after stowing this
+useless booty in the disused cave, and taking some rest and
+refreshment, we will set out again, and the object of our expedition
+shall be to obtain something for the Queen's museum which will
+interest every one."
+
+Shortly after midnight the robbers set out, accompanied by the
+Stranger and the Pupil. When they had walked about an hour, the
+Captain, as was his custom, brought them to a halt that he might tell
+them where they were going. "I have concluded," said he, "that no
+place is so likely to contain what we are looking for as the castle
+of the great magician, Alfrarmedj. We will, therefore, proceed
+thither, and sack the castle."
+
+"Will there not be great danger in attacking the castle of a
+magician?" asked the Stranger in somewhat anxious tones.
+
+"Of course there will be," said the Captain, "but we are not such
+cowards as to hesitate on account of danger. Forward, my men!" And on
+they all marched.
+
+When they reached the magician's castle, the order was given to scale
+the outer wall. This the robbers did with great agility, and the
+Hermit's Pupil was among the first to surmount it. But the Stranger
+was not used to climbing, and he had to be assisted over the wall.
+Inside the great court-yard they perceived numbers of Weirds--strange
+shadowy creatures who gathered silently around them; but not in the
+least appalled, the robbers formed into a body, and marched into the
+castle, the door of which stood open. They now entered a great hall,
+having at one end a doorway before which hung a curtain. Following
+their Captain, the robbers approached this curtain, and pushing it
+aside, entered the room beyond. There, behind a large table, sat the
+great magician, Alfrarmedj, busy over his mystic studies, which he
+generally pursued in the dead hours of the night. Drawing their
+swords, the robbers rushed upon him.
+
+"Surrender!" cried the Captain, "and deliver to us the treasures of
+your castle."
+
+The old magician raised his head from his book, and, pushing up his
+spectacles from his forehead, looked at them mildly, and said:
+
+"Freeze!"
+
+Instantly, they all froze as hard as ice, each man remaining in the
+position in which he was when the magical word was uttered. With
+uplifted swords and glaring eyes they stood, rigid and stiff, before
+the magician. After calmly surveying the group, the old man said:
+
+"I see among you one who has an intelligent brow and truthful
+expression. His head may thaw sufficiently for him to tell me what
+means this untimely intrusion upon my studies."
+
+The Stranger now felt his head begin to thaw, and in a few moments he
+was able to speak. He then told the magician about the Queen's
+museum, and how it had happened that he had come there with the
+robbers.
+
+"Your motive is a good one," said the magician, "though your actions
+are somewhat erratic; and I do not mind helping you to find what you
+wish. In what class of objects do the people of the city take the
+most interest?"
+
+"Truly I do not know," said the Stranger.
+
+"This is indeed surprising!" exclaimed Alfrarmedj. "How can you
+expect to obtain that which will interest every one, when you do not
+know what it is in which every one takes an interest? Go, find out
+this, and then return to me, and I will see what can be done."
+
+The magician then summoned his Weirds and ordered them to carry the
+frozen visitors outside the castle walls. Each one of the rigid
+figures was taken up by two Weirds, who carried him out and stood him
+up in the road outside the castle. When all had been properly set up,
+with the captain at their head, the gates were shut, and the magician
+still sitting at his table, uttered the word, "Thaw!"
+
+Instantly, the whole band thawed and marched away. At daybreak they
+halted, and considered how they should find out what all the people
+in the city took an interest in.
+
+"One thing is certain," cried the Hermit's Pupil, "whatever it is, it
+isn't the same thing."
+
+"Your remark is not well put together," said the Stranger, "but I see
+the force of it. It is true that different people like different
+things. But how shall we find out what the different people like?"
+
+"By asking them," said the Pupil.
+
+"Good!" cried the Captain, who preferred action to words. "This night
+we will ask them." He then drew upon the sand a plan of the
+city,--(with which he was quite familiar, having carefully robbed it
+for many years,)--and divided it into twenty-eight sections, each one
+of which was assigned to a man. "I omit you," the Captain said to the
+Stranger, "because I find that you are not expert at climbing." He
+then announced that at night the band would visit the city, and that
+each man should enter the houses in his district, and ask the people
+what it was in which they took the greatest interest.
+
+They then proceeded to the cave for rest and refreshment; and a
+little before midnight they entered the city, and each member of the
+band, including the Hermit's Pupil, proceeded to attend to the
+business assigned to him. It was ordered that no one should disturb
+the Queen, for they knew that what she took most interest in was the
+museum. During the night nearly every person in the town was aroused
+by a black-bearded robber, who had climbed into one of the windows of
+the house, and who, instead of demanding money and jewels, simply
+asked what it was in which that person took the greatest interest.
+Upon receiving an answer, the robber repeated it until he had learned
+it by heart, and then went to the next house. As so many of the
+citizens were confined in prisons, which the robbers easily entered,
+they transacted the business in much less time than they would
+otherwise have required.
+
+The Hermit's Pupil was very active, climbing into and out of houses
+with great agility. He obtained his answers quite as easily as did
+the others, but whenever he left a house there was a shade of
+disappointment upon his features. Among the last places that he
+visited was a room in which two boys were sleeping. He awoke them and
+asked the usual question. While they were trembling in their bed, not
+knowing what to answer, the Pupil drew his sword and exclaimed:
+"Come, now, no prevarication; you know it's fishing-tackle. Speak
+out!" Each of the boys then promptly declared it was fishing-tackle,
+and the pupil left, greatly gratified. "I was very much afraid," he
+said to himself, "that not a person in my district would say
+fishing-tackle; and I am glad to think that there were two boys who
+had sense enough to like something that is really interesting."
+
+It was nearly daylight when the work was finished; and then the band
+gathered together in an appointed place on the outside of the city,
+where the Stranger awaited them. Each of the men had an excellent
+memory, which was necessary in their profession, and they repeated to
+the Stranger all the objects and subjects that had been mentioned to
+them, and he wrote them down upon tablets.
+
+The next night, accompanied by the band, he proceeded to the castle
+of the magician, the great gate of which was silently opened for them
+by the Weirds. When they were ushered into the magician's room,
+Alfrarmedj took the tablets from the Stranger and examined them
+carefully.
+
+"All these things should make a very complete collection," he said,
+"and I think I have specimens of the various objects in my
+interminable vaults." He then called his Weirds and, giving one of
+them the tablets, told him to go with his companions into the vaults
+and gather enough of the things therein mentioned to fill a large
+museum. In half an hour the Weirds returned and announced that the
+articles were ready in the great court-yard.
+
+"Go, then," said the magician, "and assist these men to carry them to
+the Queen's museum."
+
+The Stranger then heartily thanked Alfrarmedj for the assistance he
+had given; and the band, accompanied by a number of Weirds, proceeded
+to carry the objects of interest to the Queen's museum. It was a
+strange procession. Half a dozen Weirds carried a stuffed mammoth,
+followed by others bearing the skeleton of a whale, while the robbers
+and the rest of their queer helpers were loaded with every thing
+relating to history, science, and art which ought to be in a really
+good museum. When the whole collection had been put in place upon the
+floors, the shelves, and in the cases, it was nearly morning. The
+robbers, with the Hermit's Pupil, retired to the cave; the Weirds
+disappeared; while the Stranger betook himself to the Queen's palace,
+where, as soon as the proper hour arrived, he requested an audience.
+
+When he saw the Queen, he perceived that she was very pale and that
+her cheeks bore traces of recent tears. "You are back in good time,"
+she said to him, "but it makes very little difference whether you
+have succeeded in your mission or not. There is no longer any museum.
+There has been a great robbery, and the thieves have carried off the
+whole of the vast and valuable collection which I have been so long
+in making."
+
+"I know of that affair," said the Stranger, "and I have already
+placed in your museum-building the collection which I have obtained.
+If your Majesty pleases, I shall be glad to have you look at it. It
+may, in some degree, compensate for that which has been stolen."
+
+"Compensate!" cried the Queen. "Nothing can compensate for it; I do
+not even wish to see what you have brought."
+
+"Be that as your Majesty pleases," said the Stranger; "but I will be
+so bold as to say that I have great hopes that the collection which I
+have obtained will interest the people. Will your Majesty graciously
+allow them to see it?"
+
+"I have no objection to that," said the Queen; "and indeed I shall be
+very glad if they can be made to be interested in the museum. I will
+give orders that the prisons be opened, so that everybody can go to
+see what you have brought; and those who shall be interested in it
+may return to their homes. I did not release my obstinate subjects
+when the museum was robbed, because their fault then was just as
+great as it was before; and it would not be right that they should
+profit by my loss."
+
+The Queen's proclamation was made, and for several days the museum
+was crowded with people moving from morning till night through the
+vast collection of stuffed animals, birds, and fishes; rare and
+brilliant insects; mineral and vegetable curiosities; beautiful works
+of art; and all the strange, valuable, and instructive objects which
+had been brought from the interminable vaults of the magician
+Alfrarmedj. The Queen's officers, who had been sent to observe
+whether or not the people were interested, were in no doubt upon this
+point. Every eye sparkled with delight, for every one found something
+which was the very thing he wished to see; and in the throng was the
+Hermit's Pupil, standing in rapt ecstasy before a large case
+containing all sorts of fishing-tackle, from the smallest hooks for
+little minnows to the great irons and spears used in capturing
+whales.
+
+No one went back to prison, and the city was full of re-united
+households and happy homes. On the morning of the fourth day, a grand
+procession of citizens came to the palace to express to the Queen
+their delight and appreciation of her museum. The great happiness of
+her subjects could but please the Queen. She called the Stranger to
+her, and said to him:
+
+"Tell me how you came to know what it was that would interest my
+people."
+
+"I asked them," said the Stranger. "That is to say, I arranged that
+they should be asked."
+
+"That was well done," said the Queen; "but it is a great pity that my
+long labors in their behalf should have been lost. For many years I
+have been a collector of button-holes; and there was nothing valuable
+or rare in the line of my studies of which I had not an original
+specimen or a facsimile. My agents brought me from foreign lands,
+even from the most distant islands of the sea, button-holes of every
+kind; in silk, in wool, in cloth of gold, in every imaginable
+material, and of those which could not be obtained careful copies
+were made. There was not a duplicate specimen in the whole
+collection; only one of each kind; nothing repeated. Never before was
+there such a museum. With all my power I strove to educate my people
+up to an appreciation of button-holes; but, with the exception of a
+few tailors and seamstresses, nobody took the slightest interest in
+what I had provided for their benefit. I am glad that my people are
+happy, but I cannot restrain a sigh for the failure of my efforts."
+
+"The longer your Majesty lives," said the Stranger, "the better you
+will understand that we cannot make other people like a thing simply
+because we like it ourselves."
+
+"Stranger," said the Queen, gazing upon him with admiration, "are you
+a king in disguise?"
+
+"I am," he replied.
+
+"I thought I perceived it," said the Queen, "and I wish to add that I
+believe you are far better able to govern this kingdom than I am. If
+you choose I will resign it to you."
+
+"Not so, your majesty," said the other; "I would not deprive you of
+your royal position, but I should be happy to share it with you."
+
+"That will answer very well," said the Queen. And turning to an
+attendant, she gave orders that preparations should be made for their
+marriage on the following day.
+
+After the royal wedding, which was celebrated with great pomp and
+grandeur, the Queen paid a visit to the museum, and, much to her
+surprise, was greatly delighted and interested. The King then
+informed her that he happened to know where the robbers had stored
+her collection, which they could not sell or make use of, and if she
+wished, he would regain the collection and erect a building for its
+reception.
+
+"We will not do that at present," said the Queen. "When I shall have
+thoroughly examined and studied all these objects, most of which are
+entirely new to me, we will decide about the button-holes."
+
+The Hermit's Pupil did not return to his cave. He was greatly
+delighted with the spice and dash of a robber's life, so different
+from that of a hermit; and he determined, if possible, to change his
+business and enter the band. He had a conversation with the Captain
+on the subject, and that individual encouraged him in his purpose.
+
+"I am tired," the Captain said, "of a robber's life. I have stolen so
+much, that I cannot use what I have. I take no further interest in
+accumulating spoils. The quiet of a hermit's life attracts me; and,
+if you like we will change places. I will become the pupil of your
+old master, and you shall be the captain of my band."
+
+The change was made. The Captain retired to the cave of the Hermit's
+Pupil, while the latter, with the hearty consent of all the men, took
+command of the band of robbers.
+
+When the King heard of this change, he was not at all pleased, and he
+sent for the ex-pupil.
+
+"I am willing to reward you," he said, "for assisting me in my recent
+undertaking; but I cannot allow you to lead a band of robbers in my
+dominions."
+
+A dark shade of disappointment passed over the ex-pupil's features,
+and his face lengthened visibly.
+
+"It is too bad," he said, "to be thus cut short at the very outset of
+a brilliant career. I'll tell you what I'll do," he added suddenly,
+his face brightening, "if you'll let me keep on in my new profession,
+I'll promise to do nothing but rob robbers."
+
+"Very well," said the King, "if you will confine yourself to that,
+you may retain your position."
+
+The members of the band were perfectly willing to rob in the new way,
+for it seemed quite novel and exciting to them. The first place they
+robbed was their own cave, and as they all had excellent memories,
+they knew from whom the various goods had been stolen, and every
+thing was returned to its proper owner. The ex-pupil then led his
+band against the other dens of robbers in the kingdom, and his
+movements were conducted with such dash and vigor that the various
+hordes scattered in every direction, while the treasures in their
+dens were returned to the owners, or, if these could not be found,
+were given to the poor. In a short time every robber, except those
+led by the ex-pupil, had gone into some other business; and the
+victorious youth led his band into other kingdoms to continue the
+great work of robbing robbers.
+
+The Queen never sent for the collection of curiosities which the
+robbers had stolen from her. She was so much interested in the new
+museum that she continually postponed the re-establishment of her old
+one; and, as far as can be known, the button-holes are still in the
+cave where the robbers shut them up.
+
+
+
+
+
+ CHRISTMAS BEFORE LAST;
+
+OR, THE FRUIT OF THE FRAGILE PALM.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The "Horn o' Plenty" was a fine, big, old-fashioned ship, very high
+in the bow, very high in the stern, with a quarter-deck always
+carpeted in fine weather, because her captain could not see why one
+should not make himself comfortable at sea as well as on land.
+Covajos Maroots was her captain, and a fine, jolly, old-fashioned,
+elderly sailor he was. The "Horn o' Plenty" always sailed upon one
+sea, and always between two ports, one on the west side of the sea,
+and one on the east. The port on the west was quite a large city, in
+which Captain Covajos had a married son, and the port on the east was
+another city in which he had a married daughter. In each family he
+had several grandchildren; and, consequently, it was a great joy to
+the jolly old sailor to arrive at either port. The Captain was very
+particular about his cargo, and the "Horn o' Plenty" was generally
+laden with good things to eat, or sweet things to smell, or fine
+things to wear, or beautiful things to look at. Once a merchant
+brought to him some boxes of bitter aloes, and mustard plasters, but
+Captain Covajos refused to take them into his ship.
+
+"I know," said he, "that such things are very useful and necessary at
+times, but you would better send them over in some other vessel. The
+'Horn o' Plenty' has never carried any thing that to look at, to
+taste, or to smell, did not delight the souls of old and young. I am
+sure you cannot say that of these commodities. If I were to put such
+things on board my ship, it would break the spell which more than
+fifty savory voyages have thrown around it."
+
+There were sailors who sailed upon that sea who used to say that
+sometimes, when the weather was hazy and they could not see far, they
+would know they were about to meet the "Horn o' Plenty" before she
+came in sight; her planks and timbers, and even her sails and masts,
+had gradually become so filled with the odor of good things that the
+winds that blew over her were filled with an agreeable fragrance.
+
+There was another thing about which Captain Covajos was very
+particular; he always liked to arrive at one of his ports a few days
+before Christmas. Never, in the course of his long life, had the old
+sailor spent a Christmas at sea; and now that he had his fine
+grandchildren to help make the holidays merry, it would have grieved
+him very much if he had been unable to reach one or the other of his
+ports in good season. His jolly old vessel was generally heavily
+laden, and very slow, and there were many days of calms on that sea
+when she did not sail at all, so that her voyages were usually very,
+very long. But the Captain fixed the days of sailing so as to give
+himself plenty of time to get to the other end of his course before
+Christmas came around.
+
+One spring, however, he started too late, and when he was about the
+middle of his voyage, he called to him Baragat Bean, his old
+boatswain. This venerable sailor had been with the Captain ever since
+he had commanded the "Horn o' Plenty," and on important occasions he
+was always consulted in preference to the other officers, none of
+whom had served under Captain Covajos more then fifteen or twenty
+years.
+
+"Baragat," said the Captain, "we have just passed the Isle of
+Guinea-Hens. You can see its one mountain standing up against the sky
+to the north."
+
+"Aye, aye, sir," said old Baragat; "there she stands, the same as
+usual."
+
+"That makes it plain," said the Captain, "that we are not yet
+half-way across, and I am very much afraid that I shall not be able
+to reach my dear daughter's house before Christmas."
+
+"That would be doleful, indeed," said Baragat; "but I've feared
+something of the kind, for we've had calms nearly every other day,
+and sometimes, when the wind did blow, it came from the wrong
+direction, and it's my belief that the ship sailed backward."
+
+"That was very bad management," said the Captain. "The chief mate
+should have seen to it that the sails were turned in such a manner
+that the ship could not go backward. If that sort of thing happened
+often, it would become quite a serious affair."
+
+"But what is done can't be helped," said the boatswain, "and I don't
+see how you are going to get into port before Christmas."
+
+"Nor do I," said the Captain, gazing out over the sea.
+
+"It would give me a sad turn, sir," said Baragat, "to see you spend
+Christmas at sea; a thing you never did before, nor ever shall do, if
+I can help it. If you'll take my advice, sir, you'll turn around, and
+go back. It's a shorter distance to the port we started from than to
+the one we are going to, and if we turn back now, I am sure we all
+shall be on shore before the holidays."
+
+"Go back to my son's house!" exclaimed Captain Covajos, "where I was
+last winter! Why, that would be like spending last Christmas over
+again!"
+
+"But that would be better than having none at all, sir," said the
+boatswain, "and a Christmas at sea would be about equal to none."
+
+"Good!" exclaimed the Captain. "I will give up the coming Christmas
+with my daughter and her children, and go back and spend last
+Christmas over again with my son and his dear boys and girls. Have
+the ship turned around immediately, Baragat, and tell the chief mate
+I do not wish to sail backward if it can possibly be avoided."
+
+For a week or more the "Horn o' Plenty" sailed back upon her track
+towards the city where dwelt the Captain's son. The weather was fine,
+the carpet was never taken up from the quarter-deck, and every thing
+was going on very well, when a man, who happened to have an errand at
+one of the topmasts, came down, and reported that, far away to the
+north, he had seen a little open boat with some people in it.
+
+"Ah me!" said Captain Covajos, "it must be some poor fellows who are
+shipwrecked. It will take us out of our course, but we must not leave
+them to their fate. Have the ship turned about, so that it will sail
+northward."
+
+It was not very long before they came up with the boat; and, much to
+the Captain's surprise, he saw that it was filled with boys.
+
+"Who are you?" he cried as soon as he was near enough. "And where do
+you come from?"
+
+"We are the First Class in Long Division," said the oldest boy, "and
+we are cast away. Have you any thing to eat that you can spare us? We
+are almost famished."
+
+"We have plenty of every thing," said the Captain. "Come on board
+instantly, and all your wants shall be supplied."
+
+"How long have you been without food?" he asked, when the boys were
+on the deck of the vessel.
+
+"We have had nothing to eat since breakfast," said one of them; "and
+it is now late in the afternoon. Some of us are nearly dead from
+starvation."
+
+"It is very hard for boys to go so long without eating," said the
+good Captain. And leading them below, he soon set them to work upon a
+bountiful meal.
+
+Not until their hunger was fully satisfied did he ask them how they
+came to be cast away.
+
+"You see, sir," said the oldest boy, "that we and the Multiplication
+Class had a holiday to-day, and each class took a boat and determined
+to have a race, so as to settle, once for all, which was the highest
+branch of arithmetic, multiplication or long division. Our class
+rowed so hard that we entirely lost sight of the Multiplicationers,
+and found indeed that we were out of sight of every thing; so that,
+at last, we did not know which was the way back, and thus we became
+castaways."
+
+"Where is your school?" asked the Captain.
+
+"It is on Apple Island," said the boy; "and, although it is a long
+way off for a small boat with only four oars for nine boys, it can't
+be very far for a ship."
+
+"That is quite likely," said the Captain, "and we shall take you
+home. Baragat, tell the chief mate to have the vessel turned toward
+Apple Island, that we may restore these boys to their parents and
+guardians."
+
+Now, the chief mate had not the least idea in the world where Apple
+Island was, but he did not like to ask, because that would be
+confessing his ignorance; so he steered his vessel toward a point
+where he believed he had once seen an island, which, probably, was
+the one in question. The "Horn o' Plenty" sailed in this direction
+all night, and when day broke, and there was no island in sight, she
+took another course; and so sailed this way and that for six or seven
+days, without ever seeing a sign of land. All this time, the First
+Class in Long Division was as happy as it could be, for it was having
+a perfect holiday; fishing off the sides of the vessel, climbing up
+the ladders and ropes, and helping the sailors whistle for wind. But
+the Captain now began to grow a little impatient, for he felt he was
+losing time; so he sent for the chief mate, and said to him mildly
+but firmly:
+
+"I know it is out of the line of your duty to search for island
+schools, but, if you really think that you do not know where Apple
+Island lies, I wish you to say so, frankly and openly."
+
+"Frankly and openly," answered the mate, "I don't think I do."
+
+"Very well," said the Captain. "Now, that is a basis to work upon,
+and we know where we stand. You can take a little rest, and let the
+second mate find the island. But I can only give him three days in
+which to do it. We really have no time to spare."
+
+The second mate was very proud of the responsibility placed upon him,
+and immediately ordered the vessel to be steered due south.
+
+"One is just as likely," he said, "to find a totally unknown place by
+going straight ahead in a certain direction, as by sailing here,
+there, and everywhere. In this way, you really get over more water,
+and there is less wear and tear of the ship and rigging."
+
+So he sailed due south for two days, and at the end of that time they
+came in sight of land. This was quite a large island, and when they
+approached near enough, they saw upon its shores a very handsome
+city.
+
+"Is this Apple Island?" said Captain Covajos to the oldest boy.
+
+"Well, sir," answered the youth, "I am not sure I can say with
+certainty that I truly believe that it is; but, I think, if we were
+to go on shore, the people there would be able to tell us how to go
+to Apple Island."
+
+"Very likely," said the good Captain; "and we will go on shore and
+make inquiries.--And it has struck me, Baragat," he said, "that
+perhaps the merchants in the city where my son lives may be somewhat
+annoyed when the 'Horn o' Plenty' comes back with all their goods on
+board, and not disposed of. Not understanding my motives, they may be
+disposed to think ill of me. Consequently the idea has come into my
+head, that it might be a good thing to stop here for a time, and try
+to dispose of some of our merchandise. The city seems to be quite
+prosperous, and I have no doubt there are a number of merchants
+here."
+
+So the "Horn o' Plenty" was soon anchored in the harbor, and as many
+of the officers and crew as could be spared went on shore to make
+inquiries. Of course the First Class in Long Division was not left
+behind; and, indeed, they were ashore as soon as anybody. The Captain
+and his companions were cordially welcomed by some of the dignitaries
+of the city who had come down to the harbor to see the strange
+vessel; but no one could give any information in regard to Apple
+Island, the name of which had never been heard on those shores. The
+Captain was naturally desirous of knowing at what place he had
+landed, and was informed that this was the Island of the Fragile
+Palm.
+
+"That is rather an odd name," said the old Captain. "Why is it so
+called?"
+
+"The reason is this," said his informant. "Near the centre of the
+island stands a tall and very slender palm-tree, which has been
+growing there for hundreds of years. It bears large and handsome
+fruit which is something like the cocoanut; and, in its perfection,
+is said to be a transcendently delicious fruit."
+
+"Said to be!" exclaimed the Captain; "are you not positive about it?"
+
+"No," said the other; "no one living has ever tasted the fruit in its
+perfection. When it becomes overripe, it drops to the ground, and,
+even then, it is considered royal property, and is taken to the
+palace for the King's table. But on fête-days and grand occasions
+small bits of it are distributed to the populace."
+
+"Why don't you pick the fruit," asked Captain Covajos, "when it is in
+its best condition to eat?"
+
+"It would be impossible," said the citizen, "for any one to climb up
+that tree, the trunk of which is so extremely delicate and fragile
+that the weight of a man would probably snap it; and, of course, a
+ladder placed against it would produce the same result. Many attempts
+have been made to secure this fruit at the proper season, but all of
+them have failed. Another palm-tree of a more robust sort was once
+planted near this one in the hope that when it grew high enough, men
+could climb up the stronger tree and get the fruit from the other.
+But, although we waited many years the second tree never attained
+sufficient height, and it was cut down."
+
+"It is a great pity," said the Captain; "but I suppose it cannot be
+helped." And then he began to make inquiries about the merchants in
+the place, and what probability there was of his doing a little trade
+here. The Captain soon discovered that the cargo of his ship was made
+up of goods which were greatly desired by the citizens of this place;
+and for several days he was very busy in selling the good things to
+eat, the sweet things to smell, the fine things to wear, and the
+beautiful things to look at, with which the hold of the "Horn o'
+Plenty" was crowded.
+
+During this time the First Class in Long Division roamed, in delight,
+over the city. The busy streets, the shops, the handsome buildings,
+and the queer sights which they occasionally met, interested and
+amused them greatly. But still the boys were not satisfied. They had
+heard of the Fragile Palm, and they made up their minds to go and
+have a look at it. Therefore, taking a guide, they tramped out into
+the country, and in about an hour they came in sight of the beautiful
+tree standing in the centre of the plain. The trunk was, indeed,
+exceedingly slender, and, as the guide informed them, the wood was of
+so very brittle a nature that if the tree had not been protected from
+the winds by the high hills which encircled it, it would have been
+snapped off ages ago. Under the broad tuft of leaves that formed its
+top, the boys saw hanging large clusters of the precious fruit; great
+nuts as big as their heads.
+
+"At what time of the year," asked the oldest boy, "is that fruit just
+ripe enough to eat?"
+
+"Now," answered the guide. "This is the season when it is in the most
+perfect condition. In about a month it will become entirely too ripe
+and soft, and will drop. But, even then, the King and all the rest of
+us are glad enough to get a taste of it."
+
+"I should think the King would be exceedingly eager to get some of
+it, just as it is," said the boy.
+
+"Indeed he is!" replied the guide. "He and his father, and I don't
+know how many grandfathers back, have offered large rewards to any
+one who would procure them this fruit in its best condition. But
+nobody has ever been able to get any yet."
+
+"The reward still holds good, I suppose," said the head boy.
+
+"Oh, yes," answered the guide; "there never was a King who so much
+desired to taste the fruit as our present monarch."
+
+The oldest boy looked up at the top of the tree, shut one eye, and
+gave his head a little wag. Whereupon every boy in the class looked
+up, shut one eye, and slightly wagged his head. After which the
+oldest boy said that he thought it was about time for them to go back
+to the ship.
+
+As soon as they reached the vessel, and could talk together freely,
+the boys had an animated discussion. It was unanimously agreed that
+they would make an attempt to get some of the precious fruit from the
+Fragile Palm, and the only difference of opinion among them was as to
+how it should be done. Most of them were in favor of some method of
+climbing the tree and trusting to its not breaking. But this the
+oldest boy would not listen to; the trunk might snap, and then
+somebody would be hurt, and he felt, in a measure, responsible for
+the rest of the class. At length a good plan was proposed by a boy
+who had studied mechanics.
+
+"What we ought to do with that tree," said he, "is to put a hinge
+into her. Then we could let her down gently, pick off the fruit, and
+set her up again.
+
+"But how are you going to do it?" asked the others.
+
+"This is the way," said the boy who had studied mechanics. "You take
+a saw, and then, about two feet from the ground, you begin and saw
+down diagonally, for a foot and a half, to the centre of the trunk.
+Then you go on the other side, and saw down in the same way, the two
+outs meeting each other. Now you have the upper part of the trunk
+ending in a wedge, which fits into a cleft in the lower part of the
+trunk. Then, about nine inches below the place where you first began
+to saw, you bore a hole straight through both sides of the cleft and
+the wedge between them. Then you put an iron bolt through this hole,
+and you have your tree on a hinge, only she wont be apt to move
+because she fits in so snug and tight. Then you get a long rope, and
+put one end in a slipknot loosely around the trunk. Then you get a
+lot of poles, and tie them end to end, and push this slip-knot up
+until it is somewhere near the top, when you pull it tight. Then you
+take another rope with a slip-knot, and push this a little more than
+half-way up the trunk. By having two ropes, that way, you prevent too
+much strain coming on any one part of the trunk. Then, after that,
+you take a mallet and chisel and round off the lower corners of the
+wedge, so that it will turn easily in the cleft. Then we take hold of
+the ropes, let her down gently, pick off the fruit, and haul her up
+again. That will all be easy enough."
+
+This plan delighted the boys, and they all pronounced in its favor;
+but the oldest one suggested that it would be better to fasten the
+ropes to the trunk before they began to saw upon it, and another boy
+asked how they were going to keep the tree standing when they hauled
+her up again.
+
+"Oh, that is easy," said the one who had studied mechanics; "you just
+bore another hole about six inches above the first one, and put in
+another bolt. Then, of course, she can't move."
+
+This settled all the difficulties, and it was agreed to start out
+early the next morning, gather the fruit, and claim the reward the
+King had offered. They accordingly went to the Captain and asked him
+for a sharp saw, a mallet and chisel, an auger, two iron bolts, and
+two very long ropes. These, having been cheerfully given to them,
+were put away in readiness for the work to be attempted.
+
+Very early on the next morning, the First Class in Long Division set
+out for the Fragile Palm, carrying their tools and ropes. Few people
+were awake as they passed through the city, and, without being
+observed, they reached the little plain on which the tree stood. The
+ropes were attached at the proper places, the tree was sawn,
+diagonally, according to the plan; the bolt was put in, and the
+corners of the wedge were rounded off. Then the eldest boy produced a
+pound of butter, whereupon his comrades, who had seized the ropes,
+paused in surprise and asked him why he had brought the butter.
+
+"I thought it well," was the reply, "to bring along some butter,
+because, when the tree is down, we can grease the hinge, and then it
+will not be so hard to pull it up again."
+
+When all was ready, eight of the boys took hold of the long ropes,
+while another one with a pole pushed against the trunk of the Fragile
+Palm. When it began to lean over a little, he dropped his pole and
+ran to help the others with the ropes. Slowly the tree moved on its
+hinge, descending at first very gradually; but it soon began to move
+with greater rapidity, although the boys held it back with all their
+strength; and, in spite of their most desperate efforts, the top came
+to the ground at last with a great thump. And then they all dropped
+their ropes, and ran for the fruit. Fortunately the great nuts
+incased in their strong husks were not in the least injured, and the
+boys soon pulled them off, about forty in all. Some of the boys were
+in favor of cracking open a few of the nuts and eating them, but this
+the eldest boy positively forbade.
+
+"This fruit," he said, "is looked upon as almost sacred, and if we
+were to eat any of it, it is probable that we should be put to death,
+which would be extremely awkward for fellows who have gone to all the
+trouble we have had. We must set up the tree and carry the fruit to
+the King."
+
+According to this advice, they thoroughly greased the hinge in the
+tree with the butter, and then set themselves to work to haul up the
+trunk. This, however, was much more difficult than letting it down;
+and they had to lift up the head of it, and prop it up on poles,
+before they could pull upon it with advantage. The tree, although
+tall, was indeed a very slender one, with a small top, and, if it had
+been as fragile as it was supposed to be, the boys' efforts would
+surely have broken it. At last, after much tugging and warm work,
+they pulled it into an upright position, and put in the second bolt.
+They left the ropes on the tree because, as some of them had
+suggested, the people might want to let the tree down again the next
+year. It would have been difficult for the boys to carry in their
+arms the great pile of fruit they had gathered; but, having noticed a
+basket-maker's cottage on their way to the tree, two of them were
+sent to buy one of his largest baskets or hampers. This was attached
+to two long poles, and, having been filled with the nuts, the boys
+took the poles on their shoulders, and marched into the city.
+
+On their way to the palace they attracted a great crowd, and when
+they were ushered into the presence of the King, his surprise and
+delight knew no bounds. At first he could scarcely believe his eyes;
+but he had seen the fruit so often that there could be no mistake
+about it.
+
+"I shall not ask you," he said to the boys, "how you procured this
+fruit, and thus accomplished a deed which has been the object of the
+ambition of myself and my forefathers. All I ask is, did you leave
+the tree standing?"
+
+"We did," said the boys.
+
+"Then all that remains to be done," said His Majesty, "is to give you
+the reward you have so nobly earned. Treasurer, measure out to each
+of them a quart of gold coin. And pray be quick about it, for I am
+wild with desire to have a table spread, and one of these nuts
+cracked, that I may taste of its luscious contents."
+
+The boys, however, appeared a little dissatisfied. Huddling together,
+they consulted in a low tone, and then the eldest boy addressed the
+King.
+
+"May it please your Majesty," he said; "we should very much prefer to
+have you give each of us one of those nuts instead of a quart of
+gold."
+
+The King looked grave. "This is a much greater reward," he said,
+"than I had ever expected to pay; but, since you ask it, you must
+have it. You have done something which none of my subjects has ever
+been able to accomplish, and it is right, therefore, that you should
+be fully satisfied."
+
+So he gave them each a nut, with which they departed in triumph to
+the ship.
+
+By the afternoon of the next day, the Captain had sold all his cargo
+at very good prices; and when the money was safely stored away in the
+"Horn o' Plenty," he made ready to sail, for he declared he had
+really no time to spare. "I must now make all possible haste," he
+said to old Baragat, "to find Apple Island, put these boys ashore,
+and then speed away to the city where lives my son. We must not fail
+to get there in time to spend last Christmas over again."
+
+On the second day, after the "Horn o' Plenty" had left the Island of
+the Fragile Palm, one of the sailors who happened to be aloft noticed
+a low, black, and exceedingly unpleasant-looking vessel rapidly
+approaching. This soon proved to be the ship of a band of corsairs,
+who, having heard of the large amount of money on the "Horn o'
+Plenty," had determined to pursue her and capture the rich prize. All
+sails were set upon the "Horn o' Plenty," but it soon became plain
+that she could never outsail the corsair vessel.
+
+"What our ship can do better than any thing else," said Baragat to
+the Captain, "is to stop short. Stop her short, and let the other one
+go by."
+
+This manoeuvre was executed, but, although the corsair passed rapidly
+by, not being able to stop so suddenly, it soon turned around and
+came back, its decks swarming with savage men armed to the teeth.
+
+"They are going to board us," cried Baragat. "They are getting out
+their grappling-irons, and they will fasten the two ships together."
+
+"Let all assemble on the quarter-deck," said the Captain. "It is
+higher there, and we shall not be so much exposed to accidents."
+
+The corsair ship soon ran alongside the "Horn o' Plenty," and in a
+moment the two vessels were fastened together; and then the corsairs,
+every man of them, each with cutlass in hand and a belt full of dirks
+and knives, swarmed up the side of the "Horn o' Plenty," and sprang
+upon its central deck. Some of the ferocious fellows, seeing the
+officers and crew all huddled together upon the quarter-deck, made a
+movement in that direction. This so frightened the chief mate that he
+sprang down upon the deck of the corsair ship. A panic now arose, and
+he was immediately followed by the officers and crew. The boys, of
+course, were not to be left behind; and the Captain and Baragat felt
+themselves bound not to desert the crew, and so they jumped also.
+None of the corsairs interfered with this proceeding, for each one of
+them was anxious to find the money at once. When the passengers and
+crew of the "Horn o' Plenty" were all on board the corsair ship,
+Baragat came to the Captain, and said:
+
+"If I were you, sir, I'd cast off those grapnels, and separate the
+vessels. If we don't do that those rascals, when they have finished
+robbing our money-chests, will come back here and murder us all."
+
+"That is a good idea," said Captain Covajos; and he told the chief
+mate to give orders to cast off the grapnels, push the two vessels
+apart, and set some of the sails.
+
+When this had been done, the corsair vessel began to move away from
+the other, and was soon many lengths distant from her. When the
+corsairs came on deck and perceived what had happened, they were
+infuriated, and immediately began to pursue their own vessel with the
+one they had captured. But the "Horn o' Plenty" could not, by any
+possibility, sail as fast as the corsair ship, and the latter easily
+kept away from her.
+
+"Now, then," said Baragat to the Captain, "what you have to do is
+easy enough. Sail straight for our port and those sea-robbers will
+follow you; for, of course, they will wish to get their own vessel
+back again, and will hope, by some carelessness on our part, to
+overtake us. In the mean time the money will be safe enough, for they
+will have no opportunity of spending it; and when we come to port, we
+can take some soldiers on board, and go back and capture those
+fellows. They can never sail away from us on the 'Horn o' Plenty.'"
+
+"That is an admirable plan," said the Captain, "and I shall carry it
+out; but I cannot sail to port immediately. I must first find Apple
+Island and land these boys, whose parents and guardians are probably
+growing very uneasy. I suppose the corsairs will continue to follow
+us wherever we go."
+
+"I hope so," said Baragat; "at any rate we shall see."
+
+The First Class in Long Division was very much delighted with the
+change of vessels, and the boys rambled everywhere, and examined with
+great interest all that belonged to the corsairs. They felt quite
+easy about the only treasures they possessed, because, when they had
+first seen the piratical vessel approaching, they had taken the
+precious nuts which had been given to them by the King, and had
+hidden them at the bottom of some large boxes, in which the Captain
+kept the sailors' winter clothes.
+
+"In this warm climate," said the eldest boy, "the robbers will never
+meddle with those winter clothes, and our precious fruit will be
+perfectly safe."
+
+"If you had taken my advice," said one of the other boys, "we should
+have eaten some of the nuts. Those, at least, we should have been
+sure of."
+
+"And we should have had that many less to show to the other classes,"
+said the eldest boy. "Nuts like these, I am told, if picked at the
+proper season, will keep for a long time."
+
+For some days the corsairs on board the "Horn o' Plenty" followed
+their own vessel, but then they seemed to despair of ever being able
+to overtake it, and steered in another direction. This threatened to
+ruin all the plans of Captain Covajos, and his mind became troubled.
+Then the boy who had studied mechanics came forward and said to the
+Captain:
+
+"I'll tell you what I'd do, sir, if I were you; I'd follow your old
+ship, and when night came on I'd sail up quite near to her, and let
+some of your sailors swim quietly over, and fasten a cable to her,
+and then you could tow her after you wherever you wished to go."
+
+"But they might unfasten the cable, or cut it," said Baragat, who was
+standing by.
+
+"That could easily be prevented," said the boy. "At their end of the
+cable must be a stout chain which they cannot cut, and it must be
+fastened so far beneath the surface of the water that they will not
+be able to reach it to unfasten it."
+
+"A most excellent plan," said Captain Covajos; "let it be carried
+out."
+
+As soon as it became quite dark, the corsair vessel quietly
+approached the other, and two stout sailors from Finland, who swam
+very well, were ordered to swim over and attach the chain-end of a
+long cable to the "Horn o' Plenty." It was a very difficult
+operation, for the chain was heavy, but the men succeeded at last,
+and returned to report.
+
+"We put the chain on, fast and strong sir," they said to the Captain;
+"and six feet under water. But the only place we could find to make
+it fast to was the bottom of the rudder."
+
+"That will do very well," remarked Baragat; "for the 'Horn o' Plenty'
+sails better backward than forward, and will not be so hard to tow."
+
+For week after week, and month after month, Captain Covajos, in the
+corsair vessel, sailed here and there in search of Apple Island,
+always towing after him the "Horn o' Plenty," with the corsairs on
+board, but never an island with a school on it could they find; and
+one day old Baragat came to the Captain and said:
+
+"If I were you, sir, I'd sail no more in these warm regions. I am
+quite sure that apples grow in colder latitudes, and are never found
+so far south as this."
+
+"That is a good idea," said Captain Covajos. "We should sail for the
+north if we wished to find an island of apples. Have the vessel
+turned northward."
+
+And so, for days and weeks, the two vessels slowly moved on to the
+north. One day the Captain made some observations and calculations,
+and then he hastily summoned Baragat.
+
+"Do you know," said he, "that I find it is now near the end of
+November, and I am quite certain that we shall not get to the port
+where my son lives in time to celebrate last Christmas again. It is
+dreadfully slow work, towing after us the 'Horn o' Plenty,' full of
+corsairs, wherever we go. But we cannot cast her off and sail
+straight for our port, for I should lose my good ship, the merchants
+would lose all their money, and the corsairs would go unpunished;
+and, besides all that, think of the misery of the parents and
+guardians of those poor boys. No; I must endeavor to find Apple
+Island. And if I cannot reach port in time to spend last Christmas
+with my son, I shall certainly get there in season for Christmas
+before last. It is true that I spent that Christmas with my daughter,
+but I cannot go on to her now. I am much nearer the city where my son
+lives; and, besides, it is necessary to go back, and give the
+merchants their money. So now we shall have plenty of time, and need
+not feel hurried."
+
+"No," said Baragat, heaving a vast sigh, "we need not feel hurried."
+
+The mind of the eldest boy now became very much troubled, and he
+called his companions about him. "I don't like at all," said he,
+"this sailing to the north. It is now November, and, although it is
+warm enough at this season in the southern part of the sea, it will
+become colder and colder as we go on. The consequence of this will be
+that those corsairs will want winter clothes, they will take them out
+of the Captain's chests, and they will find our fruit."
+
+The boys groaned. "That is true," said one of them; "but still we
+wish to go back to our island."
+
+"Of course," said the eldest boy, "it is quite proper that we should
+return to Long Division. But think of the hard work we did to get
+that fruit, and think of the quarts of gold we gave up for it! It
+would be too bad to lose it now!"
+
+It was unanimously agreed that it would be too bad to lose the fruit,
+and it was also unanimously agreed that they wished to go back to
+Apple Island. But what to do about it, they did not know.
+
+Day by day the weather grew colder and colder, and the boys became
+more and more excited and distressed for fear they should lose their
+precious fruit. The eldest boy lay awake for several nights, and then
+a plan came into his head. He went to Captain Covajos and proposed
+that he should send a flag of truce over to the corsairs, offering to
+exchange winter clothing. He would send over to them the heavy
+garments they had left on their own vessel, and in return would take
+the boxes of clothes intended for the winter wear of his sailors. In
+this way, they would get their fruit back without the corsairs
+knowing any thing about it. The Captain considered this an excellent
+plan, and ordered the chief mate to take a boat and a flag of truce,
+and go over to the "Horn o' Plenty," and make the proposition. The
+eldest boy and two of the others insisted on going also, in order
+that there might be no mistake about the boxes. But when the
+flag-of-truce party reached the "Horn o' Plenty" they found not a
+corsair there! Every man of them had gone. They had taken with them
+all the money-chests, but to the great delight of the boys, the boxes
+of winter clothes had not been disturbed; and in them still nestled,
+safe and sound, the precious nuts of the Fragile Palm.
+
+When the matter had been thoroughly looked into, it became quite
+evident what the corsairs had done. There had been only one boat on
+board the "Horn o' Plenty," and that was the one on which the First
+Class in Long Division had arrived. The night before, the two vessels
+had passed within a mile or so of a large island, which the Captain
+had approached in the hope it was the one they were looking for, and
+they passed it so slowly that the corsairs had time to ferry
+themselves over, a few at a time, in the little boat, taking with
+them the money,--and all without discovery.
+
+Captain Covajos was greatly depressed when he heard of the loss of
+all the money.
+
+"I shall have a sad tale to tell my merchants," he said, "and
+Christmas before last will not be celebrated so joyously as it was
+the first time. But we cannot help what has happened, and we all must
+endeavor to bear our losses with patience. We shall continue our
+search for Apple Island, but I shall go on board my own ship, for I
+have greatly missed my carpeted quarter-deck and my other comforts.
+The chief mate, however, and a majority of the crew shall remain on
+board the corsair vessel, and continue to tow us. The 'Horn o'
+Plenty' sails better stern foremost, and we shall go faster that
+way."
+
+The boys were overjoyed at recovering their fruit, and most of them
+were in favor of cracking two or three of the great nuts, and eating
+their contents in honor of the occasion, but the eldest boy dissuaded
+them.
+
+"The good Captain," he said, "has been very kind in endeavoring to
+take us back to our school, and still intends to keep up the search
+for dear old Apple Island. The least we can do for him is to give him
+this fruit, which is all we have, and let him do what he pleases with
+it. This is the only way in which we can show our gratitude to him."
+
+The boys turned their backs on one another, and each of them gave his
+eyes a little rub, but they all agreed to give the fruit to the
+Captain.
+
+When the good old man received his present, he was much affected. "I
+will accept what you offer me," he said; "for if I did not, I know
+your feelings would be wounded. But you must keep one of the nuts for
+yourselves. And, more than that, if we do not find Apple Island in
+the course of the coming year, I invite you all to spend Christmas
+before last over again, with me at my son's house."
+
+All that winter, the two ships sailed up and down, and here and
+there, but never could they find Apple Island. When Christmas-time
+came, old Baragat went around among the boys and the crew, and told
+them it would be well not to say a word on the subject to the
+Captain, for his feelings were very tender in regard to spending
+Christmas away from his families, and the thing had never happened
+before. So nobody made any allusion to the holidays, and they passed
+over as if they had been ordinary days.
+
+During the spring, and all through the summer, the two ships kept up
+the unavailing search, but when the autumn began, Captain Covajos
+said to old Baragat: "I am very sorry, but I feel that I can no
+longer look for Apple Island. I must go back and spend Christmas
+before last over again, with my dearest son; and if these poor boys
+never return to their homes, I am sure they cannot say it was any
+fault of mine."
+
+"No, sir," said Baragat, "I think you have done all that could be
+expected of you."
+
+So the ships sailed to the city on the west side of the sea; and the
+Captain was received with great joy by his son, and his
+grandchildren. He went to the merchants, and told them how he had
+lost all their money. He hoped they would be able to bear their
+misfortune with fortitude, and begged, as he could do nothing else
+for them, that they would accept the eight great nuts from the
+Fragile Palm that the boys had given him. To his surprise the
+merchants became wild with delight when they received the nuts. The
+money they had lost was as nothing, they said, compared to the value
+of this incomparable and precious fruit, picked in its prime, and
+still in a perfect condition.
+
+It had been many, many generations since this rare fruit, the value
+of which was like unto that of diamonds and pearls, had been for sale
+in any market in the world; and kings and queens in many countries
+were ready to give for it almost any price that might be asked.
+
+When the good old Captain heard this he was greatly rejoiced, and, as
+the holidays were now near, he insisted that the boys should spend
+Christmas before last over again, at his son's house. He found that a
+good many people here knew where Apple Island was, and he made
+arrangements for the First Class in Long Division to return to that
+island in a vessel which was to sail about the first of the year.
+
+The boys still possessed the great nut which the Captain had insisted
+they should keep for themselves, and he now told them that if they
+chose to sell it, they would each have a nice little fortune to take
+back with them. The eldest boy consulted the others, and then he said
+to the Captain:
+
+"Our class has gone through a good many hardships, and has had a lot
+of trouble with that palm-tree and other things, and we think we
+ought to be rewarded. So, if it is all the same to you, I think we
+will crack the nut on Christmas Day and we all will eat it."
+
+"I never imagined," cried Captain Covajos, as he sat, on that
+Christmas Day, surrounded by his son's family and the First Class in
+Long Division, the eyes of the whole party sparkling with ecstasy as
+they tasted the peerless fruit of the Fragile Palm, "that Christmas
+before last could be so joyfully celebrated over again."
+
+
+
+
+
+ PRINCE HASSAK'S MARCH.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+In the spring of a certain year, long since passed away, Prince
+Hassak, of Itoby, determined to visit his uncle, the King of Yan.
+
+"Whenever my uncle visited us," said the Prince, "or when my late
+father went to see him, the journey was always made by sea; and, in
+order to do this, it was necessary to go in a very roundabout way
+between Itoby and Yan. Now, I shall do nothing of this kind. It is
+beneath the dignity of a prince to go out of his way on account of
+capes, peninsulas, and promontories. I shall march from my palace to
+that of my uncle in a straight line. I shall go across the country,
+and no obstacle shall cause me to deviate from my course. Mountains
+and hills shall be tunnelled, rivers shall be bridged, houses shall
+be levelled; a road shall be cut through forests; and, when I have
+finished my march, the course over which I have passed shall be a
+mathematically straight line. Thus will I show to the world that,
+when a prince desires to travel, it is not necessary for him to go
+out of his way on account of obstacles."
+
+As soon as possible after the Prince had determined upon this march,
+he made his preparations, and set out. He took with him a
+few courtiers, and a large body of miners, rock-splitters,
+bridge-builders, and workmen of that class, whose services would,
+very probably, be needed. Besides these, he had an officer whose duty
+it was to point out the direct course to be taken, and another who
+was to draw a map of the march, showing the towns, mountains, and the
+various places it passed through. There were no compasses in those
+days, but the course-marker had an instrument which he would set in a
+proper direction by means of the stars, and then he could march by it
+all day. Besides these persons, Prince Hassak selected from the
+schools of his city five boys and five girls, and took them with him.
+He wished to show them how, when a thing was to be done, the best way
+was to go straight ahead and do it, turning aside for nothing.
+
+"When they grow up they will teach these things to their children,"
+said he; "and thus I shall instil good principles into my people."
+
+The first day Prince Hassak and his party marched over a level
+country, with no further trouble than that occasioned by the tearing
+down of fences and walls, and the destruction of a few cottages and
+barns. After encamping for the night, they set out the next morning,
+but had not marched many miles before they came to a rocky hill, on
+the top of which was a handsome house, inhabited by a Jolly-cum-pop.
+
+"Your Highness," said the course-marker, "in order to go in a direct
+line we must make a tunnel through this hill, immediately under the
+house. This may cause the building to fall in, but the rubbish can be
+easily removed."
+
+"Let the men go to work," said the Prince. "I will dismount from my
+horse, and watch the proceedings."
+
+When the Jolly-cum-pop saw the party halt before his house, he
+hurried out to pay his respects to the Prince. When he was informed
+of what was to be done, the Jolly-cum-pop could not refrain from
+laughing aloud.
+
+"I never heard," he said, "of such a capital idea. It is so odd and
+original. It will be very funny, I am sure, to see a tunnel cut right
+under my house."
+
+The miners and rock-splitters now began to work at the base of the
+hill, and then the Jolly-cum-pop made a proposition to the Prince.
+
+"It will take your men some time," he said, "to cut this tunnel, and
+it is a pity your Highness should not be amused in the meanwhile. It
+is a fine day: suppose we go into the forest and hunt."
+
+This suited the Prince very well, for he did not care about sitting
+under a tree and watching his workmen, and the Jolly-cum-pop having
+sent for his horse and some bows and arrows, the whole party, with
+the exception of the laborers, rode toward the forest, a short
+distance away.
+
+"What shall we find to hunt?" asked the Prince of the Jolly-cum-pop.
+
+"I really do not know," exclaimed the latter, "but we'll hunt
+whatever we happen to see--deer, small birds, rabbits, griffins,
+rhinoceroses, any thing that comes along. I feel as gay as a skipping
+grasshopper. My spirits rise like a soaring bird. What a joyful thing
+it is to have such a hunt on such a glorious day!"
+
+The gay and happy spirits of the Jolly-cum-pop affected the whole
+party, and they rode merrily through the forest; but they found no
+game; and, after an hour or two, they emerged into the open country
+again. At a distance, on a slight elevation, stood a large and
+massive building.
+
+"I am hungry and thirsty," said the Prince, "and perhaps we can get
+some refreshments at yonder house. So far, this has not been a very
+fine hunt."
+
+"No," cried the Jolly-cum-pop, "not yet. But what a joyful thing to
+see a hospitable mansion just at the moment when we begin to feel a
+little tired and hungry!"
+
+The building they were approaching belonged to a Potentate, who lived
+at a great distance. In some of his travels he had seen this massive
+house, and thought it would make a good prison. He accordingly bought
+it, fitted it up as a jail, and appointed a jailer and three
+myrmidons to take charge of it. This had occurred years before, but
+no prisoners had ever been sent to this jail. A few days preceding
+the Jolly-cum-pop's hunt, the Potentate had journeyed this way and
+had stopped at his jail. After inquiring into its condition, he had
+said to the jailer:
+
+"It is now fourteen years since I appointed you to this place, and in
+all that time there have been no prisoners, and you and your men have
+been drawing your wages without doing any thing. I shall return this
+way in a few days, and if I still find you idle I shall discharge you
+all and close the jail."
+
+This filled the jailer with great dismay, for he did not wish to lose
+his good situation. When he saw the Prince and his party approaching,
+the thought struck him that perhaps he might make prisoners of them,
+and so not be found idle when the Potentate returned. He came out to
+meet the hunters, and when they asked if they could here find
+refreshment, he gave them a most cordial welcome. His men took their
+horses, and, inviting them to enter, he showed each member of the
+party into a small bedroom, of which there seemed to be a great many.
+
+"Here are water and towels," he said to each one, "and when you have
+washed your face and hands, your refreshments will be ready." Then,
+going out, he locked the door on the outside.
+
+The party numbered seventeen: the Prince, three courtiers, five boys,
+five girls, the course-marker, the map-maker, and the Jolly-cum-pop.
+The heart of the jailer was joyful; seventeen inmates was something
+to be proud of. He ordered his myrmidons to give the prisoners a meal
+of bread and water through the holes in their cell-doors, and then he
+sat down to make out his report to the Potentate.
+
+"They must all be guilty of crimes," he said to himself, "which are
+punished by long imprisonment. I don't want any of them executed."
+
+So he numbered his prisoners from one to seventeen, according to the
+cell each happened to be in, and he wrote a crime opposite each
+number. The first was highway robbery, the next forgery, and after
+that followed treason, smuggling, barn-burning, bribery, poaching,
+usury, piracy, witchcraft, assault and battery, using false weights
+and measures, burglary, counterfeiting, robbing hen-roosts,
+conspiracy, and poisoning his grandmother by proxy.
+
+This report was scarcely finished when the Potentate returned. He was
+very much surprised to find that seventeen prisoners had come in
+since his previous visit, and he read the report with interest.
+
+"Here is one who ought to be executed," he said, referring to Number
+Seventeen. "And how did he poison his grandmother by proxy? Did he
+get another woman to be poisoned in her stead? Or did he employ some
+one to act in his place as the poisoner?"
+
+"I have not yet been fully informed, my lord," said the jailer,
+fearful that he should lose a prisoner; "but this is his first
+offence, and his grandmother, who did not die, has testified to his
+general good character."
+
+"Very well," said the Potentate; "but if he ever does it again, let
+him be executed; and, by the way, I should like to see the
+prisoners."
+
+Thereupon the jailer conducted the Potentate along the corridors, and
+let him look through the holes in the doors at the prisoners within.
+
+"What is this little girl in for?" he asked.
+
+The jailer looked at the number over the door, and then at his
+report.
+
+"Piracy," he answered.
+
+"A strange offence for such a child," said the Potentate.
+
+"They often begin that sort of thing very early in life," said the
+jailer.
+
+"And this fine gentleman," said the Potentate, looking in at the
+Prince, "what did he do?"
+
+The jailer glanced at the number, and the report.
+
+"Robbed hen-roosts," he said.
+
+"He must have done a good deal of it to afford to dress so well,"
+said the Potentate, passing on, and looking into other cells. "It
+seems to me that many of your prisoners are very young."
+
+"It is best to take them young, my lord," said the jailer. "They are
+very hard to catch when they grow up."
+
+The Potentate then looked in at the Jolly-cum-pop, and asked what was
+his offence.
+
+"Conspiracy," was the answer.
+
+"And where are the other conspirators?"
+
+"There was only one," said the jailer.
+
+Number Seventeen was the oldest of the courtiers.
+
+"He appears to be an elderly man to have a grandmother," said the
+Potentate. "She must be very aged, and that makes it all the worse
+for him. I think he should be executed."
+
+"Oh, no, my lord," cried the jailor. "I am assured that his crime was
+quite unintentional."
+
+"Then he should be set free," said the Potentate.
+
+"I mean to say," said the jailer, "that it was just enough
+intentional to cause him to be imprisoned here for a long time, but
+not enough to deserve execution."
+
+"Very well," said the Potentate, turning to leave; "take good care of
+your prisoners, and send me a report every month."
+
+"That will I do, my lord," said the jailer, bowing very low.
+
+The Prince and his party had been very much surprised and incensed
+when they found that they could not get out of their rooms, and they
+had kicked and banged and shouted until they were tired, but the
+jailer had informed them that they were to be confined there for
+years; and when the Potentate arrived they had resigned themselves to
+despair. The Jolly-cum-pop, however, was affected in a different way.
+It seemed to him the most amusing joke in the world that a person
+should deliberately walk into a prison-cell and be locked up for
+several years; and he lay down on his little bed and laughed himself
+to sleep.
+
+That night one of the boys sat at his iron-barred window, wide awake.
+He was a Truant, and had never yet been in any place from which he
+could not run away. He felt that his school-fellows depended upon him
+to run away and bring them assistance, and he knew that his
+reputation as a Truant was at stake. His responsibility was so heavy
+that he could not sleep, and he sat at the window, trying to think of
+a way to get out. After some hours the moon arose, and by its light
+he saw upon the grass, not far from his window, a number of little
+creatures, which at first he took for birds or small squirrels; but
+on looking more attentively he perceived that they were pigwidgeons.
+They were standing around a flat stone, and seemed to be making
+calculations on it with a piece of chalk. At this sight, the heart of
+the Truant jumped for joy. "Pigwidgeons can do any thing," he said to
+himself, "and these certainly can get us out." He now tried in
+various ways to attract the attention of the pigwidgeons; but as he
+was afraid to call or whistle very loud, for fear of arousing the
+jailor, he did not succeed. Happily, he thought of a pea-shooter
+which he had in his pocket, and taking this out he blew a pea into
+the midst of the little group with such force that it knocked the
+chalk from the hand of the pigwidgeon who was using it. The little
+fellows looked up in astonishment, and perceived the Truant beckoning
+to them from his window. At first they stood angrily regarding him;
+but on his urging them in a loud whisper to come to his relief, they
+approached the prison and, clambering up a vine, soon reached his
+window-sill. The Truant now told his mournful tale, to which the
+pigwidgeons listened very attentively; and then, after a little
+consultation among themselves, one of them said: "We will get you out
+if you will tell us how to divide five-sevenths by six."
+
+The poor Truant was silent for an instant, and then he said: "That is
+not the kind of thing I am good at, but I expect some of the other
+fellows could tell you easily enough. Our windows must be all in a
+row, and you can climb up and ask some of them; and if any one tells
+you, will you get us all out?"
+
+"Yes," said the pigwidgeon who had spoken before. "We will do that,
+for we are very anxious to know how to divide five-sevenths by six.
+We have been working at it for four or five days, and there won't be
+any thing worth dividing if we wait much longer."
+
+The pigwidgeons now began to descend the vine; but one of them
+lingering a little, the Truant, who had a great deal of curiosity,
+asked him what it was they had to divide.
+
+"There were eight of us," the pigwidgeon answered, "who helped a
+farmer's wife, and she gave us a pound of butter. She did not count
+us properly, and divided the butter into seven parts. We did not
+notice this at first, and two of the party, who were obliged to go
+away to a distance, took their portions and departed, and now we can
+not divide among six the five-sevenths that remain."
+
+"That is a pretty hard thing," said the Truant, "but I am sure some
+of the boys can tell you how to do it."
+
+The pigwidgeons visited the next four cells, which were occupied by
+four boys, but not one of them could tell how to divide five-sevenths
+by six. The Prince was questioned, but he did not know; and neither
+did the course-marker, nor the map-maker. It was not until they came
+to the cell of the oldest girl that they received an answer. She was
+good at mental arithmetic; and, after a minute's thought, she said,
+"It would be five forty-seconds."
+
+"Good!" cried the pigwidgeons. "We will divide the butter into
+forty-two parts, and each take five. And now let us go to work and
+cut these bars."
+
+Three of the six pigwidgeons were workers in iron, and they had their
+little files and saws in pouches by their sides. They went to work
+manfully, and the others helped them, and before morning one bar was
+cut in each of the seventeen windows. The cells were all on the
+ground floor, and it was quite easy for the prisoners to clamber out.
+That is, it was easy for all but the Jolly-cum-pop. He had laughed so
+much in his life that he had grown quite fat, and he found it
+impossible to squeeze himself through the opening made by the removal
+of one iron bar. The sixteen other prisoners had all departed; the
+pigwidgeons had hurried away to divide their butter into forty-two
+parts, and the Jolly-cum-pop still remained in his cell, convulsed
+with laughter at the idea of being caught in such a curious
+predicament.
+
+"It is the most ridiculous thing in the world," he said. "I suppose I
+must stay here and cry until I get thin." And the idea so tickled
+him, that he laughed himself to sleep.
+
+The Prince and his party kept together, and hurried from the prison
+as fast as they could. When the day broke they had gone several
+miles, and then they stopped to rest. "Where is that Jolly-cum-pop?"
+said the Prince. "I suppose he has gone home. He is a pretty fellow
+to lead us into this trouble and then desert us! How are we to find
+the way back to his house? Course-marker, can you tell us the
+direction in which we should go?"
+
+"Not until to-night, your Highness," answered the course-marker,
+"when I can set my instrument by the stars."
+
+The Prince's party was now in a doleful plight. Every one was very
+hungry; they were in an open plain, no house was visible, and they
+knew not which way to go. They wandered about for some time, looking
+for a brook or a spring where they might quench their thirst; and
+then a rabbit sprang out from some bushes. The whole party
+immediately started off in pursuit of the rabbit. They chased it
+here, there, backward and forward, through hollows and over hills,
+until it ran quite away and disappeared. Then they were more tired,
+thirsty, and hungry than before; and, to add to their miseries, when
+night came on the sky was cloudy, and the course-marker could not set
+his instrument by the stars. It would be difficult to find sixteen
+more miserable people than the Prince and his companions when they
+awoke the next morning from their troubled sleep on the hard ground.
+Nearly starved, they gazed at one another with feelings of despair.
+
+"I feel," said the Prince, in a weak voice, "that there is nothing I
+would not do to obtain food. I would willingly become a slave if my
+master would give me a good breakfast."
+
+"So would I," ejaculated each of the others.
+
+About an hour after this, as they were all sitting disconsolately
+upon the ground, they saw, slowly approaching, a large cart drawn by
+a pair of oxen. On the front of the cart, which seemed to be heavily
+loaded, sat a man, with a red beard, reading a book. The boys, when
+they saw the cart, set up a feeble shout, and the man, lifting his
+eyes from his book, drove directly toward the group on the ground.
+Dismounting, he approached Prince Hassak, who immediately told him
+his troubles and implored relief. "We will do any thing," said the
+Prince, "to obtain food."
+
+Standing for a minute in a reflective mood, the man with the red
+beard addressed the Prince in a slow, meditative manner: "How would
+you like," he said, "to form a nucleus?"
+
+"Can we get any thing to eat by it?" eagerly asked the Prince.
+
+"Yes," replied the man, "you can."
+
+"We'll do it!" immediately cried the whole sixteen, without waiting
+for further information.
+
+"Which will you do first," said the man, "listen to my explanations,
+or eat?"
+
+"Eat!" cried the entire sixteen in chorus.
+
+The man now produced from his cart a quantity of bread, meat, wine,
+and other provisions, which he distributed generously, but
+judiciously, to the hungry Prince and his followers. Every one had
+enough, but no one too much. And soon, revived and strengthened, they
+felt like new beings.
+
+"Now," said the Prince, "we are ready to form a nucleus, as we
+promised. How is it done?"
+
+"I will explain the matter to you in a few words," said the man with
+the red beard. "For a long time I have been desirous to found a city.
+In order to do this one must begin by forming a nucleus. Every great
+city is started from a nucleus. A few persons settle down in some
+particular spot, and live there. Then they are a nucleus. Then other
+people come there, and gather around this nucleus, and then more
+people come and more, until in course of time there is a great city.
+I have loaded this cart with provisions, tools, and other things that
+are necessary for my purpose, and have set out to find some people
+who would be willing to form a nucleus. I am very glad to have found
+you and that you are willing to enter into my plan; and this seems a
+good spot for us to settle upon."
+
+"What is the first thing to be done?" said the Prince.
+
+"We must all go to work," said the man with the red beard, "to build
+dwellings, and also a school-house for these young people. Then we
+must till some ground in the suburbs, and lay the foundations, at
+least, of a few public buildings."
+
+"All this will take a good while, will it not?" said the Prince.
+
+"Yes," said the man, "it will take a good while; and the sooner we
+set about it, the better."
+
+Thereupon tools were distributed among the party, and Prince,
+courtiers, boys, girls, and all went to work to build houses and form
+the nucleus of a city.
+
+When the jailer looked into his cells in the morning, and found that
+all but one of his prisoners had escaped, he was utterly astounded,
+and his face, when the Jolly-cum-pop saw him, made that individual
+roar with laughter. The jailer, however, was a man accustomed to deal
+with emergencies. "You need not laugh," he said, "every thing shall
+go on as before, and I shall take no notice of the absence of your
+companions. You are now numbered One to Seventeen inclusive, and you
+stand charged with highway robbery, forgery, treason, smuggling,
+barn-burning, bribery, poaching, usury, piracy, witchcraft, assault
+and battery, using false weights and measures, burglary,
+counterfeiting, robbing hen-roosts, conspiracy, and poisoning your
+grandmother by proxy. I intended to-day to dress the convicts in
+prison garb, and you shall immediately be so clothed."
+
+"I shall require seventeen suits," said the Jolly-cum-pop.
+
+"Yes," said the jailer, "they shall be furnished."
+
+"And seventeen rations a day," said the Jolly-cum-pop.
+
+"Certainly," replied the jailer.
+
+"This is luxury," roared the Jolly-cum-pop. "I shall spend my whole
+time in eating and putting on clean clothes."
+
+Seventeen large prison suits were now brought to the Jolly-cum-pop.
+He put one on, and hung up the rest in his cell. These suits were
+half bright yellow and half bright green, with spots of bright red,
+as big as saucers.
+
+The jailer now had doors cut from one cell to another. "If the
+Potentate comes here and wants to look at the prisoners," he said to
+the Jolly-cum-pop, "you must appear in cell number One, so that he
+can look through the hole in the door, and see you; then, as he walks
+along the corridor, you must walk through the cells, and whenever he
+looks into a cell, you must be there."
+
+"He will think," merrily replied the Jolly-cum-pop, "that all your
+prisoners are very fat, and that the little girls have grown up into
+big men."
+
+"I will endeavor to explain that," said the jailer.
+
+For several days the Jolly-cum-pop was highly amused at the idea of
+his being seventeen criminals, and he would sit first in one cell and
+then in another, trying to look like a ferocious pirate, a
+hard-hearted usurer, or a mean-spirited chicken thief, and laughing
+heartily at his failures. But, after a time, he began to tire of
+this, and to have a strong desire to see what sort of a tunnel the
+Prince's miners and rock-splitters were making under his house. "I
+had hoped," he said to himself, "that I should pine away in
+confinement, and so be able to get through the window-bars; but with
+nothing to do, and seventeen rations a day, I see no chance of that.
+But I must get out of this jail, and, as there seems no other way, I
+will revolt." Thereupon he shouted to the jailer through the hole in
+the door of his cell: "We have revolted! We have risen in a body, and
+have determined to resist your authority, and break jail!"
+
+When the jailer heard this, he was greatly troubled. "Do not proceed
+to violence," he said; "let us parley."
+
+"Very well," replied the Jolly-cum-pop, "but you must open the cell
+door. We cannot parley through a hole."
+
+The jailer thereupon opened the cell door, and the Jolly-cum-pop,
+having wrapped sixteen suits of clothes around his left arm as a
+shield, and holding in his right hand the iron bar which had been cut
+from his window, stepped boldly into the corridor, and confronted the
+jailer and his myrmidons.
+
+"It will be useless for you to resist," he said. "You are but four,
+and we are seventeen. If you had been wise you would have made us all
+cheating shop-keepers, chicken thieves, or usurers. Then you might
+have been able to control us; but when you see before you a desperate
+highwayman, a daring smuggler, a blood-thirsty pirate, a wily
+poacher, a powerful ruffian, a reckless burglar, a bold conspirator,
+and a murderer by proxy, you well may tremble!"
+
+The jailer and his myrmidons looked at each other in dismay.
+
+"We sigh for no blood," continued the Jolly-cum-pop, "and will
+readily agree to terms. We will give you your choice: Will you allow
+us to honorably surrender, and peacefully disperse to our homes, or
+shall we rush upon you in a body, and, after overpowering you by
+numbers, set fire to the jail, and escape through the crackling
+timbers of the burning pile?"
+
+The jailer reflected for a minute. "It would be better, perhaps," he
+said, "that you should surrender and disperse to your homes."
+
+The Jolly-cum-pop agreed to these terms, and the great gate being
+opened, he marched out in good order. "Now," said he to himself, "the
+thing for me to do is to get home as fast as I can, or that jailer
+may change his mind." But, being in a great hurry, he turned the
+wrong way, and walked rapidly into a country unknown to him. His walk
+was a very merry one. "By this time," he said to himself, "the Prince
+and his followers have returned to my house, and are tired of
+watching the rock-splitters and miners. How amused they will be when
+they see me come back in this gay suit of green and yellow, with red
+spots, and with sixteen similar suits upon my arm! How my own dogs
+will bark at me! And how my own servants will not know me! It is the
+funniest thing I ever knew of!" And his gay laugh echoed far and
+wide. But when he had gone several miles without seeing any signs of
+his habitation, his gayety abated. "It would have been much better,"
+he said, as he sat down to rest under the shade of a tree, "if I had
+brought with me sixteen rations instead of these sixteen suits of
+clothes."
+
+The Jolly-cum-pop soon set out again, but he walked a long distance
+without seeing any person or any house. Toward the close of the
+afternoon he stopped, and, looking back, he saw coming toward him a
+large party of foot travellers. In a few moments, he perceived that
+the person in advance was the jailer. At this the Jolly-cum-pop could
+not restrain his merriment. "How comically it has all turned out!" he
+exclaimed. "Here I've taken all this trouble, and tired myself out,
+and have nearly starved myself, and the jailer comes now, with a
+crowd of people, and takes me back. I might as well have staid where
+I was. Ha! ha!"
+
+The jailer now left his party and came running toward the
+Jolly-cum-pop. "I pray you, sir," he said, bowing very low, "do not
+cast us off."
+
+"Who are you all?" asked the Jolly-cum-pop, looking with much
+surprise at the jailer's companions, who were now quite near.
+
+"We are myself, my three myrmidons, and our wives and children. Our
+situations were such good ones that we married long ago, and our
+families lived in the upper stories of the prison. But when all the
+convicts had left we were afraid to remain, for, should the Potentate
+again visit the prison, he would be disappointed and enraged at
+finding no prisoners, and would, probably, punish us grievously. So
+we determined to follow you, and to ask you to let us go with you,
+wherever you are going. I wrote a report, which I fastened to the
+great gate, and in it I stated that sixteen of the convicts escaped
+by the aid of outside confederates, and that seventeen of them
+mutinied in a body and broke jail."
+
+"That report," laughed the Jolly-cum-pop, "your Potentate will not
+readily understand."
+
+"If I were there," said the jailer, "I could explain it to him; but,
+as it is, he must work it out for himself."
+
+"Have you any thing to eat with you?" asked the Jolly-cum-pop.
+
+"Oh, yes," said the jailer, "we brought provisions."
+
+"Well, then, I gladly take you under my protection. Let us have
+supper. I have had nothing to eat since morning, and the weight of
+sixteen extra suits of clothes does not help to refresh one."
+
+The Jolly-cum-pop and his companions slept that night under some
+trees, and started off early the next morning. "If I could only get
+myself turned in the proper direction," said he, "I believe we should
+soon reach my house."
+
+The Prince, his courtiers, the boys and girls, the course-marker, and
+the map-maker worked industriously for several days at the foundation
+of their city. They dug the ground, they carried stones, they cut
+down trees. This work was very hard for all of them, for they were
+not used to it. After a few days' labor, the Prince said to the man
+with the red beard, who was reading his book: "I think we have now
+formed a nucleus. Any one can see that this is intended to be a
+city."
+
+"No," said the man with the red beard, "nothing is truly a nucleus
+until something is gathered around it. Proceed with your work, while
+I continue my studies upon civil government."
+
+Toward the close of that day the red-bearded man raised his eyes from
+his book and beheld the Jolly-cum-pop and his party approaching.
+"Hurrah!" he cried, "we are already attracting settlers!" And he went
+forth to meet them.
+
+When the prince and the courtiers saw the Jolly-cum-pop in his bright
+and variegated dress, they did not know him; but the boys and girls
+soon recognized his jovial face, and, tired as they were, they set up
+a hearty laugh, in which they were loudly joined by their merry
+friend. While the Jolly-cum-pop was listening to the adventures of
+the Prince and his companions, and telling what had happened to
+himself, the man with the red beard was talking to the jailer and his
+party, and urging them to gather around the nucleus which had been
+here formed, and help to build a city.
+
+"Nothing will suit us better," exclaimed the jailer, "and the sooner
+we build a town wall so as to keep off the Potentate, if he should
+come this way, the better shall we be satisfied."
+
+The next morning, the Prince said to the red-bearded man: "Others
+have gathered around us. We have formed a nucleus, and thus have done
+all that we promised to do. We shall now depart."
+
+The man objected strongly to this, but the Prince paid no attention
+to his words. "What troubles me most," he said to the Jolly-cum-pop,
+"is the disgraceful condition of our clothes. They have been so torn
+and soiled during our unaccustomed work that they are not fit to be
+seen."
+
+"As for that," said the Jolly-cum-pop, "I have sixteen suits with me,
+in which you can all dress, if you like. They are of unusual
+patterns, but they are new and clean."
+
+"It is better," said the Prince, "for persons in my station to appear
+inordinately gay than to be seen in rags and dirt. We will accept
+your clothes."
+
+Thereupon, the Prince and each of the others put on a prison dress of
+bright green and yellow, with large red spots. There were some
+garments left over, for each boy wore only a pair of trousers with
+the waistband tied around his neck, and holes cut for his arms; while
+the large jackets, with the sleeves tucked, made very good dresses
+for the girls. The Prince and his party, accompanied by the
+Jolly-cum-pop, now left the red-bearded man and his new settlers to
+continue the building of the city, and set off on their journey. The
+course-marker had not been informed the night before that they were
+to go away that morning, and consequently did not set his instrument
+by the stars.
+
+"As we do not know in which way we should go," said the Prince, "one
+way will be as good as another, and if we can find a road let us take
+it; it will be easier walking."
+
+In an hour or two they found a road and they took it. After
+journeying the greater part of the day, they reached the top of a low
+hill, over which the road ran, and saw before them a glittering sea
+and the spires and houses of a city.
+
+"It is the city of Yan," said the course-marker.
+
+"That is true," said the Prince; "and as we are so near, we may as
+well go there."
+
+The astonishment of the people of Yan, when this party, dressed in
+bright green and yellow, with red spots, passed through their
+streets, was so great that the Jolly-cum-pop roared with laughter.
+This set the boys and girls and all the people laughing, and the
+sounds of merriment became so uproarious that when they reached the
+palace the King came out to see what was the matter. What he thought
+when he saw his nephew in his fantastic guise, accompanied by a party
+apparently composed of sixteen other lunatics, cannot now be known;
+but, after hearing the Prince's story, he took him into an inner
+apartment, and thus addressed him: "My dear Hassak: The next time you
+pay me a visit, I beg for your sake and my own, that you will come in
+the ordinary way. You have sufficiently shown to the world that, when
+a Prince desires to travel, it is often necessary for him to go out
+of his way on account of obstacles."
+
+"My dear uncle," replied Hassak, "your words shall not be forgotten."
+
+After a pleasant visit of a few weeks, the Prince and his party (in
+new clothes) returned (by sea) to Itoby, whence the Jolly-cum-pop
+soon repaired to his home. There he found the miners and
+rock-splitters still at work at the tunnel, which had now penetrated
+half-way through the hill on which stood his house. "You may go
+home," he said, "for the Prince has changed his plans. I will put a
+door to this tunnel, and it will make an excellent cellar in which to
+keep my wine and provisions."
+
+The day after the Prince's return his map-maker said to him: "Your
+Highness, according to your commands I made, each day, a map of your
+progress to the city of Yan. Here it is."
+
+The Prince glanced at it and then he cast his eyes upon the floor.
+"Leave me," he said. "I would be alone."
+
+[Illustration: THE MAP OF THE PRINCE'S JOURNEY FROM ITOBY TO YAN.]
+
+
+
+
+
+ THE BATTLE OF THE THIRD COUSINS.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+There were never many persons who could correctly bound the Autocracy
+of Mutjado. The reason for this was that the boundary line was not
+stationary. Whenever the Autocrat felt the need of money, he sent his
+tax-gatherers far and wide, and people who up to that time had no
+idea of such a thing found that they lived in the territory of
+Mutjado. But when times were ordinarily prosperous with him, and
+people in the outlying districts needed protection or public works,
+the dominion of the Autocrat became very much contracted.
+
+In the course of time, the Autocrat of Mutjado fell into bad health
+and sent for his doctor. That learned man prescribed some medicine
+for him; and as this did him no good, he ordered another kind. He
+continued this method of treatment until the Autocrat had swallowed
+the contents of fifteen phials and flasks, some large and some small.
+As none of these were of the slightest benefit, the learned doctor
+produced another kind of medicine which he highly extolled.
+
+"Take a dose of this twice a day," said he, "and you will soon
+find--"
+
+"A new medicine?" interrupted the Autocrat, in disgust. "I will have
+none of it! These others were bad enough, and rather than start with
+a new physic, I prefer to die. Take away your bottles, little and
+big, and send me my secretary."
+
+When that officer arrived, the Autocrat informed him that he had
+determined to write his will, and that he should set about it at
+once.
+
+The Autocrat of Mutjado had no son, and his nearest male relatives
+were a third cousin on his father's side, and another third cousin on
+his mother's side. Of course these persons were in nowise related to
+each other; and as they lived in distant countries, he had never seen
+either of them. He had made up his mind to leave his throne and
+dominions to one of these persons, but he could not determine which
+of them should be his heir.
+
+"One has as good a right as the other," he said to himself, "and I
+can't bother my brains settling the matter for them. Let them fight
+it out, and whoever conquers shall be Autocrat of Mutjado."
+
+Having arranged the affair in this manner in his will, he signed it,
+and soon after died.
+
+The Autocrat's third cousin on his father's side was a young man of
+about twenty-five, named Alberdin. He was a good horseman, and
+trained in the arts of warfare, and when he was informed of the terms
+of his distinguished relative's will, he declared himself perfectly
+willing to undertake the combat for the throne. He set out for
+Mutjado, where he arrived in a reasonable time.
+
+The third cousin on the mother's side was a very different person. He
+was a boy of about twelve years of age; and as his father and mother
+had died when he was very young, he had been for nearly all his life
+under the charge of an elderly and prudent man, who acted as his
+guardian and tutor. These two, also, soon arrived in Mutjado,--the
+boy, Phedo, being mounted on a little donkey, which was his almost
+constant companion. As soon as they reached the territory of the late
+Autocrat, old Salim, the tutor, left the boy at an inn, and went
+forward by himself to take a look at the other third cousin. When he
+saw Alberdin mounted on his fine horse, and looking so strong and
+valiant, his heart was much disturbed.
+
+"I had hoped," he said to himself, "that the other one was a small
+boy, but such does not appear to be the case. There is but one way to
+have a fair fight between these two. They must not now be allowed to
+see each other. If they can be kept apart until my boy grows up, he
+will then be able, with the military education which I intend he
+shall have, to engage in combat with any man. They must not meet for
+at least thirteen years. Phedo will then be twenty-five, and able to
+do worthy combat. To be sure, I am somewhat old myself to undertake
+to superintend so long a delay, but I must do my best to keep well
+and strong, and to attain the greatest possible longevity."
+
+Salim had always been in the habit of giving thirty-two chews to
+every mouthful of meat, and a proportionate number of chews to other
+articles of food; and had, so far, been very healthy. But he now
+determined to increase the number of chews to thirty-six, for it
+would be highly necessary for him to live until it was time for the
+battle between the third cousins to take place.
+
+Having made up his mind on these points, the old tutor introduced
+himself to Alberdin, and told him that he had come to arrange the
+terms of combat.
+
+"In the first place," said Alberdin, "I should like to know what sort
+of a person my opponent is."
+
+"He is not a cavalryman like you," answered Salim; "he belongs to the
+heavy infantry."
+
+At this, Alberdin looked grave. He knew very well that a stout and
+resolute man on foot had often the advantage of one who is mounted.
+He would have preferred meeting a horseman, and fighting on equal
+terms.
+
+"Has he had much experience in war?" asked the young man.
+
+"It is not long," answered the tutor, "since he was almost constantly
+in arms, winter and summer."
+
+"He must be a practised warrior," thought Alberdin. "I must put
+myself in good fighting-trim before I meet him."
+
+After some further conversation on the subject, the old man advised
+Alberdin to go into camp on a beautiful plain not far from the base
+of a low line of mountains.
+
+"Your opponent," said he, "will intrench himself in the valley on the
+other side. With the mountains between you, neither of you need fear
+a surprise; and when both are ready, a place of meeting can be
+appointed.
+
+"Now, then," said Salim to himself when this had been settled; "if I
+can keep them apart for thirteen years, all may be well."
+
+As soon as possible, Alberdin pitched a tent upon the appointed spot,
+and began to take daily warlike exercise in the plain, endeavoring in
+every way to put himself and his horse into proper condition for the
+combat.
+
+On the other side of the mountain, old Salim intrenched himself and
+the boy, Phedo. He carefully studied several books on military
+engineering, and caused a fortified camp to be constructed on the
+most approved principles. It was surrounded by high ramparts, and
+outside of these was a moat filled with water. In the centre of the
+camp was a neat little house which was well provided with books,
+provisions, and every thing necessary for a prolonged stay. When the
+drawbridge was up, it would be impossible for Alberdin to get inside
+of the camp; and, moreover, the ramparts were so high that he could
+not look over them to see what sort of antagonist he was to have. Old
+Salim did not tell the boy why he brought him here to live. It would
+be better to wait until he was older before informing him of the
+battle which had been decreed. He told Phedo that it was necessary
+for him to have a military education, which could very well be
+obtained in a place like this; and he was also very careful to let
+him know that there was a terrible soldier in that part of the
+country who might at any time, if it were not for the intrenchments,
+pounce down upon him, and cut him to pieces. Every fine day, Phedo
+was allowed to take a ride on his donkey outside of the
+fortifications, but during this time, the old tutor kept a strict
+watch on the mountain; and if a horseman had made his appearance,
+little Phedo would have been whisked inside, and the drawbridge would
+have been up in a twinkling.
+
+After about two weeks of this life Phedo found it dreadfully stupid
+to see no one but his old tutor, and never to go outside of these
+great ramparts except for donkey-rides, which were generally very
+short. He therefore determined, late one moonlight night, to go out
+and take a ramble by himself. He was not afraid of the dreadful
+soldier of whom the old man had told him, because at that time of
+night this personage would, of course, be in bed and asleep.
+Considering these things, he quietly dressed himself, took down a
+great key from over his sleeping tutor's head, opened the heavy gate,
+let down the drawbridge, mounted upon his donkey, and rode forth upon
+the moonlit plain.
+
+That night-ride was a very delightful one, and for a long time the
+boy and the donkey rambled and ran; first going this way and then
+that, they gradually climbed the mountain; and, reaching the brow,
+they trotted about for a while, and then went down the other side.
+The boy had been so twisted and turned in his course that he did not
+notice that he was not descending toward his camp, and the donkey,
+whose instinct told it that it was not going the right way, was also
+told by its instinct that it did not wish to go the right way, and
+that the intrenchments offered it no temptations to return. When the
+morning dawned, Phedo perceived that he was really lost, and he began
+to be afraid that he might meet the terrible soldier. But, after a
+time, he saw riding toward him a very pleasant-looking young man on a
+handsome horse, and he immediately took courage.
+
+"Now," said he to himself, "I am no longer in danger. If that
+horrible cut-throat should appear, this good gentleman will protect
+me."
+
+Alberdin had not seen any one for a long time, and he was very glad
+to meet with so nice a little boy. When Phedo told him that he was
+lost, he invited him to come to his tent, near by, and have
+breakfast. While they were eating their meal, Alberdin asked the boy
+if in the course of his rambles he had met with a heavy infantry
+soldier, probably armed to the teeth, and very large and strong.
+
+"Oh, I've heard of that dreadful man!" cried Phedo, "and I am very
+glad that I did not meet him. If he comes, I hope you'll protect me
+from him."
+
+"I will do that," said Alberdin; "but I am afraid I shall not be able
+to help you find your way home, for in doing so I should throw myself
+off my guard, and might be set upon unexpectedly by this fellow, with
+whom I have a regular engagement to fight. There is to be a time
+fixed for the combat, for which I feel myself nearly ready, but I
+have no doubt that my enemy will be very glad to take me at a
+disadvantage if I give him a chance."
+
+Phedo looked about him with an air of content. The tent was large and
+well furnished; there seemed to be plenty of good things to eat; the
+handsome horseman was certainly a very good-humored and agreeable
+gentleman; and, moreover, the tent was not shut in by high and gloomy
+ramparts.
+
+"I do not think you need trouble yourself," said he to his host, "to
+help me to find my way home. I live with my tutor, and I am sure that
+when he knows I am gone he will begin to search for me, and after
+awhile he will find me. Until then, I can be very comfortable here."
+
+For several days the two third cousins of the Autocrat lived together
+in the tent, and enjoyed each other's society very much. Then
+Alberdin began to grow a little impatient.
+
+"If I am to fight this heavy infantry man," he said; "I should like
+to do it at once. I am now quite ready, and I think he ought to be. I
+expected to hear from him before this time, and I shall start out and
+see if I can get any news of his intentions. I don't care about going
+over the mountain without giving him notice, but the capital city of
+Mutjado is only a day's ride to the west, and there I can cause
+inquiries to be made when he would like to meet me, and where."
+
+"I will go with you," said Phedo, greatly delighted at the idea of
+visiting the city.
+
+"Yes, I will take you," said Alberdin. "Your tutor don't seem
+inclined to come for you, and, of course, I can't leave you here."
+
+The next day, Alberdin on his horse, and Phedo on his donkey, set out
+for the city, where they arrived late in the afternoon. After finding
+a comfortable lodging, Alberdin sent messengers to the other side of
+the mountain, where his opponent was supposed to be encamped, and
+gave them power to arrange with him for a meeting. He particularly
+urged them to try to see the old man who had come to him at first,
+and who had seemed to be a very fair-minded and sensible person. In
+two days, however, the messengers returned, stating that they had
+found what they supposed to be the intrenched camp of the heavy
+infantry man they had been sent in search of, but that it was
+entirely deserted, and nobody could be seen anywhere near it.
+
+"It is very likely," said Alberdin, "that he has watched my
+manoeuvres and exercises from the top of the mountain, and has
+concluded to run away. I shall give him a reasonable time to show
+himself, and then, if he does not come forward, I will consider him
+beaten, and claim the Autocracy."
+
+"That is a good idea," said Phedo, "but I think, if you can, you
+ought to find him and kill him, or drive him out of the country.
+That's what I should do, if I were you."
+
+"Of course I shall do that, if I can," said Alberdin; "but I could
+not be expected to wait for him forever."
+
+When his intention had been proclaimed, Alberdin was informed of
+something which he did not know before, and that was that the late
+Autocrat had left an only daughter, a Princess about twenty years
+old. But although she was his daughter, she could not inherit his
+crown, for the laws of the country forbade that any woman should
+become Autocrat. A happy idea now struck Alberdin.
+
+"I will marry the Princess," he said, "and then every one will think
+that it is the most suitable thing for me to become Autocrat."
+
+So Alberdin sent to the Princess to ask permission to speak with her,
+and was granted an audience. With much courtesy and politeness he
+made known his plans to the lady, and hoped that she would consider
+it advisable to marry him.
+
+"I am sorry to interfere with any of your arrangements," said the
+Princess, "but as soon as I heard the terms of my father's will, I
+made up my mind to marry the victor in the contest. As I cannot
+inherit the throne myself, the next best thing is to be the wife of
+the man who does. Go forth, then, and find your antagonist, and when
+you have conquered him, I will marry you."
+
+"And if he conquers me, you will marry him?" said Alberdin.
+
+"Yes, sir," answered the Princess, with a smile, and dismissed him.
+
+It was plain enough that there was nothing for Alberdin to do but to
+go and look for the heavy infantry man. Phedo was very anxious to
+accompany him, and the two, mounted as before, set out from the city
+on their quest.
+
+When old Salim, the tutor of Phedo, awoke in the morning and found
+the boy gone, he immediately imagined that the youngster had ran away
+to his old home; so he set forth with all possible speed, hoping to
+overtake him. But when he reached the distant town where Phedo had
+lived, he found that the boy had not been there; and after taking
+some needful rest, he retraced his steps, crossed the mountains, and
+made his way toward the capital city, hoping to find news of him
+there. It was necessary for him to be very careful in his inquiries,
+for he wished no one to find out that the little boy he was looking
+for was the third cousin of the late Autocrat on the mother's side.
+He therefore disguised himself as a migratory medical man, and
+determined to use all possible caution. When he reached the camp of
+the young horseman, Alberdin, and found that personage gone, his
+suspicions became excited.
+
+"If these two have run off together," he said to himself, "my task is
+indeed difficult. If the man discovers it is the boy he has to fight,
+my poor Phedo will be cut to pieces in a twinkling. I do not believe
+there has been any trouble yet, for the boy does not know that he is
+to be one of the combatants, and the man would not be likely to
+suspect it. Come what may, the fight must not take place for thirteen
+years. And in order that I may still better preserve my health and
+strength to avert the calamity during that period, I will increase my
+number of chews to forty-two to each mouthful of meat."
+
+When old Salim reached the city, he soon found that Alberdin and the
+boy had been there, and that they had gone away together.
+
+"Nothing has happened so far," said the old man, with a sigh of
+relief; "and things may turn out all right yet. I'll follow them, but
+I must first find out what that cavalryman had to say to the
+Princess." For he had been told of the interview at the palace.
+
+It was not long before the migratory medical man was brought to the
+Princess. There was nothing the matter with her, but she liked to
+meet with persons of skill and learning to hear what they had to say.
+
+"Have you any specialty?" she asked of the old man.
+
+"Yes," said he, "I am a germ-doctor."
+
+"What is that?" asked the Princess.
+
+"All diseases," replied the old man, "come from germs; generally very
+little ones. My business is to discover these, and find out all about
+them."
+
+"Then I suppose," said the Princess, "you know how to cure the
+diseases?"
+
+"You must not expect too much," answered the old man. "It ought to be
+a great satisfaction to us to know what sort of germ is at the bottom
+of our woes."
+
+"I am very well, myself," said the Princess, "and, so far as I know,
+none of my household are troubled by germs. But there is something
+the matter with my mind which I wish you could relieve." She then
+told the old man how she had determined to marry the victor in the
+contest for her father's throne, and how she had seen one for the
+claimants whom she considered to be a very agreeable and deserving
+young man; while the other, she had heard, was a great, strong foot
+soldier, who was probably very disagreeable, and even horrid. If this
+one should prove the conqueror, she did not know what she should do.
+"You see, I am in a great deal of trouble," said she. "Can you do any
+thing to help me?"
+
+The pretending migratory medical man looked at her attentively for a
+few moments, and then he said:
+
+"The reason why you intend to marry the victor in the coming contest,
+is that you wish to remain here in your father's palace, and to
+continue to enjoy the comforts and advantages to which you have been
+accustomed."
+
+"Yes," said the Princess; "that is it."
+
+"Well, having discovered the germ of your disorder," said the old
+man, "the great point is gained. I will see what I can do."
+
+And with a respectful bow he left her presence.
+
+"Well," said old Salim to himself, as he went away, "she can never
+marry my boy, for that is certainly out of the question; but now that
+I have found out her motive, I think I can arrange matters
+satisfactorily, so far as she is concerned. But to settle the affair
+between that young man and Phedo is immensely more difficult. The
+first thing is to find them."
+
+Having learned the way they had gone, the old tutor travelled
+diligently, and in two days came up with Alberdin and Phedo. When he
+first caught sight of them, he was very much surprised to see that
+they were resting upon the ground quite a long distance apart, with a
+little stream between them. Noticing that Alberdin's back was toward
+him, he threw off his disguise and hastened to Phedo. The boy
+received him with the greatest delight, and, after many embraces,
+they sat down to talk. Phedo told the old man all that had happened,
+and finished by relating that, as they had that day stopped by this
+stream to rest, Alberdin had taken it into his head to inquire into
+the parentage of his young companion; and after many questions about
+his family, it had been made clear to both of them that they were the
+two third cousins who were to fight for the Autocracy of Mutjado.
+
+"He is very angry," said the boy, "at the tricks that have been
+played upon him, and went off and left me. Is it true that I am to
+fight him? I don't want to do it, for I like him very much."
+
+"It will be a long time before you are old enough to fight," said
+Salim; "so we need not consider that. You stay here, and I'll go over
+and talk to him."
+
+Salim then crossed the stream, and approached Alberdin. When the
+young man saw him, and recognized him as the person who had arranged
+the two encampments, he turned upon him with fury.
+
+"Wretched old man, who came to me as the emissary of my antagonist,
+you are but the tutor of that boy! If I had known the truth at first,
+I would have met him instantly; would have conquered him without
+hurting a hair on his head; and carrying him bound to the capital
+city, would have claimed the Autocracy, and would now have been
+sitting upon the throne. Instead of that, look at the delay and
+annoyance to which I have been subjected. I have also taken such a
+fancy to the boy that rather than hurt him or injure his prospects, I
+would willingly resign my pretensions to the throne, and go back
+contentedly to my own city. But this cannot now be done. I have
+fallen in love with the daughter of the late Autocrat, and she will
+marry none but the victorious claimant. Behold to what a condition
+you have brought me!"
+
+The old man regarded him with attention.
+
+"I wish very much," said he, "to defer the settlement of this matter
+for thirteen years. Are you willing to wait so long?"
+
+"No, I am not," said Alberdin.
+
+"Very well, then," said the old man, "each third cousin must retire
+to his camp, and as soon as matters can be arranged the battle must
+take place."
+
+"There is nothing else to be done," said Alberdin in a troubled
+voice; "but I shall take care that the boy receives no injury if it
+can possibly be avoided."
+
+The three now retraced their steps, and in a few days were settled
+down, Alberdin in his tent in the plain, and Salim and Phedo in their
+intrenchments on the other side of the low mountain. The old man now
+gave himself up to deep thought. He had discovered the germ of
+Alberdin's trouble; and in a few days he had arranged his plans, and
+went over to see the young man.
+
+"It has been determined," said he, "that a syndicate is to be formed
+to attend to this business for Phedo."
+
+"A syndicate!" cried Alberdin. "What is that?"
+
+"A syndic," answered Salim, "is a person who attends to business for
+others; and a syndicate is a body of men who are able to conduct
+certain affairs better than any individual can do it. In a week from
+to-day, Phedo's syndicate will meet you in the large plain outside of
+the capital city. There the contest will take place. Shall you be
+ready?"
+
+"I don't exactly understand it," said Alberdin, "but I shall be
+there."
+
+General notice was given of the coming battle of the contestants for
+the throne, and thousands of the inhabitants of the Autocracy
+assembled on the plain on the appointed day. The Princess with her
+ladies was there; and as everybody was interested, everybody was
+anxious to see what would happen.
+
+Alberdin rode into the open space in the centre of the plain, and
+demanded that his antagonist should appear. Thereupon old Salim came
+forward, leading Phedo by the hand.
+
+"This is the opposing heir," he said; "but as every one can see that
+he is too young to fight a battle, a syndicate has been appointed to
+attend to the matter for him; and there is nothing in the will of the
+late Autocrat which forbids this arrangement. The syndicate will now
+appear."
+
+At this command there came into the arena a horseman heavily armed, a
+tall foot soldier completely equipped for action, an artilleryman
+with a small cannon on wheels, a sailor with a boarding-pike and a
+drawn cutlass, and a soldier with a revolving gun which discharged
+one hundred and twenty balls a minute.
+
+"All being ready," exclaimed Salim, "the combat for the Autocracy
+will begin!"
+
+Alberdin took a good long look at the syndicate ranged before him.
+Then he dismounted from his horse, drew his sword, and stuck it,
+point downward, into the sand.
+
+"I surrender!" he said.
+
+"So do I!" cried the Princess, running toward him, and throwing
+herself into his arms.
+
+The eyes of Alberdin sparkled with joy.
+
+"Let the Autocracy go!" he cried. "Now that I have my Princess, the
+throne and the crown are nothing to me."
+
+"So long as I have you," returned the Princess, "I am content to
+resign all the comforts and advantages to which I have been
+accustomed."
+
+Phedo, who had been earnestly talking with his tutor, now looked up.
+
+"You shall not resign any thing!" he cried. "We are all of the same
+blood, and we will join together and form a royal family, and we will
+all live at the palace. Alberdin and my tutor shall manage the
+government for me until I am grown up; and if I have to go to school
+for a few years, I suppose I must. And that is all there is about
+it!"
+
+The syndicate was now ordered to retire and disband; the heralds
+proclaimed Phedo the conquering heir, and the people cheered and
+shouted with delight. All the virtues of the late Autocrat had come
+to him from his mother, and the citizens of Mutjado much preferred to
+have a new ruler from the mother's family.
+
+"I hope you bear no grudge against me," said Salim to Alberdin; "but
+if you had been willing to wait for thirteen years, you and Phedo
+might have fought on equal terms. As it is now, it would have been as
+hard for him to conquer you, as for you to conquer the syndicate. The
+odds would have been quite as great."
+
+"Don't mention it," said Alberdin. "I prefer things as they are. I
+should have hated to drive the boy away, and deprive him of a
+position which the people wish him to have. Now we are all
+satisfied."
+
+Phedo soon began to show signs that he would probably make a very
+good Autocrat. He declared that if he was to be assisted by ministers
+and cabinet officers when he came to the throne, he would like them
+to be persons who had been educated for their positions, just as he
+was to be educated for his own. Consequently he chose for the head of
+his cabinet a bright and sensible boy, and had him educated as a
+Minister of State. For Minister of Finance, he chose another boy with
+a very honest countenance, and for the other members of his cabinet,
+suitable youths were selected. He also said, that he thought there
+ought to be another officer, one who would be a sort of Minister of
+General Comfort, who would keep an eye on the health and happiness of
+the subjects, and would also see that every thing went all right in
+the palace, not only in regard to meals, but lots of other things.
+For this office he chose a bright young girl, and had her educated
+for the position of Queen.
+
+
+
+
+
+ THE BANISHED KING.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+There was once a kingdom in which every thing seemed to go wrong.
+Everybody knew this, and everybody talked about it, especially the
+King. The bad state of affairs troubled him more than it did any one
+else, but he could think of no way to make them better.
+
+"I cannot bear to see things going on so badly," he said to the Queen
+and his chief councillors. "I wish I knew how other kingdoms were
+governed."
+
+One of his councillors offered to go to some other countries, and see
+how they were governed, and come back and tell him all about it, but
+this did not suit his majesty.
+
+"You would simply return," he said, "and give me your ideas about
+things. I want my own ideas."
+
+The Queen then suggested that he should take a vacation, and visit
+other kingdoms, and see for himself how things were managed in them.
+
+This did not suit the king. "A vacation would not answer," he said.
+"I should not be gone a week before something would happen here which
+would make it necessary for me to come back."
+
+The Queen then suggested that he be banished for a certain time, say
+a year. In that case he could not come back, and would be at full
+liberty to visit foreign kingdoms, and find out how they were
+governed.
+
+This plan pleased the King. "If it were made impossible for me to
+come back," he said, "of course I could not do it. The scheme is a
+good one. Let me be banished." And he gave orders that his council
+should pass a law banishing him for one year.
+
+Preparations were immediately begun to carry out this plan, and in
+day or two the King bade farewell to the Queen, and left his kingdom,
+a banished man. He went away on foot, entirely unattended. But, as he
+did not wish to cut off all communication between himself and his
+kingdom, he made an arrangement which he thought a very good one. At
+easy shouting distance behind him walked one of the officers of the
+court, and at shouting distance behind him walked another, and so on
+at distances of about a hundred yards from each other. In this way
+there would always be a line of men extending from the King to his
+palace. Whenever the King had walked a hundred yards the line moved
+on after him, and another officer was put in the gap between the last
+man and the palace door. Thus, as the King walked on, his line of
+followers lengthened, and was never broken. Whenever he had any
+message to send to the Queen, or any other person in the palace, he
+shouted it to the officer next him, who shouted it to the one next to
+him, and it was so passed on until it reached the palace. If he
+needed food, clothes, or any other necessary thing, the order for it
+was shouted along the line, and the article was passed to him from
+man to man, each one carrying it forward to his neighbor, and then
+retiring to his proper place.
+
+In this way the King walked on day by day until he had passed
+entirely out of his own kingdom. At night he stopped at some
+convenient house on the road, and if any of his followers did not
+find himself near a house or cottage when the King shouted back the
+order to halt, he laid himself down to sleep wherever he might be. By
+this time the increasing line of followers had used up all the
+officers of the court, and it became necessary to draw upon some of
+the under government officers in order to keep the line perfect.
+
+The King had not gone very far outside the limits of his dominions
+when he met a Sphinx. He had often heard of these creatures, although
+he had never seen one before. But when he saw the winged body of a
+lion with a woman's head, he knew instantly what it was. He knew,
+also, that the chief business of a Sphinx was that of asking people
+questions, and then getting them into trouble if the right answers
+were not given. He therefore determined that he would not be caught
+by any such tricks as these, and that he would be on his guard if the
+Sphinx spoke to him. The creature was lying down when the King first
+saw it, but when he approached nearer it rose to its feet. There was
+nothing savage about its look, and the King was not at all afraid.
+
+"Where are you going?" said the Sphinx to him, in a pleasant voice.
+
+"Give it up," replied the King.
+
+"What do you mean by that?" said the other, with an air of surprise.
+
+"I give that up, too," said the King.
+
+The Sphinx then looked at him quite astonished.
+
+"I don't mind telling you," said the King, "of my own free will, and
+not in answer to any questions, that I do not know where I am going.
+I am a King, as you may have noticed, and I have been banished from
+my kingdom for a year. I am now going to look into the government of
+other countries in order that I may find out what it is that is wrong
+in my own kingdom. Every thing goes badly, and there is something
+very faulty at the bottom of it all. What this is I want to
+discover."
+
+"I am much interested in puzzles and matters of that kind," said the
+Sphinx, "and if you like I will go with you and help to find out what
+is wrong in your kingdom."
+
+"All right," said the King. "I shall be glad of your company."
+
+"What is the meaning of this long line of people following you at
+regular distances?" asked the Sphinx.
+
+"Give it up," said the King.
+
+The Sphinx laughed.
+
+"I don't mind telling you," said the King, "of my own free will, and
+not in answer to any question, that these men form a line of
+communication between me and my kingdom, where matters, I fear, must
+be going on worse than ever, in my absence."
+
+The two now travelled on together until they came to a high hill,
+from which they could see, not very far away, a large city.
+
+"That city," said the Sphinx, "is the capital of an extensive
+country. It is governed by a king of mingled sentiments. Suppose we
+go there. I think you will find a government that is rather
+peculiar."
+
+The King consented, and they walked down the hill toward the city.
+
+"How did the King get his sentiments mingled?" asked the King.
+
+"I really don't know how it began," said the Sphinx, "but the King,
+when a young man, had so many sentiments of different kinds, and he
+mingled them up so much, that no one could ever tell exactly what he
+thought on any particular subject. Of course, his people gradually
+got into the same frame of mind, and you never can know in this
+kingdom exactly what people think or what they are going to do. You
+will find all sorts of people here: giants, dwarfs, fairies, gnomes,
+and personages of that kind, who have been drawn here by the mingled
+sentiments of the people. I, myself, came into these parts because
+the people every now and then take a great fancy to puzzles and
+riddles."
+
+On entering the city, the King was cordially welcomed by his brother
+sovereign, to whom he told his story; and he was lodged in a room in
+the palace. Such of his followers as came within the limits of the
+city were entertained by the persons near to whose houses they found
+themselves when the line halted.
+
+Every day the Sphinx went with him to see the sights of this strange
+city. They took long walks through the streets, and sometimes into
+the surrounding country--always going one way and returning another,
+the Sphinx being very careful never to bring the King back by the
+same road or street by which they went. In this way the King's line
+of followers, which, of course, lengthened out every time he took a
+walk, came to be arranged in long loops through many parts of the
+city and suburbs.
+
+Many of the things the King saw showed plainly the mingled sentiments
+of the people. For instance, he would one day visit a great smith's
+shop, where heavy masses of iron were being forged, the whole place
+resounding with tremendous blows from heavy hammers, and the clank
+and din of iron on the anvils; while the next day he would find the
+place transformed into a studio, where the former blacksmith was
+painting dainty little pictures on the delicate surface of
+egg-shells. The king of the country, in his treatment of his visitor,
+showed his peculiar nature very plainly. Sometimes he would receive
+him with enthusiastic delight, while at others he would upbraid him
+with having left his dominions to go wandering around the earth in
+this senseless way. One day his host invited him to attend a royal
+dinner, but, when he went to the grand dining-hall, pleased with
+anticipations of a splendid feast, he found that the sentiments of
+his majesty had become mingled, and that he had determined, instead
+of having a dinner, to conduct the funeral services of one of his
+servants who had died the day before. All the guests were obliged by
+politeness to remain during the ceremonies, which our King, not
+having been acquainted with the deceased servant, had not found at
+all interesting.
+
+"Now," said the King to the Sphinx, "I am in favor of moving on. I am
+tired of this place, where every sentiment is so mingled with others
+that you can never tell what anybody really thinks or feels. I don't
+believe any one in this country was ever truly glad or sorry. They
+mix one sentiment so quickly with another that they never can
+discover the actual ingredients of any of their impulses."
+
+"When this King first began to mingle his sentiments," said the
+Sphinx, "it was because he always desired to think and feel exactly
+right. He did not wish his feelings to run too much one way or the
+other."
+
+"And so he is never either right or wrong," said the King. "I don't
+like that, at all. I want to be one thing or the other."
+
+"I have wasted a good deal of time at this place," remarked the King,
+as they walked on, "and I have seen and heard nothing which I wish to
+teach my people. But I must find out some way to prevent every thing
+going wrong in my kingdom. I have tried plan after plan, and
+sometimes two or three together, and have kept this up year after
+year, and yet nothing seems to do my kingdom any good."
+
+"Have you heard how things are going on there now?" asked the Sphinx.
+
+"Give it up," said the King. "But I don't mind saying of my own
+accord, and not as answer to any question, that I have sent a good
+many communications to my Queen, but have never received any from
+her. So I do not know how things are going on in my kingdom."
+
+They then travelled on, the long line of followers coming after,
+keeping their relative positions a hundred yards apart, and passing
+over all the ground the King had traversed in his circuitous walks
+about the city. Thus the line crept along like an enormous snake in
+straight lines, loops, and coils; and every time the King walked a
+hundred yards a fresh man from his capital city was obliged to take
+his place at the tail of the procession.
+
+"By the way," said the Sphinx, after they had walked an hour or more,
+"if you want to see a kingdom where there really is something to
+learn, you ought to go to the country of the Gaumers, which we are
+now approaching."
+
+"All right," said the King. "Let us go there."
+
+In the course of the afternoon they reached the edge of a high bluff.
+"On the level ground, beneath this precipice," said the Sphinx, "is
+the country of the dwarfs called Gaumers. You can sit on the edge of
+the bluff and look down upon it."
+
+The King and the Sphinx then sat down, and looked out from the edge
+over the country of the little people. The officer of the court who
+had formed the head of the line wished very much to see what they
+were looking at, but, when the line halted, he was not near enough.
+
+"You will notice," said the Sphinx, "that the little houses and huts
+are gathered together in clusters. Each one of these clusters is
+under a separate king."
+
+"Why don't they all live under one ruler?" asked the King. "That is
+the proper way."
+
+"They do not think so," said the Sphinx. "In each of these clusters
+live the Gaumers who are best suited to each other; and, if any
+Gaumer finds he cannot get along in one cluster, he goes to another.
+The kings are chosen from among the very best of them, and each one
+is always very anxious to please his subjects. He knows that every
+thing that he, and his queen, and his children eat, or drink, or
+wear, or have must be given to him by his subjects, and if it were
+not for them he could not be their ruler. And so he does every thing
+that he can to make them happy and contented, for he knows if he does
+not please them and govern them well, they will gradually drop off
+from him and go to other clusters, and he will be left without any
+people or any kingdom."
+
+"That is a very queer way of ruling," said the King. "I think the
+people ought to try to please their sovereign."
+
+"He is only one, and they are a great many," said the Sphinx.
+"Consequently they are much more important. No subject is ever
+allowed to look down upon a king, simply because he helps to feed and
+clothe him, and send his children to school. If any one does a thing
+of this kind, he is banished until he learns better."
+
+"All that may be very well for Gaumers," said the King, "but I can
+learn nothing from a government like that, where every thing seems to
+be working in an opposite direction from what everybody knows is
+right and proper. A king anxious to deserve the good opinion of his
+subjects! What nonsense! It ought to be just the other way. The ideas
+of this people are as dwarfish as their bodies."
+
+The King now arose and took up the line of march, turning away from
+the country of the Gaumers. But he had not gone more than two or
+three hundred yards before he received a message from the Queen. It
+came to him very rapidly, every man in the line seeming anxious to
+shout it to the man ahead of him as quickly as possible. The message
+was to the effect that he must either stop where he was or come home:
+his constantly lengthening line of communication had used up all the
+chief officers of the government, all the clerks in the departments,
+and all the officials of every grade, excepting the few who were
+actually needed to carry on the government, and if any more men went
+into the line it would be necessary to call upon the laborers and
+other persons who could not be spared.
+
+"I think," said the Sphinx, "that you have made your line long
+enough."
+
+"And I think," said the King. "that you made it a great deal longer
+than it need to have been, by taking me about in such winding ways."
+
+"It may be so," said the Sphinx, with its mystic smile.
+
+"Well, I am not going to stop here," said the King, "and so I might
+as well go back as soon as I can." And he shouted to the head man of
+the line to pass on the order that his edict of banishment be
+revoked.
+
+In a very short time the news came that the edict was revoked. The
+King then commanded that the procession return home, tail-end
+foremost. The march was at once begun, each man, as he reached the
+city, going immediately to his home and family.
+
+The King and the greater part of the line had a long and weary
+journey, as they followed each other through the country and over the
+devious ways in which the Sphinx had led them in the City of Mingled
+Sentiments. The King was obliged to pursue all these complicated
+turnings, or be separated from his officers, and so break up his
+communication with his palace. The Sphinx accompanied him.
+
+When at last, he reached his palace, his line of former followers
+having apparently melted entirely away, he hurried up-stairs to the
+Queen, leaving the Sphinx in the court-yard.
+
+The King found, when he had time to look into the affairs of his
+dominions, that every thing was in the most admirable condition. The
+Queen had retained a few of the best officials to carry on the
+government, and had ordered the rest to fall, one by one, into the
+line of communication. The King set himself to work to think about
+the matter. It was not long before he came to the conclusion that the
+main thing which had been wrong in his kingdom was himself. He was so
+greatly impressed with this idea that he went down to the court-yard
+to speak to the Sphinx about it.
+
+"I dare say you are right," said the Sphinx, "and I don't wonder that
+what you learned when you were away, and what you have seen since you
+came back, have made you feel certain that you were the cause of
+every thing going wrong in this kingdom. And now, what do you intend
+to do about your government?"
+
+"Give it up," promptly replied the King.
+
+"That is exactly what I should advise," said the Sphinx.
+
+The King did give up his kingdom. He was convinced that being a King
+was exactly the thing he was not suited for, and that he would get on
+much better in some other business or profession. He determined to be
+a traveller and explorer, and to go abroad into other countries to
+find out things that might be useful to his own nation. His Queen had
+shown that she could govern the country most excellently, and it was
+not at all necessary for him to stay at home. She had ordered all the
+men who had made up his line to follow the King's example and to go
+into some good business; in order that not being bothered with so
+many officers, she would be able to get along quite easily.
+
+The King was very successful in his new pursuit, and although he did
+not this time have a line of followers connecting him with the
+palace, he frequently sent home messages which were of use and value
+to his nation.
+
+"I may as well retire," said the Sphinx to itself. "As the King has
+found his vocation and every thing is going all right it is not
+necessary I should remain where I may be looked upon as a
+questionable personage."
+
+
+
+
+
+ THE PHILOPENA.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+There were once a Prince and a Princess who, when quite young, ate a
+philopena together. They agreed that the one who, at any hour after
+sunrise the next day, should accept any thing from the other--the
+giver at the same time saying "Philopena!"--should be the loser, and
+that the loser should marry the other.
+
+They did not meet as soon as they had expected the next day; and at
+the time our story begins, many years had elapsed since they had seen
+each other, and the Prince and the Princess were nearly grown up.
+They often thought of the philopena they had eaten together, and
+wondered if they should know each other when they met. He remembered
+her as a pretty little girl dressed in green silk and playing with a
+snow-white cat; while she remembered him as a handsome boy, wearing a
+little sword, the handle of which was covered with jewels. But they
+knew that each must have changed a great deal in all this time.
+
+Neither of these young people had any parents; the Prince lived with
+guardians and the Princess with uncles.
+
+The guardians of the Prince were very enterprising and energetic men,
+and were allowed to govern the country until the Prince came of age.
+The capital city was a very fine city when the old king died; but the
+guardians thought it might be much finer, so they set to work with
+all their might and main to improve it. They tore down old houses and
+made a great many new streets; they built grand and splendid bridges
+over the river on which the city stood; they constructed aqueducts to
+bring water from streams many miles away; and they were at work all
+the time upon some extensive building enterprise.
+
+The Prince did not take much interest in the works which were going
+on under direction of his guardians; and when he rode out, he
+preferred to go into the country or to ride through some of the
+quaint old streets, where nothing had been changed for hundreds of
+years.
+
+The uncles of the Princess were very different people from the
+guardians of the Prince. There were three of them, and they were very
+quiet and cosey old men, who disliked any kind of bustle or
+disturbance, and wished that every thing might remain as they had
+always known it. It even worried them a little to find that the
+Princess was growing up. They would have much preferred that she
+should remain exactly as she was when they first took charge of her.
+Then they never would have been obliged to trouble their minds about
+any changes in the manner of taking care of her. But they did not
+worry their minds very much, after all. They wished to make her
+guardianship as little laborious or exhausting as possible, and so,
+divided the work; one of them took charge of her education, another
+of her food and lodging, and the third of her dress. The first sent
+for teachers, and told them to teach her; the second had handsome
+apartments prepared for her use, and gave orders that she should have
+every thing she needed to eat and drink; while the third commanded
+that she should have a complete outfit of new clothes four times a
+year. Thus every thing went on very quietly and smoothly; and the
+three uncles were not obliged to exhaust themselves by hard work.
+There were never any new houses built in that city, and if any thing
+had to be repaired, it was done with as little noise and dirt as
+possible. The city and the whole kingdom were quiet and serene, and
+the three uncles dozed away most of the day in three great
+comfortable thrones.
+
+Everybody seemed satisfied with this state of things except the
+Princess. She often thought to herself that nothing would be more
+delightful than a little noise and motion, and she wondered if the
+whole world were as quiet as the city in which she lived. At last,
+she became unable to bear the dreadful stillness of the place any
+longer; but she could think of nothing to do but to go and try to
+find the Prince with whom she had eaten a philopena. If she should
+win, he must marry her; and then, perhaps, they could settle down in
+some place where things would be bright and lively. So, early one
+morning, she put on her white dress, and mounting her prancing black
+horse, she rode away from the city. Only one person saw her go, for
+nearly all the people were asleep.
+
+About this time, the Prince made up his mind that he could no longer
+stand the din and confusion, the everlasting up-setting and
+setting-up in his native city. He would go away, and see if he could
+find the Princess with whom he had eaten a philopena. If he should
+win, she would be obliged to marry him; and then, perhaps, they could
+settle down in some place where it was quiet and peaceful. So, on the
+same morning in which the Princess rode away, he put on a handsome
+suit of black clothes, and mounting a gentle white horse, he rode out
+of the city. Only one person saw him go; for, even at that early
+hour, the people were so busy that little attention was paid to his
+movements.
+
+About half way between these two cities, in a tall tower which stood
+upon a hill, there lived an Inquisitive Dwarf, whose whole object in
+life was to find out what people were doing and why they did it. From
+the top of this tower he generally managed to see all that was going
+on in the surrounding country; and in each of the two cities that
+have been mentioned he had an agent, whose duty it was to send him
+word, by means of carrier pigeons, whenever a new thing happened.
+Before breakfast, on the morning when the Prince and Princess rode
+away, a pigeon from the city of the Prince came flying to the tower
+of the Inquisitive Dwarf.
+
+"Some new building started, I suppose," said the Dwarf, as he took
+the little roll of paper from under the pigeon's wing. "But no; it is
+very different! 'The Prince has ridden away from the city alone, and
+is travelling to the north.'"
+
+But before he could begin to puzzle his brains about the meaning of
+this departure, another pigeon came flying in from the city of the
+Princess.
+
+"Well!" cried the Dwarf, "this is amazing! It is a long time since I
+have had a message from that city, and my agent has been drawing his
+salary without doing any work. What possibly can have happened
+there?"
+
+When he read that the Princess had ridden alone from the city that
+morning, and was travelling to the south, he was truly amazed.
+
+"What on earth can it mean?" he exclaimed. "If the city of the Prince
+were to the south of that of the Princess, then I might understand
+it; for they would be going to see each other, and that would be
+natural enough. But as his city is to the north of her city, they are
+travelling in opposite directions. And what is the meaning of this? I
+most certainly must find out."
+
+The Inquisitive Dwarf had three servants whom he employed to attend
+to his most important business. These were a Gryphoness, a Water
+Sprite, and an Absolute Fool. This last one was very valuable; for
+there were some things he would do which no one else would think of
+attempting. The Dwarf called to him the Gryphoness, the oldest and
+most discreet of the three, and told her of the departure of the
+Princess.
+
+"Hasten southward," he said, "as fast as you can, and follow her, and
+do not return to me until you have found out why she left her city,
+where she is going, and what she expects to do when she gets there.
+Your appearance may frighten her; and, therefore, you must take with
+you the Absolute Fool, to whom she will probably be willing to talk;
+but you must see that every thing is managed properly."
+
+Having despatched these two, the Inquisitive Dwarf then called the
+Water Sprite, who was singing to herself at the edge of a fountain,
+and telling her of the departure of the Prince, ordered her to follow
+him, and not to return until she had found out why he left his city,
+where he was going, and what he intended to do when he got there.
+
+"The road to the north," he said, "lies along the river bank;
+therefore, you can easily keep him company."
+
+The Water Sprite bowed, and dancing over the dewy grass to the river,
+threw herself into it. Sometimes she swam beneath the clear water;
+sometimes she rose partly in the air, where she seemed like a little
+cloud of sparkling mist borne onward by the wind; and sometimes she
+floated upon the surface, her pale blue robes undulating with the
+gentle waves, while her white hands and feet shone in the sun like
+tiny crests of foam. Thus, singing to herself, she went joyously and
+rapidly on, aided by a full, strong wind from the south. She did not
+forget to glance every now and then upon the road which ran along the
+river bank; and, in the course of the morning, she perceived the
+Prince. He was sitting in the shade of a tree near the water's edge,
+while his white horse was grazing near by.
+
+The Water Sprite came very gently out of the river, and seating
+herself upon the edge of the grassy bank, she spoke to him. The
+Prince looked up in astonishment, but there was nothing in her
+appearance to frighten him.
+
+"I came," said the Water Sprite, "at the command of my master, to ask
+you why you left your city, where you are going, and what you intend
+to do when you get there."
+
+The Prince then told her why he had left his city, and what he
+intended to do when he had found the Princess.
+
+"But where I am going," he said, "I do not know, myself. I must
+travel and travel until I succeed in the object of my search."
+
+The Water Sprite reflected for a moment, and then she said:
+
+"If I were you, I would not travel to the north. It is cold and
+dreary there, and your Princess would not dwell in such a region. A
+little above us, on the other side of this river, there is a stream
+which runs sometimes to the east and sometimes to the south, and
+which leads to the Land of the Lovely Lakes. This is the most
+beautiful country in the world, and you will be much more likely to
+find your Princess there than among the desolate mountains of the
+north."
+
+"I dare say you are right," said the Prince; "and I will go there, if
+you will show me the way."
+
+"The road runs along the bank of the river," said the Water Sprite;
+"and we shall soon reach the Land of the Lovely Lakes."
+
+The Prince then mounted his horse, forded the river, and was soon
+riding along the bank of the stream, while the Water Sprite gayly
+floated upon its dancing ripples.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+When the Gryphoness started southward, in pursuit of the Princess,
+she kept out of sight among the bushes by the roadside; but sped
+swiftly along. The Absolute Fool, however, mounted upon a fine horse,
+rode boldly along upon the open road. He was a good-looking youth,
+with rosy cheeks, bright eyes, and a handsome figure. As he cantered
+gayly along, he felt himself capable of every noble action which the
+human mind has ever conceived. The Gryphoness kept near him, and in
+the course of the morning they overtook the Princess, who was
+allowing her horse to walk in the shade by the roadside. The Absolute
+Fool dashed up to her, and, taking off his hat, asked her why she had
+left her city, where she was going, and what she intended to do when
+she got there.
+
+The Princess looked at him in surprise. "I left my city because I
+wanted to," she said. "I am going about my business, and when I get
+to the proper place, I shall attend to it."
+
+"Oh," said the Absolute Fool, "you refuse me your confidence, do you?
+But allow me to remark that I have a Gryphoness with me who is very
+frightful to look at, and whom it was my intention to keep in the
+bushes; but if you will not give fair answers to my questions, she
+must come out and talk to you, and that is all there is about it."
+
+"If there is a Gryphoness in the bushes," said the Princess, "let her
+come out. No matter how frightful she is, I would rather she should
+come where I can see her, than to have her hiding near me."
+
+The Gryphoness, who had heard these words, now came out into the
+road. The horse of the Princess reared in affright, but his young
+rider patted him on the neck, and quieted his fears.
+
+"What do you and this young man want?" said the Princess to the
+Gryphoness, "and why do you question me?"
+
+"It is not of our own will that we do it," said the Gryphoness, very
+respectfully; "but our master, the Inquisitive Dwarf, has sent us to
+obtain information about the points on which the young man questioned
+you; and until we have found out these things, it is impossible for
+us to return."
+
+"I am opposed to answering impertinent questions," replied the
+Princess; "but in order to rid myself of you, I will tell you the
+reason of my journey." And she then stated briefly the facts of the
+case.
+
+"Ah, me!" said the Gryphoness. "I am very sorry; but you cannot tell
+us where you are going, and we cannot return until we know that. But
+you need not desire to be rid of us, for it may be that we can assist
+you in the object of your journey. This young man is sometimes very
+useful, and I shall be glad to do any thing that I can to help you.
+If you should think that I would injure you, or willingly annoy you
+by my presence, it would grieve me to the heart." And as she spoke, a
+tear bedimmed her eye.
+
+The Princess was touched by the emotion of the Gryphoness.
+
+"You may accompany me," she said, "and I will trust you both. You
+must know this country better than I do. Have you any advice to give
+me in regard to my journey?"
+
+"One thing I would strongly advise," said the Gryphoness, "and that
+is, that you do not travel any farther until we know in what
+direction it will be best to go. There is an inn close by, kept by a
+worthy woman. If you will stop there until to-morrow, this young man
+and I will scour the country round about, and try to find some news
+of your Prince. The young man will return and report to you to-morrow
+morning. And if you should need help, or escort, he will aid and obey
+you as your servant. As for me, unless we have found the Prince, I
+shall continue searching for him. There is a prince in the city to
+the north of my master's tower, and it is not unlikely that it is he
+whom you seek."
+
+"You can find out if it is he," answered the Princess, "by asking
+about the philopena."
+
+"That will I do," said the Gryphoness, "and I will return hither as
+speedily as possible." And, with a respectful salutation, the
+Gryphoness and the Absolute Fool departed by different ways.
+
+The Princess then repaired to the inn, where she took lodgings.
+
+The next morning, the Absolute Fool came back to the inn, and seeing
+the Princess, said: "I rode until after night-fall, searching for the
+Prince, before it occurred to me that, even if I should find him, I
+would not know him in the dark. As soon as I thought of that, I rode
+straight to the nearest house, and slept until daybreak, when I
+remembered that I was to report to you this morning. But as I have
+heard no news of the Prince, and as this is a beautiful, clear day, I
+think it would be extremely foolish to remain idly here, where there
+is nothing of interest going on, and when a single hour's delay may
+cause you to miss the object of your search. The Prince may be in one
+place this morning, and there is no knowing where he will be in the
+afternoon. While the Gryphoness is searching, we should search also.
+We can return before sunset, and we will leave word here as to the
+direction we have taken, so that when she returns, she can quickly
+overtake us. It is my opinion that not a moment should be lost. I
+will be your guide. I know this country well."
+
+The Princess thought this sounded like good reasoning, and consented
+to set out. There were some beautiful mountains to the south-east;
+and among these, the Absolute Fool declared, a prince of good taste
+would be very apt to dwell. They, therefore, took this direction. But
+when they had travelled an hour or more, the mountains began to look
+bare and bleak, and the Absolute Fool declared that he did not
+believe any prince would live there. He therefore advised that they
+turn into a road that led to the north-east. It was a good road; and
+therefore he thought it led to a good place, where a person of good
+sense would be likely to reside. Along this road they therefore
+travelled. They had ridden but a few miles when they met three men,
+well armed and mounted. These men drew up their horses, and
+respectfully saluted the Princess.
+
+"High-born Lady," they said, "for by your aspect we know you to be
+such, we would inform you that we are the soldiers of the King, the
+outskirts of whose dominions you have reached. It is our duty to
+question all travellers, and, if their object in coming to our
+country is a good one, to give them whatever assistance and
+information they may require. Will you tell us why you are come?"
+
+"Impertinent vassals!" cried the Absolute Fool, riding up in a great
+passion. "How dare you interfere with a princess who has left her
+city because it was so dull and stupid, and is endeavoring to find a
+prince, with whom she has eaten a philopena, in order that she may
+marry him. Out of my way, or I will draw my sword and cleave you to
+the earth, and thus punish your unwarrantable curiosity!"
+
+The soldiers could not repress a smile.
+
+"In order to prevent mischief," they said to the Absolute Fool, "we
+shall be obliged to take you into custody."
+
+This they immediately did, and then requested the Princess to
+accompany them to the palace of their King, where she would receive
+hospitality and aid.
+
+The King welcomed the Princess with great cordiality. He had no son,
+and he much wished he had one; for in that case it might be his
+Prince for whom the young lady was looking. But there was a prince,
+he said, who lived in a city to the north, who was probably the very
+man; and he would send and make inquiries. In the mean time, the
+Princess would be entertained by himself and his Queen; and, if her
+servant would make a suitable apology, his violent language would be
+pardoned. But the Absolute Fool positively refused to do this.
+
+"I never apologize," he cried. "No man of spirit would do such a
+thing. What I say, I stand by."
+
+"Very well," said the King; "then you shall fight a wild beast." And
+he gave orders that the affair should be arranged for the following
+day.
+
+In a short time, however, some of his officers came to him and told
+him that there were no wild beasts; those on hand having been kept so
+long that they had become tame.
+
+"To be sure, there's the old lion, Sardon," they said; "but he is so
+dreadfully cross and has had so much experience in these fights, that
+for a long time it has not been considered fair to allow any one to
+enter the ring with him."
+
+"It is a pity," said the King, "to make the young man fight a tame
+beast; but, under the circumstances, the best thing to do will be to
+represent the case to him, just as it is. Tell him we are sorry we
+have not an ordinary wild beast; but that he can take his choice
+between a tame one and the lion Sardon, whose disposition and
+experience you will explain to him."
+
+When the matter was stated to the Absolute Fool, he refused with
+great scorn to fight a tame beast.
+
+"I will not be degraded in the eyes of the public," he said; "I will
+take the old lion."
+
+The next day, the court and the public assembled to see the fight;
+but the Queen and our Princess took a ride into the country, not
+wishing to witness a combat of this kind, especially one which was so
+unequal. The King ordered that every advantage should be given to the
+young man, in order that he might have every possible chance of
+success in fighting an animal which had been a victor on so many
+similar occasions. A large iron cage, furnished with a turnstile,
+into which the Absolute Fool could retire for rest and refreshment,
+but where the lion could not follow him, was placed in the middle of
+the arena, and the youth was supplied with all the weapons he
+desired. When every thing was ready, the Absolute Fool took his stand
+in the centre of the arena, and the door of the lion's den was
+opened. The great beast came out, he looked about for an instant, and
+then, with majestic step, advanced toward the young man. When he was
+within a few paces of him, he crouched for a spring.
+
+The Absolute Fool had never seen so magnificent a creature, and he
+could not restrain his admiration. With folded arms and sparkling
+eyes, he gazed with delight upon the lion's massive head, his long
+and flowing mane, his magnificent muscles, and his powerful feet and
+legs. There was an air of grandeur and strength about him which
+completely enraptured the youth. Approaching the lion, he knelt
+before him, and gazed with wondering ecstasy into his great, glowing
+eyes. "What glorious orbs!" he inwardly exclaimed. "What unfathomable
+expression! What possibilities! What reminiscences! And everywhere,
+what majesty of curve!"
+
+The lion was a good deal astonished at the conduct of the young man;
+and he soon began to suppose that this was not the person he was to
+fight, but probably a keeper, who was examining into his condition.
+After submitting to this scrutiny a few minutes, he gave a mighty
+yawn, which startled the spectators, but which delighted the Absolute
+Fool; for never before had he beheld such a depth of potentiality. He
+knelt in silent delight at this exhibition of the beauty of strength.
+
+Old Sardon soon became tired of all this, however, and he turned and
+walked back to his den. "When their man is ready," he thought to
+himself, "I will come out and fight him."
+
+One tremendous shout now arose from the multitude. "The youth has
+conquered!" they cried. "He has actually frightened the lion back
+into his den!" Rushing into the arena, they raised the Absolute Fool
+upon their shoulders and carried him in triumph to the open square in
+front of the palace, that he might be rewarded for his bravery. Here
+the King, followed by his court, quickly appeared; for he was as much
+delighted as any one at the victory of the young man.
+
+"Noble youth," he exclaimed, "you are the bravest of the brave. You
+are the only man I know who is worthy of our royal daughter, and you
+shall marry her forthwith. Long since, I vowed that only with the
+bravest should she wed."
+
+At this moment, the Queen and the Princess, returning from their
+ride, heard with joy the result of the combat; and riding up to the
+victor, the Queen declared that she would gladly join with her royal
+husband in giving their daughter to so brave a man.
+
+The Absolute Fool stood for a moment in silent thought; then,
+addressing the King, he said:
+
+"Was Your Majesty's father a king?"
+
+"He was," was the answer.
+
+"Was his father of royal blood?"
+
+"No; he was not," replied the King. "My grandfather was a man of the
+people; but his pre-eminent virtue, his great ability as a statesman,
+and the dignity and nobility of his character made him the unanimous
+choice of the nation as its sovereign."
+
+"I am sorry to hear that," said the Absolute Fool; "for it makes it
+necessary for me to decline the kind offer of your daughter in
+marriage. If I marry a princess at all, she must be one who can trace
+back her lineage through a long line of royal ancestors." And as he
+spoke, his breast swelled with manly pride.
+
+For a moment, the King was dumb with rage. Then loudly he shouted:
+"Ho, guards! Annihilate him! Avenge this insult!"
+
+At these words, the sword of every by-stander leaped from its
+scabbard; but, before any one could take a step forward, the Princess
+seized the Absolute Fool by his long and flowing locks, and put spurs
+to her horse. The young man yelled with pain, and shouted to
+her to let go; but she held firmly to his hair, and as he was
+extraordinarily active and fleet of foot, he kept pace with the
+galloping horse. A great crowd of people started in pursuit, but as
+none of them were mounted, they were soon left behind.
+
+"Let go my hair! Let go my hair!" shouted the Absolute Fool, as he
+bounded along. "You don't know how it hurts. Let go! Let go!"
+
+But the Princess never relinquished her hold until they were out of
+the King's domain.
+
+"A little more," cried the indignant youth, when she let him go, "and
+you would have pulled out a handful of my hair."
+
+"A little less," said the Princess, contemptuously, "and you would
+have been cut to pieces; for you have not sense enough to take care
+of yourself. I am sorry I listened to you, and left the inn to which
+the Gryphoness took me. It would have been far better to wait there
+for her as she told me to do."
+
+"Yes," said the Absolute Fool; "it would have been much better."
+
+"Now," said the Princess, "we will go back there, and see if she has
+returned."
+
+"If we can find it," said the other, "which I very much doubt."
+
+There were several roads at this point and, of course, they took the
+wrong one. As they went on, the Absolute Fool complained bitterly
+that he had left his horse behind him, and was obliged to walk.
+Sometimes he stopped, and said he would go back after it; but this
+the Princess sternly forbade.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+When the Gryphoness reached the city of the Prince, it was night; but
+she was not sorry for this. She did not like to show herself much in
+the daytime, because so many people were frightened by her. After a
+good deal of trouble, she discovered that the Prince had certainly
+left the city, although his guardians did not seem to be aware of it.
+They were so busy with a new palace, in part of which they were
+living, that they could not be expected to keep a constant eye upon
+him. In the morning, she met an old man who knew her, and was not
+afraid of her, and who told her that the day before, when he was up
+the river, he had seen the Prince on his white horse, riding on the
+bank of the stream; and that near him, in the water, was something
+which now looked like a woman, and again like a puff of mist. The
+Gryphoness reflected.
+
+"If this Prince has gone off in that way," she said to herself, "I
+believe that he is the very one whom the Princess is looking for, and
+that he has set out in search of her; and that creature in the water
+must be our Water Sprite, whom our master has probably sent out to
+discover where the Prince is going. If he had told me about this, it
+would have saved much trouble. From the direction in which they were
+going, I feel sure that the Water Sprite was taking the Prince to the
+Land of the Lovely Lakes. She never fails to go there, if she can
+possibly get an excuse. I will follow them. I suppose the Princess
+will be tired, waiting at the inn; but I must know where the Prince
+is, and if he is really her Prince, before I go back to her."
+
+When the Gryphoness reached the Land of the Lovely Lakes, she
+wandered all that day and the next night; but she saw nothing of
+those for whom she was looking.
+
+The Princess and the Absolute Fool journeyed on until near the close
+of the afternoon, when the sky began to be overcast, and it looked
+like rain. They were then not far from a large piece of water; and at
+a little distance, they saw a ship moored near the shore.
+
+"I shall seek shelter on board that ship," said the Princess.
+
+"It is going to storm," remarked the Absolute Fool. "I should prefer
+to be on dry land."
+
+"As the land is not likely to be very dry when it rains," said the
+Princess, "I prefer a shelter, even if it is upon wet water."
+
+"Women will always have their own way," muttered the Absolute Fool.
+
+The ship belonged to a crew of Amazon sailors, who gave the Princess
+a hearty welcome.
+
+"You may go on board if you choose," said the Absolute Fool to the
+Princess, "but I shall not risk my life in a ship manned by women."
+
+"It is well that you are of that opinion," said the Captain of the
+Amazons, who had heard this remark; "for you would not be allowed to
+come on board if you wished to. But we will give you a tent to
+protect you and the horse in case it should rain, and will send you
+something to eat."
+
+"While the Princess was taking tea with the Amazon Captain, she told
+her about the Prince, and how she was trying to find him.
+
+"Good!" cried the Captain. "I will join in the search, and take you
+in my ship. Some of my crew told me that yesterday they saw a young
+man, who looked like a prince, riding along the shore of a lake which
+adjoins the one we are on. In the morning we will sail after him. We
+shall keep near the shore, and your servant can mount your horse and
+ride along the edge of the lake. From what I know of the speed of
+this vessel, I think he can easily keep up with us."
+
+Early in the morning, the Amazon Captain called her crew together.
+"Hurrah, my brave girls!" she said. "We have an object. I never sail
+without an object, and it lights me to get one. The purpose of our
+present cruise is to find the Prince of whom this Princess is in
+search; and we must spare no pains to bring him to her, dead or
+alive."
+
+Luckily for her peace of mind, the Princess did not hear this speech.
+The day was a fine one, and before long the sun became very hot. The
+ship was sailing quite near the land, when the Absolute Fool rode
+down to the water's edge, and called out that he had something very
+important to communicate to the Princess. As he was not allowed to
+come on board, she was obliged to go on shore, to which she was rowed
+in a small boat.
+
+"I have been thinking," said the Absolute Fool, "that it is perfectly
+ridiculous, and very uncomfortable, to continue this search any
+longer. I would go back, but my master would not suffer me to return
+without knowing where you are going. I have, therefore, a plan to
+propose. Give up your useless search for this Prince, who is probably
+not nearly so handsome and intellectual as I am, and marry me. We
+will then return, and I will assume the reins of government in your
+domain."
+
+"Follow the vessel," said the Princess, "as you have been doing; for
+I wish some one to take care of my horse." And without another word,
+she returned to the ship.
+
+"I should like to sail as far as possible from shore during the rest
+of the trip," said she to the Captain.
+
+"Put the helm bias!" shouted the Amazon Captain to the steers-woman;
+"and keep him well out from land."
+
+When they had sailed through a small stream into the lake adjoining,
+the out-look, who was swinging in a hammock hung between the tops of
+the two masts, sang out, "Prince ahead!" Instantly all was activity
+on board the vessel. Story books were tucked under coils of rope,
+hem-stitching and embroidery were laid aside, and every woman was at
+her post.
+
+"The Princess is taking a nap," said the Captain, "and we will not
+awaken her. It will be so nice to surprise her by bringing the Prince
+to her. We will run our vessel ashore, and then steal quietly upon
+him. But do not let him get away. Cut him down, if he resists!"
+
+The Prince, who was plainly visible only a short distance ahead, was
+so pleasantly employed that he had not noticed the approach of the
+ship. He was sitting upon a low, moss-covered rock, close to the
+water's edge; and with a small hand-net, which he had found on the
+shore, he was scooping the most beautiful fishes from the lake,
+holding them up in the sunlight to admire their brilliant colors and
+graceful forms, and then returning them uninjured to the water. The
+Water Sprite was swimming near him, and calling to the fish to come
+up and be caught; for the gentle Prince would not hurt them. It was
+very delightful and rare sport, and it is not surprising that it
+entirely engrossed the attention of the Prince. The Amazons silently
+landed, and softly stole along the shore, a little back from the
+water. Then, at their Captain's command, they rushed upon the Prince.
+
+It was just about this time that the Gryphoness, who had been
+searching for the Prince, caught her first sight of him. Perceiving
+that he was about to be attacked, she rushed to his aid. The Amazon
+sailors reached him before she did, and seizing upon him they began
+to pull him away. The Prince resisted stoutly; but seeing that his
+assailants were women, he would not draw his sword. The Amazon
+Captain and mate, who were armed with broad knives, now raised their
+weapons, and called upon the Prince to surrender or die. But at this
+moment, the Gryphoness reached the spot, and catching the Captain and
+mate, each by an arm, she dragged them back from the Prince. The
+other Amazons, however, continued the combat; and the Prince defended
+himself by pushing them into the shallow water, where the Water
+Sprite nearly stifled them by throwing over them showers of spray.
+And now came riding up the Absolute Fool. Seeing a youth engaged in
+combat with the Amazon sailors, his blood boiled with indignation.
+
+"A man fighting women!" he exclaimed. "What a coward! My arm shall
+ever assist the weaker sex."
+
+Jumping from the horse, he drew his sword, and rushed upon the
+Prince. The Gryphoness saw the danger of the latter, and she would
+have gone to his assistance, but she was afraid to loosen her hold of
+the Amazon Captain and mate.
+
+Spreading her wings she flew to the top of a tree where she deposited
+the two warlike women upon a lofty branch, from which she knew it
+would take them a long time to get down to the ground. When she
+descended she found that the Absolute Fool had reached the Prince.
+The latter, being a brave fellow, although of so gentle a
+disposition, had been glad to find a man among his assailants, and
+had drawn his sword to defend himself. The two had just begun to
+fight when the Gryphoness seized the Absolute Fool by the waist and
+hurled him backward into some bushes.
+
+"You must not fight him!" she cried to the Prince. "He is beneath
+your rank! And as you will not draw your sword against these Amazons
+you must fly from them. If you run fast they cannot overtake you."
+
+The Prince followed her advice, and sheathing his sword he rapidly
+ran along the bank, followed by some of the Amazons who had succeeded
+in getting the water out of their eyes and mouths.
+
+"Run from women!" contemptuously remarked the Absolute Fool. "If you
+had not interfered with me," he said to the Gryphoness, "I should
+soon have put an end to such a coward."
+
+The Prince had nearly reached the place opposite to which the ship
+was moored, when the Princess, who had been awakened by the noise of
+the combat, appeared upon the deck of the vessel. The moment she saw
+the Prince, she felt convinced that he was certainly the one for whom
+she was looking. Fearing that the pursuing Amazons might kill him,
+she sprang from the vessel to his assistance; but her foot caught in
+a rope, and instead of reaching the shore, she fell into the water,
+which was here quite deep, and immediately sank out of sight. The
+Prince, who had noticed her just as she sprang, and who felt equally
+convinced that she was the one for whom he was searching, stopped his
+flight and rushed to the edge of the bank. Just as the Princess rose
+to the surface, he reached out his hand to her, and she took it.
+
+"Philopena!" cried the Prince.
+
+"You have won," said the Princess, gayly shaking the water from her
+curls, as he drew her ashore.
+
+At the request of the Princess, the pursuing Amazons forbore to
+assail the Prince, and when the Captain and the Mate had descended
+from the tree, every thing was explained.
+
+Within an hour, the Prince and Princess, after taking kind leave of
+the Gryphoness, and Water Sprite, and of the Amazon sailors, who
+cheered them loudly, rode away to the city of the Princess; while the
+three servants of the Inquisitive Dwarf returned to their master to
+report what had happened.
+
+The Absolute Fool was in a very bad humor; for he was obliged to go
+back on foot, having left his horse in the kingdom where he had so
+narrowly escaped being killed; and, besides this, he had had his hair
+pulled; and had not been treated with proper respect by either the
+Princess or the Gryphoness. He felt himself deeply injured. When he
+reached home, he determined that he would not remain in a position
+where his great abilities were so little appreciated. "I will do
+something," he said, "which shall prove to the world that I deserve
+to stand among the truly great. I will reform my fellow beings, and I
+will begin by reforming the Inquisitive Dwarf." Thereupon he went to
+his master, and said:
+
+"Sir, it is foolish and absurd for you to be meddling thus with the
+affairs of your neighbors. Give up your inquisitive habits, and learn
+some useful business. While you are doing this, I will consent to
+manage your affairs."
+
+The Inquisitive Dwarf turned to him, and said: "I have a great desire
+to know the exact appearance of the North Pole. Go and discover it
+for me."
+
+The Absolute Fool departed on this mission, and has not yet returned.
+
+When the Princess, with her Prince, reached her city, her uncles were
+very much amazed; for they had not known she had gone away. "If you
+are going to get married," they said, "we are very glad; for then you
+will not need our care, and we shall be free from the great
+responsibility which is bearing us down."
+
+In a short time the wedding took place, and then the question arose
+in which city should the young couple dwell. The Princess decided it.
+
+"In the winter," she said to the Prince, "We will live in your city,
+where all is life and activity; and where the houses are so well
+built with all the latest improvements. In the summer, we will come
+to my city, where everything is old, and shady, and serene." This
+they did, and were very happy.
+
+The Gryphoness would have been glad to go and live with the Princess,
+for she had taken a great fancy to her; but she did not think it
+worth her while to ask permission to do this.
+
+"My impulses, I know, are good," she said; "but my appearance is
+against me."
+
+As for the Water Sprite, she was in a truly disconsolate mood,
+because she had left so soon the Land of the Lovely Lakes, where she
+had been so happy. The more she thought about it, the more she
+grieved; and one morning, unable to bear her sorrow longer, she
+sprang into the great jet of the fountain. High into the bright air
+the fountain threw her, scattering her into a thousand drops of
+glittering water; but not one drop fell back into the basin. The
+great, warm sun drew them up; and, in a little white cloud, they
+floated away across the bright blue sky.
+
+
+
+
+
+SCRIBNER'S BOOKS FOR THE YOUNG.
+
+THIRTIETH THOUSAND.
+
+"In 'Little Lord Fauntleroy' we gain another charming child to add to
+our gallery of juvenile heroes and heroines; one who teaches a great
+lesson with such truth and sweetness that we part with him with real
+regret when the episode is over."--Louisa M. Alcott.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+LITTLE LORD FAUNTLEROY.
+
+By FRANCES HODGSON BURNETT.
+
+Beautifully illustrated by R. B. Birch. One volume, square 8vo,
+handsomely bound. $2.00.
+
+In "Little Lord Fauntleroy" the author of "That Lass o' Lowrie's" has
+given us a book which is absolutely certain to become one of the few
+real classics in the literature for children. She has presented a
+picture of child-life such as we have never had before; she has not
+only taken a subject quite new but she has written with such
+exquisite delicacy and sweetness the story of the little American
+boy's career that even were the situations old the story would be a
+notable one.
+
+"Little Lord Fauntleroy," though a book for children, is certainly
+not a "juvenile" in the common use of the word, paradoxical as the
+statement may seem. The hero is a manly little fellow, a child, but
+with all the elements of a man. Mrs. Burnett has made Lord Fauntleroy
+a thoughtful boy, and she is right in believing that the stories
+children like best are those best worth thinking about when they are
+being read.
+
+A NEW EDITION OF AN OLD FAVORITE.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+HANS BRINKER; or, The Silver Skates.
+
+A STORY OF LIFE IN HOLLAND
+
+By MARY MAPES DODGE.
+
+One volume, 12mo, with sixty beautiful illustrations. $1.50.
+
+The cordial appreciation with which "Hans Brinker" was first received
+has increased from year to year, until the original plates have
+become badly worn from constant use. The publishers have therefore
+reissued at half its original price their beautiful Holiday Edition,
+of which on its first appearance the Nation said: "We some time ago
+expressed our opinion that Mrs. Mary Mapes Dodge's delightful
+children's story called 'Hans Brinker; or, The Silver Skates'
+deserved an entirely new dress, with illustrations made in Holland
+instead of America. The publishers have just issued an edition in
+accordance with this suggestion. The pictures are admirable, and the
+whole volume, in appearance and contents, need not fear comparison
+with any juvenile publication of the year or of many years."
+
+
+AMONG THE LAW-MAKERS.
+
+By EDMUND ALTON.
+
+With many illustrations of the Government Buildings, Halls of
+Congress, etc., etc.
+
+One volume, square 8vo. $2.50.
+
+The author of this book was for four years connected with the
+legislative branch of our Government, in the capacity of a Senatorial
+page. His record of the memorable scenes and events which came under
+his observation is enlivened by anecdotes of public men, humorous and
+exciting episodes at the national capitol, and a great variety of
+stirring incidents.
+
+
+THE MAKING OF NEW ENGLAND.
+
+1580--1643.
+
+By SAMUEL ADAMS DRAKE.
+
+With many illustrations and maps. One volume, 12mo. $1.50.
+
+In his preface the author says: "To enhance the interest of this
+story, emphasis has been given to everything that went to make up the
+home-life of the pioneer settlers, or that relates to their various
+avocations." In all history no better examples of manliness, energy,
+and conscientiousness could be found, to be read about and studied by
+a child whose character is just forming. The story is told in such a
+vivid way that it is as interesting and absorbing as a romance.
+
+
+THE OLD-FASHIONED FAIRY BOOK.
+
+By MRS. BURTON HARRISON.
+
+With many quaint illustrations by MISS ROSINA EMMET.
+
+One volume, square 16mo. $1.00.
+
+"The little ones, who so willingly go back with us to 'Jack the
+Giant-Killer,' 'Blue-beard,' and the kindred stories of our
+childhood, will gladly welcome Mrs. Burton Harrison's 'Old-Fashioned
+Fairy Tales,' where the giant, the dwarf, the fairy, the wicked
+princess, the ogre, the metamorphosed prince, and all the heroes of
+that line come into play and action. ...The graceful pencil of Miss
+Rosina Emmet has given a pictorial interest to the book, and the many
+pictures scattered through its pages accord well with the good
+old-fashioned character of the tales."--Frank R. Stockton.
+
+
+BRIC-A-BRAC STORIES.
+
+By MRS. BURTON HARRISON.
+
+Illustrated and Cover designed by WALTER CRANE. One volume, 12mo.
+$2.00.
+
+"Upon the whole it is to be wished that every boy and girl in
+America, or anywhere else, might become intimately acquainted with
+the contents of this book. There is more virtue in one of
+these stories than in the entire library of modern juvenile
+literature."--Julian Hawthorne.
+
+
+THE MERRY ADVENTURES OF ROBIN HOOD,
+Of Great Renown in Nottinghamshire.
+
+Written and Illustrated by HOWARD PYLE.
+
+One volume, quarto, $3.00.
+
+"The Prince of Story-Tellers."--London Times.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+THE WORKS OF JULES VERNE.
+
+Uniform illustrated edition. Nine vols., 8vo, extra cloth, with over
+750 full-page illustrations. Price, per set, in a box, $17.50. Sold
+also in separate volumes.
+
+The most impossible stories of this imaginative writer are told in
+such a realistic manner and with so much scientific knowledge
+ingeniously wrought into them that they possess a fascination that is
+all their own. Their great and continued popularity, among both old
+and young, has led to the publication of this new edition in which
+all the numerous illustrations of the French edition are retained,
+and the volumes are issued in a uniform and attractive binding.
+
+Michael Strogoff; or, The Courier of the Czar..................$2 00
+A Floating City and the Blockade Runners....................... 2 00
+Hector Servadac................................................ 2 00
+Dick Sands..................................................... 2 00
+A Journey to the Center of the Earth........................... 2 00
+From the Earth to the Moon Direct in Ninety-seven Hours, Twenty
+   Minutes; and a Journey Around It............................ 2 00
+The Steam House. Part I.--The Demon of Cawnpore.
+   Part II.--Tigers and Traitors. Complete in one volume....... 2 00
+The Giant Raft. Part I.--Eight Hundred Leagues on the Amazon.
+   Part II.--The Cryptogram. Complete in one volume............ 2 00
+The Mysterious Island. Part I.--Dropped from the Clouds.
+   Part II.--Abandoned. Part III.--The Secret of the Island.
+   The complete work in one volume, with 150 illustrations..... 2 50
+
+
+A NEW AND REVISED EDITION OF THE
+ILLUSTRATED LIBRARY OF WONDERS.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+THE WONDERS OF MAN AND NATURE.
+
+Intelligence of Animals--Mountain Adventures--Bodily Strength and
+Skill--Wonderful Escapes--Thunder and Lightning--Adventures on the
+Great Hunting Grounds--Wonders of the Human Body--The Sublime in
+Nature.
+
+
+THE WONDERS OF SCIENCE.
+
+Wonders of Heat--Wonders of the Heavens--Wonders of Optics--The
+Sun--Wonders of Acoustics--Wonders of Water--Wonders of the
+Moon--Meteors, Aerolites, Storms, and Atmospheric Phenomena.
+
+
+THE WONDERS OF ART AND ARCHAEOLOGY.
+
+Egypt 3,300 Years Ago--Wonders of Sculpture--Wonders of Glass
+Making--Wonders of European Art--Wonders of Pompeii--Wonders of
+Architecture--The Wonders of Italian Art--The Wonders of Engraving.
+
+Twenty-four volumes, containing aver a thousand valuable
+illustrations.
+
+Each set, 8 volumes, in a box, $8.00.
+
+Each volume, 12mo, complete in itself. Sold separately at $1.00 per
+volume.
+
+
+CHILDREN'S STORIES OF AMERICAN PROGRESS.
+
+By HENRIETTA CHRISTIAN WRIGHT.
+
+With twelve full-page illustrations from drawings by J. STEEPLE
+DAVIS. One volume, 12mo. $1.50.
+
+"The 'Stories of American Progress' contain a series of pictures of
+events of the first half of the present century, and the scope of the
+book comprehends all the prominent steps by which we have reached our
+present position both as regards extent of country and industrial
+prosperity. They include an account of the first Steamboat, the
+Railroad, and the Telegraph, as well as of the Purchase of Florida,
+the War of 1812, and the Discovery of Gold. It will be found that no
+event of importance has been omitted, and any child fond of
+story-telling will gain from this book an amount of knowledge which
+may far exceed that which is usually acquired from the rigid
+instruction of the school-room."
+
+
+CHILDREN'S STORIES IN AMERICAN HISTORY.
+
+By HENRIETTA CHRISTIAN WRIGHT.
+
+With twelve full-page illustrations from drawings by J. STEEPLE
+DAVIS. One volume, 12mo. $1.50.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+THE IVORY KING.
+
+A Popular History of the Elephant and Its Allies.
+
+By CHARLES F. HOLDER.
+
+Square 8vo, with twenty-four full-page illustrations. $2.00.
+
+The wonderfully interesting array of facts which Mr. Holder brought
+together in his "Marvels of Animal Life" was the fruit very largely
+of his personal observations. It forms one of the most stimulating
+and delightful contributions to the class of Natural History books
+for the young that has ever been made, and was a fitting forerunner
+to "The Ivory King," which is devoted entirely to the Elephant, and
+has even a more vivid fascination than the first named volume. The
+summary of its contents includes the Natural History of the Elephant,
+its habits and ways and its intelligence, the Mammoth Three and Four
+Tusked Elephants, Hunting and Capturing Wild Elephants, the Elephant
+in Captivity, Rogue Elephants, the White Elephant, Trained Elephants,
+Show Elephants, Ivory, War Elephants, etc., etc. The numerous
+illustrations are especially excellent, being drawn from a great
+variety of sources.
+
+It would be hard to name a book which would be a more welcome and
+valued addition to the library of the average boy or girl just
+beginning to cultivate a love of reading and an interest in the world
+around them.
+
+
+MARVELS OF ANIMAL LIFE.
+
+By CHARLES F. HOLDER.
+
+Square 8vo, with thirty-two full-page illustrations. $2.00.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+SCRIBNER'S STANDARD JUVENILE BOOKS.
+
+THE BOY'S
+
+Library of Legend and Chivalry.
+
+EDITED BY SIDNEY LANIER,
+
+And richly illustrated by FREDERICKS, BENSELL, and KAPPES.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+THE BOY'S KING ARTHUR.   THE BOY'S FROISSART.
+KNIGHTLY LEGENDS OF WALES.   THE BOY'S PERCY.
+
+Four volumes, cloth, uniform binding. Price per set $7.00. Sold
+separately. Price per volume $2.00.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+"Amid all the strange and fanciful scenery of these stories,
+character and the ideals of character remain at the simplest and the
+purest. The romantic history transpires in the healthy atmosphere of
+the open air, on the green earth beneath the open sky.... The figures
+of Right, Truth, Justice, Honor, Purity, Courage, Reverence for Law,
+are always in the background; and the grand passion inspired by the
+book is for strength to do well and nobly in the world."--The
+Independent.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+THE BOY'S
+Library of Pluck and Action.
+
+A JOLLY FELLOWSHIP, By Frank R. Stockton.
+HANS BRINKER; OR, THE SILVER SKATES. A story of life in Holland. By
+   Mrs. Mary Mapes Dodge.
+THE BOY EMIGRANTS, By Noah Brooks.
+PHAETON ROGERS, By Rossiter Johnson.
+
+Four volumes, 12mo, in a box, illustrated, $5.00. Sold separately,
+price per volume $1.50.
+
+In the "Boy's Library of Pluck and Action," the design was to bring
+together the representative and most popular books of four of the
+best known writers for young people. The names of Mary Mapes Dodge,
+Frank R. Stockton, Noah Brooks, and Rossiter Johnson are familiar
+ones in every household, and a set of books, to which each has
+contributed one, forms a present that will delight the heart of every
+boy who likes manly, spirited, and amusing tales. The volumes are
+beautifully illustrated and uniformly bound in a most attractive
+form.
+
+
+SCRIBNER'S LIST OF JUVENILE BOOKS.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+The great legend of the Nibelungen told to boys and girls.
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+THE STORY OF SIEGFRIED.
+
+By JAMES BALDWIN.
+
+With a series of superb illustrations by Howard Pyle. One volume,
+square 12mo. $2.00.
+
+Mr. Baldwin has at last given "The Story of Siegfried" in the way in
+which it most appeals to the boy-reader,--simply and strongly told,
+with all its fire and action, yet without losing any of that strange
+charm of the myth, and that heroic pathos, which every previous
+attempt at a version, even for adult readers, has failed to catch.
+
+
+THE STORY OF ROLAND.
+
+By JAMES BALDWIN.
+
+With a series of illustrations by R.B. Birch. One volume, square
+12mo. $2.00.
+
+This volume is intended as a companion to "The Story of Siegfried."
+As Siegfried was an adaptation of Northern myths and romances to the
+wants and the understanding of young readers, so is this story a
+similar adaptation of the middle-age romances relating to Charlemagne
+and his paladins. As Siegfried was the greatest of the heroes of the
+North, so, too, was Roland the most famous among the knights of the
+Middle Ages.
+
+"We congratulate the boys of the land upon the appearance of this
+book. We commend it to parents who are selecting literature for their
+children, assured, as we are, that it will convince them that books
+may be found which will engage the attention, and stimulate the
+imagination, of the young, without dissipating the mind, or blunting
+the moral sensibilities."--Philadelphia Messenger.
+
+
+THE FIRST REALLY PRACTICAL BOY'S BOOK.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+THE AMERICAN BOY'S HANDY BOOK;
+
+Or, WHAT TO DO AND HOW TO DO IT.
+
+By DANIEL C. BEARD.
+
+With three hundred illustrations by the author. One volume, 8vo.
+$2.00.
+
+Mr. Beard's book is the first to tell the active, inventive, and
+practical American boy the things he really wants to know, the
+thousand things he wants to do, and the ten thousand ways in which he
+can do them, with the helps and ingenious contrivances which every
+boy can either procure or make.
+
+The author divides the book among the sports of the four seasons; and
+he has made an almost exhaustive collection of the cleverest modern
+devices, besides himself inventing an immense number of capital and
+practical ideas.
+
+
+FRANK R. STOCKTON'S POPULAR STORIES.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+THE STORY OF VITEAU.
+
+With sixteen full-page illustrations by R.B. Birch.
+
+One volume, 12mo, extra cloth. $1.50.
+
+In "The Story of Viteau," Mr. Stockton has opened a new vein, and one
+that he has shown all his well-known skill and ability in working.
+While describing the life and surroundings of Raymond, Louis, and
+Agnes at Viteau at the Castle of De Barran, or in the woods among the
+Cotereaux, he gives a picture of France in the age of chivalry, and
+tells, at the same time, a romantic and absorbing story of adventure
+and knightly daring. Mr. Birch's spirited illustrations add much to
+the attraction of the book.
+
+
+A JOLLY FELLOWSHIP.
+
+Illustrated. One volume, 12mo, extra cloth. $1.50.
+
+"'A Jolly Fellowship,' by Mr. Frank Stockton, is a worthy successor
+to his 'Rudder Grange.' Although written for lads, it is full of
+delicious nonsense that will be enjoyed by men and women.... The less
+serious parts are described with a mock gravity that is the
+perfection of harmless burlesque, while all the nonsense has a vein
+of good sense running through it, so that really useful information
+is conveyed to the young and untravelled reader's mind."--Philadelphia
+Evening Bulletin.
+
+
+THE FLOATING PRINCE, AND OTHER FAIRY TALES.
+
+With illustrations by Bensell and others. One volume, quarto, boards.
+$1.50.
+
+"Stockton has the knack, perhaps genius would be a better word, of
+writing in the easiest of colloquial English, without descending to
+the plane of the vulgar or commonplace. The very perfection of his
+work hinders the reader from perceiving at once how good of its kind
+it is.... With the added charm of a most delicate humor,--a real
+humor, mellow, tender, and informed by a singularly quaint and racy
+fancy,--his stories become irresistibly attractive."--Philadelphia
+Times.
+
+
+NEW EDITIONS OF OLD FAVORITES.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+ROUNDABOUT RAMBLES IN LANDS OF FACT AND FICTION.
+
+One volume, quarto, boards, with very attractive lithographed cover,
+three hundred and seventy pages, two hundred illustrations. A new
+edition. Price reduced from $3.00 to $1.50.
+
+
+TALES OUT OF SCHOOL.
+
+One volume, quarto, boards, with handsome lithographed cover, three
+hundred and fifty pages, nearly two hundred illustrations. A new
+edition. Price reduced from $3.00 to $1.50.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Charles Scribner's Sons, Publishers, 743 and 745 Broadway, New York.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Bee-Man of Orn and Other Fanciful
+Tales, by Frank R. Stockton
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BEE-MAN OF ORN AND OTHERS ***
+
+***** This file should be named 12067-8.txt or 12067-8.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/1/2/0/6/12067/
+
+Produced by Suzanne Shell, Kevin Field and PG Distributed Proofreaders
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook's
+eBook number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII,
+compressed (zipped), HTML and others.
+
+Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks replace the old file and take over
+the old filename and etext number.  The replaced older file is renamed.
+VERSIONS based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving
+new filenames and etext numbers.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+EBooks posted prior to November 2003, with eBook numbers BELOW #10000,
+are filed in directories based on their release date.  If you want to
+download any of these eBooks directly, rather than using the regular
+search system you may utilize the following addresses and just
+download by the etext year.
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org/etext06
+
+    (Or /etext 05, 04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99,
+     98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90)
+
+EBooks posted since November 2003, with etext numbers OVER #10000, are
+filed in a different way.  The year of a release date is no longer part
+of the directory path.  The path is based on the etext number (which is
+identical to the filename).  The path to the file is made up of single
+digits corresponding to all but the last digit in the filename.  For
+example an eBook of filename 10234 would be found at:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org/1/0/2/3/10234
+
+or filename 24689 would be found at:
+     https://www.gutenberg.org/2/4/6/8/24689
+
+An alternative method of locating eBooks:
+     https://www.gutenberg.org/GUTINDEX.ALL
+
+
diff --git a/old/12067-8.zip b/old/12067-8.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..20c02c7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/12067-8.zip
diff --git a/old/12067-h.zip b/old/12067-h.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..09ec199
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/12067-h.zip
diff --git a/old/12067-h/12067-h.htm b/old/12067-h/12067-h.htm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ec3b8f6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/12067-h/12067-h.htm
@@ -0,0 +1,8723 @@
+<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
+<html>
+<head>
+<meta http-equiv="Content-Type"
+    content="text/html; charset=us-ascii">
+<meta content="pg2html (binary version 0.15)"
+    name="generator">
+<title>The Project Gutenberg eBook of
+	The Bee-Man of Orn,
+	by Frank R. Stockton
+</title>
+<style type="text/css">
+    <!--
+ body { margin-left: 5%; margin-right: 5%; }
+    p { text-indent:   1em;
+        margin-top:    .75em;
+        font-size:     100%;
+        text-align:    justify;
+        margin-bottom: .75em; }
+    h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6 { text-align: center; }
+    hr  { width: 50%; }
+    hr.full { width: 100%; }
+    .poem { margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%; margin-bottom: 1em; text-align: left; }
+    .poem .stanza { margin: 1em 0em 1em 0em; }
+    .poem p     { margin: 0; padding-left: 3em; text-indent: -3em; }
+    .poem p.i2  { margin-left: 1em; }
+    .poem p.i4  { margin-left: 2em; }
+    .poem p.i6  { margin-left: 3em; }
+    .poem p.i8  { margin-left: 4em; }
+    .poem p.i10 { margin-left: 5em; }
+    .toc  { margin-left: 35%; margin-bottom: 0em;}
+    // -->
+</style>
+</head>
+<body>
+
+
+<pre>
+
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Bee-Man of Orn and Other Fanciful Tales
+by Frank R. Stockton
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: The Bee-Man of Orn and Other Fanciful Tales
+
+Author: Frank R. Stockton
+
+Release Date: April 17, 2004 [EBook #12067]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BEE-MAN OF ORN AND OTHERS ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Suzanne Shell, Kevin Field and PG Distributed Proofreaders
+
+
+
+
+
+</pre>
+
+
+<div style="height: 4em;"></div>
+
+<center><table border=1 cellpadding=15 width="50%" summary=""><tr><td>
+<h2>FRANK R. STOCKTON'S WRITINGS.</h2>
+<hr>
+<center>
+    <i>New Uniform Edition</i>.
+</center>
+<p>THE BEE-MAN OF ORN, and Other Fanciful Tales.</p>
+<p>THE LADY OR THE TIGER? and Other Stories.</p>
+<p>THE CHRISTMAS WRECK, and Other Stories.</p>
+<p>THE LATE MRS NULL.</p>
+<p>RUDDER GRANGE.</p>
+
+<p>
+    <i>The set, five vols.</i>, $6.25; <i>each</i>, $1.25.
+</p>
+<hr>
+<p>
+    RUDDER GRANGE. <i>New Illustrated Edition</i>. With
+    over 100 Illustrations by A.B. Frost. Square
+    12mo, $2.00.
+</p>
+<hr>
+<p>
+    THE LADY OR THE TIGER? and Other Stories.
+    12mo, paper, 50 cents.
+</p>
+<p>
+    THE CHRISTMAS WRECK, and Other Stories. 12mo,
+    paper, 50 cents.
+</p>
+<p>
+    RUDDER GRANGE. 12mo, paper, 60 cents.
+</p>
+<hr>
+<p>
+    A JOLLY FRIENDSHIP. Illustrated, 12mo, $1.50.
+</p>
+<p>
+    THE STORY OF VITEAU. Illustrated, 12mo, $1.50.
+</p>
+<p>
+    THE TING-A-LING TALES. Illustrated, 12mo, $1.00.
+</p>
+<p>
+    THE FLOATING PRINCE, and Other Fairy Tales.
+    Illustrated, 4to, cloth, $2.50; boards, $1.50.
+</p>
+<p>
+    ROUNDABOUT RAMBLERS IN LANDS OF FACT AND FANCY. Illustrated. 4to, boards, $1.50.
+</p>
+<p>
+    TALES OUT OF SCHOOL. Illustrated. 4to, boards, $1.50.
+</p>
+</td></tr></table></center>
+
+<div style="height: 6em;"></div>
+
+<h2>
+    THE BEE-MAN OF ORN
+</h2>
+<h4>
+    AND
+</h4>
+<h2>
+    OTHER FANCIFUL TALES
+</h2>
+<h4>
+    BY
+</h4>
+<h3>
+    FRANK R. STOCKTON
+</h3>
+
+<div style="height: 2em;"></div>
+
+<h5>
+    New York<br>
+    Copyright, 1887,<br>
+    By Charles Scribner's Sons.
+</h5>
+<h5>
+    Rand Avery Company,<br>
+    Electrotypers and Printers,<br>
+    Boston.
+</h5>
+
+
+<hr>
+<h2><a name="contents">Contents</a></h2>
+<ol type="I">
+<li class="toc"><a href="#chapter1">
+THE BEE-MAN OF ORN.
+</a>
+<li class="toc"><a href="#chapter2">
+THE GRIFFIN AND THE MINOR CANON.
+</a>
+<li class="toc"><a href="#chapter3">
+OLD PIPES AND THE DRYAD.
+</a>
+<li class="toc"><a href="#chapter4">
+THE QUEEN'S MUSEUM.
+</a>
+<li class="toc"><a href="#chapter5">
+CHRISTMAS BEFORE LAST; OR, THE FRUIT OF THE FRAGILE PALM.
+</a>
+<li class="toc"><a href="#chapter6">
+PRINCE HASSAK'S MARCH.
+</a>
+<li class="toc"><a href="#chapter7">
+THE BATTLE OF THE THIRD COUSINS.
+</a>
+<li class="toc"><a href="#chapter8">
+THE BANISHED KING.
+</a>
+<li class="toc"><a href="#chapter9">
+THE PHILOPENA.
+</a>
+</ol>
+<hr>
+
+<a name="chapter1"></a>
+
+<div style="height: 2em;"></div>
+
+<h2>
+    THE BEE-MAN OF ORN.
+</h2>
+<hr>
+<p>
+    In the ancient country of Orn, there lived an old
+    man who was called the Bee-man, because his whole
+    time was spent in the company of bees. He lived in a
+    small hut, which was nothing more than an immense
+    bee-hive, for these little creatures had built their honeycombs
+    in every corner of the one room it contained, on
+    the shelves, under the little table, all about the rough
+    bench on which the old man sat, and even about the
+    head-board and along the sides of his low bed. All
+    day the air of the room was thick with buzzing insects,
+    but this did not interfere in any way with the old Bee-man,
+    who walked in among them, ate his meals, and
+    went to sleep, without the slightest fear of being
+    stung. He had lived with the bees so long, they had
+    become so accustomed to him, and his skin was so
+    tough and hard, that the bees no more thought of
+    stinging him than they would of stinging a tree or
+    a stone. A swarm of bees had made their hive in a
+    pocket of his old leathern doublet; and when he put
+    on this coat to take one of his long walks in the forest
+    in search of wild bees' nests, he was very glad to have
+    this hive with him, for, if he did not find any wild
+    honey, he would put his hand in his pocket and take
+    out a piece of a comb for a luncheon. The bees in
+    his pocket worked very industriously, and he was
+    always certain of having something to eat with him
+    wherever he went. He lived principally upon honey;
+    and when he needed bread or meat, he carried some
+    fine combs to a village not far away and bartered
+    them for other food. He was ugly, untidy, shrivelled,
+    and brown. He was poor, and the bees seemed to be
+    his only friends. But, for all that, he was happy and
+    contented; he had all the honey he wanted, and his
+    bees, whom he considered the best company in the
+    world, were as friendly and sociable as they could be,
+    and seemed to increase in number every day.
+</p>
+<p>
+    One day, there stopped at the hut of the Bee-man a
+    Junior Sorcerer. This young person, who was a student
+    of magic, necromancy, and the kindred arts, was
+    much interested in the Bee-man, whom he had frequently
+    noticed in his wanderings, and he considered
+    him an admirable subject for study. He had got a
+    great deal of useful practice by endeavoring to find
+    out, by the various rules and laws of sorcery, exactly
+    why the old Bee-man did not happen to be something
+    that he was not, and why he was what he happened to
+    be. He had studied a long time at this matter, and
+    had found out something.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Do you know," he said, when the Bee-man came
+    out of his hut, "that you have been transformed?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "What do you mean by that?" said the other,
+    much surprised.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "You have surely heard of animals and human
+    beings who have been magically transformed into
+    different kinds of creatures?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Yes, I have heard of these things," said the Bee-man;
+    "but what have I been transformed from?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "That is more than I know," said the Junior Sorcerer.
+    "But one thing is certain&mdash;you ought to be
+    changed back. If you will find out what you have been
+    transformed from, I will see that you are made all
+    right again. Nothing would please me better than to
+    attend to such a case."
+</p>
+<p>
+    And, having a great many things to study and investigate,
+    the Junior Sorcerer went his way.
+</p>
+<p>
+    This information greatly disturbed the mind of the
+    Bee-man. If he had been changed from something
+    else, he ought to be that other thing, whatever it was.
+    He ran after the young man, and overtook him.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "If you know, kind sir," he said, "that I have
+    been transformed, you surely are able to tell me what
+    it is that I was."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "No," said the Junior Sorcerer, "my studies have
+    not proceeded far enough for that. When I become a
+    senior I can tell you all about it. But, in the meantime,
+    it will be well for you to try to discover for yourself
+    your original form, and when you have done that,
+    I will get some of the learned masters of my art to
+    restore you to it. It will be easy enough to do that,
+    but you could not expect them to take the time and
+    trouble to find out what it was."
+</p>
+<p>
+    And, with these words, he hurried away, and was
+    soon lost to view.
+</p>
+<p>
+    Greatly disquieted, the Bee-man retraced his steps,
+    and went to his hut. Never before had he heard any
+    thing which had so troubled him.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I wonder what I was transformed from?" he
+    thought, seating himself on his rough bench. "Could
+    it have been a giant, or a powerful prince, or some
+    gorgeous being whom the magicians or the fairies
+    wished to punish? It may be that I was a dog or a
+    horse, or perhaps a fiery dragon or a horrid snake. I
+    hope it was not one of these. But, whatever it was,
+    every one has certainly a right to his original form,
+    and I am resolved to find out mine. I will start early
+    to-morrow morning, and I am sorry now that I have
+    not more pockets to my old doublet, so that I might
+    carry more bees and more honey for my journey."
+</p>
+<p>
+    He spent the rest of the day in making a hive of
+    twigs and straw, and, having transferred to this a
+    number of honey-combs and a colony of bees which
+    had just swarmed, he rose before sunrise the next day,
+    and having put on his leathern doublet, and having
+    bound his new hive to his back, he set forth on his
+    quest; the bees who were to accompany him buzzing
+    around him like a cloud.
+</p>
+<p>
+    As the Bee-man passed through the little village the
+    people greatly wondered at his queer appearance, with
+    the hive upon his back. "The Bee-man is going on a
+    long expedition this time," they said; but no one
+    imagined the strange business on which he was bent.
+    About noon he sat down under a tree, near a beautiful
+    meadow covered with blossoms, and ate a little honey.
+    Then he untied his hive and stretched himself out on
+    the grass to rest. As he gazed upon his bees hovering
+    about him, some going out to the blossoms in the
+    sunshine, and some returning laden with the sweet
+    pollen, he said to himself, "They know just what they
+    have to do, and they do it; but alas for me! I know
+    not what I may have to do. And yet, whatever it
+    may be, I am determined to do it. In some way or
+    other I will find out what was my original form, and
+    then I will have myself changed back to it."
+</p>
+<p>
+    And now the thought came to him that perhaps his
+    original form might have been something very disagreeable,
+    or even horrid.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "But it does not matter," he said sturdily. "Whatever
+    I was that shall I be again. It is not right for
+    any one to retain a form which does not properly belong
+    to him. I have no doubt I shall discover my
+    original form in the same way that I find the trees in
+    which the wild bees hive. When I first catch sight of
+    a bee-tree I am drawn towards it, I know not how.
+    Something says to me: 'That is what you are looking
+    for.' In the same way I believe that I shall find my
+    original form. When I see it, I shall be drawn towards
+    it. Something will say to me: 'That is it.'"
+</p>
+<p>
+    When the Bee-man was rested he started off again,
+    and in about an hour he entered a fair domain. Around
+    him were beautiful lawns, grand trees, and lovely gardens;
+    while at a little distance stood the stately palace
+    of the Lord of the Domain. Richly dressed people
+    were walking about or sitting in the shade of the trees
+    and arbors; splendidly caparisoned horses were waiting
+    for their riders; and everywhere were seen signs
+    of opulence and gayety.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I think," said the Bee-man to himself, "that I
+    should like to stop here for a time. If it should happen
+    that I was originally like any of these happy
+    creatures it would please me much."
+</p>
+<p>
+    He untied his hive, and hid it behind some bushes,
+    and taking off his old doublet, laid that beside it. It
+    would not do to have his bees flying about him if
+    he wished to go among the inhabitants of this fair
+    domain.
+</p>
+<p>
+    For two days the Bee-man wandered about the palace
+    and its grounds, avoiding notice as much as possible,
+    but looking at every thing. He saw handsome
+    men and lovely ladies; the finest horses, dogs, and
+    cattle that were ever known; beautiful birds in cages,
+    and fishes in crystal globes, and it seemed to him that
+    the best of all living things were here collected.
+</p>
+<p>
+    At the close of the second day, the Bee-man said to
+    himself: "There is one being here toward whom I
+    feel very much drawn, and that is the Lord of the
+    Domain. I cannot feel certain that I was once like
+    him, but it would be a very fine thing if it were so;
+    and it seems impossible for me to be drawn toward any
+    other being in the domain when I look upon him, so
+    handsome, rich, and powerful. But I must observe
+    him more closely, and feel more sure of the matter,
+    before applying to the sorcerers to change me back
+    into a lord of a fair domain."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The next morning, the Bee-man saw the Lord of
+    the Domain walking in his gardens. He slipped along
+    the shady paths, and followed him so as to observe
+    him closely, and find out if he were really drawn
+    toward this noble and handsome being. The Lord of
+    the Domain walked on for some time, not noticing
+    that the Bee-man was behind him. But suddenly
+    turning, he saw the little old man.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "What are you doing here, you vile beggar?" he
+    cried; and he gave him a kick that sent him into some
+    bushes that grew by the side of the path.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Bee-man scrambled to his feet, and ran as fast
+    as he could to the place where he had hidden his hive
+    and his old doublet.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "If I am certain of any thing," he thought, "it is
+    that I was never a person who would kick a poor old
+    man. I will leave this place. I was transformed
+    from nothing that I see here."
+</p>
+<p>
+    He now travelled for a day or two longer, and then
+    he came to a great black mountain, near the bottom of
+    which was an opening like the mouth of a cave.
+</p>
+<p>
+    This mountain he had heard was filled with caverns
+    and under-ground passages, which were the abodes of
+    dragons, evil spirits, horrid creatures of all kinds.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Ah me!" said the Bee-man with a sigh, "I suppose
+    I ought to visit this place. If I am going to do
+    this thing properly, I should look on all sides of the
+    subject, and I may have been one of those horrid
+    creatures myself."
+</p>
+<p>
+    Thereupon he went to the mountain, and as he
+    approached the opening of the passage which led into
+    its inmost recesses he saw, sitting upon the ground,
+    and leaning his back against a tree, a Languid Youth.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Good-day," said this individual when he saw the
+    Bee-man. "Are you going inside?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Yes," said the Bee-man, "that is what I intend to
+    do."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Then," said the Languid Youth, slowly rising to
+    his feet, "I think I will go with you. I was told that
+    if I went in there I should get my energies toned up,
+    and they need it very much; but I did not feel equal
+    to entering by myself, and I thought I would wait
+    until some one came along. I am very glad to see
+    you, and we will go in together."
+</p>
+<p>
+    So the two went into the cave, and they had proceeded
+    but a short distance when they met a very little
+    creature, whom it was easy to recognize as a Very
+    Imp. He was about two feet high, and resembled
+    in color a freshly polished pair of boots. He was
+    extremely lively and active, and came bounding
+    toward them.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "What did you two people come here for?" he
+    asked.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I came," said the Languid Youth, "to have my
+    energies toned up."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "You have come to the right place," said the Very
+    Imp. "We will tone you up. And what does that
+    old Bee-man want?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "He has been transformed from something, and
+    wants to find out what it is. He thinks he may have
+    been one of the things in here."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I should not wonder if that were so," said the
+    Very Imp, rolling his head on one side, and eying the
+    Bee-man with a critical gaze.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "All right," said the Very Imp; "he can go around,
+    and pick out his previous existence. We have here all
+    sorts of vile creepers, crawlers, hissers, and snorters.
+    I suppose he thinks any thing will be better than a
+    Bee-man."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "It is not because I want to be better than I am,"
+    said the Bee-man, "that I started out on this search.
+    I have simply an honest desire to become what I originally
+    was."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Oh! that is it, is it?" said the other. "There is
+    an idiotic moon-calf here with a clam head, which
+    must be just like what you used to be."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Nonsense," said the Bee-man. "You have not
+    the least idea what an honest purpose is. I shall go
+    about, and see for myself."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Go ahead," said the Very Imp, "and I will attend
+    to this fellow who wants to be toned up." So saying
+    he joined the Languid Youth.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Look here," said that individual, regarding him
+    with interest, "do you black and shine yourself every
+    morning?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "No," said the other, "it is water-proof varnish.
+    You want to be invigorated, don't you? Well, I will
+    tell you a splendid way to begin. You see that Bee-man
+    has put down his hive and his coat with the bees
+    in it. Just wait till he gets out of sight, and then
+    catch a lot of those bees, and squeeze them flat. If
+    you spread them on a sticky rag, and make a plaster,
+    and put it on the small of your back, it will invigorate
+    you like every thing, especially if some of the bees are
+    not quite dead."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Yes," said the Languid Youth, looking at him
+    with his mild eyes, "but if I had energy enough to
+    catch a bee I would be satisfied. Suppose you catch
+    a lot for me."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "The subject is changed," said the Very Imp.
+    "We are now about to visit the spacious chamber of
+    the King of the Snap-dragons."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "That is a flower," said the Languid Youth.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "You will find him a gay old blossom," said the
+    other. "When he has chased you round his room,
+    and has blown sparks at you, and has snorted and
+    howled, and cracked his tail, and snapped his jaws
+    like a pair of anvils, your energies will be toned up
+    higher than ever before in your life."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "No doubt of it," said the Languid Youth; "but
+    I think I will begin with something a little milder."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Well then," said other, "there is a flat-tailed
+    Demon of the Gorge in here. He is generally asleep,
+    and, if you say so, you can slip into the farthest
+    corner of his cave, and I'll solder his tail to the opposite
+    wall. Then he will rage and roar, but he can't
+    get at you, for he doesn't reach all the way across his
+    cave; I have measured him. It will tone you up wonderfully
+    to sit there and watch him."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Very likely," said the Languid Youth; "but I
+    would rather stay outside and let you go up in the
+    corner. The performance in that way will be more
+    interesting to me."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "You are dreadfully hard to please," said the Very
+    Imp. "I have offered them to you loose, and I have
+    offered them fastened to a wall, and now the best
+    thing I can do is to give you a chance at one of them
+    that can't move at all. It is the Ghastly Griffin and
+    is enchanted. He can't stir so much as the tip of his
+    whiskers for a thousand years. You can go to his
+    cave and examine him just as if he were stuffed, and
+    then you can sit on his back and think how it would
+    be if you should live to be a thousand years old, and
+    he should wake up while you are sitting there. It
+    would be easy to imagine a lot of horrible things he
+    would do to you when you look at his open mouth
+    with its awful fangs, his dreadful claws, and his horrible
+    wings all covered with spikes."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I think that might suit me," said the Languid
+    Youth. "I would much rather imagine the exercises
+    of these monsters than to see them really going on."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Come on, then," said the Very Imp, and he led
+    the way to the cave of the Ghastly Griffin.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Bee-man went by himself through a great part
+    of the mountain, and looked into many of its gloomy
+    caves and recesses, recoiling in horror from most of the
+    dreadful monsters who met his eyes. While he was
+    wandering about, an awful roar was heard resounding
+    through the passages of the mountain, and soon there
+    came flapping along an enormous dragon, with body
+    black as night, and wings and tail of fiery red. In
+    his great fore-claws he bore a little baby.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Horrible!" exclaimed the Bee-man. "He is
+    taking that little creature to his cave to devour it."
+</p>
+<p>
+    He saw the dragon enter a cave not far away, and
+    following looked in. The dragon was crouched upon
+    the ground with the little baby lying before him. It
+    did not seem to be hurt, but was frightened and crying.
+    The monster was looking upon it with delight,
+    as if he intended to make a dainty meal of it as soon
+    as his appetite should be a little stronger.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "It is too bad!" thought the Bee-man. "Somebody
+    ought to do something." And turning around, he ran
+    away as fast as he could.
+</p>
+<p>
+    He ran through various passages until he came to
+    the spot where he had left his bee-hive. Picking it
+    up, he hurried back, carrying the hive in his two hands
+    before him. When he reached the cave of the dragon,
+    he looked in and saw the monster still crouched over
+    the weeping child. Without a moment's hesitation,
+    the Bee-man rushed into the cave and threw his hive
+    straight into the face of the dragon. The bees,
+    enraged by the shock, rushed out in an angry crowd
+    and immediately fell upon the head, mouth, eyes, and
+    nose of the dragon. The great monster, astounded
+    by this sudden attack, and driven almost wild by the
+    numberless stings of the bees, sprang back to the
+    farthest portion of his cave, still followed by his
+    relentless enemies, at whom he flapped wildly with
+    his great wings and struck with his paws. While the
+    dragon was thus engaged with the bees, the Bee-man
+    rushed forward, and, seizing the child, he hurried
+    away. He did not stop to pick up his doublet, but
+    kept on until he reached the entrance of the caves.
+    There he saw the Very Imp hopping along on one leg,
+    and rubbing his back and shoulders with his hands,
+    and stopped to inquire what was the matter, and what
+    had become of the Languid Youth.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "He is no kind of a fellow," said the Very Imp.
+    "He disappointed me dreadfully. I took him up to
+    the Ghastly Griffin, and told him the thing was enchanted,
+    and that he might sit on its back and think
+    about what it could do if it was awake; and when
+    he came near it the wretched creature opened its eyes,
+    and raised its head, and then you ought to have seen
+    how mad that simpleton was. He made a dash at me
+    and seized me by the ears; he kicked and beat me
+    till I can scarcely move."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "His energies must have been toned up a good
+    deal," said the Bee-man.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Toned up! I should say so!" cried the other. "I
+    raised a howl, and a Scissor-jawed Clipper came out
+    of his hole, and got after him; but that lazy fool ran
+    so fast that he could not be caught."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Bee-man now ran on and soon overtook the
+    Languid Youth.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "You need not be in a hurry now," said the latter,
+    "for the rules of this institution don't allow the
+    creatures inside to come out of this opening, or to hang
+    around it. If they did, they would frighten away
+    visitors. They go in and out of holes in the upper
+    part of the mountain."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The two proceeded on their way.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "What are you going to do with that baby?" said
+    the Languid Youth.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I shall carry it along with me," said the Bee-man,
+    "as I go on with my search, and perhaps I may find
+    its mother. If I do not, I shall give it to somebody
+    in that little village yonder. Any thing would be better
+    than leaving it to be devoured by that horrid
+    dragon."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Let me carry it. I feel quite strong enough now
+    to carry a baby."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Thank you," said the Bee-man, "but I can take
+    it myself. I like to carry something, and I have now
+    neither my hive nor my doublet."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "It is very well that you had to leave them behind,"
+    said the Youth, "for the bees would have stung the
+    baby."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "My bees never sting babies," said the other.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "They probably never had a chance," remarked his
+    companion.
+</p>
+<p>
+    They soon entered the village, and after walking a
+    short distance the youth exclaimed: "Do you see that
+    woman over there sitting at the door of her house?
+    She has beautiful hair and she is tearing it all to
+    pieces. She should not be allowed to do that."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "No," said the Bee-man. "Her friends should tie
+    her hands."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Perhaps she is the mother of this child," said the
+    Youth, "and if you give it to her she will no longer
+    think of tearing her hair."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "But," said the Bee-man, "you don't really think
+    this is her child?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Suppose you go over and see," said the other.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Bee-man hesitated a moment, and then he
+    walked toward the woman. Hearing him coming, she
+    raised her head, and when she saw the child she rushed
+    towards it, snatched it into her arms, and screaming
+    with joy she covered it with kisses. Then with happy
+    tears she begged to know the story of the rescue of
+    her child, whom she never expected to see again; and
+    she loaded the Bee-man with thanks and blessings.
+    The friends and neighbors gathered around and there
+    was great rejoicing. The mother urged the Bee-man
+    and the Youth to stay with her, and rest and refresh
+    themselves, which they were glad to do as they were
+    tired and hungry.
+</p>
+<p>
+    They remained at the cottage all night, and in the
+    afternoon of the next day the Bee-man said to the
+    Youth: "It may seem an odd thing to you, but never in
+    all my life have I felt myself drawn towards any living
+    being as I am drawn towards this baby. Therefore I
+    believe that I have been transformed from a baby."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Good!" cried the Youth. "It is my opinion that
+    you have hit the truth. And now would you like to
+    be changed back to your original form?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Indeed I would!" said the Bee-man, "I have the
+    strongest yearning to be what I originally was."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Youth, who had now lost every trace of languid
+    feeling, took a great interest in the matter, and early
+    the next morning started off to inform the Junior
+    Sorcerer that the Bee-man had discovered what he had
+    been transformed from, and desired to be changed
+    back to it.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Junior Sorcerer and his learned Masters were
+    filled with enthusiasm when they heard this report, and
+    they at once set out for the mother's cottage. And
+    there by magic arts the Bee-man was changed back
+    into a baby. The mother was so grateful for what
+    the Bee-man had done for her that she agreed to
+    take charge of this baby, and to bring it up as her
+    own.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "It will be a grand thing for him," said the Junior
+    Sorcerer, "and I am glad that I studied his case. He
+    will now have a fresh start in life, and will have a
+    chance to become something better than a miserable
+    old man living in a wretched hut with no friends or
+    companions but buzzing bees."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Junior Sorcerer and his Masters then returned
+    to their homes, happy in the success of their great
+    performance; and the Youth went back to his home
+    anxious to begin a life of activity and energy.
+</p>
+<p>
+    Years and years afterward, when the Junior Sorcerer
+    had become a Senior and was very old indeed, he
+    passed through the country of Orn, and noticed a small
+    hut about which swarms of bees were flying. He approached
+    it, and looking in at the door he saw an old
+    man in a leathern doublet, sitting at a table, eating
+    honey. By his magic art he knew this was the baby
+    which had been transformed from the Bee-man.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Upon my word!" exclaimed the Sorcerer, "He
+    has grown into the same thing again!"
+</p>
+<a name="chapter2"><!-- H2 anchor --></a>
+
+<div style="height: 2em;"></div>
+
+<h2>
+    THE GRIFFIN AND THE MINOR CANON.
+</h2>
+<hr>
+<p>
+    Over the great door of an old, old church which
+    stood in a quiet town of a far-away land there
+    was carved in stone the figure of a large griffin. The
+    old-time sculptor had done his work with great care,
+    but the image he had made was not a pleasant one to
+    look at. It had a large head, with enormous open
+    mouth and savage teeth; from its back arose great
+    wings, armed with sharp hooks and prongs; it had stout
+    legs in front, with projecting claws; but there were
+    no legs behind,&mdash;the body running out into a long and
+    powerful tail, finished off at the end with a barbed
+    point. This tail was coiled up under him, the end
+    sticking up just back of his wings.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The sculptor, or the people who had ordered this
+    stone figure, had evidently been very much pleased
+    with it, for little copies of it, also in stone, had been
+    placed here and there along the sides of the church,
+    not very far from the ground, so that people could
+    easily look at them, and ponder on their curious forms.
+    There were a great many other sculptures on the outside
+    of this church,&mdash;saints, martyrs, grotesque heads
+    of men, beasts, and birds, as well as those of other
+    creatures which cannot be named, because nobody
+    knows exactly what they were; but none were so
+    curious and interesting as the great griffin over the
+    door, and the little griffins on the sides of the church.
+</p>
+<p>
+    A long, long distance from the town, in the midst
+    of dreadful wilds scarcely known to man, there dwelt
+    the Griffin whose image had been put up over the
+    church-door. In some way or other, the old-time
+    sculptor had seen him, and afterward, to the best of
+    his memory, had copied his figure in stone. The
+    Griffin had never known this, until, hundreds of years
+    afterward, he heard from a bird, from a wild animal,
+    or in some manner which it is not now easy to find
+    out, that there was a likeness of him on the old church
+    in the distant town. Now, this Griffin had no idea
+    how he looked. He had never seen a mirror, and the
+    streams where he lived were so turbulent and violent
+    that a quiet piece of water, which would reflect the
+    image of any thing looking into it, could not be found.
+    Being, as far as could be ascertained, the very last of
+    his race, he had never seen another griffin. Therefore
+    it was, that, when he heard of this stone image
+    of himself, he became very anxious to know what he
+    looked like, and at last he determined to go to the old
+    church, and see for himself what manner of being he
+    was. So he started off from the dreadful wilds, and
+    flew on and on until he came to the countries inhabited
+    by men, where his appearance in the air created great
+    consternation; but he alighted nowhere, keeping up a
+    steady flight until he reached the suburbs of the town
+    which had his image on its church. Here, late in the
+    afternoon, he alighted in a green meadow by the side
+    of a brook, and stretched himself on the grass to rest.
+    His great wings were tired, for he had not made such
+    a long flight in a century, or more.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The news of his coming spread quickly over the
+    town, and the people, frightened nearly out of their
+    wits by the arrival of so extraordinary a visitor, fled
+    into their houses, and shut themselves up. The Griffin
+    called loudly for some one to come to him, but the
+    more he called, the more afraid the people were to
+    show themselves. At length he saw two laborers hurrying
+    to their homes through the fields, and in a terrible
+    voice he commanded them to stop. Not daring to
+    disobey, the men stood, trembling.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "What is the matter with you all?" cried the
+    Griffin. "Is there not a man in your town who is
+    brave enough to speak to me?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I think," said one of the laborers, his voice shaking
+    so that his words could hardly be understood,
+    "that&mdash;perhaps&mdash;the Minor Canon&mdash;would come."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Go, call him, then!" said the Griffin; "I want
+    to see him."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Minor Canon, who filled a subordinate position
+    in the old church, had just finished the afternoon services,
+    and was coming out of a side door, with three
+    aged women who had formed the week-day congregation.
+    He was a young man of a kind disposition, and
+    very anxious to do good to the people of the town.
+    Apart from his duties in the church, where he conducted
+    services every week-day, he visited the sick
+    and the poor, counselled and assisted persons who were
+    in trouble, and taught a school composed entirely of
+    the bad children in the town with whom nobody else
+    would have any thing to do. Whenever the people
+    wanted something difficult done for them, they always
+    went to the Minor Canon. Thus it was that the
+    laborer thought of the young priest when he found that
+    some one must come and speak to the Griffin.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Minor Canon had not heard of the strange
+    event, which was known to the whole town except
+    himself and the three old women, and when he was
+    informed of it, and was told that the Griffin had asked
+    to see him, he was greatly amazed, and frightened.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Me!" he exclaimed. "He has never heard of
+    me! What should he want with <i>me?</i>"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Oh! you must go instantly!" cried the two men.
+    "He is very angry now because he has been kept waiting
+    so long; and nobody knows what may happen if
+    you don't hurry to him."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The poor Minor Canon would rather have had his
+    hand cut off than go out to meet an angry griffin; but
+    he felt that it was his duty to go, for it would be a
+    woful thing if injury should come to the people of the
+    town because he was not brave enough to obey the
+    summons of the Griffin. So, pale and frightened, he
+    started off.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Well," said the Griffin, as soon as the young man
+    came near, "I am glad to see that there is some one
+    who has the courage to come to me."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Minor Canon did not feel very courageous, but
+    he bowed his head.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Is this the town," said the Griffin, "where there
+    is a church with a likeness of myself over one of the
+    doors?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Minor Canon looked at the frightful creature
+    before him and saw that it was, without doubt, exactly
+    like the stone image on the church. "Yes," he said,
+    "you are right."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Well, then," said the Griffin, "will you take me
+    to it? I wish very much to see it."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Minor Canon instantly thought that if the Griffin
+    entered the town without the people knowing what he
+    came for, some of them would probably be frightened
+    to death, and so he sought to gain time to prepare
+    their minds.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "It is growing dark, now," he said, very much
+    afraid, as he spoke, that his words might enrage the
+    Griffin, "and objects on the front of the church can
+    not be seen clearly. It will be better to wait until
+    morning, if you wish to get a good view of the stone
+    image of yourself."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "That will suit me very well," said the Griffin. "I
+    see you are a man of good sense. I am tired, and I
+    will take a nap here on this soft grass, while I cool my
+    tail in the little stream that runs near me. The end of
+    my tail gets red-hot when I am angry or excited, and
+    it is quite warm now. So you may go, but be sure
+    and come early to-morrow morning, and show me the
+    way to the church."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Minor Canon was glad enough to take his leave,
+    and hurried into the town. In front of the church he
+    found a great many people assembled to hear his
+    report of his interview with the Griffin. When they
+    found that he had not come to spread ruin and devastation,
+    but simply to see his stony likeness on the
+    church, they showed neither relief nor gratification,
+    but began to upbraid the Minor Canon for consenting
+    to conduct the creature into the town.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "What could I do?" cried the young man. "If I
+    should not bring him he would come himself and,
+    perhaps, end by setting fire to the town with his red-hot
+    tail."
+</p>
+<p>
+    Still the people were not satisfied, and a great many
+    plans were proposed to prevent the Griffin from coming
+    into the town. Some elderly persons urged that
+    the young men should go out and kill him; but the
+    young men scoffed at such a ridiculous idea. Then
+    some one said that it would be a good thing to destroy
+    the stone image so that the Griffin would have no
+    excuse for entering the town; and this proposal was
+    received with such favor that many of the people ran
+    for hammers, chisels, and crowbars, with which to tear
+    down and break up the stone griffin. But the Minor
+    Canon resisted this plan with all the strength of his
+    mind and body. He assured the people that this action
+    would enrage the Griffin beyond measure, for it would
+    be impossible to conceal from him that his image had
+    been destroyed during the night. But the people were
+    so determined to break up the stone griffin that the
+    Minor Canon saw that there was nothing for him to do
+    but to stay there and protect it. All night he walked
+    up and down in front of the church-door, keeping
+    away the men who brought ladders, by which they
+    might mount to the great stone griffin, and knock it
+    to pieces with their hammers and crowbars. After
+    many hours the people were obliged to give up their
+    attempts, and went home to sleep; but the Minor
+    Canon remained at his post till early morning, and
+    then he hurried away to the field where he had left the
+    Griffin.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The monster had just awakened, and rising to his
+    fore-legs and shaking himself, he said that he was
+    ready to go into the town. The Minor Canon, therefore,
+    walked back, the Griffin flying slowly through
+    the air, at a short distance above the head of his guide.
+    Not a person was to be seen in the streets, and they
+    proceeded directly to the front of the church, where
+    the Minor Canon pointed out the stone griffin.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The real Griffin settled down in the little square
+    before the church and gazed earnestly at his sculptured
+    likeness. For a long time he looked at it. First he
+    put his head on one side, and then he put it on the
+    other; then he shut his right eye and gazed with his
+    left, after which he shut his left eye and gazed with
+    his right. Then he moved a little to one side and
+    looked at the image, then he moved the other way.
+    After a while he said to the Minor Canon, who had
+    been standing by all this time:
+</p>
+<p>
+    "It is, it must be, an excellent likeness! That
+    breadth between the eyes, that expansive forehead,
+    those massive jaws! I feel that it must resemble me.
+    If there is any fault to find with it, it is that the neck
+    seems a little stiff. But that is nothing. It is an
+    admirable likeness,&mdash;admirable!"
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Griffin sat looking at his image all the morning
+    and all the afternoon. The Minor Canon had been
+    afraid to go away and leave him, and had hoped all
+    through the day that he would soon be satisfied with
+    his inspection and fly away home. But by evening
+    the poor young man was utterly exhausted, and felt
+    that he must eat and sleep. He frankly admitted this
+    fact to the Griffin, and asked him if he would not like
+    something to eat. He said this because he felt obliged
+    in politeness to do so, but as soon as he had spoken
+    the words, he was seized with dread lest the monster
+    should demand half a dozen babies, or some tempting
+    repast of that kind.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Oh, no," said the Griffin, "I never eat between
+    the equinoxes. At the vernal and at the autumnal
+    equinox I take a good meal, and that lasts me for
+    half a year. I am extremely regular in my habits,
+    and do not think it healthful to eat at odd times. But
+    if you need food, go and get it, and I will return to
+    the soft grass where I slept last night and take another
+    nap."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The next day the Griffin came again to the little
+    square before the church, and remained there until
+    evening, steadfastly regarding the stone griffin over
+    the door. The Minor Canon came once or twice to
+    look at him, and the Griffin seemed very glad to see
+    him; but the young clergyman could not stay as he
+    had done before, for he had many duties to perform.
+    Nobody went to the church, but the people came to
+    the Minor Canon's house, and anxiously asked him
+    how long the Griffin was going to stay.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I do not know," he answered, "but I think he
+    will soon be satisfied with regarding his stone likeness,
+    and then he will go away."
+</p>
+<p>
+    But the Griffin did not go away. Morning after
+    morning he came to the church, but after a time he
+    did not stay there all day. He seemed to have taken
+    a great fancy to the Minor Canon, and followed him
+    about as he pursued his various avocations. He would
+    wait for him at the side door of the church, for the
+    Minor Canon held services every day, morning and
+    evening, though nobody came now. "If any one
+    should come," he said to himself, "I must be found
+    at my post." When the young man came out, the
+    Griffin would accompany him in his visits to the sick
+    and the poor, and would often look into the windows
+    of the school-house where the Minor Canon was teaching
+    his unruly scholars. All the other schools were
+    closed, but the parents of the Minor Canon's scholars
+    forced them to go to school, because they were so bad
+    they could not endure them all day at home,&mdash;griffin
+    or no griffin. But it must be said they generally
+    behaved very well when that great monster sat up on
+    his tail and looked in at the school-room window.
+</p>
+<p>
+    When it was perceived that the Griffin showed no
+    sign of going away, all the people who were able to
+    do so left the town. The canons and the higher
+    officers of the church had fled away during the first
+    day of the Griffin's visit, leaving behind only the
+    Minor Canon and some of the men who opened the
+    doors and swept the church. All the citizens who
+    could afford it shut up their houses and travelled to
+    distant parts, and only the working people and the
+    poor were left behind. After some days these ventured
+    to go about and attend to their business, for if
+    they did not work they would starve. They were getting
+    a little used to seeing the Griffin, and having been
+    told that he did not eat between equinoxes, they did
+    not feel so much afraid of him as before.
+</p>
+<p>
+    Day by day the Griffin became more and more
+    attached to the Minor Canon. He kept near him a
+    great part of the time, and often spent the night in
+    front of the little house where the young clergyman
+    lived alone. This strange companionship was often
+    burdensome to the Minor Canon; but, on the other
+    hand, he could not deny that he derived a great deal
+    of benefit and instruction from it. The Griffin had
+    lived for hundreds of years, and had seen much; and
+    he told the Minor Canon many wonderful things.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "It is like reading an old book," said the young
+    clergyman to himself; "but how many books I would
+    have had to read before I would have found out what
+    the Griffin has told me about the earth, the air, the
+    water, about minerals, and metals, and growing things,
+    and all the wonders of the world!"
+</p>
+<p>
+    Thus the summer went on, and drew toward its
+    close. And now the people of the town began to be
+    very much troubled again.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "It will not be long," they said, "before the
+    autumnal equinox is here, and then that monster will
+    want to eat. He will be dreadfully hungry, for he
+    has taken so much exercise since his last meal. He
+    will devour our children. Without doubt, he will eat
+    them all. What is to be done?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    To this question no one could give an answer, but
+    all agreed that the Griffin must not be allowed to
+    remain until the approaching equinox. After talking
+    over the matter a great deal, a crowd of the people
+    went to the Minor Canon, at a time when the Griffin
+    was not with him.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "It is all your fault," they said, "that that monster
+    is among us. You brought him here, and you ought
+    to see that he goes away. It is only on your account
+    that he stays here at all, for, although he visits his
+    image every day, he is with you the greater part of the
+    time. If you were not here, he would not stay. It
+    is your duty to go away and then he will follow you,
+    and we shall be free from the dreadful danger which
+    hangs over us."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Go away!" cried the Minor Canon, greatly grieved
+    at being spoken to in such a way. "Where shall I
+    go? If I go to some other town, shall I not take this
+    trouble there? Have I a right to do that?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "No," said the people, "you must not go to any
+    other town. There is no town far enough away.
+    You must go to the dreadful wilds where the Griffin
+    lives; and then he will follow you and stay there."
+</p>
+<p>
+    They did not say whether or not they expected the
+    Minor Canon to stay there also, and he did not ask them
+    any thing about it. He bowed his head, and went into
+    his house, to think. The more he thought, the more
+    clear it became to his mind that it was his duty to go
+    away, and thus free the town from the presence of the
+    Griffin.
+</p>
+<p>
+    That evening he packed a leathern bag full of bread
+    and meat, and early the next morning he set out on
+    his journey to the dreadful wilds. It was a long,
+    weary, and doleful journey, especially after he had
+    gone beyond the habitations of men, but the Minor
+    Canon kept on bravely, and never faltered. The way
+    was longer than he had expected, and his provisions
+    soon grew so scanty that he was obliged to eat but a
+    little every day, but he kept up his courage, and
+    pressed on, and, after many days of toilsome travel,
+    he reached the dreadful wilds.
+</p>
+<p>
+    When the Griffin found that the Minor Canon had
+    left the town he seemed sorry, but showed no disposition
+    to go and look for him. After a few days had
+    passed, he became much annoyed, and asked some of
+    the people where the Minor Canon had gone. But,
+    although the citizens had been so anxious that the
+    young clergyman should go to the dreadful wilds,
+    thinking that the Griffin would immediately follow
+    him, they were now afraid to mention the Minor
+    Canon's destination, for the monster seemed angry
+    already, and, if he should suspect their trick he would,
+    doubtless, become very much enraged. So every one
+    said he did not know, and the Griffin wandered about
+    disconsolate. One morning he looked into the Minor
+    Canon's school-house, which was always empty now,
+    and thought that it was a shame that every thing
+    should suffer on account of the young man's absence.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "It does not matter so much about the church,"
+    he said, "for nobody went there; but it is a pity
+    about the school. I think I will teach it myself until
+    he returns."
+</p>
+<p>
+    It was the hour for opening the school, and the
+    Griffin went inside and pulled the rope which rang
+    the school-bell. Some of the children who heard the
+    bell ran in to see what was the matter, supposing it
+    to be a joke of one of their companions; but when
+    they saw the Griffin they stood astonished, and
+    scared.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Go tell the other scholars," said the monster,
+    "that school is about to open, and that if they are
+    not all here in ten minutes, I shall come after them."
+</p>
+<p>
+    In seven minutes every scholar was in place.
+</p>
+<p>
+    Never was seen such an orderly school. Not a boy
+    or girl moved, or uttered a whisper. The Griffin
+    climbed into the master's seat, his wide wings spread
+    on each side of him, because he could not lean back
+    in his chair while they stuck out behind, and his great
+    tail coiled around, in front of the desk, the barbed
+    end sticking up, ready to tap any boy or girl who
+    might misbehave. The Griffin now addressed the
+    scholars, telling them that he intended to teach them
+    while their master was away. In speaking he endeavored
+    to imitate, as far as possible, the mild and
+    gentle tones of the Minor Canon, but it must be
+    admitted that in this he was not very successful. He
+    had paid a good deal of attention to the studies of the
+    school, and he determined not to attempt to teach
+    them any thing new, but to review them in what they
+    had been studying; so he called up the various classes,
+    and questioned them upon their previous lessons. The
+    children racked their brains to remember what they
+    had learned. They were so afraid of the Griffin's displeasure
+    that they recited as they had never recited
+    before. One of the boys, far down in his class,
+    answered so well that the Griffin was astonished.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I should think you would be at the head," said he.
+    "I am sure you have never been in the habit of reciting
+    so well. Why is this?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Because I did not choose to take the trouble,"
+    said the boy, trembling in his boots. He felt obliged
+    to speak the truth, for all the children thought that the
+    great eyes of the Griffin could see right through them,
+    and that he would know when they told a falsehood.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "You ought to be ashamed of yourself," said the
+    Griffin. "Go down to the very tail of the class, and
+    if you are not at the head in two days, I shall know the
+    reason why."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The next afternoon this boy was number one.
+</p>
+<p>
+    It was astonishing how much these children now
+    learned of what they had been studying. It was as if
+    they had been educated over again. The Griffin used
+    no severity toward them, but there was a look about
+    him which made them unwilling to go to bed until they
+    were sure they knew their lessons for the next day.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Griffin now thought that he ought to visit the
+    sick and the poor; and he began to go about the town
+    for this purpose. The effect upon the sick was miraculous.
+    All, except those who were very ill indeed,
+    jumped from their beds when they heard he was coming,
+    and declared themselves quite well. To those
+    who could not get up, he gave herbs and roots, which
+    none of them had ever before thought of as medicines,
+    but which the Griffin had seen used in various parts of
+    the world; and most of them recovered. But, for all
+    that, they afterward said that no matter what happened
+    to them, they hoped that they should never
+    again have such a doctor coming to their bed-sides,
+    feeling their pulses and looking at their tongues.
+</p>
+<p>
+    As for the poor, they seemed to have utterly disappeared.
+    All those who had depended upon charity for
+    their daily bread were now at work in some way or
+    other; many of them offering to do odd jobs for their
+    neighbors just for the sake of their meals,&mdash;a thing
+    which before had been seldom heard of in the town.
+    The Griffin could find no one who needed his assistance.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The summer had now passed, and the autumnal
+    equinox was rapidly approaching. The citizens were
+    in a state of great alarm and anxiety. The Griffin
+    showed no signs of going away, but seemed to have
+    settled himself permanently among them. In a short
+    time, the day for his semi-annual meal would arrive,
+    and then what would happen? The monster would
+    certainly be very hungry, and would devour all their
+    children.
+</p>
+<p>
+    Now they greatly regretted and lamented that they
+    had sent away the Minor Canon; he was the only one
+    on whom they could have depended in this trouble, for
+    he could talk freely with the Griffin, and so find out
+    what could be done. But it would not do to be inactive.
+    Some step must be taken immediately. A
+    meeting of the citizens was called, and two old men
+    were appointed to go and talk to the Griffin. They
+    were instructed to offer to prepare a splendid dinner
+    for him on equinox day,&mdash;one which would entirely
+    satisfy his hunger. They would offer him the fattest
+    mutton, the most tender beef, fish, and game of
+    various sorts, and any thing of the kind that he might
+    fancy. If none of these suited, they were to mention
+    that there was an orphan asylum in the next town.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Anything would be better," said the citizens,
+    "than to have our dear children devoured."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The old men went to the Griffin, but their propositions
+    were not received with favor.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "From what I have seen of the people of this
+    town," said the monster, "I do not think I could
+    relish any thing which was prepared by them. They
+    appear to be all cowards, and, therefore, mean and
+    selfish. As for eating one of them, old or young, I
+    could not think of it for a moment. In fact, there
+    was only one creature in the whole place for whom I
+    could have had any appetite, and that is the Minor
+    Canon, who has gone away. He was brave, and good,
+    and honest, and I think I should have relished him."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Ah!" said one of the old men very politely, "in
+    that case I wish we had not sent him to the dreadful
+    wilds!"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "What!" cried the Griffin. "What do you mean?
+    Explain instantly what you are talking about!"
+</p>
+<p>
+    The old man, terribly frightened at what he had
+    said, was obliged to tell how the Minor Canon had
+    been sent away by the people, in the hope that the
+    Griffin might be induced to follow him.
+</p>
+<p>
+    When the monster heard this, he became furiously
+    angry. He dashed away from the old men and, spreading
+    his wings, flew backward and forward over the
+    town. He was so much excited that his tail became
+    red-hot, and glowed like a meteor against the evening
+    sky. When at last he settled down in the little field
+    where he usually rested, and thrust his tail into the
+    brook, the steam arose like a cloud, and the water of
+    the stream ran hot through the town. The citizens
+    were greatly frightened, and bitterly blamed the old
+    man for telling about the Minor Canon.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "It is plain," they said, "that the Griffin intended
+    at last to go and look for him, and we should have
+    been saved. Now who can tell what misery you have
+    brought upon us."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Griffin did not remain long in the little field.
+    As soon as his tail was cool he flew to the town-hall
+    and rang the bell. The citizens knew that they were
+    expected to come there, and although they were afraid
+    to go, they were still more afraid to stay away; and
+    they crowded into the hall. The Griffin was on the
+    platform at one end, flapping his wings and walking
+    up and down, and the end of his tail was still so warm
+    that it slightly scorched the boards as he dragged it
+    after him.
+</p>
+<p>
+    When everybody who was able to come was there,
+    the Griffin stood still and addressed the meeting.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I have had a contemptible opinion of you," he
+    said, "ever since I discovered what cowards you are,
+    but I had no idea that you were so ungrateful, selfish,
+    and cruel, as I now find you to be. Here was your
+    Minor Canon, who labored day and night for your
+    good, and thought of nothing else but how he might
+    benefit you and make you happy; and as soon as you
+    imagine yourselves threatened with a danger,&mdash;for
+    well I know you are dreadfully afraid of me,&mdash;you
+    send him off, caring not whether he returns or perishes,
+    hoping thereby to save yourselves. Now, I had
+    conceived a great liking for that young man, and had
+    intended, in a day or two, to go and look him up. But
+    I have changed my mind about him. I shall go and
+    find him, but I shall send him back here to live among
+    you, and I intend that he shall enjoy the reward of his
+    labor and his sacrifices. Go, some of you, to the officers
+    of the church, who so cowardly ran away when I
+    first came here, and tell them never to return to this
+    town under penalty of death. And if, when your
+    Minor Canon comes back to you, you do not bow yourselves
+    before him, put him in the highest place among
+    you, and serve and honor him all his life, beware of
+    my terrible vengeance! There were only two good
+    things in this town: the Minor Canon and the stone
+    image of myself over your church-door. One of these
+    you have sent away, and the other I shall carry away
+    myself."
+</p>
+<p>
+    With these words he dismissed the meeting, and it
+    was time, for the end of his tail had become so hot that
+    there was danger of its setting fire to the building.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The next morning, the Griffin came to the church,
+    and tearing the stone image of himself from its fastenings
+    over the great door, he grasped it with his powerful
+    fore-legs and flew up into the air. Then, after
+    hovering over the town for a moment, he gave his tail
+    an angry shake and took up his flight to the dreadful
+    wilds. When he reached this desolate region, he set
+    the stone Griffin upon a ledge of a rock which rose in
+    front of the dismal cave he called his home. There the
+    image occupied a position somewhat similar to that it
+    had had over the church-door; and the Griffin, panting
+    with the exertion of carrying such an enormous load
+    to so great a distance, lay down upon the ground, and
+    regarded it with much satisfaction. When he felt
+    somewhat rested he went to look for the Minor Canon.
+    He found the young man, weak and half starved, lying
+    under the shadow of a rock. After picking him up
+    and carrying him to his cave, the Griffin flew away to
+    a distant marsh, where he procured some roots and
+    herbs which he well knew were strengthening and
+    beneficial to man, though he had never tasted them
+    himself. After eating these the Minor Canon was
+    greatly revived, and sat up and listened while the
+    Griffin told him what had happened in the town.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Do you know," said the monster, when he had
+    finished, "that I have had, and still have, a great
+    liking for you?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I am very glad to hear it," said the Minor Canon,
+    with his usual politeness.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I am not at all sure that you would be," said the
+    Griffin, "if you thoroughly understood the state of
+    the case, but we will not consider that now. If some
+    things were different, other things would be otherwise.
+    I have been so enraged by discovering the manner in
+    which you have been treated that I have determined
+    that you shall at last enjoy the rewards and honors
+    to which you are entitled. Lie down and have a good
+    sleep, and then I will take you back to the town."
+</p>
+<p>
+    As he heard these words, a look of trouble came
+    over the young man's face.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "You need not give yourself any anxiety," said the
+    Griffin, "about my return to the town. I shall not
+    remain there. Now that I have that admirable likeness
+    of myself in front of my cave, where I can sit at my
+    leisure, and gaze upon its noble features and magnificent
+    proportions, I have no wish to see that abode of
+    cowardly and selfish people."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Minor Canon, relieved from his fears, lay back,
+    and dropped into a doze; and when he was sound
+    asleep the Griffin took him up, and carried him back
+    to the town. He arrived just before day-break, and
+    putting the young man gently on the grass in the little
+    field where he himself used to rest, the monster,
+    without having been seen by any of the people, flew
+    back to his home.
+</p>
+<p>
+    When the Minor Canon made his appearance in the
+    morning among the citizens, the enthusiasm and cordiality
+    with which he was received were truly wonderful.
+    He was taken to a house which had been occupied by
+    one of the banished high officers of the place, and
+    every one was anxious to do all that could be done for
+    his health and comfort. The people crowded into the
+    church when he held services, so that the three old
+    women who used to be his week-day congregation could
+    not get to the best seats, which they had always been
+    in the habit of taking; and the parents of the bad children
+    determined to reform them at home, in order that
+    he might be spared the trouble of keeping up his
+    former school. The Minor Canon was appointed to
+    the highest office of the old church, and before he died,
+    he became a bishop.
+</p>
+<p>
+    During the first years after his return from the
+    dreadful wilds, the people of the town looked up to
+    him as a man to whom they were bound to do honor
+    and reverence; but they often, also, looked up to the
+    sky to see if there were any signs of the Griffin coming
+    back. However, in the course of time, they learned
+    to honor and reverence their former Minor Canon
+    without the fear of being punished if they did not do
+    so.
+</p>
+<p>
+    But they need never have been afraid of the Griffin.
+    The autumnal equinox day came round, and the monster
+    ate nothing. If he could not have the Minor
+    Canon, he did not care for any thing. So, lying down,
+    with his eyes fixed upon the great stone griffin, he
+    gradually declined, and died. It was a good thing for
+    some of the people of the town that they did not know
+    this.
+</p>
+<p>
+    If you should ever visit the old town, you would still
+    see the little griffins on the sides of the church; but
+    the great stone griffin that was over the door is gone.
+</p>
+<a name="chapter3"><!-- H2 anchor --></a>
+
+<div style="height: 2em;"></div>
+
+<h2>
+    OLD PIPES AND THE DRYAD.
+</h2>
+<hr>
+<p>
+    A mountain brook ran through a little village.
+    Over the brook there was a narrow bridge, and
+    from the bridge a foot-path led out from the village
+    and up the hill-side, to the cottage of Old Pipes and
+    his mother. For many, many years, Old Pipes had
+    been employed by the villagers to pipe the cattle down
+    from the hills. Every afternoon, an hour before sunset,
+    he would sit on a rock in front of his cottage and
+    play on his pipes. Then all the flocks and herds that
+    were grazing on the mountains would hear him, wherever
+    they might happen to be, and would come down
+    to the village&mdash;the cows by the easiest paths, the
+    sheep by those not quite so easy, and the goats by
+    the steep and rocky ways that were hardest of all.
+</p>
+<p>
+    But now, for a year or more, Old Pipes had not
+    piped the cattle home. It is true that every afternoon
+    he sat upon the rock and played upon his familiar
+    instrument; but the cattle did not hear him. He had
+    grown old, and his breath was feeble. The echoes of
+    his cheerful notes, which used to come from the rocky
+    hill on the other side of the valley, were heard no
+    more; and twenty yards from Old Pipes one could
+    scarcely tell what tune he was playing. He had
+    become somewhat deaf, and did not know that the
+    sound of his pipes was so thin and weak, and that
+    the cattle did not hear him. The cows, the sheep, and
+    the goats came down every afternoon as before, but
+    this was because two boys and a girl were sent up after
+    them. The villagers did not wish the good old man to
+    know that his piping was no longer of any use, so they
+    paid him his little salary every month, and said nothing
+    about the two boys and the girl.
+</p>
+<p>
+    Old Pipes's mother was, of course, a great deal older
+    then he was, and was as deaf as a gate,&mdash;posts, latch,
+    hinges, and all,&mdash;and she never knew that the sound
+    of her son's pipe did not spread over all the mountainside,
+    and echo back strong and clear from the opposite
+    hills. She was very fond of Old Pipes, and proud of
+    his piping; and as he was so much younger than she
+    was, she never thought of him as being very old. She
+    cooked for him, and made his bed, and mended his
+    clothes; and they lived very comfortably on his little
+    salary.
+</p>
+<p>
+    One afternoon, at the end of the month, when Old
+    Pipes had finished his piping, he took his stout staff
+    and went down the hill to the village to receive the
+    money for his month's work. The path seemed a great
+    deal steeper and more difficult than it used to be; and
+    Old Pipes thought that it must have been washed by
+    the rains and greatly damaged. He remembered it as
+    a path that was quite easy to traverse either up or
+    down. But Old Pipes had been a very active man,
+    and as his mother was so much older than he was, he
+    never thought of himself as aged and infirm.
+</p>
+<p>
+    When the Chief Villager had paid him, and he had
+    talked a little with some of his friends, Old Pipes
+    started to go home. But when he had crossed the
+    bridge over the brook, and gone a short distance up
+    the hill-side, he became very tired, and sat down upon
+    a stone. He had not been sitting there half a minute,
+    when along came two boys and a girl.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Children," said Old Pipes, "I'm very tired tonight,
+    and I don't believe I can climb up this steep
+    path to my home. I think I shall have to ask you to
+    help me."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "We will do that," said the boys and the girl, quite
+    cheerfully; and one boy took him by the right hand,
+    and the other by the left, while the girl pushed him in
+    the back. In this way he went up the hill quite easily,
+    and soon reached his cottage door. Old Pipes gave
+    each of the three children a copper coin, and then they
+    sat down for a few minutes' rest before starting back
+    to the village.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I'm sorry that I tired you so much," said Old Pipes.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Oh, that would not have tired us," said one of the
+    boys, "if we had not been so far to-day after the cows,
+    the sheep, and the goats. They rambled high up on
+    the mountain, and we never before had such a time in
+    finding them."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Had to go after the cows, the sheep, and the
+    goats!" exclaimed Old Pipes. "What do you mean
+    by that?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    The girl, who stood behind the old man, shook her
+    head, put her hand on her mouth, and made all sorts
+    of signs to the boy to stop talking on this subject;
+    but he did not notice her, and promptly answered Old
+    Pipes.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Why, you see, good sir," said he, "that as the
+    cattle can't hear your pipes now, somebody has to go
+    after them every evening to drive them down from the
+    mountain, and the Chief Villager has hired us three to
+    do it. Generally it is not very hard work, but to-night
+    the cattle had wandered far."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "How long have you been doing this?" asked the
+    old man.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The girl shook her head and clapped her hand on
+    her mouth more vigorously than before, but the boy
+    went on.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I think it is about a year now," he said, "since
+    the people first felt sure that the cattle could not hear
+    your pipes; and from that time we've been driving
+    them down. But we are rested now, and will go home.
+    Good-night, sir."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The three children then went down the hill, the girl
+    scolding the boy all the way home. Old Pipes stood silent
+    a few moments, and then he went into his cottage.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Mother," he shouted; "did you hear what those
+    children said?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Children!" exclaimed the old woman; "I did not
+    hear them. I did not know there were any children
+    here."
+</p>
+<p>
+    Then Old Pipes told his mother, shouting very loudly
+    to make her hear, how the two boys and the girl had
+    helped him up the hill, and what he had heard about his
+    piping and the cattle.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "They can't hear you?" cried his mother. "Why,
+    what's the matter with the cattle?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Ah, me!" said Old Pipes; "I don't believe
+    there's any thing the matter with the cattle. It must
+    be with me and my pipes that there is something the
+    matter. But one thing is certain, if I do not earn the
+    wages the Chief Villager pays me, I shall not take
+    them. I shall go straight down to the village and give
+    back the money I received to-day."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Nonsense!" cried his mother. "I'm sure you've
+    piped as well as you could, and no more can be expected.
+    And what are we to do without the money?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I don't know," said Old Pipes; "but I'm going
+    down to the village to pay it back."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The sun had now set; but the moon was shining
+    very brightly on the hill-side, and Old Pipes could see
+    his way very well. He did not take the same path by
+    which he had gone before, but followed another, which
+    led among the trees upon the hill-side, and, though
+    longer, was not so steep.
+</p>
+<p>
+    When he had gone about half-way, the old man sat
+    down to rest, leaning his back against a great oak-tree.
+    As he did so, he heard a sound like knocking inside
+    the tree, and then a voice distinctly said:
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Let me out! let me out!"
+</p>
+<p>
+    Old Pipes instantly forgot that he was tired, and
+    sprang to his feet. "This must be a Dryad-tree!"
+    he exclaimed. "If it is, I'll let her out."
+</p>
+<p>
+    Old Pipes had never, to his knowledge, seen a
+    Dryad-tree, but he knew there were such trees on the
+    hill-sides and the mountains, and that Dryads lived in
+    them. He knew, too, that in the summer-time, on
+    those days when the moon rose before the sun went
+    down, a Dryad could come out of her tree if any one
+    could find the key which locked her in, and turn it.
+    Old Pipes closely examined the trunk of the tree,
+    which stood in the full moonlight. "If I see that
+    key," he said, "I shall surely turn it." Before long
+    he perceived a piece of bark standing out from the
+    tree, which appeared to him very much like the handle
+    of a key. He took hold of it, and found he could
+    turn it quite around. As he did so, a large part of
+    the side of the tree was pushed open, and a beautiful
+    Dryad stepped quickly out.
+</p>
+<p>
+    For a moment she stood motionless, gazing on the
+    scene before her,&mdash;the tranquil valley, the hills, the
+    forest, and the mountain-side, all lying in the soft
+    clear light of the moon. "Oh, lovely! lovely!" she
+    exclaimed. "How long it is since I have seen any
+    thing like this!" And then, turning to Old Pipes,
+    she said: "How good of you to let me out! I am so
+    happy and so thankful, that I must kiss you, you dear
+    old man!" And she threw her arms around the neck
+    of Old Pipes, and kissed him on both cheeks. "You
+    don't know," she then went on to say, "how doleful
+    it is to be shut up so long in a tree. I don't mind it
+    in the winter, for then I am glad to be sheltered, but in
+    summer it is a rueful thing not to be able to see all the
+    beauties of the world. And it's ever so long since
+    I've been let out. People so seldom come this way;
+    and when they do come at the right time they either
+    don't hear me, or they are frightened, and run away.
+    But you, you dear old man, you were not frightened,
+    and you looked and looked for the key, and you let
+    me out, and now I shall not have to go back till winter
+    has come, and the air grows cold. Oh, it is glorious!
+    What can I do for you, to show you how grateful I
+    am?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I am very glad," said Old Pipes, "that I let you
+    out, since I see that it makes you so happy; but I
+    must admit that I tried to find the key because I had a
+    great desire to see a Dryad. But if you wish to do
+    something for me, you can, if you happen to be going
+    down toward the village."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "To the village!" exclaimed the Dryad. "I will
+    go anywhere for you, my kind old benefactor."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Well, then," said Old Pipes, "I wish you would
+    take this little bag of money to the Chief Villager and
+    tell him that Old Pipes cannot receive pay for the services
+    which he does not perform. It is now more than
+    a year that I have not been able to make the cattle
+    hear me, when I piped to call them home. I did not
+    know this until to-night; but now that I know it, I cannot
+    keep the money, and so I send it back." And,
+    handing the little bag to the Dryad, he bade her good-night,
+    and turned toward his cottage.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Good-night," said the Dryad. "And I thank
+    you over, and over, and over again, you good old
+    man!"
+</p>
+<p>
+    Old Pipes walked toward his home, very glad to be
+    saved the fatigue of going all the way down to the village
+    and back again. "To be sure," he said to himself,
+    "this path does not seem at all steep, and I can
+    walk along it very easily; but it would have tired me
+    dreadfully to come up all the way from the village,
+    especially as I could not have expected those children
+    to help me again." When he reached home, his
+    mother was surprised to see him returning so soon.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "What!" she exclaimed; "have you already come
+    back? What did the Chief Villager say? Did he
+    take the money?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    Old Pipes was just about to tell her that he had sent
+    the money to the village by a Dryad, when he suddenly
+    reflected that his mother would be sure to disapprove
+    such a proceeding, and so he merely said he had sent
+    it by a person whom he had met.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "And how do you know that the person will ever
+    take it to the Chief Villager?" cried his mother.
+    "You will lose it, and the villagers will never get it.
+    Oh, Pipes! Pipes! when will you be old enough to
+    have ordinary common sense?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    Old Pipes considered that as he was already seventy
+    years of age he could scarcely expect to grow any
+    wiser, but he made no remark on this subject; and,
+    saying that he doubted not that the money would go
+    safely to its destination, he sat down to his supper.
+    His mother scolded him roundly, but he did not mind
+    it; and after supper he went out and sat on a rustic chair
+    in front of the cottage to look at the moonlit village,
+    and to wonder whether or not the Chief Villager really
+    received the money. While he was doing these two
+    things, he went fast asleep.
+</p>
+<p>
+    When Old Pipes left the Dryad, she did not go
+    down to the village with the little bag of money. She
+    held it in her hand, and thought about what she had
+    heard. "This is a good and honest old man," she said;
+    "and it is a shame that he should lose this money.
+    He looked as if he needed it, and I don't believe the
+    people in the village will take it from one who has
+    served them so long. Often, when in my tree, have I
+    heard the sweet notes of his pipes. I am going to
+    take the money back to him." She did not start
+    immediately, because there were so many beautiful
+    things to look at; but after a while she went up to the
+    cottage, and, finding Old Pipes asleep in his chair, she
+    slipped the little bag into his coat-pocket, and silently
+    sped away.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The next day, Old Pipes told his mother that he
+    would go up the mountain and cut some wood. He
+    had a right to get wood from the mountain, but for a
+    long time he had been content to pick up the dead
+    branches which lay about his cottage. To-day, however,
+    he felt so strong and vigorous that he thought he
+    would go and cut some fuel that would be better than
+    this. He worked all the morning, and when he came
+    back he did not feel at all tired, and he had a very
+    good appetite for his dinner.
+</p>
+<p>
+    Now, Old Pipes knew a good deal about Dryads,
+    but there was one thing which, although he had heard,
+    he had forgotten. This was, that a kiss from a Dryad
+    made a person ten years younger. The people of the
+    village knew this, and they were very careful not to let
+    any child of ten years or younger, go into the woods
+    where the Dryads were supposed to be; for, if they
+    should chance to be kissed by one of these tree-nymphs,
+    they would be set back so far that they would
+    cease to exist. A story was told in the village that a
+    very bad boy of eleven once ran away into the woods,
+    and had an adventure of this kind; and when his
+    mother found him he was a little baby of one year old.
+    Taking advantage of her opportunity, she brought him
+    up more carefully than she had done before; and he
+    grew to be a very good boy indeed.
+</p>
+<p>
+    Now, Old Pipes had been kissed twice by the Dryad,
+    once on each cheek, and he therefore felt as vigorous
+    and active as when he was a hale man of fifty. His
+    mother noticed how much work he was doing, and told
+    him that he need not try in that way to make up for the
+    loss of his piping wages; for he would only tire himself
+    out, and get sick. But her son answered that he
+    had not felt so well for years, and that he was quite
+    able to work. In the course of the afternoon, Old
+    Pipes, for the first time that day, put his hand in his
+    coat-pocket, and there, to his amazement, he found
+    the little bag of money. "Well, well!" he exclaimed,
+    "I am stupid, indeed! I really thought that
+    I had seen a Dryad; but when I sat down by that big
+    oak-tree I must have gone to sleep and dreamed it all;
+    and then I came home thinking I had given the money
+    to a Dryad, when it was in my pocket all the time.
+    But the Chief Villager shall have the money. I shall
+    not take it to him to-day, but to-morrow I wish to go
+    to the village to see some of my old friends; and then
+    I shall give up the money."
+</p>
+<p>
+    Toward the close of the afternoon, Old Pipes, as
+    had been his custom for so many years, took his pipes
+    from the shelf on which they lay, and went out to the
+    rock in front of the cottage.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "What are you going to do?" cried his mother.
+    "If you will not consent to be paid, why do you
+    pipe?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I am going to pipe for my own pleasure," said her
+    son. "I am used to it, and I do not wish to give it
+    up. It does not matter now whether the cattle hear
+    me or not, and I am sure that my piping will injure no
+    one."
+</p>
+<p>
+    When the good man began to play upon his favorite
+    instrument he was astonished at the sound that came
+    from it. The beautiful notes of the pipes sounded
+    clear and strong down into the valley, and spread over
+    the hills, and up the sides of the mountain beyond,
+    while, after a little interval, an echo came back from
+    the rocky hill on the other side of the valley.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Ha! ha!" he cried, "what has happened to my
+    pipes? They must have been stopped up of late, but
+    now they are as clear and good as ever."
+</p>
+<p>
+    Again the merry notes went sounding far and wide.
+    The cattle on the mountain heard them, and those that
+    were old enough remembered how these notes had
+    called them from their pastures every evening, and so
+    they started down the mountain-side, the others following.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The merry notes were heard in the village below,
+    and the people were much astonished thereby. "Why,
+    who can be blowing the pipes of Old Pipes?" they
+    said. But, as they were all very busy, no one went up
+    to see. One thing, however, was plain enough: the
+    cattle were coming down the mountain. And so the
+    two boys and the girl did not have to go after them,
+    and had an hour for play, for which they were very
+    glad.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The next morning Old Pipes started down to the
+    village with his money, and on the way he met the
+    Dryad. "Oh, ho!" he cried, "is that you? Why, I
+    thought my letting you out of the tree was nothing but
+    a dream."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "A dream!" cried the Dryad; "if you only knew
+    how happy you have made me, you would not think
+    it merely a dream. And has it not benefited you?
+    Do you not feel happier? Yesterday I heard you
+    playing beautifully on your pipes."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Yes, yes," cried he. "I did not understand it
+    before, but I see it all now. I have really grown
+    younger. I thank you, I thank you, good Dryad,
+    from the bottom of my heart. It was the finding of
+    the money in my pocket that made me think it was a
+    dream."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Oh, I put it in when you were asleep," she said,
+    laughing, "because I thought you ought to keep it.
+    Good-by, kind, honest man. May you live long, and
+    be as happy as I am now."
+</p>
+<p>
+    Old Pipes was greatly delighted when he understood
+    that he was really a younger man; but that made no
+    difference about the money, and he kept on his way to
+    the village. As soon as he reached it, he was eagerly
+    questioned as to who had been playing his pipes the
+    evening before, and when the people heard that it was
+    himself, they were very much surprised. Thereupon,
+    Old Pipes told what had happened to him, and then
+    there was greater wonder, with hearty congratulations
+    and hand-shakes; for Old Pipes was liked by every
+    one. The Chief Villager refused to take his money,
+    and, although Old Pipes said that he had not earned it,
+    every one present insisted that, as he would now play
+    on his pipes as before, he should lose nothing, because,
+    for a time, he was unable to perform his duty.
+</p>
+<p>
+    So Old Pipes was obliged to keep his money, and
+    after an hour or two spent in conversation with his
+    friends, he returned to his cottage.
+</p>
+<p>
+    There was one individual, however, who was not at
+    all pleased with what had happened to Old Pipes.
+    This was an Echo-dwarf, who lived on the hills on the
+    other side of the valley, and whose duty it was to echo
+    back the notes of the pipes whenever they could be
+    heard. There were a great many other Echo-dwarfs
+    on these hills, some of whom echoed back the songs
+    of maidens, some the shouts of children, and others
+    the music that was often heard in the village. But
+    there was only one who could send back the strong
+    notes of the pipes of Old Pipes, and this had been his
+    sole duty for many years. But when the old man
+    grew feeble, and the notes of his pipes could not be
+    heard on the opposite hills, this Echo-dwarf had nothing
+    to do, and he spent his time in delightful idleness;
+    and he slept so much and grew so fat that it made his
+    companions laugh to see him walk.
+</p>
+<p>
+    On the afternoon on which, after so long an interval,
+    the sound of the pipes was heard on the echo hills,
+    this dwarf was fast asleep behind a rock. As soon as
+    the first notes reached them, some of his companions
+    ran to wake him. Rolling to his feet, he echoed back
+    the merry tune of Old Pipes. Naturally, he was very
+    much annoyed and indignant at being thus obliged to
+    give up his life of comfortable leisure, and he hoped
+    very much that this pipe-playing would not occur again.
+    The next afternoon he was awake and listening, and,
+    sure enough, at the usual hour, along came the notes
+    of the pipes as clear and strong as they ever had been;
+    and he was obliged to work as long as Old Pipes
+    played. The Echo-dwarf was very angry. He had
+    supposed, of course, that the pipe-playing had ceased
+    forever, and he felt that he had a right to be indignant
+    at being thus deceived. He was so much disturbed
+    that he made up his mind to go and try to find out
+    whether this was to be a temporary matter or not.
+    He had plenty of time, as the pipes were played but
+    once a day, and he set off early in the morning for
+    the hill on which Old Pipes lived. It was hard work
+    for the fat little fellow, and when he had crossed the
+    valley and had gone some distance into the woods on
+    the hill-side, he stopped to rest, and, in a few minutes,
+    the Dryad came tripping along.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Ho, ho!" exclaimed the dwarf; "what are you
+    doing here? and how did you get out of your
+    tree?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Doing!" cried the Dryad; "I am being happy;
+    that's what I am doing. And I was let out of my
+    tree by the good old man who plays the pipes to call
+    the cattle down from the mountain. And it makes me
+    happier to think that I have been of service to him.
+    I gave him two kisses of gratitude, and now he
+    is young enough to play his pipes as well as
+    ever."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Echo-dwarf stepped forward, his face pale with
+    passion. "Am I to believe," he said, "that you are
+    the cause of this great evil that has come upon me?
+    and that you are the wicked creature who has again
+    started this old man upon his career of pipe-playing?
+    What have I ever done to you that you should have
+    condemned me for years and years to echo back the
+    notes of those wretched pipes?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    At this the Dryad laughed loudly.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "What a funny little fellow you are!" she said.
+    "Any one would think you had been condemned to
+    toil from morning till night; while what you really
+    have to do is merely to imitate for half an hour every
+    day the merry notes of Old Pipes's piping. Fie upon
+    you, Echo-dwarf! You are lazy and selfish; and that
+    is what is the matter with you. Instead of grumbling
+    at being obliged to do a little wholesome work, which
+    is less, I am sure, than that of any other echo-dwarf
+    upon the rocky hill-side, you should rejoice at the
+    good fortune of the old man who has regained so much
+    of his strength and vigor. Go home and learn to
+    be just and generous; and then, perhaps, you may be
+    happy. Good-by."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Insolent creature!" shouted the dwarf, as he
+    shook his fat little fist at her. "I'll make you suffer
+    for this. You shall find out what it is to heap injury
+    and insult upon one like me, and to snatch from him
+    the repose that he has earned by long years of toil."
+    And, shaking his head savagely, he hurried back to
+    the rocky hill-side.
+</p>
+<p>
+    Every afternoon the merry notes of the pipes of
+    Old Pipes sounded down into the valley and over the
+    hills and up the mountain-side; and every afternoon
+    when he had echoed them back, the little dwarf grew
+    more and more angry with the Dryad. Each day,
+    from early morning till it was time for him to go back
+    to his duties upon the rocky hill-side, he searched the
+    woods for her. He intended, if he met her, to pretend
+    to be very sorry for what he had said, and he
+    thought he might be able to play a trick upon her
+    which would avenge him well. One day, while thus
+    wandering among the trees, he met Old Pipes. The
+    Echo-dwarf did not generally care to see or speak to
+    ordinary people; but now he was so anxious to find
+    the object of his search, that he stopped and asked
+    Old Pipes if he had seen the Dryad. The piper had
+    not noticed the little fellow, and he looked down on
+    him with some surprise.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "No," he said; "I have not seen her, and I have
+    been looking everywhere for her."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "You!" cried the dwarf, "what do you wish with
+    her?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    Old Pipes then sat down on a stone, so that he
+    should be nearer the ear of his small companion, and
+    he told what the Dryad had done for him.
+</p>
+<p>
+    When the Echo-dwarf heard that this was the man
+    whose pipes he was obliged to echo back every day,
+    he would have slain him on the spot had he been able;
+    but, as he was not able, he merely ground his teeth
+    and listened to the rest of the story.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I am looking for the Dryad now," Old Pipes continued,
+    "on account of my aged mother. When I
+    was old myself, I did not notice how very old my
+    mother was; but now it shocks me to see how feeble
+    and decrepit her years have caused her to become;
+    and I am looking for the Dryad to ask her to make
+    my mother younger, as she made me."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The eyes of the Echo-dwarf glistened. Here was
+    a man who might help him in his plans.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Your idea is a good one," he said to Old Pipes,
+    "and it does you honor. But you should know that a
+    Dryad can make no person younger but one who lets
+    her out of her tree. However, you can manage the
+    affair very easily. All you need do is to find the
+    Dryad, tell her what you want, and request her to
+    step into her tree and be shut up for a short time.
+    Then you will go and bring your mother to the tree;
+    she will open it, and every thing will be as you wish.
+    Is not this a good plan?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Excellent!" cried Old Pipes; "and I will go
+    instantly and search more diligently for the Dryad."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Take me with you," said the Echo-dwarf. "You
+    can easily carry me on your strong shoulders; and I
+    shall be glad to help you in any way that I can."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Now, then," said the little fellow to himself, as
+    Old Pipes carried him rapidly along, "if he persuades
+    the Dryad to get into a tree,&mdash;and she is quite foolish
+    enough to do it,&mdash;and then goes away to bring his
+    mother, I shall take a stone or a club and I will break
+    off the key of that tree, so that nobody can ever turn
+    it again. Then Mistress Dryad will see what she has
+    brought upon herself by her behavior to me."
+</p>
+<p>
+    Before long they came to the great oak-tree in
+    which the Dryad had lived, and, at a distance, they
+    saw that beautiful creature herself coming toward
+    them.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "How excellently well every thing happens!" said
+    the dwarf. "Put me down, and I will go. Your
+    business with the Dryad is more important than mine;
+    and you need not say any thing about my having
+    suggested your plan to you. I am willing that you
+    should have all the credit of it yourself."
+</p>
+<p>
+    Old Pipes put the Echo-dwarf upon the ground, but
+    the little rogue did not go away. He concealed himself
+    between some low, mossy rocks, and he was so
+    much of their color that you would not have noticed
+    him if you had been looking straight at him.
+</p>
+<p>
+    When the Dryad came up, Old Pipes lost no time
+    in telling her about his mother, and what he wished
+    her to do. At first, the Dryad answered nothing, but
+    stood looking very sadly at Old Pipes.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Do you really wish me to go into my tree again?"
+    she said. "I should dreadfully dislike to do it, for I
+    don't know what might happen. It is not at all necessary,
+    for I could make your mother younger at any
+    time if she would give me the opportunity. I had
+    already thought of making you still happier in this
+    way, and several times I have waited about your
+    cottage, hoping to meet your aged mother, but she
+    never comes outside, and you know a Dryad cannot
+    enter a house. I cannot imagine what put this idea
+    into your head. Did you think of it yourself?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "No, I cannot say that I did," answered Old
+    Pipes. "A little dwarf whom I met in the woods
+    proposed it to me."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Oh!" cried the Dryad; "now I see through it
+    all. It is the scheme of that vile Echo-dwarf&mdash;your
+    enemy and mine. Where is he? I should like to see
+    him."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I think he has gone away," said Old Pipes.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "No he has not," said the Dryad, whose quick eyes
+    perceived the Echo-dwarf among the rocks. "There
+    he is. Seize him and drag him out, I beg of you."
+</p>
+<p>
+    Old Pipes perceived the dwarf as soon as he was
+    pointed out to him, and, running to the rocks, he
+    caught the little fellow by the arm and pulled him
+    out.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Now, then," cried the Dryad, who had opened the
+    door of the great oak, "just stick him in there, and
+    we will shut him up. Then I shall be safe from
+    his mischief for the rest of the time I am free."
+</p>
+<p>
+    Old Pipes thrust the Echo-dwarf into the tree; the
+    Dryad pushed the door shut; there was a clicking
+    sound of bark and wood, and no one would have
+    noticed that the big oak had ever had an opening
+    in it.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "There," said the Dryad; "now we need not be
+    afraid of him. And I assure you, my good piper,
+    that I shall be very glad to make your mother younger
+    as soon as I can. Will you not ask her to come out
+    and meet me?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Of course I will," cried Old Pipes; "and I will
+    do it without delay."
+</p>
+<p>
+    And then, the Dryad by his side, he hurried to his
+    cottage. But when he mentioned the matter to his
+    mother, the old woman became very angry indeed.
+    She did not believe in Dryads; and, if they really did
+    exist, she knew they must be witches and sorceresses,
+    and she would have nothing to do with them. If her
+    son had ever allowed himself to be kissed by one of
+    them, he ought to be ashamed of himself. As to its
+    doing him the least bit of good, she did not believe a
+    word of it. He felt better than he used to feel, but
+    that was very common. She had sometimes felt that
+    way herself, and she forbade him ever to mention a
+    Dryad to her again.
+</p>
+<p>
+    That afternoon, Old Pipes, feeling very sad that his
+    plan in regard to his mother had failed, sat down upon
+    the rock and played upon his pipes. The pleasant
+    sounds went down the valley and up the hills and
+    mountain, but, to the great surprise of some persons
+    who happened to notice the fact, the notes were not
+    echoed back from the rocky hill-side, but from the
+    woods on the side of the valley on which Old Pipes
+    lived. The next day many of the villagers stopped in
+    their work to listen to the echo of the pipes coming
+    from the woods. The sound was not as clear and
+    strong as it used to be when it was sent back from the
+    rocky hill-side, but it certainly came from among the
+    trees. Such a thing as an echo changing its place in
+    this way had never been heard of before, and nobody
+    was able to explain how it could have happened. Old
+    Pipes, however, knew very well that the sound came
+    from the Echo-dwarf shut up in the great oak-tree.
+    The sides of the tree were thin, and the sound of the
+    pipes could be heard through them, and the dwarf was
+    obliged by the laws of his being to echo back those
+    notes whenever they came to him. But Old Pipes
+    thought he might get the Dryad in trouble if he let any
+    one know that the Echo-dwarf was shut up in the tree,
+    and so he wisely said nothing about it.
+</p>
+<p>
+    One day the two boys and the girl who had helped
+    Old Pipes up the hill were playing in the woods. Stopping
+    near the great oak-tree, they heard a sound of
+    knocking within it, and then a voice plainly said:
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Let me out! let me out!"
+</p>
+<p>
+    For a moment the children stood still in astonishment,
+    and then one of the boys exclaimed:
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Oh, it is a Dryad, like the one Old Pipes found!
+    Let's let her out!"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "What are you thinking of?" cried the girl. "I
+    am the oldest of all, and I am only thirteen. Do you
+    wish to be turned into crawling babies? Run! run!
+    run!"
+</p>
+<p>
+    And the two boys and the girl dashed down into the
+    valley as fast as their legs could carry them. There
+    was no desire in their youthful hearts to be made
+    younger than they were. And for fear that their parents
+    might think it well that they should commence
+    their careers anew, they never said a word about
+    finding the Dryad-tree.
+</p>
+<p>
+    As the summer days went on, Old Pipes's mother
+    grew feebler and feebler. One day when her son was
+    away, for he now frequently went into the woods to
+    hunt or fish, or down into the valley to work, she arose
+    from her knitting to prepare the simple dinner. But
+    she felt so weak and tired that she was not able to
+    do the work to which she had been so long accustomed.
+    "Alas! alas!" she said, "the time has come when I
+    am too old to work. My son will have to hire some
+    one to come here and cook his meals, make his bed,
+    and mend his clothes. Alas! alas! I had hoped that
+    as long as I lived I should be able to do these things.
+    But it is not so. I have grown utterly worthless, and
+    some one else must prepare the dinner for my son. I
+    wonder where he is." And tottering to the door, she
+    went outside to look for him. She did not feel able to
+    stand, and reaching the rustic chair, she sank into it,
+    quite exhausted, and soon fell asleep.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Dryad, who had often come to the cottage to
+    see if she could find an opportunity of carrying out old
+    Pipes's affectionate design, now happened by; and
+    seeing that the much-desired occasion had come, she
+    stepped up quietly behind the old woman and gently
+    kissed her on each cheek, and then as quietly disappeared.
+</p>
+<p>
+    In a few minutes the mother of old Pipes awoke, and
+    looking up at the sun, she exclaimed: "Why, it is
+    almost dinner-time! My son will be here directly, and
+    I am not ready for him." And rising to her feet, she
+    hurried into the house, made the fire, set the meat and
+    vegetables to cook, laid the cloth, and by the time her
+    son arrived the meal was on the table.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "How a little sleep does refresh one," she said to
+    herself, as she was bustling about. She was a woman
+    of very vigorous constitution, and at seventy had been
+    a great deal stronger and more active than her son was
+    at that age. The moment Old Pipes saw his mother,
+    he knew that the Dryad had been there; but, while he
+    felt as happy as a king, he was too wise to say any
+    thing about her.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "It is astonishing how well I feel to-day," said his
+    mother; "and either my hearing has improved or you
+    speak much more plainly than you have done of late."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The summer days went on and passed away, the
+    leaves were falling from the trees, and the air was
+    becoming cold.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Nature has ceased to be lovely," said the Dryad,
+    "and the night-winds chill me. It is time for me to go
+    back into my comfortable quarters in the great oak.
+    But first I must pay another visit to the cottage of Old
+    Pipes."
+</p>
+<p>
+    She found the piper and his mother sitting side by
+    side on the rock in front of the door. The cattle were
+    not to go to the mountain any more that season, and
+    he was piping them down for the last time. Loud
+    and merrily sounded the pipes of Old Pipes, and down
+    the mountain-side came the cattle, the cows by the
+    easiest paths, the sheep by those not quite so easy,
+    and the goats by the most difficult ones among the
+    rocks; while from the great oak-tree were heard the
+    echoes of the cheerful music.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "How happy they look, sitting there together,"
+    said the Dryad; "and I don't believe it will do them
+    a bit of harm to be still younger." And moving
+    quietly up behind them, she first kissed Old Pipes on
+    his cheek and then his mother.
+</p>
+<p>
+    Old Pipes, who had stopped playing, knew what it
+    was, but he did not move, and said nothing. His
+    mother, thinking that her son had kissed her, turned
+    to him with a smile and kissed him in return. And
+    then she arose and went into the cottage, a vigorous
+    woman of sixty, followed by her son, erect and happy,
+    and twenty years younger than herself.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Dryad sped away to the woods, shrugging her
+    shoulders as she felt the cool evening wind.
+</p>
+<p>
+    When she reached the great oak, she turned the key
+    and opened the door. "Come out," she said to the
+    Echo-dwarf, who sat blinking within. "Winter is
+    coming on, and I want the comfortable shelter of my
+    tree for myself. The cattle have come down from the
+    mountain for the last time this year, the pipes will no
+    longer sound, and you can go to your rocks and have
+    a holiday until next spring."
+</p>
+<p>
+    Upon hearing these words the dwarf skipped quickly
+    out, and the Dryad entered the tree and pulled the
+    door shut after her. "Now, then," she said to herself,
+    "he can break off the key if he likes. It does
+    not matter to me. Another will grow out next spring.
+    And although the good piper made me no promise, I
+    know that when the warm days arrive next year, he
+    will come and let me out again."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Echo-dwarf did not stop to break the key of the
+    tree. He was too happy to be released to think of any
+    thing else, and he hastened as fast as he could to his
+    home on the rocky hill-side.
+</p>
+<hr>
+<p>
+    The Dryad was not mistaken when she trusted in
+    the piper. When the warm days came again he went
+    to the oak-tree to let her out. But, to his sorrow
+    and surprise, he found the great tree lying upon the
+    ground. A winter storm had blown it down, and it
+    lay with its trunk shattered and split. And what
+    became of the Dryad, no one ever knew.
+</p>
+<a name="chapter4"><!-- H2 anchor --></a>
+
+<div style="height: 2em;"></div>
+
+<h2>
+    THE QUEEN'S MUSEUM.
+</h2>
+<hr>
+<p>
+    There was once a Queen who founded, in her
+    capital city, a grand museum. This institution
+    was the pride of her heart, and she devoted nearly all
+    her time to overseeing the collection of objects for it,
+    and their arrangement in the spacious halls. This
+    museum was intended to elevate the intelligence of her
+    people, but the result was quite disappointing to the
+    Queen. For some reason, and what it was she could
+    not imagine, the people were not interested in her
+    museum. She considered it the most delightful place
+    in the world, and spent hours every day in examining
+    and studying the thousands of objects it contained;
+    but although here and there in the city there was a
+    person who cared to visit the collection, the great
+    body of the people found it impossible to feel the
+    slightest interest in it. At first this grieved the Queen,
+    and she tried to make her museum better; but as this
+    did no good, she became very angry, and she issued
+    a decree that all persons of mature age who were not
+    interested in her museum should be sent to prison.
+</p>
+<p>
+    This decree produced a great sensation in the city.
+    The people crowded to the building, and did their very
+    best to be interested; but, in the majority of cases,
+    the attempt was an utter failure. They could not feel
+    any interest whatever. The consequence was that
+    hundreds and thousands of the people were sent to
+    prison, and as there was not room enough for them
+    in the ordinary jails, large temporary prisons were
+    erected in various parts of the city. Those persons
+    who were actually needed for work or service which
+    no one else could do were allowed to come out in the
+    day-time on parole; but at night they had to return to
+    their prisons.
+</p>
+<p>
+    It was during this deplorable state of affairs that a
+    stranger entered the city one day. He was surprised
+    at seeing so many prisons, and approaching the window
+    in one of them, behind the bars of which he saw
+    a very respectable-looking citizen, he asked what all
+    this meant. The citizen informed him how matters
+    stood, and then, with tears mounting to his eyes, he
+    added:
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Oh, sir, I have tried my best to be interested in
+    that museum; but it is impossible; I cannot make
+    myself care for it in the slightest degree! And, what
+    is more, I know I shall never be able to do so; and I
+    shall languish here for the rest of my days."
+</p>
+<p>
+    Passing on, the Stranger met a mother coming out
+    of her house. Her face was pale, and she was weeping
+    bitterly. Filled with pity, he stopped and asked
+    her what was the matter. "Oh, sir," she said, "for
+    a week I have been trying, for the sake of my dear
+    children, to take an interest in that museum. For a
+    time I thought I might do it, but the hopes proved
+    false. It is impossible. I must leave my little ones,
+    and go to prison."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Stranger was deeply affected by these cases
+    and many others of a similar character, which he soon
+    met with. "It is too bad! too bad!" he said to
+    himself. "I never saw a city in so much trouble.
+    There is scarcely a family, I am told, in which there
+    is not some uninterested person&mdash;I must see the
+    Queen and talk to her about it," and with this he
+    wended his way to the palace.
+</p>
+<p>
+    He met the Queen just starting out on her morning
+    visit to the museum. When he made it known that
+    he was a stranger, and desired a short audience, she
+    stopped and spoke to him.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Have you visited my museum yet?" she said.
+    "There is nothing in the city so well worth your
+    attention as that. You should go there before seeing
+    any thing else. You have a high forehead, and an
+    intelligent expression, and I have no doubt that it
+    will interest you greatly. I am going there myself,
+    and I shall be glad to see what effect that fine collection
+    has upon a stranger."
+</p>
+<p>
+    This did not suit the Stranger at all. From what
+    he had heard he felt quite sure that if he went to the
+    museum, he would soon be in jail; and so he hurried
+    to propose a plan which had occurred to him while on
+    his way to the palace.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I came to see your Majesty on the subject of
+    the museum," he said, "and to crave permission to
+    contribute to the collection some objects which shall
+    be interesting to every one. I understand that it
+    is highly desirable that every one should be interested."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Of course it is," said the Queen, "and although
+    I think that there is not the slightest reason why every
+    one should not feel the keenest interest in what the
+    museum already contains, I am willing to add to it
+    whatever may make it of greater value."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "In that case," said the Stranger, "no time should
+    be lost in securing what I wish to present."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Go at once," said the Queen. "But how soon
+    can you return?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "It will take some days, at least," said the
+    Stranger.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Give me your parole to return in a week," said
+    the Queen, "and start immediately."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Stranger gave his parole and left the palace.
+    Having filled a leathern bag with provisions from a
+    cook's shop, he went out of the city gates. As he
+    walked into the open country, he said to himself:
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I have certainly undertaken a very difficult enterprise.
+    Where I am to find any thing that will interest
+    all the people in that city, I am sure I do not know;
+    but my heart is so filled with pity for the great number
+    of unfortunate persons who are torn from their homes
+    and shut up in prison, that I am determined to do
+    something for them, if I possibly can. There must
+    be some objects to be found in this vast country that
+    will interest every one."
+</p>
+<p>
+    About noon he came to a great mountain-side
+    covered with a forest. Thinking that he was as
+    likely to find what he sought in one place as another,
+    and preferring the shade to the sun, he entered the
+    forest, and walked for some distance along a path
+    which gradually led up the mountain. Having crossed
+    a brook with its edges lined with water-cresses, he
+    soon perceived a large cave, at the entrance of which
+    sat an aged hermit. "Ah," said the Stranger to
+    himself, "this is indeed fortunate! This good and
+    venerable man, who passes his life amid the secrets
+    of nature, can surely tell me what I wish to know."
+    Saluting the Hermit, he sat down and told the old man
+    the object of his quest.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I am afraid you are looking for what you will not
+    find," said the Hermit. "Most people are too silly
+    to be truly interested in any thing. They herd together
+    like cattle, and do not know what is good for
+    them. There are now on this mountain-side many
+    commodious and comfortable caves, all of which would
+    be tenanted if people only knew how improving and
+    interesting it is to live apart from their fellow-men.
+    But, so far as it can be done, I will help you in your
+    quest, which I think is a worthy one. I can do
+    nothing for you myself, but I have a pupil who is
+    very much given to wandering about, and looking for
+    curious things. He may tell you where you will be
+    able to find something that will interest everybody,
+    though I doubt it. You may go and see him, if you
+    like, and I will excuse him from his studies for a
+    time, so that he may aid you in your search."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Hermit then wrote an excuse upon a piece of
+    parchment, and, giving it to the Stranger, he directed
+    him to the cave of his pupil.
+</p>
+<p>
+    This was situated at some distance, and higher up
+    the mountain, and when the Stranger reached it, he
+    found the Pupil fast asleep upon the ground. This
+    individual was a long-legged youth, with long arms,
+    long hair, a long nose, and a long face. When the
+    Stranger awakened him, told him why he had come,
+    and gave him the hermit's excuse, the sleepy eyes of
+    the Pupil brightened, and his face grew less long.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "That's delightful!" he said, "to be let off on a
+    Monday; for I generally have to be satisfied with a
+    half-holiday, Wednesdays and Saturdays."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Is the Hermit very strict with you?" asked the
+    Stranger.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Yes," said the Pupil, "I have to stick closely to
+    the cave; though I have been known to go fishing on
+    days when there was no holiday. I have never seen
+    the old man but once, and that was when he first took
+    me. You know it wouldn't do for us to be too sociable.
+    That wouldn't be hermit-like. He comes up
+    here on the afternoons I am out, and writes down what
+    I am to do for the next half-week."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "And do you always do it?" asked the Stranger.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Oh, I get some of it done," said the Pupil; "but
+    there have been times when I have wondered whether
+    it wouldn't have been better for me to have been something
+    else. But I have chosen my profession, and I
+    suppose I must be faithful to it. We will start immediately
+    on our search; but first I must put the cave in
+    order, for the old man will be sure to come up while I
+    am gone."
+</p>
+<p>
+    So saying, the Pupil opened an old parchment book
+    at a marked page, and laid it on a flat stone, which
+    served as a table, and then placed a skull and a couple
+    of bones in a proper position near by.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The two now started off, the Pupil first putting a
+    line and hook in his pocket, and pulling out a fishing-rod
+    from under some bushes.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "What do you want with that?" asked the Stranger,
+    "we are not going to fish!"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Why not?" said the Pupil; "if we come to a
+    good place, we might catch something that would be
+    a real curiosity."
+</p>
+<p>
+    Before long they came to a mountain brook, and
+    here the Pupil insisted on trying his luck. The
+    Stranger was a little tired and hungry, and so was
+    quite willing to sit down for a time and eat something
+    from his bag. The Pupil ran off to find some bait,
+    and he staid away so long that the Stranger had quite
+    finished his meal before he returned. He came back
+    at last, however, in a state of great excitement.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Come with me! come with me!" he cried. "I
+    have found something that is truly astonishing! Come
+    quickly!"
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Stranger arose and hurried after the Pupil,
+    whose long legs carried him rapidly over the mountain-side.
+    Reaching a large hole at the bottom of a
+    precipitous rock, the Pupil stopped, and exclaiming:
+    "Come in here and I will show you something that
+    will amaze you!" he immediately entered the hole.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Stranger, who was very anxious to see what
+    curiosity he had found, followed him some distance
+    along a narrow and winding under-ground passage.
+    The two suddenly emerged into a high and spacious
+    cavern, which was lighted by openings in the roof;
+    on the floor, in various places, were strongly fastened
+    boxes, and packages of many sorts, bales and bundles
+    of silks and rich cloths, with handsome caskets, and
+    many other articles of value.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "What kind of a place is this?" exclaimed the
+    Stranger, in great surprise.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Don't you know?" cried the Pupil, his eyes
+    fairly sparkling with delight. "It is a robber's den!
+    Isn't it a great thing to find a place like this?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "A robber's den!" exclaimed the Stranger in alarm;
+    "let us get out of it as quickly as we can, or the robbers
+    will return, and we shall be cut to pieces."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I don't believe they are coming back very soon,"
+    said the Pupil, "and we ought to stop and take a look
+    at some of these things."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Fly, you foolish youth!" cried the Stranger;
+    "you do not know what danger you are in." And,
+    so saying, he turned to hasten away from the place.
+</p>
+<p>
+    But he was too late. At that moment the robber
+    captain and his band entered the cave. When these
+    men perceived the Stranger and the Hermit's Pupil,
+    they drew their swords and were about to rush upon
+    them, when the Pupil sprang forward and, throwing up
+    his long arms, exclaimed:
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Stop! it is a mistake!"
+</p>
+<p>
+    At these words, the robber captain lowered his sword,
+    and motioned to his men to halt. "A mistake!" he
+    said; "what do you mean by that?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I mean," said the Pupil, "that I was out looking
+    for curiosities, and wandered into this place by accident.
+    We haven't taken a thing. You may count your
+    goods, and you will find nothing missing. We have
+    not even opened a box, although I very much wanted
+    to see what was in some of them."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Are his statements correct?" said the Captain,
+    turning to the Stranger.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Entirely so," was the answer.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "You have truthful features, and an honest expression,"
+    said the Captain, "and I do not believe you
+    would be so dishonorable as to creep in here during
+    our absence and steal our possessions. Your lives
+    shall be spared, but you will be obliged to remain
+    with us; for we cannot allow any one who knows our
+    secret to leave us. You shall be treated well, and
+    shall accompany us in our expeditions; and if your
+    conduct merits it, you shall in time be made full
+    members."
+</p>
+<p>
+    Bitterly the Stranger now regretted his unfortunate
+    position. He strode up and down one side of the cave,
+    vowing inwardly that never again would he allow himself
+    to be led by a Hermit's Pupil. That individual,
+    however, was in a state of high delight. He ran
+    about from box to bale, looking at the rare treasures
+    which some of the robbers showed him.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The two captives were fed and lodged very well;
+    and the next day the Captain called them and the
+    band together, and addressed them.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "We are now twenty-nine in number," he said;
+    "twenty-seven full members, and two on probation.
+    To-night we are about to undertake a very important
+    expedition, in which we shall all join. We shall fasten
+    up the door of the cave, and at the proper time I shall
+    tell you to what place we are going."
+</p>
+<p>
+    An hour or two before midnight the band set out,
+    accompanied by the Stranger and the Hermit's Pupil;
+    and when they had gone some miles the Captain halted
+    them to inform them of the object of the expedition.
+    "We are going," he said, "to rob the Queen's
+    museum. It is the most important business we have
+    ever undertaken."
+</p>
+<p>
+    At these words the Stranger stepped forward and
+    made a protest. "I left the city yesterday," he said,
+    "commissioned by the Queen to obtain one or more
+    objects of interest for her museum; and to return now
+    to rob an institution which I have promised to enrich
+    will be simply impossible."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "You are right," said the Captain, after a moment's
+    reflection, "such an action would be highly dishonorable
+    on your part. If you will give me your word of
+    honor that you will remain by this stone until our
+    return, the expedition will proceed without you."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Stranger gave his word, and having been left
+    sitting upon the stone, soon dropped asleep, and so
+    remained until he was awakened by the return of the
+    band, a little before daylight. They came slowly toiling
+    along, each man carrying an enormous bundle
+    upon his back. Near the end of the line was the
+    Hermit's Pupil, bearing a load as heavy as any of
+    the others. The Stranger offered to relieve him for a
+    time of his burden, but the Pupil would not allow it.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I don't wish these men to think I can't do as much
+    as they can," he said. "You ought to have been
+    along. We had a fine time! We swept that museum
+    clean, I tell you! We didn't leave a thing on a shelf
+    or in a case."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "What sort of things are they," asked the
+    Stranger.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I don't know," replied the Pupil, "we didn't
+    have any light for fear people would notice it, but the
+    moon shone in bright enough for us to see all the
+    shelves and the cases; and our orders were not to try
+    and examine any thing, but to take all that was there.
+    The cases had great cloth covers on them, and we
+    spread these on the floor and made bundles of the
+    curiosities. We are going to examine them carefully
+    as soon as we get to the den."
+</p>
+<p>
+    It was broad daylight when the robbers reached their
+    cave. The bundles were laid in a great circle on the
+    floor, and, at a given signal, they were opened. For
+    a moment each robber gazed blankly at the contents
+    of his bundle, and then they all began to fumble and
+    search among the piles of articles upon the cloths; but
+    after a few minutes, they arose, looking blanker and
+    more disappointed than before.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "So far as I can see," said the Captain, "there is
+    nothing in the whole collection that I care for. I do
+    not like a thing here!"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Nor I!" "Nor I!" "Nor I!" cried each one
+    of his band.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I suppose," said the Captain, after musing for
+    a moment, "that as these things are of no use to us,
+    we are bound in honor to take them back."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Hold!" said the Stranger, stepping forward; "do
+    not be in too great a hurry to do that." He then told
+    the Captain of the state of affairs in the city, and
+    explained in full the nature of the expedition he had
+    undertaken for the Queen. "I think it would be
+    better," he said, "if these things were not taken back
+    for the present. If you have a safe place where you
+    can put them, I will in due time tell the Queen where
+    they are, and if she chooses she can send for them."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Good!" said the Captain, "it is but right that
+    she should bear part of the labor of transportation.
+    There is a disused cave, a mile or so away, and we
+    will tie up these bundles and carry them there; and
+    then we shall leave the matter to you. We take no
+    further interest in it. And if you have given your
+    parole to the Queen to return in a week," the Captain
+    further continued, "of course you'll have to keep it.
+    Did you give your parole also?" he asked, turning to
+    the Pupil.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Oh, no!" cried that youth; "there was no time
+    fixed for my return. And I am sure that I like a
+    robber's life much better than that of a hermit. There
+    is ever so much more spice and dash in it."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "The Stranger was then told that if he would promise
+    not to betray the robbers he might depart. He
+    gave the promise; but added sadly that he had lost so
+    much time that he was afraid he would not now be able
+    to attain the object of his search and return within the
+    week.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "If that is the case," said the Captain, "we will
+    gladly assist you." "Comrades!" he cried, addressing
+    his band, "after stowing this useless booty in the
+    disused cave, and taking some rest and refreshment,
+    we will set out again, and the object of our expedition
+    shall be to obtain something for the Queen's museum
+    which will interest every one."
+</p>
+<p>
+    Shortly after midnight the robbers set out, accompanied
+    by the Stranger and the Pupil. When they
+    had walked about an hour, the Captain, as was his
+    custom, brought them to a halt that he might tell
+    them where they were going. "I have concluded,"
+    said he, "that no place is so likely to contain what we
+    are looking for as the castle of the great magician,
+    Alfrarmedj. We will, therefore, proceed thither, and
+    sack the castle."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Will there not be great danger in attacking the
+    castle of a magician?" asked the Stranger in somewhat
+    anxious tones.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Of course there will be," said the Captain, "but
+    we are not such cowards as to hesitate on account of
+    danger. Forward, my men!" And on they all
+    marched.
+</p>
+<p>
+    When they reached the magician's castle, the order
+    was given to scale the outer wall. This the robbers
+    did with great agility, and the Hermit's Pupil was
+    among the first to surmount it. But the Stranger was
+    not used to climbing, and he had to be assisted over
+    the wall. Inside the great court-yard they perceived
+    numbers of Weirds&mdash;strange shadowy creatures who
+    gathered silently around them; but not in the least
+    appalled, the robbers formed into a body, and marched
+    into the castle, the door of which stood open. They
+    now entered a great hall, having at one end a doorway
+    before which hung a curtain. Following their Captain,
+    the robbers approached this curtain, and pushing it
+    aside, entered the room beyond. There, behind a
+    large table, sat the great magician, Alfrarmedj, busy
+    over his mystic studies, which he generally pursued in
+    the dead hours of the night. Drawing their swords,
+    the robbers rushed upon him.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Surrender!" cried the Captain, "and deliver to
+    us the treasures of your castle."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The old magician raised his head from his book,
+    and, pushing up his spectacles from his forehead,
+    looked at them mildly, and said:
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Freeze!"
+</p>
+<p>
+    Instantly, they all froze as hard as ice, each man
+    remaining in the position in which he was when the
+    magical word was uttered. With uplifted swords and
+    glaring eyes they stood, rigid and stiff, before the
+    magician. After calmly surveying the group, the old
+    man said:
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I see among you one who has an intelligent brow
+    and truthful expression. His head may thaw sufficiently
+    for him to tell me what means this untimely
+    intrusion upon my studies."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Stranger now felt his head begin to thaw, and
+    in a few moments he was able to speak. He then
+    told the magician about the Queen's museum, and how
+    it had happened that he had come there with the robbers.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Your motive is a good one," said the magician,
+    "though your actions are somewhat erratic; and I do
+    not mind helping you to find what you wish. In what
+    class of objects do the people of the city take the
+    most interest?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Truly I do not know," said the Stranger.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "This is indeed surprising!" exclaimed Alfrarmedj.
+    "How can you expect to obtain that which
+    will interest every one, when you do not know what it
+    is in which every one takes an interest? Go, find out
+    this, and then return to me, and I will see what can be
+    done."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The magician then summoned his Weirds and ordered
+    them to carry the frozen visitors outside the castle
+    walls. Each one of the rigid figures was taken up by
+    two Weirds, who carried him out and stood him up
+    in the road outside the castle. When all had been
+    properly set up, with the captain at their head, the
+    gates were shut, and the magician still sitting at his
+    table, uttered the word, "Thaw!"
+</p>
+<p>
+    Instantly, the whole band thawed and marched
+    away. At daybreak they halted, and considered how
+    they should find out what all the people in the city took
+    an interest in.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "One thing is certain," cried the Hermit's Pupil,
+    "whatever it is, it isn't the same thing."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Your remark is not well put together," said the
+    Stranger, "but I see the force of it. It is true that
+    different people like different things. But how shall
+    we find out what the different people like?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "By asking them," said the Pupil.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Good!" cried the Captain, who preferred action
+    to words. "This night we will ask them."
+    He then drew upon the sand a plan of the city,&mdash;(with
+    which he was quite familiar, having carefully
+    robbed it for many years,)&mdash;and divided it into
+    twenty-eight sections, each one of which was assigned
+    to a man. "I omit you," the Captain said to the
+    Stranger, "because I find that you are not expert
+    at climbing." He then announced that at night the
+    band would visit the city, and that each man should
+    enter the houses in his district, and ask the people
+    what it was in which they took the greatest interest.
+</p>
+<p>
+    They then proceeded to the cave for rest and
+    refreshment; and a little before midnight they entered
+    the city, and each member of the band, including the
+    Hermit's Pupil, proceeded to attend to the business
+    assigned to him. It was ordered that no one should
+    disturb the Queen, for they knew that what she took
+    most interest in was the museum. During the night
+    nearly every person in the town was aroused by a
+    black-bearded robber, who had climbed into one of the
+    windows of the house, and who, instead of demanding
+    money and jewels, simply asked what it was in which
+    that person took the greatest interest. Upon receiving
+    an answer, the robber repeated it until he had
+    learned it by heart, and then went to the next house.
+    As so many of the citizens were confined in prisons,
+    which the robbers easily entered, they transacted the
+    business in much less time than they would otherwise
+    have required.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Hermit's Pupil was very active, climbing into
+    and out of houses with great agility. He obtained his
+    answers quite as easily as did the others, but whenever
+    he left a house there was a shade of disappointment
+    upon his features. Among the last places that he
+    visited was a room in which two boys were sleeping.
+    He awoke them and asked the usual question. While
+    they were trembling in their bed, not knowing what to
+    answer, the Pupil drew his sword and exclaimed:
+    "Come, now, no prevarication; you know it's fishing-tackle.
+    Speak out!" Each of the boys then promptly
+    declared it was fishing-tackle, and the pupil left, greatly
+    gratified. "I was very much afraid," he said to himself,
+    "that not a person in my district would say fishing-tackle;
+    and I am glad to think that there were two
+    boys who had sense enough to like something that is
+    really interesting."
+</p>
+<p>
+    It was nearly daylight when the work was finished;
+    and then the band gathered together in an appointed
+    place on the outside of the city, where the Stranger
+    awaited them. Each of the men had an excellent
+    memory, which was necessary in their profession, and
+    they repeated to the Stranger all the objects and subjects
+    that had been mentioned to them, and he wrote
+    them down upon tablets.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The next night, accompanied by the band, he proceeded
+    to the castle of the magician, the great gate of
+    which was silently opened for them by the Weirds.
+    When they were ushered into the magician's room,
+    Alfrarmedj took the tablets from the Stranger and examined
+    them carefully.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "All these things should make a very complete
+    collection," he said, "and I think I have specimens
+    of the various objects in my interminable vaults."
+    He then called his Weirds and, giving one of them
+    the tablets, told him to go with his companions into the
+    vaults and gather enough of the things therein mentioned
+    to fill a large museum. In half an hour the
+    Weirds returned and announced that the articles were
+    ready in the great court-yard.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Go, then," said the magician, "and assist these
+    men to carry them to the Queen's museum."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Stranger then heartily thanked Alfrarmedj for
+    the assistance he had given; and the band, accompanied
+    by a number of Weirds, proceeded to carry the
+    objects of interest to the Queen's museum. It was
+    a strange procession. Half a dozen Weirds carried a
+    stuffed mammoth, followed by others bearing the skeleton
+    of a whale, while the robbers and the rest of their
+    queer helpers were loaded with every thing relating to
+    history, science, and art which ought to be in a really
+    good museum. When the whole collection had been
+    put in place upon the floors, the shelves, and in the
+    cases, it was nearly morning. The robbers, with the
+    Hermit's Pupil, retired to the cave; the Weirds disappeared;
+    while the Stranger betook himself to the
+    Queen's palace, where, as soon as the proper hour
+    arrived, he requested an audience.
+</p>
+<p>
+    When he saw the Queen, he perceived that she was
+    very pale and that her cheeks bore traces of recent
+    tears. "You are back in good time," she said to
+    him, "but it makes very little difference whether you
+    have succeeded in your mission or not. There is no
+    longer any museum. There has been a great robbery,
+    and the thieves have carried off the whole of the vast
+    and valuable collection which I have been so long in
+    making."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I know of that affair," said the Stranger, "and
+    I have already placed in your museum-building the
+    collection which I have obtained. If your Majesty
+    pleases, I shall be glad to have you look at it. It may,
+    in some degree, compensate for that which has been
+    stolen."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Compensate!" cried the Queen. "Nothing can
+    compensate for it; I do not even wish to see what you
+    have brought."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Be that as your Majesty pleases," said the Stranger;
+    "but I will be so bold as to say that I have great
+    hopes that the collection which I have obtained will
+    interest the people. Will your Majesty graciously
+    allow them to see it?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I have no objection to that," said the Queen;
+    "and indeed I shall be very glad if they can be
+    made to be interested in the museum. I will give
+    orders that the prisons be opened, so that everybody
+    can go to see what you have brought; and those who
+    shall be interested in it may return to their homes. I
+    did not release my obstinate subjects when the museum
+    was robbed, because their fault then was just as great
+    as it was before; and it would not be right that they
+    should profit by my loss."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Queen's proclamation was made, and for several
+    days the museum was crowded with people moving
+    from morning till night through the vast collection of
+    stuffed animals, birds, and fishes; rare and brilliant
+    insects; mineral and vegetable curiosities; beautiful
+    works of art; and all the strange, valuable, and instructive
+    objects which had been brought from the
+    interminable vaults of the magician Alfrarmedj. The
+    Queen's officers, who had been sent to observe whether
+    or not the people were interested, were in no doubt
+    upon this point. Every eye sparkled with delight,
+    for every one found something which was the very
+    thing he wished to see; and in the throng was the
+    Hermit's Pupil, standing in rapt ecstasy before a large
+    case containing all sorts of fishing-tackle, from the
+    smallest hooks for little minnows to the great irons
+    and spears used in capturing whales.
+</p>
+<p>
+    No one went back to prison, and the city was full
+    of re-united households and happy homes. On the
+    morning of the fourth day, a grand procession of
+    citizens came to the palace to express to the Queen
+    their delight and appreciation of her museum. The
+    great happiness of her subjects could but please the
+    Queen. She called the Stranger to her, and said to
+    him:
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Tell me how you came to know what it was that
+    would interest my people."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I asked them," said the Stranger. "That is to
+    say, I arranged that they should be asked."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "That was well done," said the Queen; "but it is
+    a great pity that my long labors in their behalf should
+    have been lost. For many years I have been a collector
+    of button-holes; and there was nothing valuable
+    or rare in the line of my studies of which I had not
+    an original specimen or a facsimile. My agents
+    brought me from foreign lands, even from the most
+    distant islands of the sea, button-holes of every kind;
+    in silk, in wool, in cloth of gold, in every imaginable
+    material, and of those which could not be obtained
+    careful copies were made. There was not a duplicate
+    specimen in the whole collection; only one of each
+    kind; nothing repeated. Never before was there such
+    a museum. With all my power I strove to educate my
+    people up to an appreciation of button-holes; but,
+    with the exception of a few tailors and seamstresses,
+    nobody took the slightest interest in what I had provided
+    for their benefit. I am glad that my people are
+    happy, but I cannot restrain a sigh for the failure of
+    my efforts."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "The longer your Majesty lives," said the Stranger,
+    "the better you will understand that we cannot make
+    other people like a thing simply because we like it
+    ourselves."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Stranger," said the Queen, gazing upon him with
+    admiration, "are you a king in disguise?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I am," he replied.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I thought I perceived it," said the Queen, "and
+    I wish to add that I believe you are far better able to
+    govern this kingdom than I am. If you choose I will
+    resign it to you."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Not so, your majesty," said the other; "I would
+    not deprive you of your royal position, but I should
+    be happy to share it with you."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "That will answer very well," said the Queen.
+    And turning to an attendant, she gave orders that
+    preparations should be made for their marriage on the
+    following day.
+</p>
+<p>
+    After the royal wedding, which was celebrated with
+    great pomp and grandeur, the Queen paid a visit to
+    the museum, and, much to her surprise, was greatly
+    delighted and interested. The King then informed
+    her that he happened to know where the robbers had
+    stored her collection, which they could not sell or
+    make use of, and if she wished, he would regain the
+    collection and erect a building for its reception.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "We will not do that at present," said the
+    Queen. "When I shall have thoroughly examined
+    and studied all these objects, most of which are entirely
+    new to me, we will decide about the button-holes."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Hermit's Pupil did not return to his cave. He
+    was greatly delighted with the spice and dash of a
+    robber's life, so different from that of a hermit; and
+    he determined, if possible, to change his business and
+    enter the band. He had a conversation with the
+    Captain on the subject, and that individual encouraged
+    him in his purpose.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I am tired," the Captain said, "of a robber's life.
+    I have stolen so much, that I cannot use what I
+    have. I take no further interest in accumulating spoils.
+    The quiet of a hermit's life attracts me; and, if you
+    like we will change places. I will become the pupil of
+    your old master, and you shall be the captain of my
+    band."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The change was made. The Captain retired to the
+    cave of the Hermit's Pupil, while the latter, with the
+    hearty consent of all the men, took command of
+    the band of robbers.
+</p>
+<p>
+    When the King heard of this change, he was not
+    at all pleased, and he sent for the ex-pupil.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I am willing to reward you," he said, "for
+    assisting me in my recent undertaking; but I cannot
+    allow you to lead a band of robbers in my dominions."
+</p>
+<p>
+    A dark shade of disappointment passed over the
+    ex-pupil's features, and his face lengthened visibly.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "It is too bad," he said, "to be thus cut short at
+    the very outset of a brilliant career. I'll tell you
+    what I'll do," he added suddenly, his face brightening,
+    "if you'll let me keep on in my new profession, I'll
+    promise to do nothing but rob robbers."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Very well," said the King, "if you will confine
+    yourself to that, you may retain your position."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The members of the band were perfectly willing to
+    rob in the new way, for it seemed quite novel and
+    exciting to them. The first place they robbed was
+    their own cave, and as they all had excellent memories,
+    they knew from whom the various goods had been
+    stolen, and every thing was returned to its proper
+    owner. The ex-pupil then led his band against the
+    other dens of robbers in the kingdom, and his movements
+    were conducted with such dash and vigor that
+    the various hordes scattered in every direction, while
+    the treasures in their dens were returned to the owners,
+    or, if these could not be found, were given to the
+    poor. In a short time every robber, except those led
+    by the ex-pupil, had gone into some other business;
+    and the victorious youth led his band into other
+    kingdoms to continue the great work of robbing
+    robbers.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Queen never sent for the collection of curiosities
+    which the robbers had stolen from her. She was
+    so much interested in the new museum that she continually
+    postponed the re-establishment of her old one;
+    and, as far as can be known, the button-holes are still
+    in the cave where the robbers shut them up.
+</p>
+<a name="chapter5"><!-- H2 anchor --></a>
+
+<div style="height: 2em;"></div>
+
+<h2>
+    CHRISTMAS BEFORE LAST;
+</h2>
+<center>
+    OR, THE FRUIT OF THE FRAGILE PALM.
+</center>
+<hr>
+<p>
+    The "Horn o' Plenty" was a fine, big, old-fashioned
+    ship, very high in the bow, very high in
+    the stern, with a quarter-deck always carpeted in fine
+    weather, because her captain could not see why one
+    should not make himself comfortable at sea as well as
+    on land. Covajos Maroots was her captain, and a
+    fine, jolly, old-fashioned, elderly sailor he was. The
+    "Horn o' Plenty" always sailed upon one sea, and
+    always between two ports, one on the west side of the
+    sea, and one on the east. The port on the west was
+    quite a large city, in which Captain Covajos had a
+    married son, and the port on the east was another city
+    in which he had a married daughter. In each family he
+    had several grandchildren; and, consequently, it was
+    a great joy to the jolly old sailor to arrive at either
+    port. The Captain was very particular about his
+    cargo, and the "Horn o' Plenty" was generally laden
+    with good things to eat, or sweet things to smell, or
+    fine things to wear, or beautiful things to look at.
+    Once a merchant brought to him some boxes of bitter
+    aloes, and mustard plasters, but Captain Covajos
+    refused to take them into his ship.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I know," said he, "that such things are very useful
+    and necessary at times, but you would better send
+    them over in some other vessel. The 'Horn o' Plenty'
+    has never carried any thing that to look at, to taste, or
+    to smell, did not delight the souls of old and young.
+    I am sure you cannot say that of these commodities.
+    If I were to put such things on board my ship, it would
+    break the spell which more than fifty savory voyages
+    have thrown around it."
+</p>
+<p>
+    There were sailors who sailed upon that sea who
+    used to say that sometimes, when the weather was
+    hazy and they could not see far, they would know they
+    were about to meet the "Horn o' Plenty" before she
+    came in sight; her planks and timbers, and even her
+    sails and masts, had gradually become so filled with
+    the odor of good things that the winds that blew
+    over her were filled with an agreeable fragrance.
+</p>
+<p>
+    There was another thing about which Captain Covajos
+    was very particular; he always liked to arrive at
+    one of his ports a few days before Christmas. Never,
+    in the course of his long life, had the old sailor spent
+    a Christmas at sea; and now that he had his fine
+    grandchildren to help make the holidays merry, it
+    would have grieved him very much if he had been
+    unable to reach one or the other of his ports in good
+    season. His jolly old vessel was generally heavily
+    laden, and very slow, and there were many days of
+    calms on that sea when she did not sail at all, so that
+    her voyages were usually very, very long. But the
+    Captain fixed the days of sailing so as to give himself
+    plenty of time to get to the other end of his course
+    before Christmas came around.
+</p>
+<p>
+    One spring, however, he started too late, and when
+    he was about the middle of his voyage, he called to
+    him Baragat Bean, his old boatswain. This venerable
+    sailor had been with the Captain ever since he had
+    commanded the "Horn o' Plenty," and on important
+    occasions he was always consulted in preference to the
+    other officers, none of whom had served under Captain
+    Covajos more then fifteen or twenty years.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Baragat," said the Captain, "we have just passed
+    the Isle of Guinea-Hens. You can see its one mountain
+    standing up against the sky to the north."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Aye, aye, sir," said old Baragat; "there she
+    stands, the same as usual."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "That makes it plain," said the Captain, "that we
+    are not yet half-way across, and I am very much afraid
+    that I shall not be able to reach my dear daughter's
+    house before Christmas."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "That would be doleful, indeed," said Baragat;
+    "but I've feared something of the kind, for we've had
+    calms nearly every other day, and sometimes, when
+    the wind did blow, it came from the wrong direction,
+    and it's my belief that the ship sailed backward."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "That was very bad management," said the Captain.
+    "The chief mate should have seen to it that the
+    sails were turned in such a manner that the ship could
+    not go backward. If that sort of thing happened
+    often, it would become quite a serious affair."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "But what is done can't be helped," said the boatswain,
+    "and I don't see how you are going to get into
+    port before Christmas."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Nor do I," said the Captain, gazing out over the
+    sea.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "It would give me a sad turn, sir," said Baragat,
+    "to see you spend Christmas at sea; a thing you never
+    did before, nor ever shall do, if I can help it. If you'll
+    take my advice, sir, you'll turn around, and go back.
+    It's a shorter distance to the port we started from than
+    to the one we are going to, and if we turn back
+    now, I am sure we all shall be on shore before the
+    holidays."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Go back to my son's house!" exclaimed Captain
+    Covajos, "where I was last winter! Why, that would
+    be like spending last Christmas over again!"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "But that would be better than having none at all,
+    sir," said the boatswain, "and a Christmas at sea
+    would be about equal to none."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Good!" exclaimed the Captain. "I will give up
+    the coming Christmas with my daughter and her children,
+    and go back and spend last Christmas over again
+    with my son and his dear boys and girls. Have the
+    ship turned around immediately, Baragat, and tell the
+    chief mate I do not wish to sail backward if it can
+    possibly be avoided."
+</p>
+<p>
+    For a week or more the "Horn o' Plenty" sailed
+    back upon her track towards the city where dwelt the
+    Captain's son. The weather was fine, the carpet was
+    never taken up from the quarter-deck, and every thing
+    was going on very well, when a man, who happened to
+    have an errand at one of the topmasts, came down,
+    and reported that, far away to the north, he had seen
+    a little open boat with some people in it.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Ah me!" said Captain Covajos, "it must be
+    some poor fellows who are shipwrecked. It will take
+    us out of our course, but we must not leave them to
+    their fate. Have the ship turned about, so that it will
+    sail northward."
+</p>
+<p>
+    It was not very long before they came up with the
+    boat; and, much to the Captain's surprise, he saw that
+    it was filled with boys.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Who are you?" he cried as soon as he was near
+    enough. "And where do you come from?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "We are the First Class in Long Division," said
+    the oldest boy, "and we are cast away. Have you
+    any thing to eat that you can spare us? We are almost
+    famished."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "We have plenty of every thing," said the Captain.
+    "Come on board instantly, and all your wants shall
+    be supplied."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "How long have you been without food?" he asked,
+    when the boys were on the deck of the vessel.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "We have had nothing to eat since breakfast," said
+    one of them; "and it is now late in the afternoon.
+    Some of us are nearly dead from starvation."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "It is very hard for boys to go so long without
+    eating," said the good Captain. And leading them
+    below, he soon set them to work upon a bountiful
+    meal.
+</p>
+<p>
+    Not until their hunger was fully satisfied did he ask
+    them how they came to be cast away.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "You see, sir," said the oldest boy, "that we and
+    the Multiplication Class had a holiday to-day, and
+    each class took a boat and determined to have a race,
+    so as to settle, once for all, which was the highest
+    branch of arithmetic, multiplication or long division.
+    Our class rowed so hard that we entirely lost sight of
+    the Multiplicationers, and found indeed that we were
+    out of sight of every thing; so that, at last, we did not
+    know which was the way back, and thus we became
+    castaways."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Where is your school?" asked the Captain.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "It is on Apple Island," said the boy; "and,
+    although it is a long way off for a small boat with
+    only four oars for nine boys, it can't be very far for a
+    ship."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "That is quite likely," said the Captain, "and we
+    shall take you home. Baragat, tell the chief mate to
+    have the vessel turned toward Apple Island, that we
+    may restore these boys to their parents and guardians."
+</p>
+<p>
+    Now, the chief mate had not the least idea in the
+    world where Apple Island was, but he did not like to
+    ask, because that would be confessing his ignorance;
+    so he steered his vessel toward a point where he believed
+    he had once seen an island, which, probably,
+    was the one in question. The "Horn o' Plenty"
+    sailed in this direction all night, and when day broke,
+    and there was no island in sight, she took another
+    course; and so sailed this way and that for six or
+    seven days, without ever seeing a sign of land. All
+    this time, the First Class in Long Division was as
+    happy as it could be, for it was having a perfect holiday;
+    fishing off the sides of the vessel, climbing up
+    the ladders and ropes, and helping the sailors whistle
+    for wind. But the Captain now began to grow a little
+    impatient, for he felt he was losing time; so he sent
+    for the chief mate, and said to him mildly but firmly:
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I know it is out of the line of your duty to search
+    for island schools, but, if you really think that you do
+    not know where Apple Island lies, I wish you to say
+    so, frankly and openly."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Frankly and openly," answered the mate, "I
+    don't think I do."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Very well," said the Captain. "Now, that is a
+    basis to work upon, and we know where we stand.
+    You can take a little rest, and let the second mate find
+    the island. But I can only give him three days in
+    which to do it. We really have no time to spare."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The second mate was very proud of the responsibility
+    placed upon him, and immediately ordered the
+    vessel to be steered due south.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "One is just as likely," he said, "to find a totally
+    unknown place by going straight ahead in a certain
+    direction, as by sailing here, there, and everywhere.
+    In this way, you really get over more water, and there
+    is less wear and tear of the ship and rigging."
+</p>
+<p>
+    So he sailed due south for two days, and at the end
+    of that time they came in sight of land. This was
+    quite a large island, and when they approached near
+    enough, they saw upon its shores a very handsome
+    city.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Is this Apple Island?" said Captain Covajos to
+    the oldest boy.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Well, sir," answered the youth, "I am not sure I
+    can say with certainty that I truly believe that it is;
+    but, I think, if we were to go on shore, the people
+    there would be able to tell us how to go to Apple
+    Island."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Very likely," said the good Captain; "and we
+    will go on shore and make inquiries.&mdash;And it has struck
+    me, Baragat," he said, "that perhaps the merchants in
+    the city where my son lives may be somewhat annoyed
+    when the 'Horn o' Plenty' comes back with all their
+    goods on board, and not disposed of. Not understanding
+    my motives, they may be disposed to think ill
+    of me. Consequently the idea has come into my head,
+    that it might be a good thing to stop here for a time,
+    and try to dispose of some of our merchandise. The
+    city seems to be quite prosperous, and I have no doubt
+    there are a number of merchants here."
+</p>
+<p>
+    So the "Horn o' Plenty" was soon anchored in the
+    harbor, and as many of the officers and crew as could
+    be spared went on shore to make inquiries. Of course
+    the First Class in Long Division was not left behind;
+    and, indeed, they were ashore as soon as anybody.
+    The Captain and his companions were cordially welcomed
+    by some of the dignitaries of the city who had
+    come down to the harbor to see the strange vessel;
+    but no one could give any information in regard to
+    Apple Island, the name of which had never been heard
+    on those shores. The Captain was naturally desirous
+    of knowing at what place he had landed, and was
+    informed that this was the Island of the Fragile Palm.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "That is rather an odd name," said the old Captain.
+    "Why is it so called?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "The reason is this," said his informant. "Near
+    the centre of the island stands a tall and very slender
+    palm-tree, which has been growing there for hundreds
+    of years. It bears large and handsome fruit which
+    is something like the cocoanut; and, in its perfection,
+    is said to be a transcendently delicious fruit."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Said to be!" exclaimed the Captain; "are you
+    not positive about it?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "No," said the other; "no one living has ever
+    tasted the fruit in its perfection. When it becomes
+    overripe, it drops to the ground, and, even then, it is
+    considered royal property, and is taken to the palace
+    for the King's table. But on f&ecirc;te-days and grand
+    occasions small bits of it are distributed to the
+    populace."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Why don't you pick the fruit," asked Captain
+    Covajos, "when it is in its best condition to eat?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "It would be impossible," said the citizen, "for
+    any one to climb up that tree, the trunk of which is so
+    extremely delicate and fragile that the weight of a
+    man would probably snap it; and, of course, a ladder
+    placed against it would produce the same result.
+    Many attempts have been made to secure this fruit at
+    the proper season, but all of them have failed. Another
+    palm-tree of a more robust sort was once planted near
+    this one in the hope that when it grew high enough,
+    men could climb up the stronger tree and get the fruit
+    from the other. But, although we waited many years
+    the second tree never attained sufficient height, and it
+    was cut down."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "It is a great pity," said the Captain; "but I
+    suppose it cannot be helped." And then he began to
+    make inquiries about the merchants in the place, and
+    what probability there was of his doing a little trade
+    here. The Captain soon discovered that the cargo of
+    his ship was made up of goods which were greatly
+    desired by the citizens of this place; and for several
+    days he was very busy in selling the good things to
+    eat, the sweet things to smell, the fine things to wear,
+    and the beautiful things to look at, with which the
+    hold of the "Horn o' Plenty" was crowded.
+</p>
+<p>
+    During this time the First Class in Long Division
+    roamed, in delight, over the city. The busy streets,
+    the shops, the handsome buildings, and the queer
+    sights which they occasionally met, interested and
+    amused them greatly. But still the boys were not
+    satisfied. They had heard of the Fragile Palm, and
+    they made up their minds to go and have a look at it.
+    Therefore, taking a guide, they tramped out into the
+    country, and in about an hour they came in sight of
+    the beautiful tree standing in the centre of the plain.
+    The trunk was, indeed, exceedingly slender, and, as
+    the guide informed them, the wood was of so very
+    brittle a nature that if the tree had not been protected
+    from the winds by the high hills which encircled it,
+    it would have been snapped off ages ago. Under
+    the broad tuft of leaves that formed its top, the boys
+    saw hanging large clusters of the precious fruit; great
+    nuts as big as their heads.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "At what time of the year," asked the oldest boy,
+    "is that fruit just ripe enough to eat?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Now," answered the guide. "This is the season
+    when it is in the most perfect condition. In about a
+    month it will become entirely too ripe and soft, and
+    will drop. But, even then, the King and all the rest
+    of us are glad enough to get a taste of it."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I should think the King would be exceedingly
+    eager to get some of it, just as it is," said the boy.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Indeed he is!" replied the guide. "He and his
+    father, and I don't know how many grandfathers back,
+    have offered large rewards to any one who would procure
+    them this fruit in its best condition. But nobody
+    has ever been able to get any yet."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "The reward still holds good, I suppose," said the
+    head boy.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Oh, yes," answered the guide; "there never was
+    a King who so much desired to taste the fruit as our
+    present monarch."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The oldest boy looked up at the top of the tree,
+    shut one eye, and gave his head a little wag. Whereupon
+    every boy in the class looked up, shut one eye,
+    and slightly wagged his head. After which the oldest
+    boy said that he thought it was about time for them
+    to go back to the ship.
+</p>
+<p>
+    As soon as they reached the vessel, and could talk
+    together freely, the boys had an animated discussion.
+    It was unanimously agreed that they would make an
+    attempt to get some of the precious fruit from the
+    Fragile Palm, and the only difference of opinion among
+    them was as to how it should be done. Most of them
+    were in favor of some method of climbing the tree and
+    trusting to its not breaking. But this the oldest boy
+    would not listen to; the trunk might snap, and then
+    somebody would be hurt, and he felt, in a measure,
+    responsible for the rest of the class. At length a
+    good plan was proposed by a boy who had studied
+    mechanics.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "What we ought to do with that tree," said he,
+    "is to put a hinge into her. Then we could let her
+    down gently, pick off the fruit, and set her up again.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "But how are you going to do it?" asked the
+    others.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "This is the way," said the boy who had studied
+    mechanics. "You take a saw, and then, about two
+    feet from the ground, you begin and saw down diagonally,
+    for a foot and a half, to the centre of the
+    trunk. Then you go on the other side, and saw down
+    in the same way, the two outs meeting each other.
+    Now you have the upper part of the trunk ending in
+    a wedge, which fits into a cleft in the lower part of
+    the trunk. Then, about nine inches below the place
+    where you first began to saw, you bore a hole straight
+    through both sides of the cleft and the wedge between
+    them. Then you put an iron bolt through this hole,
+    and you have your tree on a hinge, only she wont be
+    apt to move because she fits in so snug and tight.
+    Then you get a long rope, and put one end in a slipknot
+    loosely around the trunk. Then you get a lot of
+    poles, and tie them end to end, and push this slip-knot
+    up until it is somewhere near the top, when you pull
+    it tight. Then you take another rope with a slip-knot,
+    and push this a little more than half-way up the
+    trunk. By having two ropes, that way, you prevent
+    too much strain coming on any one part of the trunk.
+    Then, after that, you take a mallet and chisel and
+    round off the lower corners of the wedge, so that it
+    will turn easily in the cleft. Then we take hold of the
+    ropes, let her down gently, pick off the fruit, and haul
+    her up again. That will all be easy enough."
+</p>
+<p>
+    This plan delighted the boys, and they all pronounced
+    in its favor; but the oldest one suggested
+    that it would be better to fasten the ropes to the trunk
+    before they began to saw upon it, and another boy
+    asked how they were going to keep the tree standing
+    when they hauled her up again.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Oh, that is easy," said the one who had studied
+    mechanics; "you just bore another hole about six
+    inches above the first one, and put in another bolt.
+    Then, of course, she can't move."
+</p>
+<p>
+    This settled all the difficulties, and it was agreed to
+    start out early the next morning, gather the fruit, and
+    claim the reward the King had offered. They accordingly
+    went to the Captain and asked him for a sharp saw,
+    a mallet and chisel, an auger, two iron bolts, and two
+    very long ropes. These, having been cheerfully given
+    to them, were put away in readiness for the work to
+    be attempted.
+</p>
+<p>
+    Very early on the next morning, the First Class in
+    Long Division set out for the Fragile Palm, carrying
+    their tools and ropes. Few people were awake as they
+    passed through the city, and, without being observed,
+    they reached the little plain on which the tree stood.
+    The ropes were attached at the proper places, the tree
+    was sawn, diagonally, according to the plan; the bolt
+    was put in, and the corners of the wedge were rounded
+    off. Then the eldest boy produced a pound of butter,
+    whereupon his comrades, who had seized the ropes,
+    paused in surprise and asked him why he had brought
+    the butter.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I thought it well," was the reply, "to bring along
+    some butter, because, when the tree is down, we can
+    grease the hinge, and then it will not be so hard to
+    pull it up again."
+</p>
+<p>
+    When all was ready, eight of the boys took hold of
+    the long ropes, while another one with a pole pushed
+    against the trunk of the Fragile Palm. When it began
+    to lean over a little, he dropped his pole and ran to
+    help the others with the ropes. Slowly the tree moved
+    on its hinge, descending at first very gradually; but it
+    soon began to move with greater rapidity, although
+    the boys held it back with all their strength; and,
+    in spite of their most desperate efforts, the top came to
+    the ground at last with a great thump. And then
+    they all dropped their ropes, and ran for the fruit.
+    Fortunately the great nuts incased in their strong
+    husks were not in the least injured, and the boys soon
+    pulled them off, about forty in all. Some of the boys
+    were in favor of cracking open a few of the nuts
+    and eating them, but this the eldest boy positively
+    forbade.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "This fruit," he said, "is looked upon as almost
+    sacred, and if we were to eat any of it, it is probable
+    that we should be put to death, which would be extremely
+    awkward for fellows who have gone to all the
+    trouble we have had. We must set up the tree and
+    carry the fruit to the King."
+</p>
+<p>
+    According to this advice, they thoroughly greased the
+    hinge in the tree with the butter, and then set themselves
+    to work to haul up the trunk. This, however,
+    was much more difficult than letting it down; and they
+    had to lift up the head of it, and prop it up on poles,
+    before they could pull upon it with advantage. The
+    tree, although tall, was indeed a very slender one, with
+    a small top, and, if it had been as fragile as it was
+    supposed to be, the boys' efforts would surely have
+    broken it. At last, after much tugging and warm
+    work, they pulled it into an upright position, and put
+    in the second bolt. They left the ropes on the tree
+    because, as some of them had suggested, the people
+    might want to let the tree down again the next year.
+    It would have been difficult for the boys to carry in
+    their arms the great pile of fruit they had gathered;
+    but, having noticed a basket-maker's cottage on their
+    way to the tree, two of them were sent to buy one of
+    his largest baskets or hampers. This was attached to
+    two long poles, and, having been filled with the nuts,
+    the boys took the poles on their shoulders, and marched
+    into the city.
+</p>
+<p>
+    On their way to the palace they attracted a great
+    crowd, and when they were ushered into the presence
+    of the King, his surprise and delight knew no bounds.
+    At first he could scarcely believe his eyes; but he had
+    seen the fruit so often that there could be no mistake
+    about it.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I shall not ask you," he said to the boys, "how
+    you procured this fruit, and thus accomplished a deed
+    which has been the object of the ambition of myself
+    and my forefathers. All I ask is, did you leave the
+    tree standing?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "We did," said the boys.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Then all that remains to be done," said His Majesty,
+    "is to give you the reward you have so nobly
+    earned. Treasurer, measure out to each of them a
+    quart of gold coin. And pray be quick about it, for I
+    am wild with desire to have a table spread, and one of
+    these nuts cracked, that I may taste of its luscious
+    contents."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The boys, however, appeared a little dissatisfied.
+    Huddling together, they consulted in a low tone, and
+    then the eldest boy addressed the King.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "May it please your Majesty," he said; "we should
+    very much prefer to have you give each of us one of
+    those nuts instead of a quart of gold."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The King looked grave. "This is a much greater
+    reward," he said, "than I had ever expected to pay;
+    but, since you ask it, you must have it. You have
+    done something which none of my subjects has ever
+    been able to accomplish, and it is right, therefore, that
+    you should be fully satisfied."
+</p>
+<p>
+    So he gave them each a nut, with which they
+    departed in triumph to the ship.
+</p>
+<p>
+    By the afternoon of the next day, the Captain had
+    sold all his cargo at very good prices; and when the
+    money was safely stored away in the "Horn o'
+    Plenty," he made ready to sail, for he declared he had
+    really no time to spare. "I must now make all possible
+    haste," he said to old Baragat, "to find Apple
+    Island, put these boys ashore, and then speed away to
+    the city where lives my son. We must not fail to get
+    there in time to spend last Christmas over again."
+</p>
+<p>
+    On the second day, after the "Horn o' Plenty" had
+    left the Island of the Fragile Palm, one of the sailors
+    who happened to be aloft noticed a low, black, and exceedingly
+    unpleasant-looking vessel rapidly approaching.
+    This soon proved to be the ship of a band of
+    corsairs, who, having heard of the large amount of
+    money on the "Horn o' Plenty," had determined to
+    pursue her and capture the rich prize. All sails were
+    set upon the "Horn o' Plenty," but it soon became
+    plain that she could never outsail the corsair vessel.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "What our ship can do better than any thing else,"
+    said Baragat to the Captain, "is to stop short. Stop
+    her short, and let the other one go by."
+</p>
+<p>
+    This manoeuvre was executed, but, although the
+    corsair passed rapidly by, not being able to stop so
+    suddenly, it soon turned around and came back, its
+    decks swarming with savage men armed to the teeth.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "They are going to board us," cried Baragat.
+    "They are getting out their grappling-irons, and they
+    will fasten the two ships together."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Let all assemble on the quarter-deck," said the
+    Captain. "It is higher there, and we shall not be so
+    much exposed to accidents."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The corsair ship soon ran alongside the "Horn o'
+    Plenty," and in a moment the two vessels were fastened
+    together; and then the corsairs, every man of
+    them, each with cutlass in hand and a belt full of dirks
+    and knives, swarmed up the side of the "Horn o'
+    Plenty," and sprang upon its central deck. Some of
+    the ferocious fellows, seeing the officers and crew all
+    huddled together upon the quarter-deck, made a movement
+    in that direction. This so frightened the chief
+    mate that he sprang down upon the deck of the corsair
+    ship. A panic now arose, and he was immediately
+    followed by the officers and crew. The boys, of
+    course, were not to be left behind; and the Captain
+    and Baragat felt themselves bound not to desert the
+    crew, and so they jumped also. None of the corsairs
+    interfered with this proceeding, for each one of them
+    was anxious to find the money at once. When the
+    passengers and crew of the "Horn o' Plenty" were
+    all on board the corsair ship, Baragat came to the
+    Captain, and said:
+</p>
+<p>
+    "If I were you, sir, I'd cast off those grapnels, and
+    separate the vessels. If we don't do that those rascals,
+    when they have finished robbing our money-chests,
+    will come back here and murder us all."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "That is a good idea," said Captain Covajos; and
+    he told the chief mate to give orders to cast off the
+    grapnels, push the two vessels apart, and set some of
+    the sails.
+</p>
+<p>
+    When this had been done, the corsair vessel began
+    to move away from the other, and was soon many
+    lengths distant from her. When the corsairs came
+    on deck and perceived what had happened, they were
+    infuriated, and immediately began to pursue their own
+    vessel with the one they had captured. But the "Horn
+    o' Plenty" could not, by any possibility, sail as fast
+    as the corsair ship, and the latter easily kept away
+    from her.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Now, then," said Baragat to the Captain, "what
+    you have to do is easy enough. Sail straight for our
+    port and those sea-robbers will follow you; for, of
+    course, they will wish to get their own vessel back
+    again, and will hope, by some carelessness on our
+    part, to overtake us. In the mean time the money will
+    be safe enough, for they will have no opportunity of
+    spending it; and when we come to port, we can take
+    some soldiers on board, and go back and capture those
+    fellows. They can never sail away from us on the
+    'Horn o' Plenty.'"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "That is an admirable plan," said the Captain,
+    "and I shall carry it out; but I cannot sail to port
+    immediately. I must first find Apple Island and land
+    these boys, whose parents and guardians are probably
+    growing very uneasy. I suppose the corsairs will continue
+    to follow us wherever we go."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I hope so," said Baragat; "at any rate we shall
+    see."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The First Class in Long Division was very much
+    delighted with the change of vessels, and the boys
+    rambled everywhere, and examined with great interest
+    all that belonged to the corsairs. They felt quite easy
+    about the only treasures they possessed, because, when
+    they had first seen the piratical vessel approaching,
+    they had taken the precious nuts which had been given
+    to them by the King, and had hidden them at the
+    bottom of some large boxes, in which the Captain
+    kept the sailors' winter clothes.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "In this warm climate," said the eldest boy,
+    "the robbers will never meddle with those winter
+    clothes, and our precious fruit will be perfectly
+    safe."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "If you had taken my advice," said one of the
+    other boys, "we should have eaten some of the nuts.
+    Those, at least, we should have been sure of."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "And we should have had that many less to show to
+    the other classes," said the eldest boy. "Nuts like
+    these, I am told, if picked at the proper season, will
+    keep for a long time."
+</p>
+<p>
+    For some days the corsairs on board the "Horn o'
+    Plenty" followed their own vessel, but then they
+    seemed to despair of ever being able to overtake it,
+    and steered in another direction. This threatened to
+    ruin all the plans of Captain Covajos, and his mind
+    became troubled. Then the boy who had studied
+    mechanics came forward and said to the Captain:
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I'll tell you what I'd do, sir, if I were you; I'd
+    follow your old ship, and when night came on I'd sail
+    up quite near to her, and let some of your sailors swim
+    quietly over, and fasten a cable to her, and then you
+    could tow her after you wherever you wished to go."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "But they might unfasten the cable, or cut it,"
+    said Baragat, who was standing by.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "That could easily be prevented," said the boy.
+    "At their end of the cable must be a stout chain
+    which they cannot cut, and it must be fastened so far
+    beneath the surface of the water that they will not be
+    able to reach it to unfasten it."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "A most excellent plan," said Captain Covajos;
+    "let it be carried out."
+</p>
+<p>
+    As soon as it became quite dark, the corsair vessel
+    quietly approached the other, and two stout sailors
+    from Finland, who swam very well, were ordered to
+    swim over and attach the chain-end of a long cable
+    to the "Horn o' Plenty." It was a very difficult
+    operation, for the chain was heavy, but the men succeeded
+    at last, and returned to report.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "We put the chain on, fast and strong sir," they
+    said to the Captain; "and six feet under water. But
+    the only place we could find to make it fast to was the
+    bottom of the rudder."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "That will do very well," remarked Baragat; "for
+    the 'Horn o' Plenty' sails better backward than forward,
+    and will not be so hard to tow."
+</p>
+<p>
+    For week after week, and month after month, Captain
+    Covajos, in the corsair vessel, sailed here and
+    there in search of Apple Island, always towing after
+    him the "Horn o' Plenty," with the corsairs on board,
+    but never an island with a school on it could they find;
+    and one day old Baragat came to the Captain and
+    said:
+</p>
+<p>
+    "If I were you, sir, I'd sail no more in these warm
+    regions. I am quite sure that apples grow in colder
+    latitudes, and are never found so far south as this."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "That is a good idea," said Captain Covajos.
+    "We should sail for the north if we wished to find an
+    island of apples. Have the vessel turned northward."
+</p>
+<p>
+    And so, for days and weeks, the two vessels slowly
+    moved on to the north. One day the Captain made
+    some observations and calculations, and then he hastily
+    summoned Baragat.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Do you know," said he, "that I find it is now
+    near the end of November, and I am quite certain that
+    we shall not get to the port where my son lives in time
+    to celebrate last Christmas again. It is dreadfully
+    slow work, towing after us the 'Horn o' Plenty,' full
+    of corsairs, wherever we go. But we cannot cast her
+    off and sail straight for our port, for I should lose my
+    good ship, the merchants would lose all their money,
+    and the corsairs would go unpunished; and, besides
+    all that, think of the misery of the parents and guardians
+    of those poor boys. No; I must endeavor to
+    find Apple Island. And if I cannot reach port in
+    time to spend last Christmas with my son, I shall certainly
+    get there in season for Christmas before last.
+    It is true that I spent that Christmas with my daughter,
+    but I cannot go on to her now. I am much nearer the
+    city where my son lives; and, besides, it is necessary
+    to go back, and give the merchants their money. So
+    now we shall have plenty of time, and need not feel
+    hurried."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "No," said Baragat, heaving a vast sigh, "we
+    need not feel hurried."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The mind of the eldest boy now became very much
+    troubled, and he called his companions about him.
+    "I don't like at all," said he, "this sailing to the
+    north. It is now November, and, although it is warm
+    enough at this season in the southern part of the sea,
+    it will become colder and colder as we go on. The
+    consequence of this will be that those corsairs will
+    want winter clothes, they will take them out of the
+    Captain's chests, and they will find our fruit."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The boys groaned. "That is true," said one of
+    them; "but still we wish to go back to our
+    island."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Of course," said the eldest boy, "it is quite
+    proper that we should return to Long Division. But
+    think of the hard work we did to get that fruit, and
+    think of the quarts of gold we gave up for it! It
+    would be too bad to lose it now!"
+</p>
+<p>
+    It was unanimously agreed that it would be too bad
+    to lose the fruit, and it was also unanimously agreed
+    that they wished to go back to Apple Island. But
+    what to do about it, they did not know.
+</p>
+<p>
+    Day by day the weather grew colder and colder,
+    and the boys became more and more excited and distressed
+    for fear they should lose their precious fruit.
+    The eldest boy lay awake for several nights, and then
+    a plan came into his head. He went to Captain Covajos
+    and proposed that he should send a flag of truce
+    over to the corsairs, offering to exchange winter clothing.
+    He would send over to them the heavy garments
+    they had left on their own vessel, and in return would
+    take the boxes of clothes intended for the winter wear
+    of his sailors. In this way, they would get their fruit
+    back without the corsairs knowing any thing about it.
+    The Captain considered this an excellent plan, and
+    ordered the chief mate to take a boat and a flag of
+    truce, and go over to the "Horn o' Plenty," and make
+    the proposition. The eldest boy and two of the others
+    insisted on going also, in order that there might be no
+    mistake about the boxes. But when the flag-of-truce
+    party reached the "Horn o' Plenty" they found not
+    a corsair there! Every man of them had gone. They
+    had taken with them all the money-chests, but to the
+    great delight of the boys, the boxes of winter clothes
+    had not been disturbed; and in them still nestled,
+    safe and sound, the precious nuts of the Fragile
+    Palm.
+</p>
+<p>
+    When the matter had been thoroughly looked into,
+    it became quite evident what the corsairs had done.
+    There had been only one boat on board the "Horn o'
+    Plenty," and that was the one on which the First
+    Class in Long Division had arrived. The night before,
+    the two vessels had passed within a mile or so
+    of a large island, which the Captain had approached
+    in the hope it was the one they were looking for, and
+    they passed it so slowly that the corsairs had time to
+    ferry themselves over, a few at a time, in the little
+    boat, taking with them the money,&mdash;and all without
+    discovery.
+</p>
+<p>
+    Captain Covajos was greatly depressed when he
+    heard of the loss of all the money.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I shall have a sad tale to tell my merchants," he
+    said, "and Christmas before last will not be celebrated
+    so joyously as it was the first time. But we cannot
+    help what has happened, and we all must endeavor to
+    bear our losses with patience. We shall continue our
+    search for Apple Island, but I shall go on board my
+    own ship, for I have greatly missed my carpeted quarter-deck
+    and my other comforts. The chief mate,
+    however, and a majority of the crew shall remain on
+    board the corsair vessel, and continue to tow us. The
+    'Horn o' Plenty' sails better stern foremost, and we
+    shall go faster that way."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The boys were overjoyed at recovering their fruit,
+    and most of them were in favor of cracking two or
+    three of the great nuts, and eating their contents in
+    honor of the occasion, but the eldest boy dissuaded
+    them.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "The good Captain," he said, "has been very kind
+    in endeavoring to take us back to our school, and still
+    intends to keep up the search for dear old Apple
+    Island. The least we can do for him is to give him
+    this fruit, which is all we have, and let him do what he
+    pleases with it. This is the only way in which we can
+    show our gratitude to him."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The boys turned their backs on one another, and
+    each of them gave his eyes a little rub, but they all
+    agreed to give the fruit to the Captain.
+</p>
+<p>
+    When the good old man received his present, he was
+    much affected. "I will accept what you offer me,"
+    he said; "for if I did not, I know your feelings would
+    be wounded. But you must keep one of the nuts for
+    yourselves. And, more than that, if we do not find
+    Apple Island in the course of the coming year, I
+    invite you all to spend Christmas before last over again,
+    with me at my son's house."
+</p>
+<p>
+    All that winter, the two ships sailed up and down, and
+    here and there, but never could they find Apple Island.
+    When Christmas-time came, old Baragat went around
+    among the boys and the crew, and told them it would
+    be well not to say a word on the subject to the Captain,
+    for his feelings were very tender in regard to spending
+    Christmas away from his families, and the thing had
+    never happened before. So nobody made any allusion
+    to the holidays, and they passed over as if they had
+    been ordinary days.
+</p>
+<p>
+    During the spring, and all through the summer, the
+    two ships kept up the unavailing search, but when
+    the autumn began, Captain Covajos said to old Baragat:
+    "I am very sorry, but I feel that I can no longer
+    look for Apple Island. I must go back and spend
+    Christmas before last over again, with my dearest son;
+    and if these poor boys never return to their homes, I
+    am sure they cannot say it was any fault of mine."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "No, sir," said Baragat, "I think you have done
+    all that could be expected of you."
+</p>
+<p>
+    So the ships sailed to the city on the west side of
+    the sea; and the Captain was received with great joy
+    by his son, and his grandchildren. He went to the
+    merchants, and told them how he had lost all their
+    money. He hoped they would be able to bear their
+    misfortune with fortitude, and begged, as he could
+    do nothing else for them, that they would accept the
+    eight great nuts from the Fragile Palm that the boys
+    had given him. To his surprise the merchants became
+    wild with delight when they received the nuts. The
+    money they had lost was as nothing, they said, compared
+    to the value of this incomparable and precious
+    fruit, picked in its prime, and still in a perfect condition.
+</p>
+<p>
+    It had been many, many generations since this rare
+    fruit, the value of which was like unto that of diamonds
+    and pearls, had been for sale in any market in the
+    world; and kings and queens in many countries were
+    ready to give for it almost any price that might be
+    asked.
+</p>
+<p>
+    When the good old Captain heard this he was greatly
+    rejoiced, and, as the holidays were now near, he insisted
+    that the boys should spend Christmas before last
+    over again, at his son's house. He found that a good
+    many people here knew where Apple Island was, and
+    he made arrangements for the First Class in Long
+    Division to return to that island in a vessel which was
+    to sail about the first of the year.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The boys still possessed the great nut which the
+    Captain had insisted they should keep for themselves,
+    and he now told them that if they chose to sell it,
+    they would each have a nice little fortune to take back
+    with them. The eldest boy consulted the others, and
+    then he said to the Captain:
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Our class has gone through a good many hardships,
+    and has had a lot of trouble with that palm-tree and
+    other things, and we think we ought to be rewarded.
+    So, if it is all the same to you, I think we will crack
+    the nut on Christmas Day and we all will eat it."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I never imagined," cried Captain Covajos, as he
+    sat, on that Christmas Day, surrounded by his son's
+    family and the First Class in Long Division, the eyes
+    of the whole party sparkling with ecstasy as they tasted
+    the peerless fruit of the Fragile Palm, "that Christmas
+    before last could be so joyfully celebrated over
+    again."
+</p>
+<a name="chapter6"><!-- H2 anchor --></a>
+
+<div style="height: 2em;"></div>
+
+<h2>
+    PRINCE HASSAK'S MARCH.
+</h2>
+<hr>
+<p>
+    In the spring of a certain year, long since passed
+    away, Prince Hassak, of Itoby, determined to visit
+    his uncle, the King of Yan.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Whenever my uncle visited us," said the Prince,
+    "or when my late father went to see him, the journey
+    was always made by sea; and, in order to do this, it
+    was necessary to go in a very roundabout way between
+    Itoby and Yan. Now, I shall do nothing of this kind.
+    It is beneath the dignity of a prince to go out of his
+    way on account of capes, peninsulas, and promontories.
+    I shall march from my palace to that of my
+    uncle in a straight line. I shall go across the country,
+    and no obstacle shall cause me to deviate from my
+    course. Mountains and hills shall be tunnelled, rivers
+    shall be bridged, houses shall be levelled; a road shall
+    be cut through forests; and, when I have finished my
+    march, the course over which I have passed shall be a
+    mathematically straight line. Thus will I show to the
+    world that, when a prince desires to travel, it is not
+    necessary for him to go out of his way on account of
+    obstacles."
+</p>
+<p>
+    As soon as possible after the Prince had determined
+    upon this march, he made his preparations, and set
+    out. He took with him a few courtiers, and a large
+    body of miners, rock-splitters, bridge-builders, and
+    workmen of that class, whose services would, very
+    probably, be needed. Besides these, he had an officer
+    whose duty it was to point out the direct course to be
+    taken, and another who was to draw a map of the
+    march, showing the towns, mountains, and the various
+    places it passed through. There were no compasses
+    in those days, but the course-marker had an instrument
+    which he would set in a proper direction by means of
+    the stars, and then he could march by it all day. Besides
+    these persons, Prince Hassak selected from the
+    schools of his city five boys and five girls, and took
+    them with him. He wished to show them how, when a
+    thing was to be done, the best way was to go straight
+    ahead and do it, turning aside for nothing.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "When they grow up they will teach these things to
+    their children," said he; "and thus I shall instil good
+    principles into my people."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The first day Prince Hassak and his party marched
+    over a level country, with no further trouble than that
+    occasioned by the tearing down of fences and walls,
+    and the destruction of a few cottages and barns.
+    After encamping for the night, they set out the next
+    morning, but had not marched many miles before they
+    came to a rocky hill, on the top of which was a handsome
+    house, inhabited by a Jolly-cum-pop.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Your Highness," said the course-marker, "in order
+    to go in a direct line we must make a tunnel through
+    this hill, immediately under the house. This may
+    cause the building to fall in, but the rubbish can be
+    easily removed."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Let the men go to work," said the Prince. "I
+    will dismount from my horse, and watch the proceedings."
+</p>
+<p>
+    When the Jolly-cum-pop saw the party halt before
+    his house, he hurried out to pay his respects to the
+    Prince. When he was informed of what was to be
+    done, the Jolly-cum-pop could not refrain from laughing
+    aloud.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I never heard," he said, "of such a capital idea.
+    It is so odd and original. It will be very funny, I am
+    sure, to see a tunnel cut right under my house."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The miners and rock-splitters now began to work at
+    the base of the hill, and then the Jolly-cum-pop made
+    a proposition to the Prince.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "It will take your men some time," he said, "to
+    cut this tunnel, and it is a pity your Highness should
+    not be amused in the meanwhile. It is a fine day:
+    suppose we go into the forest and hunt."
+</p>
+<p>
+    This suited the Prince very well, for he did not care
+    about sitting under a tree and watching his workmen,
+    and the Jolly-cum-pop having sent for his horse and
+    some bows and arrows, the whole party, with the
+    exception of the laborers, rode toward the forest, a
+    short distance away.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "What shall we find to hunt?" asked the Prince of
+    the Jolly-cum-pop.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I really do not know," exclaimed the latter, "but
+    we'll hunt whatever we happen to see&mdash;deer, small
+    birds, rabbits, griffins, rhinoceroses, any thing that
+    comes along. I feel as gay as a skipping grasshopper.
+    My spirits rise like a soaring bird. What a joyful
+    thing it is to have such a hunt on such a glorious
+    day!"
+</p>
+<p>
+    The gay and happy spirits of the Jolly-cum-pop
+    affected the whole party, and they rode merrily through
+    the forest; but they found no game; and, after an
+    hour or two, they emerged into the open country again.
+    At a distance, on a slight elevation, stood a large and
+    massive building.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I am hungry and thirsty," said the Prince, "and
+    perhaps we can get some refreshments at yonder house.
+    So far, this has not been a very fine hunt."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "No," cried the Jolly-cum-pop, "not yet. But
+    what a joyful thing to see a hospitable mansion just at
+    the moment when we begin to feel a little tired and
+    hungry!"
+</p>
+<p>
+    The building they were approaching belonged to a
+    Potentate, who lived at a great distance. In some of
+    his travels he had seen this massive house, and thought
+    it would make a good prison. He accordingly bought it,
+    fitted it up as a jail, and appointed a jailer and three
+    myrmidons to take charge of it. This had occurred
+    years before, but no prisoners had ever been sent to
+    this jail. A few days preceding the Jolly-cum-pop's
+    hunt, the Potentate had journeyed this way and had
+    stopped at his jail. After inquiring into its condition,
+    he had said to the jailer:
+</p>
+<p>
+    "It is now fourteen years since I appointed you to
+    this place, and in all that time there have been no
+    prisoners, and you and your men have been drawing
+    your wages without doing any thing. I shall return
+    this way in a few days, and if I still find you idle I
+    shall discharge you all and close the jail."
+</p>
+<p>
+    This filled the jailer with great dismay, for he did
+    not wish to lose his good situation. When he saw the
+    Prince and his party approaching, the thought struck
+    him that perhaps he might make prisoners of them,
+    and so not be found idle when the Potentate returned.
+    He came out to meet the hunters, and when they asked
+    if they could here find refreshment, he gave them a
+    most cordial welcome. His men took their horses,
+    and, inviting them to enter, he showed each member
+    of the party into a small bedroom, of which there
+    seemed to be a great many.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Here are water and towels," he said to each one,
+    "and when you have washed your face and hands,
+    your refreshments will be ready." Then, going out,
+    he locked the door on the outside.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The party numbered seventeen: the Prince, three
+    courtiers, five boys, five girls, the course-marker, the
+    map-maker, and the Jolly-cum-pop. The heart of the
+    jailer was joyful; seventeen inmates was something to
+    be proud of. He ordered his myrmidons to give the
+    prisoners a meal of bread and water through the holes
+    in their cell-doors, and then he sat down to make out
+    his report to the Potentate.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "They must all be guilty of crimes," he said to
+    himself, "which are punished by long imprisonment.
+    I don't want any of them executed."
+</p>
+<p>
+    So he numbered his prisoners from one to seventeen,
+    according to the cell each happened to be in, and he
+    wrote a crime opposite each number. The first was
+    highway robbery, the next forgery, and after that
+    followed treason, smuggling, barn-burning, bribery,
+    poaching, usury, piracy, witchcraft, assault and battery,
+    using false weights and measures, burglary,
+    counterfeiting, robbing hen-roosts, conspiracy, and
+    poisoning his grandmother by proxy.
+</p>
+<p>
+    This report was scarcely finished when the Potentate
+    returned. He was very much surprised to find that
+    seventeen prisoners had come in since his previous
+    visit, and he read the report with interest.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Here is one who ought to be executed," he said,
+    referring to Number Seventeen. "And how did he
+    poison his grandmother by proxy? Did he get another
+    woman to be poisoned in her stead? Or did he employ
+    some one to act in his place as the poisoner?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I have not yet been fully informed, my lord," said
+    the jailer, fearful that he should lose a prisoner;
+    "but this is his first offence, and his grandmother, who
+    did not die, has testified to his general good character."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Very well," said the Potentate; "but if he ever
+    does it again, let him be executed; and, by the way, I
+    should like to see the prisoners."
+</p>
+<p>
+    Thereupon the jailer conducted the Potentate along
+    the corridors, and let him look through the holes in the
+    doors at the prisoners within.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "What is this little girl in for?" he asked.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The jailer looked at the number over the door, and
+    then at his report.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Piracy," he answered.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "A strange offence for such a child," said the
+    Potentate.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "They often begin that sort of thing very early in
+    life," said the jailer.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "And this fine gentleman," said the Potentate,
+    looking in at the Prince, "what did he do?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    The jailer glanced at the number, and the report.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Robbed hen-roosts," he said.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "He must have done a good deal of it to afford to
+    dress so well," said the Potentate, passing on, and
+    looking into other cells. "It seems to me that many
+    of your prisoners are very young."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "It is best to take them young, my lord," said the
+    jailer. "They are very hard to catch when they grow
+    up."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Potentate then looked in at the Jolly-cum-pop,
+    and asked what was his offence.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Conspiracy," was the answer.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "And where are the other conspirators?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "There was only one," said the jailer.
+</p>
+<p>
+    Number Seventeen was the oldest of the courtiers.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "He appears to be an elderly man to have a grandmother,"
+    said the Potentate. "She must be very
+    aged, and that makes it all the worse for him. I
+    think he should be executed."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Oh, no, my lord," cried the jailor. "I am assured
+    that his crime was quite unintentional."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Then he should be set free," said the Potentate.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I mean to say," said the jailer, "that it was just
+    enough intentional to cause him to be imprisoned here
+    for a long time, but not enough to deserve execution."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Very well," said the Potentate, turning to leave;
+    "take good care of your prisoners, and send me a
+    report every month."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "That will I do, my lord," said the jailer, bowing
+    very low.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Prince and his party had been very much surprised
+    and incensed when they found that they could
+    not get out of their rooms, and they had kicked and
+    banged and shouted until they were tired, but the
+    jailer had informed them that they were to be confined
+    there for years; and when the Potentate arrived they
+    had resigned themselves to despair. The Jolly-cum-pop,
+    however, was affected in a different way. It
+    seemed to him the most amusing joke in the world that
+    a person should deliberately walk into a prison-cell
+    and be locked up for several years; and he lay down
+    on his little bed and laughed himself to sleep.
+</p>
+<p>
+    That night one of the boys sat at his iron-barred
+    window, wide awake. He was a Truant, and had
+    never yet been in any place from which he could not
+    run away. He felt that his school-fellows depended
+    upon him to run away and bring them assistance, and
+    he knew that his reputation as a Truant was at stake.
+    His responsibility was so heavy that he could not sleep,
+    and he sat at the window, trying to think of a way to
+    get out. After some hours the moon arose, and by its
+    light he saw upon the grass, not far from his window,
+    a number of little creatures, which at first he took for
+    birds or small squirrels; but on looking more attentively
+    he perceived that they were pigwidgeons. They
+    were standing around a flat stone, and seemed to be
+    making calculations on it with a piece of chalk. At
+    this sight, the heart of the Truant jumped for joy.
+    "Pigwidgeons can do any thing," he said to himself,
+    "and these certainly can get us out." He now tried
+    in various ways to attract the attention of the pigwidgeons;
+    but as he was afraid to call or whistle very
+    loud, for fear of arousing the jailor, he did not succeed.
+    Happily, he thought of a pea-shooter which he had in
+    his pocket, and taking this out he blew a pea into the
+    midst of the little group with such force that it knocked
+    the chalk from the hand of the pigwidgeon who was
+    using it. The little fellows looked up in astonishment,
+    and perceived the Truant beckoning to them from his
+    window. At first they stood angrily regarding him;
+    but on his urging them in a loud whisper to come to
+    his relief, they approached the prison and, clambering
+    up a vine, soon reached his window-sill. The Truant
+    now told his mournful tale, to which the pigwidgeons
+    listened very attentively; and then, after a little consultation
+    among themselves, one of them said: "We
+    will get you out if you will tell us how to divide five-sevenths
+    by six."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The poor Truant was silent for an instant, and then
+    he said: "That is not the kind of thing I am good
+    at, but I expect some of the other fellows could tell
+    you easily enough. Our windows must be all in a row,
+    and you can climb up and ask some of them; and if
+    any one tells you, will you get us all out?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Yes," said the pigwidgeon who had spoken before.
+    "We will do that, for we are very anxious to know
+    how to divide five-sevenths by six. We have been
+    working at it for four or five days, and there won't be
+    any thing worth dividing if we wait much longer."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The pigwidgeons now began to descend the vine;
+    but one of them lingering a little, the Truant, who had
+    a great deal of curiosity, asked him what it was they
+    had to divide.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "There were eight of us," the pigwidgeon answered,
+    "who helped a farmer's wife, and she gave us a pound
+    of butter. She did not count us properly, and divided
+    the butter into seven parts. We did not notice this
+    at first, and two of the party, who were obliged to go
+    away to a distance, took their portions and departed,
+    and now we can not divide among six the five-sevenths
+    that remain."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "That is a pretty hard thing," said the Truant,
+    "but I am sure some of the boys can tell you how to
+    do it."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The pigwidgeons visited the next four cells, which
+    were occupied by four boys, but not one of them
+    could tell how to divide five-sevenths by six. The
+    Prince was questioned, but he did not know; and
+    neither did the course-marker, nor the map-maker. It
+    was not until they came to the cell of the oldest girl
+    that they received an answer. She was good at mental
+    arithmetic; and, after a minute's thought, she said,
+    "It would be five forty-seconds."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Good!" cried the pigwidgeons. "We will divide
+    the butter into forty-two parts, and each take five.
+    And now let us go to work and cut these bars."
+</p>
+<p>
+    Three of the six pigwidgeons were workers in iron,
+    and they had their little files and saws in pouches by
+    their sides. They went to work manfully, and the
+    others helped them, and before morning one bar was
+    cut in each of the seventeen windows. The cells were
+    all on the ground floor, and it was quite easy for the
+    prisoners to clamber out. That is, it was easy for all
+    but the Jolly-cum-pop. He had laughed so much in
+    his life that he had grown quite fat, and he found it
+    impossible to squeeze himself through the opening
+    made by the removal of one iron bar. The sixteen
+    other prisoners had all departed; the pigwidgeons had
+    hurried away to divide their butter into forty-two parts,
+    and the Jolly-cum-pop still remained in his cell, convulsed
+    with laughter at the idea of being caught in
+    such a curious predicament.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "It is the most ridiculous thing in the world," he
+    said. "I suppose I must stay here and cry until I
+    get thin." And the idea so tickled him, that he
+    laughed himself to sleep.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Prince and his party kept together, and hurried
+    from the prison as fast as they could. When the day
+    broke they had gone several miles, and then they
+    stopped to rest. "Where is that Jolly-cum-pop?"
+    said the Prince. "I suppose he has gone home. He
+    is a pretty fellow to lead us into this trouble and then
+    desert us! How are we to find the way back to his
+    house? Course-marker, can you tell us the direction in
+    which we should go?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Not until to-night, your Highness," answered the
+    course-marker, "when I can set my instrument by
+    the stars."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Prince's party was now in a doleful plight.
+    Every one was very hungry; they were in an open
+    plain, no house was visible, and they knew not which
+    way to go. They wandered about for some time,
+    looking for a brook or a spring where they might
+    quench their thirst; and then a rabbit sprang out from
+    some bushes. The whole party immediately started
+    off in pursuit of the rabbit. They chased it here,
+    there, backward and forward, through hollows and
+    over hills, until it ran quite away and disappeared.
+    Then they were more tired, thirsty, and hungry than
+    before; and, to add to their miseries, when night came
+    on the sky was cloudy, and the course-marker could
+    not set his instrument by the stars. It would be
+    difficult to find sixteen more miserable people than
+    the Prince and his companions when they awoke the
+    next morning from their troubled sleep on the hard
+    ground. Nearly starved, they gazed at one another
+    with feelings of despair.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I feel," said the Prince, in a weak voice, "that
+    there is nothing I would not do to obtain food. I
+    would willingly become a slave if my master would
+    give me a good breakfast."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "So would I," ejaculated each of the others.
+</p>
+<p>
+    About an hour after this, as they were all sitting
+    disconsolately upon the ground, they saw, slowly approaching,
+    a large cart drawn by a pair of oxen. On
+    the front of the cart, which seemed to be heavily
+    loaded, sat a man, with a red beard, reading a book.
+    The boys, when they saw the cart, set up a feeble
+    shout, and the man, lifting his eyes from his book,
+    drove directly toward the group on the ground. Dismounting,
+    he approached Prince Hassak, who immediately
+    told him his troubles and implored relief. "We
+    will do any thing," said the Prince, "to obtain food."
+</p>
+<p>
+    Standing for a minute in a reflective mood, the man
+    with the red beard addressed the Prince in a slow,
+    meditative manner: "How would you like," he said,
+    "to form a nucleus?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Can we get any thing to eat by it?" eagerly asked
+    the Prince.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Yes," replied the man, "you can."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "We'll do it!" immediately cried the whole sixteen,
+    without waiting for further information.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Which will you do first," said the man, "listen to
+    my explanations, or eat?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Eat!" cried the entire sixteen in chorus.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The man now produced from his cart a quantity of
+    bread, meat, wine, and other provisions, which he distributed
+    generously, but judiciously, to the hungry
+    Prince and his followers. Every one had enough, but
+    no one too much. And soon, revived and strengthened,
+    they felt like new beings.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Now," said the Prince, "we are ready to form a
+    nucleus, as we promised. How is it done?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I will explain the matter to you in a few words,"
+    said the man with the red beard. "For a long time I
+    have been desirous to found a city. In order to do
+    this one must begin by forming a nucleus. Every
+    great city is started from a nucleus. A few persons
+    settle down in some particular spot, and live there.
+    Then they are a nucleus. Then other people come
+    there, and gather around this nucleus, and then more
+    people come and more, until in course of time there
+    is a great city. I have loaded this cart with provisions,
+    tools, and other things that are necessary for
+    my purpose, and have set out to find some people who
+    would be willing to form a nucleus. I am very glad
+    to have found you and that you are willing to enter
+    into my plan; and this seems a good spot for us to
+    settle upon."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "What is the first thing to be done?" said the
+    Prince.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "We must all go to work," said the man with the
+    red beard, "to build dwellings, and also a school-house
+    for these young people. Then we must till some
+    ground in the suburbs, and lay the foundations, at
+    least, of a few public buildings."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "All this will take a good while, will it not?" said
+    the Prince.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Yes," said the man, "it will take a good while;
+    and the sooner we set about it, the better."
+</p>
+<p>
+    Thereupon tools were distributed among the party,
+    and Prince, courtiers, boys, girls, and all went to work
+    to build houses and form the nucleus of a city.
+</p>
+<p>
+    When the jailer looked into his cells in the morning,
+    and found that all but one of his prisoners had escaped,
+    he was utterly astounded, and his face, when the Jolly-cum-pop
+    saw him, made that individual roar with
+    laughter. The jailer, however, was a man accustomed
+    to deal with emergencies. "You need not
+    laugh," he said, "every thing shall go on as before,
+    and I shall take no notice of the absence of your companions.
+    You are now numbered One to Seventeen
+    inclusive, and you stand charged with highway robbery,
+    forgery, treason, smuggling, barn-burning, bribery,
+    poaching, usury, piracy, witchcraft, assault and
+    battery, using false weights and measures, burglary,
+    counterfeiting, robbing hen-roosts, conspiracy, and
+    poisoning your grandmother by proxy. I intended
+    to-day to dress the convicts in prison garb, and you
+    shall immediately be so clothed."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I shall require seventeen suits," said the Jolly-cum-pop.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Yes," said the jailer, "they shall be furnished."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "And seventeen rations a day," said the Jolly-cum-pop.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Certainly," replied the jailer.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "This is luxury," roared the Jolly-cum-pop. "I
+    shall spend my whole time in eating and putting on
+    clean clothes."
+</p>
+<p>
+    Seventeen large prison suits were now brought to
+    the Jolly-cum-pop. He put one on, and hung up the
+    rest in his cell. These suits were half bright yellow
+    and half bright green, with spots of bright red, as big
+    as saucers.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The jailer now had doors cut from one cell to
+    another. "If the Potentate comes here and wants
+    to look at the prisoners," he said to the Jolly-cum-pop,
+    "you must appear in cell number One, so that
+    he can look through the hole in the door, and see you;
+    then, as he walks along the corridor, you must walk
+    through the cells, and whenever he looks into a cell,
+    you must be there."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "He will think," merrily replied the Jolly-cum-pop,
+    "that all your prisoners are very fat, and that the
+    little girls have grown up into big men."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I will endeavor to explain that," said the jailer.
+</p>
+<p>
+    For several days the Jolly-cum-pop was highly
+    amused at the idea of his being seventeen criminals,
+    and he would sit first in one cell and then in another,
+    trying to look like a ferocious pirate, a hard-hearted
+    usurer, or a mean-spirited chicken thief, and laughing
+    heartily at his failures. But, after a time, he began
+    to tire of this, and to have a strong desire to see what
+    sort of a tunnel the Prince's miners and rock-splitters
+    were making under his house. "I had hoped," he
+    said to himself, "that I should pine away in confinement,
+    and so be able to get through the window-bars;
+    but with nothing to do, and seventeen rations a day, I
+    see no chance of that. But I must get out of this jail,
+    and, as there seems no other way, I will revolt."
+    Thereupon he shouted to the jailer through the hole
+    in the door of his cell: "We have revolted! We
+    have risen in a body, and have determined to resist
+    your authority, and break jail!"
+</p>
+<p>
+    When the jailer heard this, he was greatly troubled.
+    "Do not proceed to violence," he said; "let us
+    parley."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Very well," replied the Jolly-cum-pop, "but you
+    must open the cell door. We cannot parley through
+    a hole."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The jailer thereupon opened the cell door, and the
+    Jolly-cum-pop, having wrapped sixteen suits of clothes
+    around his left arm as a shield, and holding in his
+    right hand the iron bar which had been cut from
+    his window, stepped boldly into the corridor, and confronted
+    the jailer and his myrmidons.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "It will be useless for you to resist," he said.
+    "You are but four, and we are seventeen. If you
+    had been wise you would have made us all cheating
+    shop-keepers, chicken thieves, or usurers. Then you
+    might have been able to control us; but when you see
+    before you a desperate highwayman, a daring smuggler,
+    a blood-thirsty pirate, a wily poacher, a powerful
+    ruffian, a reckless burglar, a bold conspirator, and a
+    murderer by proxy, you well may tremble!"
+</p>
+<p>
+    The jailer and his myrmidons looked at each other
+    in dismay.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "We sigh for no blood," continued the Jolly-cum-pop,
+    "and will readily agree to terms. We will give
+    you your choice: Will you allow us to honorably surrender,
+    and peacefully disperse to our homes, or shall
+    we rush upon you in a body, and, after overpowering
+    you by numbers, set fire to the jail, and escape through
+    the crackling timbers of the burning pile?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    The jailer reflected for a minute. "It would be
+    better, perhaps," he said, "that you should surrender
+    and disperse to your homes."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Jolly-cum-pop agreed to these terms, and the
+    great gate being opened, he marched out in good
+    order. "Now," said he to himself, "the thing for
+    me to do is to get home as fast as I can, or that jailer
+    may change his mind." But, being in a great hurry,
+    he turned the wrong way, and walked rapidly into a
+    country unknown to him. His walk was a very merry
+    one. "By this time," he said to himself, "the Prince
+    and his followers have returned to my house, and are
+    tired of watching the rock-splitters and miners. How
+    amused they will be when they see me come back in
+    this gay suit of green and yellow, with red spots, and
+    with sixteen similar suits upon my arm! How my own
+    dogs will bark at me! And how my own servants will
+    not know me! It is the funniest thing I ever knew
+    of!" And his gay laugh echoed far and wide. But
+    when he had gone several miles without seeing any
+    signs of his habitation, his gayety abated. "It would
+    have been much better," he said, as he sat down to
+    rest under the shade of a tree, "if I had brought with
+    me sixteen rations instead of these sixteen suits of
+    clothes."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Jolly-cum-pop soon set out again, but he walked
+    a long distance without seeing any person or any house.
+    Toward the close of the afternoon he stopped, and,
+    looking back, he saw coming toward him a large party
+    of foot travellers. In a few moments, he perceived
+    that the person in advance was the jailer. At this
+    the Jolly-cum-pop could not restrain his merriment.
+    "How comically it has all turned out!" he exclaimed.
+    "Here I've taken all this trouble, and tired myself
+    out, and have nearly starved myself, and the jailer
+    comes now, with a crowd of people, and takes me
+    back. I might as well have staid where I was. Ha!
+    ha!"
+</p>
+<p>
+    The jailer now left his party and came running
+    toward the Jolly-cum-pop. "I pray you, sir," he
+    said, bowing very low, "do not cast us off."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Who are you all?" asked the Jolly-cum-pop,
+    looking with much surprise at the jailer's companions,
+    who were now quite near.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "We are myself, my three myrmidons, and our
+    wives and children. Our situations were such good
+    ones that we married long ago, and our families lived
+    in the upper stories of the prison. But when all the
+    convicts had left we were afraid to remain, for, should
+    the Potentate again visit the prison, he would be
+    disappointed and enraged at finding no prisoners, and
+    would, probably, punish us grievously. So we determined
+    to follow you, and to ask you to let us go with
+    you, wherever you are going. I wrote a report, which
+    I fastened to the great gate, and in it I stated that
+    sixteen of the convicts escaped by the aid of outside
+    confederates, and that seventeen of them mutinied in
+    a body and broke jail."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "That report," laughed the Jolly-cum-pop, "your
+    Potentate will not readily understand."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "If I were there," said the jailer, "I could explain
+    it to him; but, as it is, he must work it out for
+    himself."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Have you any thing to eat with you?" asked the
+    Jolly-cum-pop.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Oh, yes," said the jailer, "we brought provisions."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Well, then, I gladly take you under my protection.
+    Let us have supper. I have had nothing to eat since
+    morning, and the weight of sixteen extra suits of
+    clothes does not help to refresh one."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Jolly-cum-pop and his companions slept that
+    night under some trees, and started off early the next
+    morning. "If I could only get myself turned in the
+    proper direction," said he, "I believe we should
+    soon reach my house."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Prince, his courtiers, the boys and girls, the
+    course-marker, and the map-maker worked industriously
+    for several days at the foundation of their city.
+    They dug the ground, they carried stones, they cut
+    down trees. This work was very hard for all of them,
+    for they were not used to it. After a few days' labor,
+    the Prince said to the man with the red beard, who was
+    reading his book: "I think we have now formed a
+    nucleus. Any one can see that this is intended to be
+    a city."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "No," said the man with the red beard, "nothing
+    is truly a nucleus until something is gathered around
+    it. Proceed with your work, while I continue my
+    studies upon civil government."
+</p>
+<p>
+    Toward the close of that day the red-bearded man
+    raised his eyes from his book and beheld the Jolly-cum-pop
+    and his party approaching. "Hurrah!" he
+    cried, "we are already attracting settlers!" And
+    he went forth to meet them.
+</p>
+<p>
+    When the prince and the courtiers saw the Jolly-cum-pop
+    in his bright and variegated dress, they did not
+    know him; but the boys and girls soon recognized his
+    jovial face, and, tired as they were, they set up a
+    hearty laugh, in which they were loudly joined by their
+    merry friend. While the Jolly-cum-pop was listening
+    to the adventures of the Prince and his companions,
+    and telling what had happened to himself, the man
+    with the red beard was talking to the jailer and his
+    party, and urging them to gather around the nucleus
+    which had been here formed, and help to build a
+    city.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Nothing will suit us better," exclaimed the jailer,
+    "and the sooner we build a town wall so as to keep
+    off the Potentate, if he should come this way, the
+    better shall we be satisfied."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The next morning, the Prince said to the red-bearded
+    man: "Others have gathered around us. We have
+    formed a nucleus, and thus have done all that we
+    promised to do. We shall now depart."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The man objected strongly to this, but the Prince
+    paid no attention to his words. "What troubles me
+    most," he said to the Jolly-cum-pop, "is the disgraceful
+    condition of our clothes. They have been so torn
+    and soiled during our unaccustomed work that they are
+    not fit to be seen."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "As for that," said the Jolly-cum-pop, "I have
+    sixteen suits with me, in which you can all dress, if
+    you like. They are of unusual patterns, but they are
+    new and clean."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "It is better," said the Prince, "for persons in my
+    station to appear inordinately gay than to be seen in
+    rags and dirt. We will accept your clothes."
+</p>
+<p>
+    Thereupon, the Prince and each of the others put on
+    a prison dress of bright green and yellow, with large
+    red spots. There were some garments left over, for
+    each boy wore only a pair of trousers with the waistband
+    tied around his neck, and holes cut for his arms;
+    while the large jackets, with the sleeves tucked, made
+    very good dresses for the girls. The Prince and his
+    party, accompanied by the Jolly-cum-pop, now left the
+    red-bearded man and his new settlers to continue the
+    building of the city, and set off on their journey.
+    The course-marker had not been informed the night
+    before that they were to go away that morning, and
+    consequently did not set his instrument by the stars.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "As we do not know in which way we should go,"
+    said the Prince, "one way will be as good as another,
+    and if we can find a road let us take it; it will be easier
+    walking."
+</p>
+<p>
+    In an hour or two they found a road and they took
+    it. After journeying the greater part of the day, they
+    reached the top of a low hill, over which the road ran,
+    and saw before them a glittering sea and the spires
+    and houses of a city.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "It is the city of Yan," said the course-marker.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "That is true," said the Prince; "and as we are
+    so near, we may as well go there."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The astonishment of the people of Yan, when this
+    party, dressed in bright green and yellow, with red
+    spots, passed through their streets, was so great that
+    the Jolly-cum-pop roared with laughter. This set the
+    boys and girls and all the people laughing, and the
+    sounds of merriment became so uproarious that when
+    they reached the palace the King came out to see what
+    was the matter. What he thought when he saw his
+    nephew in his fantastic guise, accompanied by a party
+    apparently composed of sixteen other lunatics, cannot
+    now be known; but, after hearing the Prince's story,
+    he took him into an inner apartment, and thus addressed
+    him: "My dear Hassak: The next time you pay me a
+    visit, I beg for your sake and my own, that you will
+    come in the ordinary way. You have sufficiently shown
+    to the world that, when a Prince desires to travel, it is
+    often necessary for him to go out of his way on account
+    of obstacles."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "My dear uncle," replied Hassak, "your words
+    shall not be forgotten."
+</p>
+<p>
+    After a pleasant visit of a few weeks, the Prince
+    and his party (in new clothes) returned (by sea) to
+    Itoby, whence the Jolly-cum-pop soon repaired to his
+    home. There he found the miners and rock-splitters
+    still at work at the tunnel, which had now penetrated
+    half-way through the hill on which stood his house.
+    "You may go home," he said, "for the Prince has
+    changed his plans. I will put a door to this tunnel,
+    and it will make an excellent cellar in which to keep
+    my wine and provisions."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The day after the Prince's return his map-maker
+    said to him: "Your Highness, according to your commands
+    I made, each day, a map of your progress to
+    the city of Yan. Here it is."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Prince glanced at it and then he cast his eyes
+    upon the floor. "Leave me," he said. "I would be
+    alone."
+</p>
+
+<center>
+<img src="images/map.png" width="747" height="360"
+alt="The Map of the Prince's Journey from Itoby to Yan.">
+</center>
+
+<a name="chapter7"><!-- H2 anchor --></a>
+
+<div style="height: 2em;"></div>
+
+<h2>
+    THE BATTLE OF THE THIRD COUSINS.
+</h2>
+<hr>
+<p>
+    There were never many persons who could correctly
+    bound the Autocracy of Mutjado. The
+    reason for this was that the boundary line was not
+    stationary. Whenever the Autocrat felt the need of
+    money, he sent his tax-gatherers far and wide, and
+    people who up to that time had no idea of such a thing
+    found that they lived in the territory of Mutjado. But
+    when times were ordinarily prosperous with him, and
+    people in the outlying districts needed protection or
+    public works, the dominion of the Autocrat became
+    very much contracted.
+</p>
+<p>
+    In the course of time, the Autocrat of Mutjado fell
+    into bad health and sent for his doctor. That learned
+    man prescribed some medicine for him; and as this
+    did him no good, he ordered another kind. He continued
+    this method of treatment until the Autocrat had
+    swallowed the contents of fifteen phials and flasks,
+    some large and some small. As none of these were of
+    the slightest benefit, the learned doctor produced another
+    kind of medicine which he highly extolled.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Take a dose of this twice a day," said he, "and
+    you will soon find&mdash;"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "A new medicine?" interrupted the Autocrat, in
+    disgust. "I will have none of it! These others were
+    bad enough, and rather than start with a new physic, I
+    prefer to die. Take away your bottles, little and big,
+    and send me my secretary."
+</p>
+<p>
+    When that officer arrived, the Autocrat informed
+    him that he had determined to write his will, and that
+    he should set about it at once.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Autocrat of Mutjado had no son, and his nearest
+    male relatives were a third cousin on his father's
+    side, and another third cousin on his mother's side. Of
+    course these persons were in nowise related to each
+    other; and as they lived in distant countries, he had
+    never seen either of them. He had made up his mind to
+    leave his throne and dominions to one of these persons,
+    but he could not determine which of them should be
+    his heir.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "One has as good a right as the other," he said
+    to himself, "and I can't bother my brains settling the
+    matter for them. Let them fight it out, and whoever
+    conquers shall be Autocrat of Mutjado."
+</p>
+<p>
+    Having arranged the affair in this manner in his
+    will, he signed it, and soon after died.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Autocrat's third cousin on his father's side was
+    a young man of about twenty-five, named Alberdin.
+    He was a good horseman, and trained in the arts of
+    warfare, and when he was informed of the terms of his
+    distinguished relative's will, he declared himself perfectly
+    willing to undertake the combat for the throne.
+    He set out for Mutjado, where he arrived in a reasonable
+    time.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The third cousin on the mother's side was a very
+    different person. He was a boy of about twelve years
+    of age; and as his father and mother had died when
+    he was very young, he had been for nearly all his life
+    under the charge of an elderly and prudent man, who
+    acted as his guardian and tutor. These two, also, soon
+    arrived in Mutjado,&mdash;the boy, Phedo, being mounted
+    on a little donkey, which was his almost constant companion.
+    As soon as they reached the territory of the
+    late Autocrat, old Salim, the tutor, left the boy at an
+    inn, and went forward by himself to take a look at the
+    other third cousin. When he saw Alberdin mounted
+    on his fine horse, and looking so strong and valiant,
+    his heart was much disturbed.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I had hoped," he said to himself, "that the other
+    one was a small boy, but such does not appear to be
+    the case. There is but one way to have a fair fight
+    between these two. They must not now be allowed to
+    see each other. If they can be kept apart until my boy
+    grows up, he will then be able, with the military education
+    which I intend he shall have, to engage in combat
+    with any man. They must not meet for at least thirteen
+    years. Phedo will then be twenty-five, and able to do
+    worthy combat. To be sure, I am somewhat old myself
+    to undertake to superintend so long a delay, but I
+    must do my best to keep well and strong, and to attain
+    the greatest possible longevity."
+</p>
+<p>
+    Salim had always been in the habit of giving thirty-two
+    chews to every mouthful of meat, and a proportionate
+    number of chews to other articles of food;
+    and had, so far, been very healthy. But he now determined
+    to increase the number of chews to thirty-six,
+    for it would be highly necessary for him to live until it
+    was time for the battle between the third cousins to
+    take place.
+</p>
+<p>
+    Having made up his mind on these points, the old
+    tutor introduced himself to Alberdin, and told him that
+    he had come to arrange the terms of combat.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "In the first place," said Alberdin, "I should like
+    to know what sort of a person my opponent is."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "He is not a cavalryman like you," answered
+    Salim; "he belongs to the heavy infantry."
+</p>
+<p>
+    At this, Alberdin looked grave. He knew very well
+    that a stout and resolute man on foot had often the
+    advantage of one who is mounted. He would have
+    preferred meeting a horseman, and fighting on equal
+    terms.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Has he had much experience in war?" asked the
+    young man.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "It is not long," answered the tutor, "since he was
+    almost constantly in arms, winter and summer."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "He must be a practised warrior," thought Alberdin.
+    "I must put myself in good fighting-trim before I
+    meet him."
+</p>
+<p>
+    After some further conversation on the subject, the
+    old man advised Alberdin to go into camp on a beautiful
+    plain not far from the base of a low line of mountains.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Your opponent," said he, "will intrench himself
+    in the valley on the other side. With the mountains
+    between you, neither of you need fear a surprise; and
+    when both are ready, a place of meeting can be appointed.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Now, then," said Salim to himself when this had
+    been settled; "if I can keep them apart for thirteen
+    years, all may be well."
+</p>
+<p>
+    As soon as possible, Alberdin pitched a tent upon
+    the appointed spot, and began to take daily warlike
+    exercise in the plain, endeavoring in every way to put
+    himself and his horse into proper condition for the
+    combat.
+</p>
+<p>
+    On the other side of the mountain, old Salim intrenched
+    himself and the boy, Phedo. He carefully
+    studied several books on military engineering, and
+    caused a fortified camp to be constructed on the most
+    approved principles. It was surrounded by high ramparts,
+    and outside of these was a moat filled with
+    water. In the centre of the camp was a neat little
+    house which was well provided with books, provisions,
+    and every thing necessary for a prolonged stay. When
+    the drawbridge was up, it would be impossible for Alberdin
+    to get inside of the camp; and, moreover, the
+    ramparts were so high that he could not look over
+    them to see what sort of antagonist he was to have.
+    Old Salim did not tell the boy why he brought him
+    here to live. It would be better to wait until he was
+    older before informing him of the battle which had
+    been decreed. He told Phedo that it was necessary
+    for him to have a military education, which could very
+    well be obtained in a place like this; and he was also
+    very careful to let him know that there was a terrible
+    soldier in that part of the country who might at any
+    time, if it were not for the intrenchments, pounce
+    down upon him, and cut him to pieces. Every fine
+    day, Phedo was allowed to take a ride on his donkey
+    outside of the fortifications, but during this time, the
+    old tutor kept a strict watch on the mountain; and if
+    a horseman had made his appearance, little Phedo
+    would have been whisked inside, and the drawbridge
+    would have been up in a twinkling.
+</p>
+<p>
+    After about two weeks of this life Phedo found it
+    dreadfully stupid to see no one but his old tutor, and
+    never to go outside of these great ramparts except for
+    donkey-rides, which were generally very short. He
+    therefore determined, late one moonlight night, to go
+    out and take a ramble by himself. He was not afraid
+    of the dreadful soldier of whom the old man had told
+    him, because at that time of night this personage
+    would, of course, be in bed and asleep. Considering
+    these things, he quietly dressed himself, took down a
+    great key from over his sleeping tutor's head, opened
+    the heavy gate, let down the drawbridge, mounted
+    upon his donkey, and rode forth upon the moonlit
+    plain.
+</p>
+<p>
+    That night-ride was a very delightful one, and for a
+    long time the boy and the donkey rambled and ran;
+    first going this way and then that, they gradually
+    climbed the mountain; and, reaching the brow, they
+    trotted about for a while, and then went down the other
+    side. The boy had been so twisted and turned in his
+    course that he did not notice that he was not descending
+    toward his camp, and the donkey, whose instinct
+    told it that it was not going the right way, was also
+    told by its instinct that it did not wish to go the right
+    way, and that the intrenchments offered it no temptations
+    to return. When the morning dawned, Phedo
+    perceived that he was really lost, and he began to be
+    afraid that he might meet the terrible soldier. But,
+    after a time, he saw riding toward him a very pleasant-looking
+    young man on a handsome horse, and he
+    immediately took courage.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Now," said he to himself, "I am no longer in
+    danger. If that horrible cut-throat should appear,
+    this good gentleman will protect me."
+</p>
+<p>
+    Alberdin had not seen any one for a long time, and
+    he was very glad to meet with so nice a little boy.
+    When Phedo told him that he was lost, he invited him
+    to come to his tent, near by, and have breakfast.
+    While they were eating their meal, Alberdin asked the
+    boy if in the course of his rambles he had met with a
+    heavy infantry soldier, probably armed to the teeth,
+    and very large and strong.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Oh, I've heard of that dreadful man!" cried
+    Phedo, "and I am very glad that I did not meet him.
+    If he comes, I hope you'll protect me from him."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I will do that," said Alberdin; "but I am afraid I
+    shall not be able to help you find your way home, for
+    in doing so I should throw myself off my guard, and
+    might be set upon unexpectedly by this fellow, with
+    whom I have a regular engagement to fight. There is
+    to be a time fixed for the combat, for which I feel myself
+    nearly ready, but I have no doubt that my enemy
+    will be very glad to take me at a disadvantage if I give
+    him a chance."
+</p>
+<p>
+    Phedo looked about him with an air of content. The
+    tent was large and well furnished; there seemed to be
+    plenty of good things to eat; the handsome horseman
+    was certainly a very good-humored and agreeable gentleman;
+    and, moreover, the tent was not shut in by
+    high and gloomy ramparts.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I do not think you need trouble yourself," said he
+    to his host, "to help me to find my way home. I live
+    with my tutor, and I am sure that when he knows I
+    am gone he will begin to search for me, and after
+    awhile he will find me. Until then, I can be very
+    comfortable here."
+</p>
+<p>
+    For several days the two third cousins of the Autocrat
+    lived together in the tent, and enjoyed each other's
+    society very much. Then Alberdin began to grow a
+    little impatient.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "If I am to fight this heavy infantry man," he said;
+    "I should like to do it at once. I am now quite ready,
+    and I think he ought to be. I expected to hear from
+    him before this time, and I shall start out and see if I
+    can get any news of his intentions. I don't care about
+    going over the mountain without giving him notice, but
+    the capital city of Mutjado is only a day's ride to the
+    west, and there I can cause inquiries to be made when
+    he would like to meet me, and where."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I will go with you," said Phedo, greatly delighted
+    at the idea of visiting the city.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Yes, I will take you," said Alberdin. "Your
+    tutor don't seem inclined to come for you, and, of
+    course, I can't leave you here."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The next day, Alberdin on his horse, and Phedo on
+    his donkey, set out for the city, where they arrived
+    late in the afternoon. After finding a comfortable
+    lodging, Alberdin sent messengers to the other side of
+    the mountain, where his opponent was supposed to be
+    encamped, and gave them power to arrange with him
+    for a meeting. He particularly urged them to try to see
+    the old man who had come to him at first, and who had
+    seemed to be a very fair-minded and sensible person.
+    In two days, however, the messengers returned, stating
+    that they had found what they supposed to be the intrenched
+    camp of the heavy infantry man they had
+    been sent in search of, but that it was entirely deserted,
+    and nobody could be seen anywhere near it.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "It is very likely," said Alberdin, "that he has
+    watched my manoeuvres and exercises from the top of
+    the mountain, and has concluded to run away. I shall
+    give him a reasonable time to show himself, and then,
+    if he does not come forward, I will consider him
+    beaten, and claim the Autocracy."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "That is a good idea," said Phedo, "but I think,
+    if you can, you ought to find him and kill him, or
+    drive him out of the country. That's what I should
+    do, if I were you."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Of course I shall do that, if I can," said Alberdin;
+    "but I could not be expected to wait for him forever."
+</p>
+<p>
+    When his intention had been proclaimed, Alberdin
+    was informed of something which he did not know
+    before, and that was that the late Autocrat had left
+    an only daughter, a Princess about twenty years old.
+    But although she was his daughter, she could not inherit
+    his crown, for the laws of the country forbade
+    that any woman should become Autocrat. A happy
+    idea now struck Alberdin.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I will marry the Princess," he said, "and then
+    every one will think that it is the most suitable thing
+    for me to become Autocrat."
+</p>
+<p>
+    So Alberdin sent to the Princess to ask permission
+    to speak with her, and was granted an audience.
+    With much courtesy and politeness he made known his
+    plans to the lady, and hoped that she would consider
+    it advisable to marry him.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I am sorry to interfere with any of your arrangements,"
+    said the Princess, "but as soon as I heard
+    the terms of my father's will, I made up my mind to
+    marry the victor in the contest. As I cannot inherit
+    the throne myself, the next best thing is to be the wife
+    of the man who does. Go forth, then, and find your
+    antagonist, and when you have conquered him, I will
+    marry you."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "And if he conquers me, you will marry him?"
+    said Alberdin.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Yes, sir," answered the Princess, with a smile,
+    and dismissed him.
+</p>
+<p>
+    It was plain enough that there was nothing for
+    Alberdin to do but to go and look for the heavy infantry man.
+    Phedo was very anxious to accompany him,
+    and the two, mounted as before, set out from the city
+    on their quest.
+</p>
+<p>
+    When old Salim, the tutor of Phedo, awoke in the
+    morning and found the boy gone, he immediately
+    imagined that the youngster had ran away to his old
+    home; so he set forth with all possible speed, hoping
+    to overtake him. But when he reached the distant
+    town where Phedo had lived, he found that the boy
+    had not been there; and after taking some needful rest,
+    he retraced his steps, crossed the mountains, and made
+    his way toward the capital city, hoping to find news of
+    him there. It was necessary for him to be very careful
+    in his inquiries, for he wished no one to find out
+    that the little boy he was looking for was the third
+    cousin of the late Autocrat on the mother's side. He
+    therefore disguised himself as a migratory medical
+    man, and determined to use all possible caution.
+    When he reached the camp of the young horseman,
+    Alberdin, and found that personage gone, his suspicions
+    became excited.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "If these two have run off together," he said to
+    himself, "my task is indeed difficult. If the man
+    discovers it is the boy he has to fight, my poor Phedo
+    will be cut to pieces in a twinkling. I do not believe
+    there has been any trouble yet, for the boy does not
+    know that he is to be one of the combatants, and the
+    man would not be likely to suspect it. Come what
+    may, the fight must not take place for thirteen years.
+    And in order that I may still better preserve my health
+    and strength to avert the calamity during that period,
+    I will increase my number of chews to forty-two to
+    each mouthful of meat."
+</p>
+<p>
+    When old Salim reached the city, he soon found that
+    Alberdin and the boy had been there, and that they
+    had gone away together.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Nothing has happened so far," said the old man,
+    with a sigh of relief; "and things may turn out all
+    right yet. I'll follow them, but I must first find
+    out what that cavalryman had to say to the Princess."
+    For he had been told of the interview at the
+    palace.
+</p>
+<p>
+    It was not long before the migratory medical man
+    was brought to the Princess. There was nothing the
+    matter with her, but she liked to meet with persons of
+    skill and learning to hear what they had to say.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Have you any specialty?" she asked of the old
+    man.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Yes," said he, "I am a germ-doctor."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "What is that?" asked the Princess.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "All diseases," replied the old man, "come from
+    germs; generally very little ones. My business is to
+    discover these, and find out all about them."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Then I suppose," said the Princess, "you know
+    how to cure the diseases?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "You must not expect too much," answered the old
+    man. "It ought to be a great satisfaction to us to
+    know what sort of germ is at the bottom of our
+    woes."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I am very well, myself," said the Princess, "and,
+    so far as I know, none of my household are troubled
+    by germs. But there is something the matter with my
+    mind which I wish you could relieve." She then told
+    the old man how she had determined to marry the victor
+    in the contest for her father's throne, and how she had
+    seen one for the claimants whom she considered to be a
+    very agreeable and deserving young man; while the
+    other, she had heard, was a great, strong foot soldier,
+    who was probably very disagreeable, and even horrid.
+    If this one should prove the conqueror, she did not
+    know what she should do. "You see, I am in a great
+    deal of trouble," said she. "Can you do any thing to
+    help me?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    The pretending migratory medical man looked at her
+    attentively for a few moments, and then he said:
+</p>
+<p>
+    "The reason why you intend to marry the victor in
+    the coming contest, is that you wish to remain here in
+    your father's palace, and to continue to enjoy the comforts
+    and advantages to which you have been accustomed."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Yes," said the Princess; "that is it."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Well, having discovered the germ of your disorder,"
+    said the old man, "the great point is gained. I
+    will see what I can do."
+</p>
+<p>
+    And with a respectful bow he left her presence.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Well," said old Salim to himself, as he went away,
+    "she can never marry my boy, for that is certainly out
+    of the question; but now that I have found out her
+    motive, I think I can arrange matters satisfactorily, so
+    far as she is concerned. But to settle the affair between
+    that young man and Phedo is immensely more
+    difficult. The first thing is to find them."
+</p>
+<p>
+    Having learned the way they had gone, the old tutor
+    travelled diligently, and in two days came up with
+    Alberdin and Phedo. When he first caught sight of
+    them, he was very much surprised to see that they
+    were resting upon the ground quite a long distance
+    apart, with a little stream between them. Noticing
+    that Alberdin's back was toward him, he threw off his
+    disguise and hastened to Phedo. The boy received
+    him with the greatest delight, and, after many embraces,
+    they sat down to talk. Phedo told the old
+    man all that had happened, and finished by relating
+    that, as they had that day stopped by this stream to
+    rest, Alberdin had taken it into his head to inquire
+    into the parentage of his young companion; and after
+    many questions about his family, it had been made
+    clear to both of them that they were the two third
+    cousins who were to fight for the Autocracy of Mutjado.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "He is very angry," said the boy, "at the tricks
+    that have been played upon him, and went off and left
+    me. Is it true that I am to fight him? I don't want
+    to do it, for I like him very much."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "It will be a long time before you are old enough to
+    fight," said Salim; "so we need not consider that.
+    You stay here, and I'll go over and talk to him."
+</p>
+<p>
+    Salim then crossed the stream, and approached Alberdin.
+    When the young man saw him, and recognized
+    him as the person who had arranged the two
+    encampments, he turned upon him with fury.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Wretched old man, who came to me as the emissary
+    of my antagonist, you are but the tutor of that
+    boy! If I had known the truth at first, I would have
+    met him instantly; would have conquered him without
+    hurting a hair on his head; and carrying him bound to
+    the capital city, would have claimed the Autocracy,
+    and would now have been sitting upon the throne. Instead
+    of that, look at the delay and annoyance to which
+    I have been subjected. I have also taken such a
+    fancy to the boy that rather than hurt him or injure
+    his prospects, I would willingly resign my pretensions
+    to the throne, and go back contentedly to my own city.
+    But this cannot now be done. I have fallen in love
+    with the daughter of the late Autocrat, and she will
+    marry none but the victorious claimant. Behold to
+    what a condition you have brought me!"
+</p>
+<p>
+    The old man regarded him with attention.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I wish very much," said he, "to defer the settlement
+    of this matter for thirteen years. Are you willing
+    to wait so long?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "No, I am not," said Alberdin.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Very well, then," said the old man, "each third
+    cousin must retire to his camp, and as soon as matters
+    can be arranged the battle must take place."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "There is nothing else to be done," said Alberdin
+    in a troubled voice; "but I shall take care that the
+    boy receives no injury if it can possibly be avoided."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The three now retraced their steps, and in a few
+    days were settled down, Alberdin in his tent in the
+    plain, and Salim and Phedo in their intrenchments on
+    the other side of the low mountain. The old man now
+    gave himself up to deep thought. He had discovered
+    the germ of Alberdin's trouble; and in a few days he
+    had arranged his plans, and went over to see the young
+    man.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "It has been determined," said he, "that a syndicate
+    is to be formed to attend to this business for
+    Phedo."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "A syndicate!" cried Alberdin. "What is that?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "A syndic," answered Salim, "is a person who
+    attends to business for others; and a syndicate is a
+    body of men who are able to conduct certain affairs
+    better than any individual can do it. In a week from
+    to-day, Phedo's syndicate will meet you in the large
+    plain outside of the capital city. There the contest
+    will take place. Shall you be ready?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I don't exactly understand it," said Alberdin,
+    "but I shall be there."
+</p>
+<p>
+    General notice was given of the coming battle of the
+    contestants for the throne, and thousands of the inhabitants
+    of the Autocracy assembled on the plain on the
+    appointed day. The Princess with her ladies was
+    there; and as everybody was interested, everybody
+    was anxious to see what would happen.
+</p>
+<p>
+    Alberdin rode into the open space in the centre of
+    the plain, and demanded that his antagonist should
+    appear. Thereupon old Salim came forward, leading
+    Phedo by the hand.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "This is the opposing heir," he said; "but as every
+    one can see that he is too young to fight a battle, a
+    syndicate has been appointed to attend to the matter
+    for him; and there is nothing in the will of the late
+    Autocrat which forbids this arrangement. The syndicate
+    will now appear."
+</p>
+<p>
+    At this command there came into the arena a horseman
+    heavily armed, a tall foot soldier completely
+    equipped for action, an artilleryman with a small cannon
+    on wheels, a sailor with a boarding-pike and a
+    drawn cutlass, and a soldier with a revolving gun which
+    discharged one hundred and twenty balls a minute.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "All being ready," exclaimed Salim, "the combat
+    for the Autocracy will begin!"
+</p>
+<p>
+    Alberdin took a good long look at the syndicate
+    ranged before him. Then he dismounted from his
+    horse, drew his sword, and stuck it, point downward,
+    into the sand.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I surrender!" he said.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "So do I!" cried the Princess, running toward him,
+    and throwing herself into his arms.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The eyes of Alberdin sparkled with joy.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Let the Autocracy go!" he cried. "Now that I
+    have my Princess, the throne and the crown are nothing
+    to me."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "So long as I have you," returned the Princess, "I
+    am content to resign all the comforts and advantages
+    to which I have been accustomed."
+</p>
+<p>
+    Phedo, who had been earnestly talking with his tutor,
+    now looked up.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "You shall not resign any thing!" he cried. "We
+    are all of the same blood, and we will join together
+    and form a royal family, and we will all live at the
+    palace. Alberdin and my tutor shall manage the government
+    for me until I am grown up; and if I have to
+    go to school for a few years, I suppose I must. And
+    that is all there is about it!"
+</p>
+<p>
+    The syndicate was now ordered to retire and disband;
+    the heralds proclaimed Phedo the conquering
+    heir, and the people cheered and shouted with delight.
+    All the virtues of the late Autocrat had come to him
+    from his mother, and the citizens of Mutjado much
+    preferred to have a new ruler from the mother's
+    family.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I hope you bear no grudge against me," said
+    Salim to Alberdin; "but if you had been willing to
+    wait for thirteen years, you and Phedo might have
+    fought on equal terms. As it is now, it would have
+    been as hard for him to conquer you, as for you to conquer
+    the syndicate. The odds would have been quite
+    as great."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Don't mention it," said Alberdin. "I prefer
+    things as they are. I should have hated to drive the
+    boy away, and deprive him of a position which the
+    people wish him to have. Now we are all satisfied."
+</p>
+<p>
+    Phedo soon began to show signs that he would probably
+    make a very good Autocrat. He declared that if
+    he was to be assisted by ministers and cabinet officers
+    when he came to the throne, he would like them to be
+    persons who had been educated for their positions, just
+    as he was to be educated for his own. Consequently
+    he chose for the head of his cabinet a bright and sensible
+    boy, and had him educated as a Minister of State.
+    For Minister of Finance, he chose another boy with a
+    very honest countenance, and for the other members
+    of his cabinet, suitable youths were selected. He also
+    said, that he thought there ought to be another officer,
+    one who would be a sort of Minister of General Comfort,
+    who would keep an eye on the health and happiness
+    of the subjects, and would also see that every
+    thing went all right in the palace, not only in regard
+    to meals, but lots of other things. For this office he
+    chose a bright young girl, and had her educated for
+    the position of Queen.
+</p>
+<a name="chapter8"><!-- H2 anchor --></a>
+
+<div style="height: 2em;"></div>
+
+<h2>
+    THE BANISHED KING.
+</h2>
+<hr>
+<p>
+    There was once a kingdom in which every thing
+    seemed to go wrong. Everybody knew this, and
+    everybody talked about it, especially the King. The
+    bad state of affairs troubled him more than it did any
+    one else, but he could think of no way to make them
+    better.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I cannot bear to see things going on so badly," he
+    said to the Queen and his chief councillors. "I wish I
+    knew how other kingdoms were governed."
+</p>
+<p>
+    One of his councillors offered to go to some other
+    countries, and see how they were governed, and come
+    back and tell him all about it, but this did not suit his
+    majesty.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "You would simply return," he said, "and give me
+    your ideas about things. I want my own ideas."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Queen then suggested that he should take a
+    vacation, and visit other kingdoms, and see for himself
+    how things were managed in them.
+</p>
+<p>
+    This did not suit the king. "A vacation would not
+    answer," he said. "I should not be gone a week before
+    something would happen here which would make
+    it necessary for me to come back."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Queen then suggested that he be banished for a
+    certain time, say a year. In that case he could not
+    come back, and would be at full liberty to visit foreign
+    kingdoms, and find out how they were governed.
+</p>
+<p>
+    This plan pleased the King. "If it were made impossible
+    for me to come back," he said, "of course I
+    could not do it. The scheme is a good one. Let me
+    be banished." And he gave orders that his council
+    should pass a law banishing him for one year.
+</p>
+<p>
+    Preparations were immediately begun to carry out
+    this plan, and in day or two the King bade farewell to
+    the Queen, and left his kingdom, a banished man. He
+    went away on foot, entirely unattended. But, as he
+    did not wish to cut off all communication between himself
+    and his kingdom, he made an arrangement which
+    he thought a very good one. At easy shouting distance
+    behind him walked one of the officers of the
+    court, and at shouting distance behind him walked
+    another, and so on at distances of about a hundred
+    yards from each other. In this way there would
+    always be a line of men extending from the King
+    to his palace. Whenever the King had walked a
+    hundred yards the line moved on after him, and
+    another officer was put in the gap between the last
+    man and the palace door. Thus, as the King walked
+    on, his line of followers lengthened, and was never
+    broken. Whenever he had any message to send
+    to the Queen, or any other person in the palace, he
+    shouted it to the officer next him, who shouted it to the
+    one next to him, and it was so passed on until it
+    reached the palace. If he needed food, clothes, or any
+    other necessary thing, the order for it was shouted
+    along the line, and the article was passed to him from
+    man to man, each one carrying it forward to his neighbor,
+    and then retiring to his proper place.
+</p>
+<p>
+    In this way the King walked on day by day until he
+    had passed entirely out of his own kingdom. At night
+    he stopped at some convenient house on the road, and
+    if any of his followers did not find himself near a house
+    or cottage when the King shouted back the order to
+    halt, he laid himself down to sleep wherever he might
+    be. By this time the increasing line of followers had
+    used up all the officers of the court, and it became
+    necessary to draw upon some of the under government
+    officers in order to keep the line perfect.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The King had not gone very far outside the limits of
+    his dominions when he met a Sphinx. He had often
+    heard of these creatures, although he had never seen
+    one before. But when he saw the winged body of a
+    lion with a woman's head, he knew instantly what it
+    was. He knew, also, that the chief business of a
+    Sphinx was that of asking people questions, and then
+    getting them into trouble if the right answers were not
+    given. He therefore determined that he would not be
+    caught by any such tricks as these, and that he would
+    be on his guard if the Sphinx spoke to him. The
+    creature was lying down when the King first saw it,
+    but when he approached nearer it rose to its feet.
+    There was nothing savage about its look, and the King
+    was not at all afraid.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Where are you going?" said the Sphinx to him,
+    in a pleasant voice.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Give it up," replied the King.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "What do you mean by that?" said the other, with
+    an air of surprise.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I give that up, too," said the King.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Sphinx then looked at him quite astonished.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I don't mind telling you," said the King, "of my
+    own free will, and not in answer to any questions, that
+    I do not know where I am going. I am a King, as
+    you may have noticed, and I have been banished from
+    my kingdom for a year. I am now going to look into
+    the government of other countries in order that I may
+    find out what it is that is wrong in my own kingdom.
+    Every thing goes badly, and there is something very
+    faulty at the bottom of it all. What this is I want to
+    discover."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I am much interested in puzzles and matters of
+    that kind," said the Sphinx, "and if you like I will go
+    with you and help to find out what is wrong in your
+    kingdom."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "All right," said the King. "I shall be glad of
+    your company."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "What is the meaning of this long line of people
+    following you at regular distances?" asked the
+    Sphinx.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Give it up," said the King.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Sphinx laughed.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I don't mind telling you," said the King, "of my
+    own free will, and not in answer to any question, that
+    these men form a line of communication between me
+    and my kingdom, where matters, I fear, must be going
+    on worse than ever, in my absence."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The two now travelled on together until they came to
+    a high hill, from which they could see, not very far
+    away, a large city.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "That city," said the Sphinx, "is the capital of an
+    extensive country. It is governed by a king of mingled
+    sentiments. Suppose we go there. I think you
+    will find a government that is rather peculiar."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The King consented, and they walked down the hill
+    toward the city.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "How did the King get his sentiments mingled?"
+    asked the King.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I really don't know how it began," said the
+    Sphinx, "but the King, when a young man, had so
+    many sentiments of different kinds, and he mingled
+    them up so much, that no one could ever tell exactly
+    what he thought on any particular subject. Of course,
+    his people gradually got into the same frame of mind,
+    and you never can know in this kingdom exactly what
+    people think or what they are going to do. You will
+    find all sorts of people here: giants, dwarfs, fairies,
+    gnomes, and personages of that kind, who have been
+    drawn here by the mingled sentiments of the people.
+    I, myself, came into these parts because the people
+    every now and then take a great fancy to puzzles and
+    riddles."
+</p>
+<p>
+    On entering the city, the King was cordially welcomed
+    by his brother sovereign, to whom he told his
+    story; and he was lodged in a room in the palace.
+    Such of his followers as came within the limits of the
+    city were entertained by the persons near to whose
+    houses they found themselves when the line halted.
+</p>
+<p>
+    Every day the Sphinx went with him to see the
+    sights of this strange city. They took long walks
+    through the streets, and sometimes into the surrounding
+    country&mdash;always going one way and returning
+    another, the Sphinx being very careful never to bring
+    the King back by the same road or street by which they
+    went. In this way the King's line of followers, which,
+    of course, lengthened out every time he took a walk,
+    came to be arranged in long loops through many parts
+    of the city and suburbs.
+</p>
+<p>
+    Many of the things the King saw showed plainly the
+    mingled sentiments of the people. For instance, he
+    would one day visit a great smith's shop, where heavy
+    masses of iron were being forged, the whole place resounding
+    with tremendous blows from heavy hammers,
+    and the clank and din of iron on the anvils; while
+    the next day he would find the place transformed
+    into a studio, where the former blacksmith was painting
+    dainty little pictures on the delicate surface of
+    egg-shells. The king of the country, in his treatment
+    of his visitor, showed his peculiar nature very plainly.
+    Sometimes he would receive him with enthusiastic
+    delight, while at others he would upbraid him with
+    having left his dominions to go wandering around the
+    earth in this senseless way. One day his host invited
+    him to attend a royal dinner, but, when he went to the
+    grand dining-hall, pleased with anticipations of a splendid
+    feast, he found that the sentiments of his majesty
+    had become mingled, and that he had determined,
+    instead of having a dinner, to conduct the funeral services
+    of one of his servants who had died the day before.
+    All the guests were obliged by politeness to remain
+    during the ceremonies, which our King, not having
+    been acquainted with the deceased servant, had
+    not found at all interesting.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Now," said the King to the Sphinx, "I am in
+    favor of moving on. I am tired of this place, where
+    every sentiment is so mingled with others that you can
+    never tell what anybody really thinks or feels. I don't
+    believe any one in this country was ever truly glad
+    or sorry. They mix one sentiment so quickly with
+    another that they never can discover the actual ingredients
+    of any of their impulses."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "When this King first began to mingle his sentiments,"
+    said the Sphinx, "it was because he always
+    desired to think and feel exactly right. He did not
+    wish his feelings to run too much one way or the
+    other."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "And so he is never either right or wrong," said the
+    King. "I don't like that, at all. I want to be one
+    thing or the other."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I have wasted a good deal of time at this place,"
+    remarked the King, as they walked on, "and I have
+    seen and heard nothing which I wish to teach my
+    people. But I must find out some way to prevent
+    every thing going wrong in my kingdom. I have tried
+    plan after plan, and sometimes two or three together,
+    and have kept this up year after year, and yet nothing
+    seems to do my kingdom any good."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Have you heard how things are going on there
+    now?" asked the Sphinx.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Give it up," said the King. "But I don't mind
+    saying of my own accord, and not as answer to any
+    question, that I have sent a good many communications
+    to my Queen, but have never received any from
+    her. So I do not know how things are going on in my
+    kingdom."
+</p>
+<p>
+    They then travelled on, the long line of followers
+    coming after, keeping their relative positions a hundred
+    yards apart, and passing over all the ground the King
+    had traversed in his circuitous walks about the city.
+    Thus the line crept along like an enormous snake in
+    straight lines, loops, and coils; and every time the
+    King walked a hundred yards a fresh man from his
+    capital city was obliged to take his place at the tail of
+    the procession.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "By the way," said the Sphinx, after they had
+    walked an hour or more, "if you want to see a
+    kingdom where there really is something to learn, you
+    ought to go to the country of the Gaumers, which we
+    are now approaching."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "All right," said the King. "Let us go there."
+</p>
+<p>
+    In the course of the afternoon they reached the edge
+    of a high bluff. "On the level ground, beneath this
+    precipice," said the Sphinx, "is the country of the
+    dwarfs called Gaumers. You can sit on the edge of
+    the bluff and look down upon it."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The King and the Sphinx then sat down, and
+    looked out from the edge over the country of the little
+    people. The officer of the court who had formed the
+    head of the line wished very much to see what they
+    were looking at, but, when the line halted, he was not
+    near enough.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "You will notice," said the Sphinx, "that the little
+    houses and huts are gathered together in clusters.
+    Each one of these clusters is under a separate king."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Why don't they all live under one ruler?" asked
+    the King. "That is the proper way."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "They do not think so," said the Sphinx. "In each
+    of these clusters live the Gaumers who are best suited
+    to each other; and, if any Gaumer finds he cannot
+    get along in one cluster, he goes to another. The
+    kings are chosen from among the very best of them,
+    and each one is always very anxious to please his subjects.
+    He knows that every thing that he, and his
+    queen, and his children eat, or drink, or wear, or have
+    must be given to him by his subjects, and if it were
+    not for them he could not be their ruler. And so he
+    does every thing that he can to make them happy and
+    contented, for he knows if he does not please them
+    and govern them well, they will gradually drop off from
+    him and go to other clusters, and he will be left without
+    any people or any kingdom."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "That is a very queer way of ruling," said the
+    King. "I think the people ought to try to please
+    their sovereign."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "He is only one, and they are a great many," said
+    the Sphinx. "Consequently they are much more
+    important. No subject is ever allowed to look down
+    upon a king, simply because he helps to feed and
+    clothe him, and send his children to school. If any
+    one does a thing of this kind, he is banished until he
+    learns better."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "All that may be very well for Gaumers," said the
+    King, "but I can learn nothing from a government
+    like that, where every thing seems to be working in an
+    opposite direction from what everybody knows is right
+    and proper. A king anxious to deserve the good
+    opinion of his subjects! What nonsense! It ought
+    to be just the other way. The ideas of this people are
+    as dwarfish as their bodies."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The King now arose and took up the line of march,
+    turning away from the country of the Gaumers. But
+    he had not gone more than two or three hundred yards
+    before he received a message from the Queen. It
+    came to him very rapidly, every man in the line seeming
+    anxious to shout it to the man ahead of him as
+    quickly as possible. The message was to the effect
+    that he must either stop where he was or come home:
+    his constantly lengthening line of communication had
+    used up all the chief officers of the government, all the
+    clerks in the departments, and all the officials of every
+    grade, excepting the few who were actually needed to
+    carry on the government, and if any more men went
+    into the line it would be necessary to call upon the
+    laborers and other persons who could not be spared.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I think," said the Sphinx, "that you have made
+    your line long enough."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "And I think," said the King. "that you made it
+    a great deal longer than it need to have been, by taking
+    me about in such winding ways."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "It may be so," said the Sphinx, with its mystic
+    smile.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Well, I am not going to stop here," said the King,
+    "and so I might as well go back as soon as I can."
+    And he shouted to the head man of the line to pass on
+    the order that his edict of banishment be revoked.
+</p>
+<p>
+    In a very short time the news came that the edict
+    was revoked. The King then commanded that the
+    procession return home, tail-end foremost. The march
+    was at once begun, each man, as he reached the city,
+    going immediately to his home and family.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The King and the greater part of the line had a long
+    and weary journey, as they followed each other through
+    the country and over the devious ways in which the
+    Sphinx had led them in the City of Mingled Sentiments.
+    The King was obliged to pursue all these
+    complicated turnings, or be separated from his officers,
+    and so break up his communication with his palace.
+    The Sphinx accompanied him.
+</p>
+<p>
+    When at last, he reached his palace, his line of
+    former followers having apparently melted entirely
+    away, he hurried up-stairs to the Queen, leaving the
+    Sphinx in the court-yard.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The King found, when he had time to look into the
+    affairs of his dominions, that every thing was in the
+    most admirable condition. The Queen had retained a
+    few of the best officials to carry on the government,
+    and had ordered the rest to fall, one by one, into the
+    line of communication. The King set himself to work
+    to think about the matter. It was not long before he
+    came to the conclusion that the main thing which had
+    been wrong in his kingdom was himself. He was so
+    greatly impressed with this idea that he went down to
+    the court-yard to speak to the Sphinx about it.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I dare say you are right," said the Sphinx, "and
+    I don't wonder that what you learned when you were
+    away, and what you have seen since you came back,
+    have made you feel certain that you were the cause of
+    every thing going wrong in this kingdom. And now,
+    what do you intend to do about your government?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Give it up," promptly replied the King.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "That is exactly what I should advise," said the
+    Sphinx.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The King did give up his kingdom. He was convinced
+    that being a King was exactly the thing he was
+    not suited for, and that he would get on much better
+    in some other business or profession. He determined
+    to be a traveller and explorer, and to go abroad into
+    other countries to find out things that might be useful
+    to his own nation. His Queen had shown that she
+    could govern the country most excellently, and it was
+    not at all necessary for him to stay at home. She had
+    ordered all the men who had made up his line to follow
+    the King's example and to go into some good business;
+    in order that not being bothered with so many officers,
+    she would be able to get along quite easily.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The King was very successful in his new pursuit, and
+    although he did not this time have a line of followers
+    connecting him with the palace, he frequently sent
+    home messages which were of use and value to his
+    nation.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I may as well retire," said the Sphinx to itself.
+    "As the King has found his vocation and every thing
+    is going all right it is not necessary I should remain
+    where I may be looked upon as a questionable
+    personage."
+</p>
+<a name="chapter9"><!-- H2 anchor --></a>
+
+<div style="height: 2em;"></div>
+
+<h2>
+    THE PHILOPENA.
+</h2>
+<hr>
+<p>
+    There were once a Prince and a Princess who,
+    when quite young, ate a philopena together. They
+    agreed that the one who, at any hour after sunrise
+    the next day, should accept any thing from the other
+    &mdash;the giver at the same time saying "Philopena!"&mdash;should
+    be the loser, and that the loser should marry
+    the other.
+</p>
+<p>
+    They did not meet as soon as they had expected the
+    next day; and at the time our story begins, many
+    years had elapsed since they had seen each other, and
+    the Prince and the Princess were nearly grown up.
+    They often thought of the philopena they had eaten
+    together, and wondered if they should know each other
+    when they met. He remembered her as a pretty little
+    girl dressed in green silk and playing with a snow-white
+    cat; while she remembered him as a handsome
+    boy, wearing a little sword, the handle of which was
+    covered with jewels. But they knew that each must
+    have changed a great deal in all this time.
+</p>
+<p>
+    Neither of these young people had any parents; the
+    Prince lived with guardians and the Princess with
+    uncles.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The guardians of the Prince were very enterprising
+    and energetic men, and were allowed to govern the
+    country until the Prince came of age. The capital city
+    was a very fine city when the old king died; but the
+    guardians thought it might be much finer, so they set
+    to work with all their might and main to improve it.
+    They tore down old houses and made a great many
+    new streets; they built grand and splendid bridges
+    over the river on which the city stood; they constructed
+    aqueducts to bring water from streams many miles
+    away; and they were at work all the time upon some
+    extensive building enterprise.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Prince did not take much interest in the works
+    which were going on under direction of his guardians;
+    and when he rode out, he preferred to go into the country
+    or to ride through some of the quaint old streets,
+    where nothing had been changed for hundreds of
+    years.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The uncles of the Princess were very different people
+    from the guardians of the Prince. There were three
+    of them, and they were very quiet and cosey old men,
+    who disliked any kind of bustle or disturbance, and
+    wished that every thing might remain as they had
+    always known it. It even worried them a little to find
+    that the Princess was growing up. They would have
+    much preferred that she should remain exactly as she
+    was when they first took charge of her. Then they
+    never would have been obliged to trouble their minds
+    about any changes in the manner of taking care of her.
+    But they did not worry their minds very much, after
+    all. They wished to make her guardianship as little
+    laborious or exhausting as possible, and so, divided the
+    work; one of them took charge of her education, another
+    of her food and lodging, and the third of her
+    dress. The first sent for teachers, and told them to
+    teach her; the second had handsome apartments prepared
+    for her use, and gave orders that she should
+    have every thing she needed to eat and drink; while
+    the third commanded that she should have a complete
+    outfit of new clothes four times a year. Thus every
+    thing went on very quietly and smoothly; and the three
+    uncles were not obliged to exhaust themselves by hard
+    work. There were never any new houses built in that
+    city, and if any thing had to be repaired, it was done
+    with as little noise and dirt as possible. The city and
+    the whole kingdom were quiet and serene, and the
+    three uncles dozed away most of the day in three great
+    comfortable thrones.
+</p>
+<p>
+    Everybody seemed satisfied with this state of things
+    except the Princess. She often thought to herself that
+    nothing would be more delightful than a little noise
+    and motion, and she wondered if the whole world
+    were as quiet as the city in which she lived. At last,
+    she became unable to bear the dreadful stillness of the
+    place any longer; but she could think of nothing to do
+    but to go and try to find the Prince with whom she had
+    eaten a philopena. If she should win, he must marry
+    her; and then, perhaps, they could settle down in some
+    place where things would be bright and lively. So,
+    early one morning, she put on her white dress, and
+    mounting her prancing black horse, she rode away from
+    the city. Only one person saw her go, for nearly all
+    the people were asleep.
+</p>
+<p>
+    About this time, the Prince made up his mind that
+    he could no longer stand the din and confusion, the
+    everlasting up-setting and setting-up in his native city.
+    He would go away, and see if he could find the Princess
+    with whom he had eaten a philopena. If he
+    should win, she would be obliged to marry him; and
+    then, perhaps, they could settle down in some place
+    where it was quiet and peaceful. So, on the same
+    morning in which the Princess rode away, he put on a
+    handsome suit of black clothes, and mounting a gentle
+    white horse, he rode out of the city. Only one person
+    saw him go; for, even at that early hour, the people
+    were so busy that little attention was paid to his movements.
+</p>
+<p>
+    About half way between these two cities, in a tall
+    tower which stood upon a hill, there lived an Inquisitive
+    Dwarf, whose whole object in life was to find out
+    what people were doing and why they did it. From
+    the top of this tower he generally managed to see all
+    that was going on in the surrounding country; and in
+    each of the two cities that have been mentioned he had
+    an agent, whose duty it was to send him word, by
+    means of carrier pigeons, whenever a new thing happened.
+    Before breakfast, on the morning when the
+    Prince and Princess rode away, a pigeon from the city
+    of the Prince came flying to the tower of the Inquisitive
+    Dwarf.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Some new building started, I suppose," said the
+    Dwarf, as he took the little roll of paper from under
+    the pigeon's wing. "But no; it is very different!
+    'The Prince has ridden away from the city alone, and
+    is travelling to the north.'"
+</p>
+<p>
+    But before he could begin to puzzle his brains about
+    the meaning of this departure, another pigeon came
+    flying in from the city of the Princess.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Well!" cried the Dwarf, "this is amazing! It is
+    a long time since I have had a message from that city,
+    and my agent has been drawing his salary without
+    doing any work. What possibly can have happened
+    there?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    When he read that the Princess had ridden alone
+    from the city that morning, and was travelling to the
+    south, he was truly amazed.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "What on earth can it mean?" he exclaimed. "If
+    the city of the Prince were to the south of that
+    of the Princess, then I might understand it; for they
+    would be going to see each other, and that would be
+    natural enough. But as his city is to the north of her
+    city, they are travelling in opposite directions. And
+    what is the meaning of this? I most certainly must
+    find out."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Inquisitive Dwarf had three servants whom he
+    employed to attend to his most important business.
+    These were a Gryphoness, a Water Sprite, and an
+    Absolute Fool. This last one was very valuable; for
+    there were some things he would do which no one else
+    would think of attempting. The Dwarf called to him
+    the Gryphoness, the oldest and most discreet of the
+    three, and told her of the departure of the Princess.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Hasten southward," he said, "as fast as you can,
+    and follow her, and do not return to me until you have
+    found out why she left her city, where she is going,
+    and what she expects to do when she gets there.
+    Your appearance may frighten her; and, therefore,
+    you must take with you the Absolute Fool, to whom
+    she will probably be willing to talk; but you must see
+    that every thing is managed properly."
+</p>
+<p>
+    Having despatched these two, the Inquisitive Dwarf
+    then called the Water Sprite, who was singing to herself
+    at the edge of a fountain, and telling her of the
+    departure of the Prince, ordered her to follow him, and
+    not to return until she had found out why he left his
+    city, where he was going, and what he intended to do
+    when he got there.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "The road to the north," he said, "lies along the
+    river bank; therefore, you can easily keep him company."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Water Sprite bowed, and dancing over the dewy
+    grass to the river, threw herself into it. Sometimes
+    she swam beneath the clear water; sometimes she rose
+    partly in the air, where she seemed like a little cloud
+    of sparkling mist borne onward by the wind; and
+    sometimes she floated upon the surface, her pale blue
+    robes undulating with the gentle waves, while her white
+    hands and feet shone in the sun like tiny crests of
+    foam. Thus, singing to herself, she went joyously
+    and rapidly on, aided by a full, strong wind from the
+    south. She did not forget to glance every now and
+    then upon the road which ran along the river bank;
+    and, in the course of the morning, she perceived the
+    Prince. He was sitting in the shade of a tree near the
+    water's edge, while his white horse was grazing near
+    by.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Water Sprite came very gently out of the river,
+    and seating herself upon the edge of the grassy bank,
+    she spoke to him. The Prince looked up in astonishment,
+    but there was nothing in her appearance to
+    frighten him.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I came," said the Water Sprite, "at the command
+    of my master, to ask you why you left your city, where
+    you are going, and what you intend to do when you
+    get there."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Prince then told her why he had left his city,
+    and what he intended to do when he had found the
+    Princess.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "But where I am going," he said, "I do not know,
+    myself. I must travel and travel until I succeed in
+    the object of my search."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Water Sprite reflected for a moment, and then
+    she said:
+</p>
+<p>
+    "If I were you, I would not travel to the north.
+    It is cold and dreary there, and your Princess would
+    not dwell in such a region. A little above us, on the
+    other side of this river, there is a stream which runs
+    sometimes to the east and sometimes to the south, and
+    which leads to the Land of the Lovely Lakes. This is
+    the most beautiful country in the world, and you will
+    be much more likely to find your Princess there than
+    among the desolate mountains of the north."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I dare say you are right," said the Prince; "and I
+    will go there, if you will show me the way."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "The road runs along the bank of the river," said
+    the Water Sprite; "and we shall soon reach the Land
+    of the Lovely Lakes."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Prince then mounted his horse, forded the
+    river, and was soon riding along the bank of the
+    stream, while the Water Sprite gayly floated upon its
+    dancing ripples.
+</p>
+<hr>
+<p>
+    When the Gryphoness started southward, in pursuit
+    of the Princess, she kept out of sight among the bushes
+    by the roadside; but sped swiftly along. The Absolute
+    Fool, however, mounted upon a fine horse, rode boldly
+    along upon the open road. He was a good-looking
+    youth, with rosy cheeks, bright eyes, and a handsome
+    figure. As he cantered gayly along, he felt himself
+    capable of every noble action which the human mind
+    has ever conceived. The Gryphoness kept near him,
+    and in the course of the morning they overtook the
+    Princess, who was allowing her horse to walk in the
+    shade by the roadside. The Absolute Fool dashed up
+    to her, and, taking off his hat, asked her why she had
+    left her city, where she was going, and what she intended
+    to do when she got there.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Princess looked at him in surprise. "I left my
+    city because I wanted to," she said. "I am going
+    about my business, and when I get to the proper place,
+    I shall attend to it."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Oh," said the Absolute Fool, "you refuse me your
+    confidence, do you? But allow me to remark that I
+    have a Gryphoness with me who is very frightful to
+    look at, and whom it was my intention to keep in the
+    bushes; but if you will not give fair answers to my
+    questions, she must come out and talk to you, and that
+    is all there is about it."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "If there is a Gryphoness in the bushes," said the
+    Princess, "let her come out. No matter how frightful
+    she is, I would rather she should come where I can see
+    her, than to have her hiding near me."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Gryphoness, who had heard these words, now
+    came out into the road. The horse of the Princess
+    reared in affright, but his young rider patted him on
+    the neck, and quieted his fears.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "What do you and this young man want?" said the
+    Princess to the Gryphoness, "and why do you question
+    me?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "It is not of our own will that we do it," said the
+    Gryphoness, very respectfully; "but our master, the
+    Inquisitive Dwarf, has sent us to obtain information
+    about the points on which the young man questioned
+    you; and until we have found out these things, it is
+    impossible for us to return."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I am opposed to answering impertinent questions,"
+    replied the Princess; "but in order to rid myself
+    of you, I will tell you the reason of my journey."
+    And she then stated briefly the facts of the case.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Ah, me!" said the Gryphoness. "I am very
+    sorry; but you cannot tell us where you are going,
+    and we cannot return until we know that. But you
+    need not desire to be rid of us, for it may be that we
+    can assist you in the object of your journey. This
+    young man is sometimes very useful, and I shall be
+    glad to do any thing that I can to help you. If you
+    should think that I would injure you, or willingly
+    annoy you by my presence, it would grieve me to the
+    heart." And as she spoke, a tear bedimmed her eye.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Princess was touched by the emotion of the
+    Gryphoness.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "You may accompany me," she said, "and I will
+    trust you both. You must know this country better
+    than I do. Have you any advice to give me in regard
+    to my journey?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "One thing I would strongly advise," said the
+    Gryphoness, "and that is, that you do not travel any
+    farther until we know in what direction it will be best
+    to go. There is an inn close by, kept by a worthy
+    woman. If you will stop there until to-morrow, this
+    young man and I will scour the country round about,
+    and try to find some news of your Prince. The young
+    man will return and report to you to-morrow morning.
+    And if you should need help, or escort, he will aid and
+    obey you as your servant. As for me, unless we have
+    found the Prince, I shall continue searching for him.
+    There is a prince in the city to the north of my master's
+    tower, and it is not unlikely that it is he whom you
+    seek."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "You can find out if it is he," answered the
+    Princess, "by asking about the philopena."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "That will I do," said the Gryphoness, "and I will
+    return hither as speedily as possible." And, with a
+    respectful salutation, the Gryphoness and the Absolute
+    Fool departed by different ways.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Princess then repaired to the inn, where she
+    took lodgings.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The next morning, the Absolute Fool came back to
+    the inn, and seeing the Princess, said: "I rode until
+    after night-fall, searching for the Prince, before it
+    occurred to me that, even if I should find him, I would
+    not know him in the dark. As soon as I thought of
+    that, I rode straight to the nearest house, and slept
+    until daybreak, when I remembered that I was to report
+    to you this morning. But as I have heard no news
+    of the Prince, and as this is a beautiful, clear day, I
+    think it would be extremely foolish to remain idly
+    here, where there is nothing of interest going on, and
+    when a single hour's delay may cause you to miss the
+    object of your search. The Prince may be in one
+    place this morning, and there is no knowing where he
+    will be in the afternoon. While the Gryphoness is
+    searching, we should search also. We can return
+    before sunset, and we will leave word here as to the
+    direction we have taken, so that when she returns, she
+    can quickly overtake us. It is my opinion that not a
+    moment should be lost. I will be your guide. I know
+    this country well."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Princess thought this sounded like good reasoning,
+    and consented to set out. There were some
+    beautiful mountains to the south-east; and among
+    these, the Absolute Fool declared, a prince of good
+    taste would be very apt to dwell. They, therefore,
+    took this direction. But when they had travelled an
+    hour or more, the mountains began to look bare and
+    bleak, and the Absolute Fool declared that he did not
+    believe any prince would live there. He therefore
+    advised that they turn into a road that led to the
+    north-east. It was a good road; and therefore he
+    thought it led to a good place, where a person of good
+    sense would be likely to reside. Along this road they
+    therefore travelled. They had ridden but a few miles
+    when they met three men, well armed and mounted.
+    These men drew up their horses, and respectfully
+    saluted the Princess.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "High-born Lady," they said, "for by your aspect
+    we know you to be such, we would inform you that we
+    are the soldiers of the King, the outskirts of whose
+    dominions you have reached. It is our duty to question
+    all travellers, and, if their object in coming to
+    our country is a good one, to give them whatever
+    assistance and information they may require. Will
+    you tell us why you are come?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Impertinent vassals!" cried the Absolute Fool,
+    riding up in a great passion. "How dare you interfere
+    with a princess who has left her city because it
+    was so dull and stupid, and is endeavoring to find a
+    prince, with whom she has eaten a philopena, in order
+    that she may marry him. Out of my way, or I will
+    draw my sword and cleave you to the earth, and thus
+    punish your unwarrantable curiosity!"
+</p>
+<p>
+    The soldiers could not repress a smile.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "In order to prevent mischief," they said to the
+    Absolute Fool, "we shall be obliged to take you into
+    custody."
+</p>
+<p>
+    This they immediately did, and then requested the
+    Princess to accompany them to the palace of their
+    King, where she would receive hospitality and aid.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The King welcomed the Princess with great cordiality.
+    He had no son, and he much wished he had
+    one; for in that case it might be his Prince for whom
+    the young lady was looking. But there was a prince,
+    he said, who lived in a city to the north, who was
+    probably the very man; and he would send and make
+    inquiries. In the mean time, the Princess would be
+    entertained by himself and his Queen; and, if her
+    servant would make a suitable apology, his violent
+    language would be pardoned. But the Absolute Fool
+    positively refused to do this.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I never apologize," he cried. "No man of spirit
+    would do such a thing. What I say, I stand by."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Very well," said the King; "then you shall fight
+    a wild beast." And he gave orders that the affair
+    should be arranged for the following day.
+</p>
+<p>
+    In a short time, however, some of his officers came
+    to him and told him that there were no wild beasts;
+    those on hand having been kept so long that they had
+    become tame.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "To be sure, there's the old lion, Sardon," they
+    said; "but he is so dreadfully cross and has had so
+    much experience in these fights, that for a long time it
+    has not been considered fair to allow any one to enter
+    the ring with him."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "It is a pity," said the King, "to make the young
+    man fight a tame beast; but, under the circumstances,
+    the best thing to do will be to represent the case to
+    him, just as it is. Tell him we are sorry we have not
+    an ordinary wild beast; but that he can take his choice
+    between a tame one and the lion Sardon, whose disposition
+    and experience you will explain to him."
+</p>
+<p>
+    When the matter was stated to the Absolute Fool,
+    he refused with great scorn to fight a tame beast.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I will not be degraded in the eyes of the public,"
+    he said; "I will take the old lion."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The next day, the court and the public assembled to
+    see the fight; but the Queen and our Princess took a
+    ride into the country, not wishing to witness a combat
+    of this kind, especially one which was so unequal.
+    The King ordered that every advantage should be
+    given to the young man, in order that he might have
+    every possible chance of success in fighting an animal
+    which had been a victor on so many similar occasions.
+    A large iron cage, furnished with a turnstile, into
+    which the Absolute Fool could retire for rest and refreshment,
+    but where the lion could not follow him,
+    was placed in the middle of the arena, and the youth
+    was supplied with all the weapons he desired. When
+    every thing was ready, the Absolute Fool took his
+    stand in the centre of the arena, and the door of the
+    lion's den was opened. The great beast came out, he
+    looked about for an instant, and then, with majestic
+    step, advanced toward the young man. When he was
+    within a few paces of him, he crouched for a spring.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Absolute Fool had never seen so magnificent a
+    creature, and he could not restrain his admiration.
+    With folded arms and sparkling eyes, he gazed with
+    delight upon the lion's massive head, his long and
+    flowing mane, his magnificent muscles, and his powerful
+    feet and legs. There was an air of grandeur and
+    strength about him which completely enraptured the
+    youth. Approaching the lion, he knelt before him,
+    and gazed with wondering ecstasy into his great, glowing
+    eyes. "What glorious orbs!" he inwardly exclaimed.
+    "What unfathomable expression! What
+    possibilities! What reminiscences! And everywhere,
+    what majesty of curve!"
+</p>
+<p>
+    The lion was a good deal astonished at the conduct
+    of the young man; and he soon began to suppose that
+    this was not the person he was to fight, but probably a
+    keeper, who was examining into his condition. After
+    submitting to this scrutiny a few minutes, he gave a
+    mighty yawn, which startled the spectators, but which
+    delighted the Absolute Fool; for never before had he
+    beheld such a depth of potentiality. He knelt in silent
+    delight at this exhibition of the beauty of strength.
+</p>
+<p>
+    Old Sardon soon became tired of all this, however,
+    and he turned and walked back to his den. "When
+    their man is ready," he thought to himself, "I will
+    come out and fight him."
+</p>
+<p>
+    One tremendous shout now arose from the multitude.
+    "The youth has conquered!" they cried. "He has
+    actually frightened the lion back into his den!"
+    Rushing into the arena, they raised the Absolute Fool
+    upon their shoulders and carried him in triumph to the
+    open square in front of the palace, that he might be
+    rewarded for his bravery. Here the King, followed
+    by his court, quickly appeared; for he was as much
+    delighted as any one at the victory of the young
+    man.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Noble youth," he exclaimed, "you are the
+    bravest of the brave. You are the only man I know
+    who is worthy of our royal daughter, and you shall
+    marry her forthwith. Long since, I vowed that only
+    with the bravest should she wed."
+</p>
+<p>
+    At this moment, the Queen and the Princess, returning
+    from their ride, heard with joy the result of the
+    combat; and riding up to the victor, the Queen
+    declared that she would gladly join with her royal husband
+    in giving their daughter to so brave a man.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Absolute Fool stood for a moment in silent
+    thought; then, addressing the King, he said:
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Was Your Majesty's father a king?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "He was," was the answer.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Was his father of royal blood?"
+</p>
+<p>
+    "No; he was not," replied the King. "My grandfather
+    was a man of the people; but his pre-eminent
+    virtue, his great ability as a statesman, and the dignity
+    and nobility of his character made him the unanimous
+    choice of the nation as its sovereign."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I am sorry to hear that," said the Absolute Fool;
+    "for it makes it necessary for me to decline the kind
+    offer of your daughter in marriage. If I marry a
+    princess at all, she must be one who can trace back her
+    lineage through a long line of royal ancestors." And
+    as he spoke, his breast swelled with manly pride.
+</p>
+<p>
+    For a moment, the King was dumb with rage. Then
+    loudly he shouted: "Ho, guards! Annihilate him!
+    Avenge this insult!"
+</p>
+<p>
+    At these words, the sword of every by-stander
+    leaped from its scabbard; but, before any one could
+    take a step forward, the Princess seized the Absolute
+    Fool by his long and flowing locks, and put spurs to
+    her horse. The young man yelled with pain, and
+    shouted to her to let go; but she held firmly to his
+    hair, and as he was extraordinarily active and fleet of
+    foot, he kept pace with the galloping horse. A great
+    crowd of people started in pursuit, but as none of them
+    were mounted, they were soon left behind.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Let go my hair! Let go my hair!" shouted the
+    Absolute Fool, as he bounded along. "You don't
+    know how it hurts. Let go! Let go!"
+</p>
+<p>
+    But the Princess never relinquished her hold until
+    they were out of the King's domain.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "A little more," cried the indignant youth, when
+    she let him go, "and you would have pulled out a
+    handful of my hair."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "A little less," said the Princess, contemptuously,
+    "and you would have been cut to pieces; for you
+    have not sense enough to take care of yourself. I am
+    sorry I listened to you, and left the inn to which the
+    Gryphoness took me. It would have been far better to
+    wait there for her as she told me to do."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Yes," said the Absolute Fool; "it would have
+    been much better."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Now," said the Princess, "we will go back there,
+    and see if she has returned."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "If we can find it," said the other, "which I very
+    much doubt."
+</p>
+<p>
+    There were several roads at this point and, of
+    course, they took the wrong one. As they went on,
+    the Absolute Fool complained bitterly that he had left
+    his horse behind him, and was obliged to walk. Sometimes
+    he stopped, and said he would go back after it;
+    but this the Princess sternly forbade.
+</p>
+<hr>
+<p>
+    When the Gryphoness reached the city of the Prince,
+    it was night; but she was not sorry for this. She did
+    not like to show herself much in the daytime, because
+    so many people were frightened by her. After a good
+    deal of trouble, she discovered that the Prince had
+    certainly left the city, although his guardians did not
+    seem to be aware of it. They were so busy with a
+    new palace, in part of which they were living, that
+    they could not be expected to keep a constant eye upon
+    him. In the morning, she met an old man who knew
+    her, and was not afraid of her, and who told her that
+    the day before, when he was up the river, he had seen
+    the Prince on his white horse, riding on the bank of
+    the stream; and that near him, in the water, was something
+    which now looked like a woman, and again like
+    a puff of mist. The Gryphoness reflected.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "If this Prince has gone off in that way," she said
+    to herself, "I believe that he is the very one whom
+    the Princess is looking for, and that he has set out in
+    search of her; and that creature in the water must be
+    our Water Sprite, whom our master has probably sent
+    out to discover where the Prince is going. If he had
+    told me about this, it would have saved much trouble.
+    From the direction in which they were going, I feel
+    sure that the Water Sprite was taking the Prince to
+    the Land of the Lovely Lakes. She never fails to go
+    there, if she can possibly get an excuse. I will follow
+    them. I suppose the Princess will be tired, waiting at
+    the inn; but I must know where the Prince is, and if
+    he is really her Prince, before I go back to her."
+</p>
+<p>
+    When the Gryphoness reached the Land of the
+    Lovely Lakes, she wandered all that day and the next
+    night; but she saw nothing of those for whom she was
+    looking.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Princess and the Absolute Fool journeyed on
+    until near the close of the afternoon, when the sky
+    began to be overcast, and it looked like rain. They
+    were then not far from a large piece of water; and at
+    a little distance, they saw a ship moored near the
+    shore.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I shall seek shelter on board that ship," said the
+    Princess.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "It is going to storm," remarked the Absolute
+    Fool. "I should prefer to be on dry land."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "As the land is not likely to be very dry when it
+    rains," said the Princess, "I prefer a shelter, even if
+    it is upon wet water."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Women will always have their own way," muttered
+    the Absolute Fool.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The ship belonged to a crew of Amazon sailors, who
+    gave the Princess a hearty welcome.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "You may go on board if you choose," said the
+    Absolute Fool to the Princess, "but I shall not risk
+    my life in a ship manned by women."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "It is well that you are of that opinion," said
+    the Captain of the Amazons, who had heard this remark;
+    "for you would not be allowed to come on board
+    if you wished to. But we will give you a tent to protect
+    you and the horse in case it should rain, and will
+    send you something to eat."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "While the Princess was taking tea with the Amazon
+    Captain, she told her about the Prince, and how she
+    was trying to find him.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Good!" cried the Captain. "I will join in the
+    search, and take you in my ship. Some of my crew told
+    me that yesterday they saw a young man, who looked
+    like a prince, riding along the shore of a lake which
+    adjoins the one we are on. In the morning we will
+    sail after him. We shall keep near the shore, and
+    your servant can mount your horse and ride along the
+    edge of the lake. From what I know of the speed of
+    this vessel, I think he can easily keep up with us."
+</p>
+<p>
+    Early in the morning, the Amazon Captain called her
+    crew together. "Hurrah, my brave girls!" she said.
+    "We have an object. I never sail without an object,
+    and it lights me to get one. The purpose of our
+    present cruise is to find the Prince of whom this Princess
+    is in search; and we must spare no pains to bring
+    him to her, dead or alive."
+</p>
+<p>
+    Luckily for her peace of mind, the Princess did not
+    hear this speech. The day was a fine one, and before
+    long the sun became very hot. The ship was sailing
+    quite near the land, when the Absolute Fool rode down
+    to the water's edge, and called out that he had something
+    very important to communicate to the Princess.
+    As he was not allowed to come on board, she was
+    obliged to go on shore, to which she was rowed in a
+    small boat.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I have been thinking," said the Absolute Fool,
+    "that it is perfectly ridiculous, and very uncomfortable,
+    to continue this search any longer. I would go
+    back, but my master would not suffer me to return
+    without knowing where you are going. I have, therefore,
+    a plan to propose. Give up your useless search
+    for this Prince, who is probably not nearly so handsome
+    and intellectual as I am, and marry me. We will then
+    return, and I will assume the reins of government in
+    your domain."
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Follow the vessel," said the Princess, "as you
+    have been doing; for I wish some one to take care of
+    my horse." And without another word, she returned
+    to the ship.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "I should like to sail as far as possible from shore
+    during the rest of the trip," said she to the Captain.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Put the helm bias!" shouted the Amazon Captain
+    to the steers-woman; "and keep him well out
+    from land."
+</p>
+<p>
+    When they had sailed through a small stream into
+    the lake adjoining, the out-look, who was swinging in
+    a hammock hung between the tops of the two masts,
+    sang out, "Prince ahead!" Instantly all was activity
+    on board the vessel. Story books were tucked under
+    coils of rope, hem-stitching and embroidery were laid
+    aside, and every woman was at her post.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "The Princess is taking a nap," said the Captain,
+    "and we will not awaken her. It will be so nice to
+    surprise her by bringing the Prince to her. We will
+    run our vessel ashore, and then steal quietly upon him.
+    But do not let him get away. Cut him down, if he
+    resists!"
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Prince, who was plainly visible only a short distance
+    ahead, was so pleasantly employed that he had
+    not noticed the approach of the ship. He was sitting
+    upon a low, moss-covered rock, close to the water's
+    edge; and with a small hand-net, which he had found
+    on the shore, he was scooping the most beautiful fishes
+    from the lake, holding them up in the sunlight to
+    admire their brilliant colors and graceful forms, and then
+    returning them uninjured to the water. The Water
+    Sprite was swimming near him, and calling to the fish
+    to come up and be caught; for the gentle Prince
+    would not hurt them. It was very delightful and rare
+    sport, and it is not surprising that it entirely engrossed
+    the attention of the Prince. The Amazons silently
+    landed, and softly stole along the shore, a little back
+    from the water. Then, at their Captain's command,
+    they rushed upon the Prince.
+</p>
+<p>
+    It was just about this time that the Gryphoness, who
+    had been searching for the Prince, caught her first
+    sight of him. Perceiving that he was about to be
+    attacked, she rushed to his aid. The Amazon sailors
+    reached him before she did, and seizing upon him they
+    began to pull him away. The Prince resisted stoutly;
+    but seeing that his assailants were women, he would
+    not draw his sword. The Amazon Captain and mate,
+    who were armed with broad knives, now raised their
+    weapons, and called upon the Prince to surrender or
+    die. But at this moment, the Gryphoness reached the
+    spot, and catching the Captain and mate, each by an
+    arm, she dragged them back from the Prince. The
+    other Amazons, however, continued the combat; and
+    the Prince defended himself by pushing them into the
+    shallow water, where the Water Sprite nearly stifled
+    them by throwing over them showers of spray. And
+    now came riding up the Absolute Fool. Seeing a
+    youth engaged in combat with the Amazon sailors, his
+    blood boiled with indignation.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "A man fighting women!" he exclaimed. "What
+    a coward! My arm shall ever assist the weaker
+    sex."
+</p>
+<p>
+    Jumping from the horse, he drew his sword, and
+    rushed upon the Prince. The Gryphoness saw the
+    danger of the latter, and she would have gone to his
+    assistance, but she was afraid to loosen her hold of
+    the Amazon Captain and mate.
+</p>
+<p>
+    Spreading her wings she flew to the top of a tree
+    where she deposited the two warlike women upon a
+    lofty branch, from which she knew it would take them
+    a long time to get down to the ground. When she
+    descended she found that the Absolute Fool had
+    reached the Prince. The latter, being a brave fellow,
+    although of so gentle a disposition, had been glad to
+    find a man among his assailants, and had drawn his
+    sword to defend himself. The two had just begun to
+    fight when the Gryphoness seized the Absolute Fool by
+    the waist and hurled him backward into some bushes.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "You must not fight him!" she cried to the Prince.
+    "He is beneath your rank! And as you will not draw
+    your sword against these Amazons you must fly from
+    them. If you run fast they cannot overtake you."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Prince followed her advice, and sheathing his
+    sword he rapidly ran along the bank, followed by some
+    of the Amazons who had succeeded in getting the
+    water out of their eyes and mouths.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Run from women!" contemptuously remarked the
+    Absolute Fool. "If you had not interfered with me,"
+    he said to the Gryphoness, "I should soon have put
+    an end to such a coward."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Prince had nearly reached the place opposite to
+    which the ship was moored, when the Princess, who
+    had been awakened by the noise of the combat, appeared
+    upon the deck of the vessel. The moment she
+    saw the Prince, she felt convinced that he was certainly
+    the one for whom she was looking. Fearing that the
+    pursuing Amazons might kill him, she sprang from the
+    vessel to his assistance; but her foot caught in a rope,
+    and instead of reaching the shore, she fell into the
+    water, which was here quite deep, and immediately
+    sank out of sight. The Prince, who had noticed her
+    just as she sprang, and who felt equally convinced that
+    she was the one for whom he was searching, stopped
+    his flight and rushed to the edge of the bank. Just as
+    the Princess rose to the surface, he reached out his
+    hand to her, and she took it.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Philopena!" cried the Prince.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "You have won," said the Princess, gayly shaking
+    the water from her curls, as he drew her ashore.
+</p>
+<p>
+    At the request of the Princess, the pursuing Amazons
+    forbore to assail the Prince, and when the Captain
+    and the Mate had descended from the tree, every
+    thing was explained.
+</p>
+<p>
+    Within an hour, the Prince and Princess, after taking
+    kind leave of the Gryphoness, and Water Sprite,
+    and of the Amazon sailors, who cheered them loudly,
+    rode away to the city of the Princess; while the three
+    servants of the Inquisitive Dwarf returned to their
+    master to report what had happened.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Absolute Fool was in a very bad humor; for he
+    was obliged to go back on foot, having left his horse in
+    the kingdom where he had so narrowly escaped being
+    killed; and, besides this, he had had his hair pulled;
+    and had not been treated with proper respect by either
+    the Princess or the Gryphoness. He felt himself
+    deeply injured. When he reached home, he determined
+    that he would not remain in a position where his
+    great abilities were so little appreciated. "I will do
+    something," he said, "which shall prove to the world
+    that I deserve to stand among the truly great. I will
+    reform my fellow beings, and I will begin by reforming
+    the Inquisitive Dwarf." Thereupon he went to his
+    master, and said:
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Sir, it is foolish and absurd for you to be meddling
+    thus with the affairs of your neighbors. Give up
+    your inquisitive habits, and learn some useful business.
+    While you are doing this, I will consent to manage
+    your affairs."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Inquisitive Dwarf turned to him, and said: "I
+    have a great desire to know the exact appearance of
+    the North Pole. Go and discover it for me."
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Absolute Fool departed on this mission, and
+    has not yet returned.
+</p>
+<p>
+    When the Princess, with her Prince, reached her
+    city, her uncles were very much amazed; for they had
+    not known she had gone away. "If you are going to
+    get married," they said, "we are very glad; for then
+    you will not need our care, and we shall be free from
+    the great responsibility which is bearing us down."
+</p>
+<p>
+    In a short time the wedding took place, and then
+    the question arose in which city should the young
+    couple dwell. The Princess decided it.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "In the winter," she said to the Prince, "We will
+    live in your city, where all is life and activity; and
+    where the houses are so well built with all the latest improvements.
+    In the summer, we will come to my city,
+    where everything is old, and shady, and serene."
+    This they did, and were very happy.
+</p>
+<p>
+    The Gryphoness would have been glad to go and
+    live with the Princess, for she had taken a great fancy
+    to her; but she did not think it worth her while to ask
+    permission to do this.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "My impulses, I know, are good," she said; "but
+    my appearance is against me."
+</p>
+<p>
+    As for the Water Sprite, she was in a truly disconsolate
+    mood, because she had left so soon the Land of
+    the Lovely Lakes, where she had been so happy. The
+    more she thought about it, the more she grieved;
+    and one morning, unable to bear her sorrow longer,
+    she sprang into the great jet of the fountain. High
+    into the bright air the fountain threw her, scattering
+    her into a thousand drops of glittering water; but not
+    one drop fell back into the basin. The great, warm
+    sun drew them up; and, in a little white cloud, they
+    floated away across the bright blue sky.
+</p>
+
+
+<div style="height: 6em;"></div>
+
+<hr>
+
+<h2>
+    <b>SCRIBNER'S BOOKS FOR THE YOUNG.</b>
+</h2>
+<hr>
+<center>
+    <i>THIRTIETH THOUSAND.</i>
+</center>
+<p>
+    <i>"In 'Little Lord Fauntleroy' we gain another charming child to
+    add to our gallery of juvenile heroes and heroines; one who teaches a
+    great lesson with such truth and sweetness that we part with him with
+    real regret when the episode is over."</i>&mdash;Louisa M. Alcott.
+</p>
+<hr>
+<h2>LITTLE LORD FAUNTLEROY.</h2>
+<center>By FRANCES HODGSON BURNETT.<br><br>
+    Beautifully illustrated by R. B. Birch. <i>One volume, square 8vo, handsomely
+    bound.</i> $2.00.
+</center>
+<p>
+    In "Little Lord Fauntleroy" the author of "That Lass o' Lowrie's" has given
+    us a book which is absolutely certain to become one of the few real classics in the
+    literature for children. She has presented a picture of child-life such as we have
+    never had before; she has not only taken a subject quite new but she has written
+    with such exquisite delicacy and sweetness the story of the little American boy's
+    career that even were the situations old the story would be a notable one.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "Little Lord Fauntleroy," though a book for children, is certainly not a
+    "juvenile" in the common use of the word, paradoxical as the statement may seem.
+    The hero is a manly little fellow, a child, but with all the elements of a man.
+    Mrs. Burnett has made Lord Fauntleroy a thoughtful boy, and she is right in
+    believing that the stories children like best are those best worth thinking about
+    when they are being read.
+</p>
+<center>
+    <i>A NEW EDITION OF AN OLD FAVORITE.</i>
+</center>
+<hr>
+<h2>HANS BRINKER; or, The Silver Skates.</h2>
+<h3><i>A STORY OF LIFE IN HOLLAND</i></h3>
+<center>By MARY MAPES DODGE.<br><br>
+    <i>One volume, 12mo, with sixty beautiful illustrations.</i> $1.50.
+</center>
+<p>
+    The cordial appreciation with which "Hans Brinker" was first received has increased
+    from year to year, until the original plates have become badly worn from
+    constant use. The publishers have therefore reissued at half its original price
+    their beautiful Holiday Edition, of which on its first appearance the Nation said:
+    "We some time ago expressed our opinion that Mrs. Mary Mapes Dodge's delightful
+    children's story called 'Hans Brinker; or, The Silver Skates' deserved
+    an entirely new dress, with illustrations made in Holland instead of America. The
+    publishers have just issued an edition in accordance with this suggestion. The
+    pictures are admirable, and the whole volume, in appearance and contents, need
+    not fear comparison with any juvenile publication of the year or of many years."
+</p>
+<h2>AMONG THE LAW-MAKERS.</h2>
+<center>By EDMUND ALTON.<br><br>
+    With many illustrations of the Government Buildings, Halls of Congress, etc., etc.
+<br><i>One volume, square 8vo.</i> $2.50.
+</center>
+<p>
+    The author of this book was for four years connected with the legislative branch
+    of our Government, in the capacity of a Senatorial page. His record of the
+    memorable scenes and events which came under his observation is enlivened by
+    anecdotes of public men, humorous and exciting episodes at the national capitol,
+    and a great variety of stirring incidents.
+</p>
+<h2>THE MAKING OF NEW ENGLAND.</h2>
+<center>
+    1580&mdash;1643.<br><br>
+    By SAMUEL ADAMS DRAKE.<br><br>
+    With many illustrations and maps. <i>One volume, 12mo.</i> $1.50.
+</center>
+<p>
+    In his preface the author says: "To enhance the interest of this story, emphasis
+    has been given to everything that went to make up the home-life of the pioneer
+    settlers, or that relates to their various avocations." In all history no better
+    examples of manliness, energy, and conscientiousness could be found, to be read
+    about and studied by a child whose character is just forming. The story is told in
+    such a vivid way that it is as interesting and absorbing as a romance.
+</p>
+<h2>THE OLD-FASHIONED FAIRY BOOK.</h2>
+<center>By MRS. BURTON HARRISON.<br><br>
+    With many quaint illustrations by MISS ROSINA EMMET.<br>
+    <i>One volume, square 16mo.</i> $1.00.
+</center>
+<p>
+    "The little ones, who so willingly go back with us to 'Jack the Giant-Killer,'
+    'Blue-beard,' and the kindred stories of our childhood, will gladly welcome Mrs.
+    Burton Harrison's 'Old-Fashioned Fairy Tales,' where the giant, the dwarf, the
+    fairy, the wicked princess, the ogre, the metamorphosed prince, and all the heroes
+    of that line come into play and action. ...The graceful pencil of Miss Rosina
+    Emmet has given a pictorial interest to the book, and the many pictures scattered
+    through its pages accord well with the good old-fashioned character of the tales."&mdash;
+    Frank R. Stockton.
+</p>
+<h2>BRIC-A-BRAC STORIES.</h2>
+<center>By MRS. BURTON HARRISON.<br><br>
+    Illustrated and Cover designed by WALTER CRANE. <i>One volume, 12mo.</i> $2.00.
+</center>
+<p>
+    "Upon the whole it is to be wished that every boy and girl in America, or anywhere
+    else, might become intimately acquainted with the contents of this book.
+    There is more virtue in one of these stories than in the entire library of modern
+    juvenile literature."&mdash;Julian Hawthorne.
+</p>
+<h4>THE</h4>
+<h2>MERRY ADVENTURES OF ROBIN HOOD,</h2>
+<h3>Of Great Renown in Nottinghamshire.</h3>
+<center>Written and Illustrated by HOWARD PYLE.<br>
+    <i>One volume, quarto,</i> $3.00.<br><br>
+    <i>"The Prince of Story-Tellers."</i>&mdash;London Times.
+</center>
+<hr>
+<h2>THE WORKS OF JULES VERNE.</h2>
+<center>Uniform illustrated edition. <i>Nine vols., 8vo, extra cloth, with over 750 full-page
+    illustrations.</i> Price, per set, in a box, $17.50. Sold also in separate volumes.
+</center>
+<p>
+    The most impossible stories of this imaginative writer are told in such a realistic
+    manner and with so much scientific knowledge ingeniously wrought into them that
+    they possess a fascination that is all their own. Their great and continued popularity,
+    among both old and young, has led to the publication of this new edition in
+    which all the numerous illustrations of the French edition are retained, and the
+    volumes are issued in a uniform and attractive binding.
+</p>
+<pre>
+Michael Strogoff; or, The Courier of the Czar..................$2 00
+A Floating City and the Blockade Runners....................... 2 00
+Hector Servadac................................................ 2 00
+Dick Sanps..................................................... 2 00
+A Journey to the Center of the Earth........................... 2 00
+From the Earth to the Moon Direct in Ninety-seven Hours, Twenty
+   Minutes; and a Journey Around It............................ 2 00
+The Steam House. Part I.&mdash;The Demon of Cawnpore.
+   Part II.&mdash;Tigers and Traitors. Complete in one volume....... 2 00
+The Giant Raft. Part I.&mdash;Eight Hundred Leagues on the Amazon.
+   Part II.&mdash;The Cryptogram. Complete in one volume............ 2 00
+The Mysterious Island. Part I.&mdash;Dropped from the Clouds.
+   Part II.&mdash;Abandoned. Part III.&mdash;The Secret of the Island.
+   The complete work in one volume, with 150 illustrations..... 2 50
+</pre>
+<center><i>A NEW AND REVISED EDITION OF THE</i></center>
+<h2>ILLUSTRATED LIBRARY OF WONDERS.</h2>
+<hr>
+<h3>THE WONDERS OF MAN AND NATURE.</h3>
+<p>
+    Intelligence of Animals&mdash;Mountain Adventures&mdash;Bodily Strength and Skill&mdash;Wonderful
+    Escapes&mdash;Thunder and Lightning&mdash;Adventures on the Great Hunting
+    Grounds&mdash;Wonders of the Human Body&mdash;The Sublime in Nature.
+</p>
+<h3>THE WONDERS OF SCIENCE.</h3>
+<p>
+    Wonders of Heat&mdash;Wonders of the Heavens&mdash;Wonders of Optics&mdash;The Sun&mdash;Wonders
+    of Acoustics&mdash;Wonders of Water&mdash;Wonders of the Moon&mdash;Meteors,
+    Aerolites, Storms, and Atmospheric Phenomena.
+</p>
+<h3>THE WONDERS OF ART AND ARCHAEOLOGY.</h3>
+<p>
+    Egypt 3,300 Years Ago&mdash;Wonders of Sculpture&mdash;Wonders of Glass Making&mdash;Wonders
+    of European Art&mdash;Wonders of Pompeii&mdash;Wonders of Architecture&mdash;The
+    Wonders of Italian Art&mdash;The Wonders of Engraving.
+</p>
+<center><i>Twenty-four volumes, containing aver a thousand valuable illustrations.</i><br><br>
+    Each set, 8 volumes, in a box, $8.00.
+</center>
+<p>
+    Each volume, 12mo, complete in itself. Sold separately at $1.00 per volume.
+</p>
+<h2>CHILDREN'S STORIES OF AMERICAN PROGRESS.</h2>
+<center>By HENRIETTA CHRISTIAN WRIGHT.<br><br>
+    With twelve full-page illustrations from drawings by J. STEEPLE DAVIS. <i>One
+    volume, 12mo.</i> $1.50.
+</center>
+<p>
+    "The 'Stories of American Progress' contain a series of pictures of events of
+    the first half of the present century, and the scope of the book comprehends all the
+    prominent steps by which we have reached our present position both as regards
+    extent of country and industrial prosperity. They include an account of the first
+    Steamboat, the Railroad, and the Telegraph, as well as of the Purchase of Florida,
+    the War of 1812, and the Discovery of Gold. It will be found that no event of
+    importance has been omitted, and any child fond of story-telling will gain from
+    this book an amount of knowledge which may far exceed that which is usually
+    acquired from the rigid instruction of the school-room."
+</p>
+<h2>CHILDREN'S STORIES IN AMERICAN HISTORY.</h2>
+<center>By HENRIETTA CHRISTIAN WRIGHT.<br><br>
+    With twelve full-page illustrations from drawings by J. STEEPLE DAVIS. <i>One
+    volume, 12mo.</i> $1.50.
+</center>
+<hr>
+<h2>THE IVORY KING.</h2>
+<h3>A Popular History of the Elephant and Its Allies.</h3>
+<center>By CHARLES F. HOLDER.<br><br>
+    <i>Square 8vo, with twenty-four full-page illustrations.</i> $2.00.
+</center>
+<p>
+    The wonderfully interesting array of facts which Mr. Holder brought together
+    in his "Marvels of Animal Life" was the fruit very largely of his personal observations.
+    It forms one of the most stimulating and delightful contributions to the class
+    of Natural History books for the young that has ever been made, and was a fitting
+    forerunner to "The Ivory King," which is devoted entirely to the Elephant, and
+    has even a more vivid fascination than the first named volume. The summary of
+    its contents includes the Natural History of the Elephant, its habits and ways and
+    its intelligence, the Mammoth Three and Four Tusked Elephants, Hunting and
+    Capturing Wild Elephants, the Elephant in Captivity, Rogue Elephants, the White
+    Elephant, Trained Elephants, Show Elephants, Ivory, War Elephants, etc., etc. The
+    numerous illustrations are especially excellent, being drawn from a great variety
+    of sources.
+</p>
+<p>
+    It would be hard to name a book which would be a more welcome and valued
+    addition to the library of the average boy or girl just beginning to cultivate a love
+    of reading and an interest in the world around them.
+</p>
+<h2>MARVELS OF ANIMAL LIFE.</h2>
+<center>By CHARLES F. HOLDER.<br><br>
+    <i>Square 8vo, with thirty-two full-page illustrations.</i> $2.00.
+</center>
+<hr>
+<h2>SCRIBNER'S STANDARD JUVENILE BOOKS.</h2>
+<hr>
+<h2>THE BOY'S</h2>
+<h1><i>Library of Legend and Chivalry.</i></h1>
+<h3>EDITED BY SIDNEY LANIER,</h3>
+<center><i>And richly illustrated by FREDERICKS, BENSELL, and KAPPES.</i></center>
+<hr>
+<h3>THE BOY'S KING ARTHUR.</h3>
+<h3>THE BOY'S FROISSART.</h3>
+<h3>KNIGHTLY LEGENDS OF WALES.</h3>
+<h3>THE BOY'S PERCY.</h3>
+<center>
+    <i>Four volumes, cloth, uniform binding. Price per set $7.00.</i><br><br>
+    <i>Sold separately. Price per volume $2.00.</i>
+</center>
+<hr>
+<p>
+    "Amid all the strange and fanciful scenery of these stories, character and the ideals
+    of character remain at the simplest and the purest. The romantic history transpires
+    in the healthy atmosphere of the open air, on the green earth beneath the open sky....
+    The figures of Right, Truth, Justice, Honor, Purity, Courage, Reverence for
+    Law, are always in the background; and the grand passion inspired by the book is
+    for strength to do well and nobly in the world."&mdash;<i>The Independent</i>.
+</p>
+<hr>
+<h2>THE BOY'S</h2>
+<h1><i>Library of Pluck and Action.</i></h1>
+<h3>A JOLLY FELLOWSHIP,</h3>
+<center>By FRANK R. STOCKTON.</center>
+<h3>HANS BRINKER;<br>
+OR, THE SILVER SKATES.</h3>
+<center>
+    A STORY OF LIFE IN HOLLAND.<br><br>
+    By MRS. MARY MAPES DODGE.
+</center>
+<h3>THE BOY EMIGRANTS,</h3>
+<center>By Noah Brooks.</center>
+<h3>PHAETON ROGERS,</h3>
+<center>By Rossiter Johnson.<br><br>
+    Four volumes, 12mo, in a box, illustrated, $5.00.<br>
+    Sold separately, price per volume $1.50.
+</center>
+<p>
+    In the "<i>Boy's Library of Pluck and Action</i>," the design was to bring together
+    the representative and most popular books of four of the best known writers for young
+    people. The names of Mary Mapes Dodge, Frank R. Stockton, Noah Brooks, and
+    Rossiter Johnson are familiar ones in every household, and a set of books, to which
+    each has contributed one, forms a present that will delight the heart of every boy who
+    likes manly, spirited, and amusing tales. The volumes are beautifully illustrated and
+    uniformly bound in a most attractive form.
+</p>
+<hr>
+<h1><i>Scribner's List of Juvenile Books.</i></h1>
+<hr>
+<center><i>The great legend of the Nibelungen told to boys and girls.</i></center>
+<hr>
+<h2>THE STORY OF SIEGFRIED.</h2>
+<center>By JAMES BALDWIN.<br><br>
+    With a series of superb illustrations by Howard Pyle.
+    <i>One volume, square 12mo.</i> $2.00.
+</center>
+<p>
+    Mr. Baldwin has at last given "The Story of Siegfried" in the way in which it most
+    appeals to the boy-reader,&mdash;simply and strongly told, with all its fire and action, yet
+    without losing any of that strange charm of the myth, and that heroic pathos, which
+    every previous attempt at a version, even for adult readers, has failed to catch.
+</p>
+<h2>THE STORY OF ROLAND.</h2>
+<center>By JAMES BALDWIN.<br><br>
+    With a series of illustrations by R.B. Birch. <i>One volume, square 12mo.</i> $2.00.
+</center>
+<p>
+    This volume is intended as a companion to "The Story of Siegfried." As Siegfried
+    was an adaptation of Northern myths and romances to the wants and the understanding
+    of young readers, so is this story a similar adaptation of the middle-age romances
+    relating to Charlemagne and his paladins. As Siegfried was the greatest of the heroes
+    of the North, so, too, was Roland the most famous among the knights of the Middle
+    Ages.
+</p>
+<p>
+    "We congratulate the boys of the land upon the appearance of this book. We commend
+    it to parents who are selecting literature for their children, assured, as we are,
+    that it will convince them that books may be found which will engage the attention,
+    and stimulate the imagination, of the young, without dissipating the mind, or blunting
+    the moral sensibilities."&mdash;Philadelphia Messenger.
+</p>
+<br>
+<h3>THE FIRST REALLY PRACTICAL BOY'S BOOK.</h3>
+<hr>
+<h2>THE AMERICAN BOY'S HANDY BOOK;</h2>
+<h3>Or, WHAT TO DO AND HOW TO DO IT.</h3>
+<center>By DANIEL C. BEARD.<br><br>
+    With three hundred illustrations by the author. <i>One volume, 8vo.</i> $2.00.
+</center>
+<p><i>
+    Mr. Beard's book is the first to tell the active, inventive, and practical American
+    boy the things he really wants to know, the thousand things he wants to do,
+    and the ten thousand ways in which he can do them, with the helps and ingenious
+    contrivances which every boy can either procure or make.</i>
+</p>
+<p>
+    The author divides the book among the sports of the four seasons; and he has made
+    an almost exhaustive collection of the cleverest modern devices, besides himself inventing
+    an immense number of capital and practical ideas.
+</p>
+<hr>
+<h3>FRANK R. STOCKTON'S POPULAR STORIES.</h3>
+<hr>
+<h2>THE STORY OF VITEAU.</h2>
+<center>
+    With sixteen full-page illustrations by R.B. Birch.<br>
+    <i>One volume, 12mo, extra cloth.</i> $1.50.
+</center>
+<p>
+    In "The Story of Viteau," Mr. Stockton has opened a new vein, and one that he
+    has shown all his well-known skill and ability in working. While describing the life
+    and surroundings of Raymond, Louis, and Agnes at Viteau at the Castle of De Barran,
+    or in the woods among the <i>Cotereaux</i>, he gives a picture of France in the age
+    of chivalry, and tells, at the same time, a romantic and absorbing story of adventure
+    and knightly daring. Mr. Birch's spirited illustrations add much to the attraction of
+    the book.
+</p>
+<h2>A JOLLY FELLOWSHIP.</h2>
+<center><i>Illustrated. One volume, 12mo, extra cloth.</i> $1.50.</center>
+<p>
+    "'A Jolly Fellowship,' by Mr. Frank Stockton, is a worthy successor to his 'Rudder
+    Grange.' Although written for lads, it is full of delicious nonsense that will be
+    enjoyed by men and women.... The less serious parts are described with a mock
+    gravity that is the perfection of harmless burlesque, while all the nonsense has a vein
+    of good sense running through it, so that really useful information is conveyed to the
+    young and untravelled reader's mind."&mdash;<i>Philadelphia Evening Bulletin</i>.
+</p>
+<h2>THE FLOATING PRINCE, AND OTHER FAIRY TALES.</h2>
+<center>With illustrations by Bensell and others. <i>One volume, quarto, boards.</i> $1.50.</center>
+<p>
+    "Stockton has the knack, perhaps genius would be a better word, of writing in the
+    easiest of colloquial English, without descending to the plane of the vulgar or commonplace.
+    The very perfection of his work hinders the reader from perceiving at once
+    how good of its kind it is.... With the added charm of a most delicate humor,&mdash;a
+    real humor, mellow, tender, and informed by a singularly quaint and racy fancy,&mdash;his
+    stories become irresistibly attractive."&mdash;<i>Philadelphia Times</i>.
+</p>
+<br>
+<h3>NEW EDITIONS OF OLD FAVORITES.</h3>
+<hr>
+<h2>ROUNDABOUT RAMBLES IN LANDS OF FACT AND FICTION.</h2>
+<p>
+    One volume, quarto, boards, with very attractive lithographed cover, three hundred and
+    seventy pages, two hundred illustrations. A new edition. Price reduced from
+    $3.00 to $1.50.
+</p>
+<h2>TALES OUT OF SCHOOL.</h2>
+<p>
+    One volume, quarto, boards, with handsome lithographed cover, three hundred and
+    fifty pages, nearly two hundred illustrations. A new edition. Price reduced from
+    $3.00 to $1.50.
+</p>
+<hr>
+<h3>Charles Scribner's Sons, Publishers, 743 and 745 Broadway, New York.</h3>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+<pre>
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Bee-Man of Orn and Other Fanciful
+Tales, by Frank R. Stockton
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BEE-MAN OF ORN AND OTHERS ***
+
+***** This file should be named 12067-h.htm or 12067-h.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/1/2/0/6/12067/
+
+Produced by Suzanne Shell, Kevin Field and PG Distributed Proofreaders
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook's
+eBook number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII,
+compressed (zipped), HTML and others.
+
+Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks replace the old file and take over
+the old filename and etext number.  The replaced older file is renamed.
+VERSIONS based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving
+new filenames and etext numbers.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+EBooks posted prior to November 2003, with eBook numbers BELOW #10000,
+are filed in directories based on their release date.  If you want to
+download any of these eBooks directly, rather than using the regular
+search system you may utilize the following addresses and just
+download by the etext year.
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org/etext06
+
+    (Or /etext 05, 04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99,
+     98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90)
+
+EBooks posted since November 2003, with etext numbers OVER #10000, are
+filed in a different way.  The year of a release date is no longer part
+of the directory path.  The path is based on the etext number (which is
+identical to the filename).  The path to the file is made up of single
+digits corresponding to all but the last digit in the filename.  For
+example an eBook of filename 10234 would be found at:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org/1/0/2/3/10234
+
+or filename 24689 would be found at:
+     https://www.gutenberg.org/2/4/6/8/24689
+
+An alternative method of locating eBooks:
+     https://www.gutenberg.org/GUTINDEX.ALL
+
+
+
+
+</pre>
+
+</body>
+</html>
+
diff --git a/old/12067-h/images/map.png b/old/12067-h/images/map.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f5332e1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/12067-h/images/map.png
diff --git a/old/12067.txt b/old/12067.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6a3dd4c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/12067.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,6552 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Bee-Man of Orn and Other Fanciful Tales
+by Frank R. Stockton
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: The Bee-Man of Orn and Other Fanciful Tales
+
+Author: Frank R. Stockton
+
+Release Date: April 17, 2004 [EBook #12067]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BEE-MAN OF ORN AND OTHERS ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Suzanne Shell, Kevin Field and PG Distributed Proofreaders
+
+
+
+
+[Transcriber's note:  Italics and bold markup only occurred in the
+ads for other books at the beginning and end, and using the standard
+_italics_ or *bold* just made it hard to read, so this markup has
+been removed in the plain-text version.]
+
+
+
+
+FRANK R. STOCKTON'S WRITINGS.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+New Uniform Edition.
+
+THE BEE-MAN OF ORN, and Other Fanciful Tales.
+THE LADY OR THE TIGER? and Other Stories.
+THE CHRISTMAS WRECK, and Other Stories.
+THE LATE MRS NULL.
+RUDDER GRANGE.
+
+The set, five vols., $6.25; each, $1.25.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+RUDDER GRANGE. New Illustrated Edition. With over 100 Illustrations
+by A.B. Frost. Square 12mo, $2.00.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+THE LADY OR THE TIGER? and Other Stories. 12mo, paper, 50 cents.
+
+THE CHRISTMAS WRECK, and Other Stories. 12mo, paper, 50 cents.
+
+RUDDER GRANGE. 12mo, paper, 60 cents.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A JOLLY FRIENDSHIP. Illustrated, 12mo, $1.50.
+
+THE STORY OF VITEAU. Illustrated, 12mo, $1.50.
+
+THE TING-A-LING TALES. Illustrated, 12mo, $1.00.
+
+THE FLOATING PRINCE, and Other Fairy Tales. Illustrated, 4to, cloth,
+$2.50; boards, $1.50.
+
+ROUNDABOUT RAMBLERS IN LANDS OF FACT AND FANCY. Illustrated. 4to,
+boards, $1.50.
+
+TALES OUT OF SCHOOL. Illustrated. 4to, boards, $1.50.
+
+
+
+
+
+THE BEE-MAN OF ORN
+
+AND
+
+OTHER FANCIFUL TALES
+
+BY
+
+FRANK R. STOCKTON
+
+
+
+
+
+New York
+1887
+Charles Scribner's Sons.
+
+Rand Avery Company,
+Electrotypers and Printers,
+Boston.
+
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+     I. THE BEE-MAN OF ORN
+
+    II. THE GRIFFIN AND THE MINOR CANON
+
+   III. OLD PIPES AND THE DRYAD
+
+    IV. THE QUEEN'S MUSEUM
+
+     V. CHRISTMAS BEFORE LAST; OR, THE FRUIT OF THE FRAGILE PALM
+
+    VI. PRINCE HASSAK'S MARCH
+
+   VII. THE BATTLE OF THE THIRD COUSINS
+
+  VIII. THE BANISHED KING
+
+    IX. THE PHILOPENA
+
+
+
+
+
+THE BEE-MAN OF ORN.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+In the ancient country of Orn, there lived an old man who was called
+the Bee-man, because his whole time was spent in the company of bees.
+He lived in a small hut, which was nothing more than an immense
+bee-hive, for these little creatures had built their honeycombs in
+every corner of the one room it contained, on the shelves, under the
+little table, all about the rough bench on which the old man sat, and
+even about the head-board and along the sides of his low bed. All day
+the air of the room was thick with buzzing insects, but this did not
+interfere in any way with the old Bee-man, who walked in among them,
+ate his meals, and went to sleep, without the slightest fear of being
+stung. He had lived with the bees so long, they had become so
+accustomed to him, and his skin was so tough and hard, that the bees
+no more thought of stinging him than they would of stinging a tree or
+a stone. A swarm of bees had made their hive in a pocket of his old
+leathern doublet; and when he put on this coat to take one of his
+long walks in the forest in search of wild bees' nests, he was very
+glad to have this hive with him, for, if he did not find any wild
+honey, he would put his hand in his pocket and take out a piece of a
+comb for a luncheon. The bees in his pocket worked very
+industriously, and he was always certain of having something to eat
+with him wherever he went. He lived principally upon honey; and when
+he needed bread or meat, he carried some fine combs to a village not
+far away and bartered them for other food. He was ugly, untidy,
+shrivelled, and brown. He was poor, and the bees seemed to be his
+only friends. But, for all that, he was happy and contented; he had
+all the honey he wanted, and his bees, whom he considered the best
+company in the world, were as friendly and sociable as they could be,
+and seemed to increase in number every day.
+
+One day, there stopped at the hut of the Bee-man a Junior Sorcerer.
+This young person, who was a student of magic, necromancy, and the
+kindred arts, was much interested in the Bee-man, whom he had
+frequently noticed in his wanderings, and he considered him an
+admirable subject for study. He had got a great deal of useful
+practice by endeavoring to find out, by the various rules and laws of
+sorcery, exactly why the old Bee-man did not happen to be something
+that he was not, and why he was what he happened to be. He had
+studied a long time at this matter, and had found out something.
+
+"Do you know," he said, when the Bee-man came out of his hut, "that
+you have been transformed?"
+
+"What do you mean by that?" said the other, much surprised.
+
+"You have surely heard of animals and human beings who have been
+magically transformed into different kinds of creatures?"
+
+"Yes, I have heard of these things," said the Bee-man; "but what have
+I been transformed from?"
+
+"That is more than I know," said the Junior Sorcerer. "But one thing
+is certain--you ought to be changed back. If you will find out what
+you have been transformed from, I will see that you are made all
+right again. Nothing would please me better than to attend to such a
+case."
+
+And, having a great many things to study and investigate, the Junior
+Sorcerer went his way.
+
+This information greatly disturbed the mind of the Bee-man. If he had
+been changed from something else, he ought to be that other thing,
+whatever it was. He ran after the young man, and overtook him.
+
+"If you know, kind sir," he said, "that I have been transformed, you
+surely are able to tell me what it is that I was."
+
+"No," said the Junior Sorcerer, "my studies have not proceeded far
+enough for that. When I become a senior I can tell you all about it.
+But, in the meantime, it will be well for you to try to discover for
+yourself your original form, and when you have done that, I will get
+some of the learned masters of my art to restore you to it. It will
+be easy enough to do that, but you could not expect them to take the
+time and trouble to find out what it was."
+
+And, with these words, he hurried away, and was soon lost to view.
+
+Greatly disquieted, the Bee-man retraced his steps, and went to his
+hut. Never before had he heard any thing which had so troubled him.
+
+"I wonder what I was transformed from?" he thought, seating himself
+on his rough bench. "Could it have been a giant, or a powerful
+prince, or some gorgeous being whom the magicians or the fairies
+wished to punish? It may be that I was a dog or a horse, or perhaps a
+fiery dragon or a horrid snake. I hope it was not one of these. But,
+whatever it was, every one has certainly a right to his original
+form, and I am resolved to find out mine. I will start early
+to-morrow morning, and I am sorry now that I have not more pockets to
+my old doublet, so that I might carry more bees and more honey for my
+journey."
+
+He spent the rest of the day in making a hive of twigs and straw,
+and, having transferred to this a number of honey-combs and a colony
+of bees which had just swarmed, he rose before sunrise the next day,
+and having put on his leathern doublet, and having bound his new hive
+to his back, he set forth on his quest; the bees who were to
+accompany him buzzing around him like a cloud.
+
+As the Bee-man passed through the little village the people greatly
+wondered at his queer appearance, with the hive upon his back. "The
+Bee-man is going on a long expedition this time," they said; but no
+one imagined the strange business on which he was bent. About noon he
+sat down under a tree, near a beautiful meadow covered with blossoms,
+and ate a little honey. Then he untied his hive and stretched himself
+out on the grass to rest. As he gazed upon his bees hovering about
+him, some going out to the blossoms in the sunshine, and some
+returning laden with the sweet pollen, he said to himself, "They know
+just what they have to do, and they do it; but alas for me! I know
+not what I may have to do. And yet, whatever it may be, I am
+determined to do it. In some way or other I will find out what was my
+original form, and then I will have myself changed back to it."
+
+And now the thought came to him that perhaps his original form might
+have been something very disagreeable, or even horrid.
+
+"But it does not matter," he said sturdily. "Whatever I was that
+shall I be again. It is not right for any one to retain a form which
+does not properly belong to him. I have no doubt I shall discover my
+original form in the same way that I find the trees in which the wild
+bees hive. When I first catch sight of a bee-tree I am drawn towards
+it, I know not how. Something says to me: 'That is what you are
+looking for.' In the same way I believe that I shall find my original
+form. When I see it, I shall be drawn towards it. Something will say
+to me: 'That is it.'"
+
+When the Bee-man was rested he started off again, and in about an
+hour he entered a fair domain. Around him were beautiful lawns, grand
+trees, and lovely gardens; while at a little distance stood the
+stately palace of the Lord of the Domain. Richly dressed people were
+walking about or sitting in the shade of the trees and arbors;
+splendidly caparisoned horses were waiting for their riders; and
+everywhere were seen signs of opulence and gayety.
+
+"I think," said the Bee-man to himself, "that I should like to stop
+here for a time. If it should happen that I was originally like any
+of these happy creatures it would please me much."
+
+He untied his hive, and hid it behind some bushes, and taking off his
+old doublet, laid that beside it. It would not do to have his bees
+flying about him if he wished to go among the inhabitants of this
+fair domain.
+
+For two days the Bee-man wandered about the palace and its grounds,
+avoiding notice as much as possible, but looking at every thing. He
+saw handsome men and lovely ladies; the finest horses, dogs, and
+cattle that were ever known; beautiful birds in cages, and fishes in
+crystal globes, and it seemed to him that the best of all living
+things were here collected.
+
+At the close of the second day, the Bee-man said to himself: "There
+is one being here toward whom I feel very much drawn, and that is the
+Lord of the Domain. I cannot feel certain that I was once like him,
+but it would be a very fine thing if it were so; and it seems
+impossible for me to be drawn toward any other being in the domain
+when I look upon him, so handsome, rich, and powerful. But I must
+observe him more closely, and feel more sure of the matter, before
+applying to the sorcerers to change me back into a lord of a fair
+domain."
+
+The next morning, the Bee-man saw the Lord of the Domain walking in
+his gardens. He slipped along the shady paths, and followed him so as
+to observe him closely, and find out if he were really drawn toward
+this noble and handsome being. The Lord of the Domain walked on for
+some time, not noticing that the Bee-man was behind him. But suddenly
+turning, he saw the little old man.
+
+"What are you doing here, you vile beggar?" he cried; and he gave him
+a kick that sent him into some bushes that grew by the side of the
+path.
+
+The Bee-man scrambled to his feet, and ran as fast as he could to the
+place where he had hidden his hive and his old doublet.
+
+"If I am certain of any thing," he thought, "it is that I was never a
+person who would kick a poor old man. I will leave this place. I was
+transformed from nothing that I see here."
+
+He now travelled for a day or two longer, and then he came to a great
+black mountain, near the bottom of which was an opening like the
+mouth of a cave.
+
+This mountain he had heard was filled with caverns and under-ground
+passages, which were the abodes of dragons, evil spirits, horrid
+creatures of all kinds.
+
+"Ah me!" said the Bee-man with a sigh, "I suppose I ought to visit
+this place. If I am going to do this thing properly, I should look on
+all sides of the subject, and I may have been one of those horrid
+creatures myself."
+
+Thereupon he went to the mountain, and as he approached the opening
+of the passage which led into its inmost recesses he saw, sitting
+upon the ground, and leaning his back against a tree, a Languid
+Youth.
+
+"Good-day," said this individual when he saw the Bee-man. "Are you
+going inside?"
+
+"Yes," said the Bee-man, "that is what I intend to do."
+
+"Then," said the Languid Youth, slowly rising to his feet, "I think I
+will go with you. I was told that if I went in there I should get my
+energies toned up, and they need it very much; but I did not feel
+equal to entering by myself, and I thought I would wait until some
+one came along. I am very glad to see you, and we will go in
+together."
+
+So the two went into the cave, and they had proceeded but a short
+distance when they met a very little creature, whom it was easy to
+recognize as a Very Imp. He was about two feet high, and resembled in
+color a freshly polished pair of boots. He was extremely lively and
+active, and came bounding toward them.
+
+"What did you two people come here for?" he asked.
+
+"I came," said the Languid Youth, "to have my energies toned up."
+
+"You have come to the right place," said the Very Imp. "We will tone
+you up. And what does that old Bee-man want?"
+
+"He has been transformed from something, and wants to find out what
+it is. He thinks he may have been one of the things in here."
+
+"I should not wonder if that were so," said the Very Imp, rolling his
+head on one side, and eying the Bee-man with a critical gaze.
+
+"All right," said the Very Imp; "he can go around, and pick out his
+previous existence. We have here all sorts of vile creepers,
+crawlers, hissers, and snorters. I suppose he thinks any thing will
+be better than a Bee-man."
+
+"It is not because I want to be better than I am," said the Bee-man,
+"that I started out on this search. I have simply an honest desire to
+become what I originally was."
+
+"Oh! that is it, is it?" said the other. "There is an idiotic
+moon-calf here with a clam head, which must be just like what you
+used to be."
+
+"Nonsense," said the Bee-man. "You have not the least idea what an
+honest purpose is. I shall go about, and see for myself."
+
+"Go ahead," said the Very Imp, "and I will attend to this fellow who
+wants to be toned up." So saying he joined the Languid Youth.
+
+"Look here," said that individual, regarding him with interest, "do
+you black and shine yourself every morning?"
+
+"No," said the other, "it is water-proof varnish. You want to be
+invigorated, don't you? Well, I will tell you a splendid way to
+begin. You see that Bee-man has put down his hive and his coat with
+the bees in it. Just wait till he gets out of sight, and then catch a
+lot of those bees, and squeeze them flat. If you spread them on a
+sticky rag, and make a plaster, and put it on the small of your back,
+it will invigorate you like every thing, especially if some of the
+bees are not quite dead."
+
+"Yes," said the Languid Youth, looking at him with his mild eyes,
+"but if I had energy enough to catch a bee I would be satisfied.
+Suppose you catch a lot for me."
+
+"The subject is changed," said the Very Imp. "We are now about to
+visit the spacious chamber of the King of the Snap-dragons."
+
+"That is a flower," said the Languid Youth.
+
+"You will find him a gay old blossom," said the other. "When he has
+chased you round his room, and has blown sparks at you, and has
+snorted and howled, and cracked his tail, and snapped his jaws like a
+pair of anvils, your energies will be toned up higher than ever
+before in your life."
+
+"No doubt of it," said the Languid Youth; "but I think I will begin
+with something a little milder."
+
+"Well then," said other, "there is a flat-tailed Demon of the Gorge
+in here. He is generally asleep, and, if you say so, you can slip
+into the farthest corner of his cave, and I'll solder his tail to the
+opposite wall. Then he will rage and roar, but he can't get at you,
+for he doesn't reach all the way across his cave; I have measured
+him. It will tone you up wonderfully to sit there and watch him."
+
+"Very likely," said the Languid Youth; "but I would rather stay
+outside and let you go up in the corner. The performance in that way
+will be more interesting to me."
+
+"You are dreadfully hard to please," said the Very Imp. "I have
+offered them to you loose, and I have offered them fastened to a
+wall, and now the best thing I can do is to give you a chance at one
+of them that can't move at all. It is the Ghastly Griffin and is
+enchanted. He can't stir so much as the tip of his whiskers for a
+thousand years. You can go to his cave and examine him just as if he
+were stuffed, and then you can sit on his back and think how it would
+be if you should live to be a thousand years old, and he should wake
+up while you are sitting there. It would be easy to imagine a lot of
+horrible things he would do to you when you look at his open mouth
+with its awful fangs, his dreadful claws, and his horrible wings all
+covered with spikes."
+
+"I think that might suit me," said the Languid Youth. "I would much
+rather imagine the exercises of these monsters than to see them
+really going on."
+
+"Come on, then," said the Very Imp, and he led the way to the cave of
+the Ghastly Griffin.
+
+The Bee-man went by himself through a great part of the mountain, and
+looked into many of its gloomy caves and recesses, recoiling in
+horror from most of the dreadful monsters who met his eyes. While he
+was wandering about, an awful roar was heard resounding through the
+passages of the mountain, and soon there came flapping along an
+enormous dragon, with body black as night, and wings and tail of
+fiery red. In his great fore-claws he bore a little baby.
+
+"Horrible!" exclaimed the Bee-man. "He is taking that little creature
+to his cave to devour it."
+
+He saw the dragon enter a cave not far away, and following looked in.
+The dragon was crouched upon the ground with the little baby lying
+before him. It did not seem to be hurt, but was frightened and
+crying. The monster was looking upon it with delight, as if he
+intended to make a dainty meal of it as soon as his appetite should
+be a little stronger.
+
+"It is too bad!" thought the Bee-man. "Somebody ought to do
+something." And turning around, he ran away as fast as he could.
+
+He ran through various passages until he came to the spot where he
+had left his bee-hive. Picking it up, he hurried back, carrying the
+hive in his two hands before him. When he reached the cave of the
+dragon, he looked in and saw the monster still crouched over the
+weeping child. Without a moment's hesitation, the Bee-man rushed into
+the cave and threw his hive straight into the face of the dragon. The
+bees, enraged by the shock, rushed out in an angry crowd and
+immediately fell upon the head, mouth, eyes, and nose of the dragon.
+The great monster, astounded by this sudden attack, and driven almost
+wild by the numberless stings of the bees, sprang back to the
+farthest portion of his cave, still followed by his relentless
+enemies, at whom he flapped wildly with his great wings and struck
+with his paws. While the dragon was thus engaged with the bees, the
+Bee-man rushed forward, and, seizing the child, he hurried away. He
+did not stop to pick up his doublet, but kept on until he reached the
+entrance of the caves. There he saw the Very Imp hopping along on one
+leg, and rubbing his back and shoulders with his hands, and stopped
+to inquire what was the matter, and what had become of the Languid
+Youth.
+
+"He is no kind of a fellow," said the Very Imp. "He disappointed me
+dreadfully. I took him up to the Ghastly Griffin, and told him the
+thing was enchanted, and that he might sit on its back and think
+about what it could do if it was awake; and when he came near it the
+wretched creature opened its eyes, and raised its head, and then you
+ought to have seen how mad that simpleton was. He made a dash at me
+and seized me by the ears; he kicked and beat me till I can scarcely
+move."
+
+"His energies must have been toned up a good deal," said the Bee-man.
+
+"Toned up! I should say so!" cried the other. "I raised a howl, and a
+Scissor-jawed Clipper came out of his hole, and got after him; but
+that lazy fool ran so fast that he could not be caught."
+
+The Bee-man now ran on and soon overtook the Languid Youth.
+
+"You need not be in a hurry now," said the latter, "for the rules of
+this institution don't allow the creatures inside to come out of this
+opening, or to hang around it. If they did, they would frighten away
+visitors. They go in and out of holes in the upper part of the
+mountain."
+
+The two proceeded on their way.
+
+"What are you going to do with that baby?" said the Languid Youth.
+
+"I shall carry it along with me," said the Bee-man, "as I go on with
+my search, and perhaps I may find its mother. If I do not, I shall
+give it to somebody in that little village yonder. Any thing would be
+better than leaving it to be devoured by that horrid dragon."
+
+"Let me carry it. I feel quite strong enough now to carry a baby."
+
+"Thank you," said the Bee-man, "but I can take it myself. I like to
+carry something, and I have now neither my hive nor my doublet."
+
+"It is very well that you had to leave them behind," said the Youth,
+"for the bees would have stung the baby."
+
+"My bees never sting babies," said the other.
+
+"They probably never had a chance," remarked his companion.
+
+They soon entered the village, and after walking a short distance the
+youth exclaimed: "Do you see that woman over there sitting at the
+door of her house? She has beautiful hair and she is tearing it all
+to pieces. She should not be allowed to do that."
+
+"No," said the Bee-man. "Her friends should tie her hands."
+
+"Perhaps she is the mother of this child," said the Youth, "and if
+you give it to her she will no longer think of tearing her hair."
+
+"But," said the Bee-man, "you don't really think this is her child?"
+
+"Suppose you go over and see," said the other.
+
+The Bee-man hesitated a moment, and then he walked toward the woman.
+Hearing him coming, she raised her head, and when she saw the child
+she rushed towards it, snatched it into her arms, and screaming with
+joy she covered it with kisses. Then with happy tears she begged to
+know the story of the rescue of her child, whom she never expected to
+see again; and she loaded the Bee-man with thanks and blessings. The
+friends and neighbors gathered around and there was great rejoicing.
+The mother urged the Bee-man and the Youth to stay with her, and rest
+and refresh themselves, which they were glad to do as they were tired
+and hungry.
+
+They remained at the cottage all night, and in the afternoon of the
+next day the Bee-man said to the Youth: "It may seem an odd thing to
+you, but never in all my life have I felt myself drawn towards any
+living being as I am drawn towards this baby. Therefore I believe
+that I have been transformed from a baby."
+
+"Good!" cried the Youth. "It is my opinion that you have hit the
+truth. And now would you like to be changed back to your original
+form?"
+
+"Indeed I would!" said the Bee-man, "I have the strongest yearning to
+be what I originally was."
+
+The Youth, who had now lost every trace of languid feeling, took a
+great interest in the matter, and early the next morning started off
+to inform the Junior Sorcerer that the Bee-man had discovered what he
+had been transformed from, and desired to be changed back to it.
+
+The Junior Sorcerer and his learned Masters were filled with
+enthusiasm when they heard this report, and they at once set out for
+the mother's cottage. And there by magic arts the Bee-man was changed
+back into a baby. The mother was so grateful for what the Bee-man had
+done for her that she agreed to take charge of this baby, and to
+bring it up as her own.
+
+"It will be a grand thing for him," said the Junior Sorcerer, "and I
+am glad that I studied his case. He will now have a fresh start in
+life, and will have a chance to become something better than a
+miserable old man living in a wretched hut with no friends or
+companions but buzzing bees."
+
+The Junior Sorcerer and his Masters then returned to their homes,
+happy in the success of their great performance; and the Youth went
+back to his home anxious to begin a life of activity and energy.
+
+Years and years afterward, when the Junior Sorcerer had become a
+Senior and was very old indeed, he passed through the country of Orn,
+and noticed a small hut about which swarms of bees were flying. He
+approached it, and looking in at the door he saw an old man in a
+leathern doublet, sitting at a table, eating honey. By his magic art
+he knew this was the baby which had been transformed from the
+Bee-man.
+
+"Upon my word!" exclaimed the Sorcerer, "He has grown into the same
+thing again!"
+
+
+
+
+
+ THE GRIFFIN AND THE MINOR CANON.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Over the great door of an old, old church which stood in a quiet town
+of a far-away land there was carved in stone the figure of a large
+griffin. The old-time sculptor had done his work with great care, but
+the image he had made was not a pleasant one to look at. It had a
+large head, with enormous open mouth and savage teeth; from its back
+arose great wings, armed with sharp hooks and prongs; it had stout
+legs in front, with projecting claws; but there were no legs
+behind,--the body running out into a long and powerful tail, finished
+off at the end with a barbed point. This tail was coiled up under
+him, the end sticking up just back of his wings.
+
+The sculptor, or the people who had ordered this stone figure, had
+evidently been very much pleased with it, for little copies of it,
+also in stone, had been placed here and there along the sides of the
+church, not very far from the ground, so that people could easily
+look at them, and ponder on their curious forms. There were a great
+many other sculptures on the outside of this church,--saints,
+martyrs, grotesque heads of men, beasts, and birds, as well as those
+of other creatures which cannot be named, because nobody knows
+exactly what they were; but none were so curious and interesting as
+the great griffin over the door, and the little griffins on the sides
+of the church.
+
+A long, long distance from the town, in the midst of dreadful wilds
+scarcely known to man, there dwelt the Griffin whose image had been
+put up over the church-door. In some way or other, the old-time
+sculptor had seen him, and afterward, to the best of his memory, had
+copied his figure in stone. The Griffin had never known this, until,
+hundreds of years afterward, he heard from a bird, from a wild
+animal, or in some manner which it is not now easy to find out, that
+there was a likeness of him on the old church in the distant town.
+Now, this Griffin had no idea how he looked. He had never seen a
+mirror, and the streams where he lived were so turbulent and violent
+that a quiet piece of water, which would reflect the image of any
+thing looking into it, could not be found. Being, as far as could be
+ascertained, the very last of his race, he had never seen another
+griffin. Therefore it was, that, when he heard of this stone image of
+himself, he became very anxious to know what he looked like, and at
+last he determined to go to the old church, and see for himself what
+manner of being he was. So he started off from the dreadful wilds,
+and flew on and on until he came to the countries inhabited by men,
+where his appearance in the air created great consternation; but he
+alighted nowhere, keeping up a steady flight until he reached the
+suburbs of the town which had his image on its church. Here, late in
+the afternoon, he alighted in a green meadow by the side of a brook,
+and stretched himself on the grass to rest. His great wings were
+tired, for he had not made such a long flight in a century, or more.
+
+The news of his coming spread quickly over the town, and the people,
+frightened nearly out of their wits by the arrival of so
+extraordinary a visitor, fled into their houses, and shut themselves
+up. The Griffin called loudly for some one to come to him, but the
+more he called, the more afraid the people were to show themselves.
+At length he saw two laborers hurrying to their homes through the
+fields, and in a terrible voice he commanded them to stop. Not daring
+to disobey, the men stood, trembling.
+
+"What is the matter with you all?" cried the Griffin. "Is there not a
+man in your town who is brave enough to speak to me?"
+
+"I think," said one of the laborers, his voice shaking so that his
+words could hardly be understood, "that--perhaps--the Minor
+Canon--would come."
+
+"Go, call him, then!" said the Griffin; "I want to see him."
+
+The Minor Canon, who filled a subordinate position in the old church,
+had just finished the afternoon services, and was coming out of a
+side door, with three aged women who had formed the week-day
+congregation. He was a young man of a kind disposition, and very
+anxious to do good to the people of the town. Apart from his duties
+in the church, where he conducted services every week-day, he visited
+the sick and the poor, counselled and assisted persons who were in
+trouble, and taught a school composed entirely of the bad children in
+the town with whom nobody else would have any thing to do. Whenever
+the people wanted something difficult done for them, they always went
+to the Minor Canon. Thus it was that the laborer thought of the young
+priest when he found that some one must come and speak to the
+Griffin.
+
+The Minor Canon had not heard of the strange event, which was known
+to the whole town except himself and the three old women, and when he
+was informed of it, and was told that the Griffin had asked to see
+him, he was greatly amazed, and frightened.
+
+"Me!" he exclaimed. "He has never heard of me! What should he want
+with me?"
+
+"Oh! you must go instantly!" cried the two men. "He is very angry now
+because he has been kept waiting so long; and nobody knows what may
+happen if you don't hurry to him."
+
+The poor Minor Canon would rather have had his hand cut off than go
+out to meet an angry griffin; but he felt that it was his duty to go,
+for it would be a woful thing if injury should come to the people of
+the town because he was not brave enough to obey the summons of the
+Griffin. So, pale and frightened, he started off.
+
+"Well," said the Griffin, as soon as the young man came near, "I am
+glad to see that there is some one who has the courage to come to
+me."
+
+The Minor Canon did not feel very courageous, but he bowed his head.
+
+"Is this the town," said the Griffin, "where there is a church with a
+likeness of myself over one of the doors?"
+
+The Minor Canon looked at the frightful creature before him and saw
+that it was, without doubt, exactly like the stone image on the
+church. "Yes," he said, "you are right."
+
+"Well, then," said the Griffin, "will you take me to it? I wish very
+much to see it."
+
+The Minor Canon instantly thought that if the Griffin entered the
+town without the people knowing what he came for, some of them would
+probably be frightened to death, and so he sought to gain time to
+prepare their minds.
+
+"It is growing dark, now," he said, very much afraid, as he spoke,
+that his words might enrage the Griffin, "and objects on the front of
+the church can not be seen clearly. It will be better to wait until
+morning, if you wish to get a good view of the stone image of
+yourself."
+
+"That will suit me very well," said the Griffin. "I see you are a man
+of good sense. I am tired, and I will take a nap here on this soft
+grass, while I cool my tail in the little stream that runs near me.
+The end of my tail gets red-hot when I am angry or excited, and it is
+quite warm now. So you may go, but be sure and come early to-morrow
+morning, and show me the way to the church."
+
+The Minor Canon was glad enough to take his leave, and hurried into
+the town. In front of the church he found a great many people
+assembled to hear his report of his interview with the Griffin. When
+they found that he had not come to spread ruin and devastation, but
+simply to see his stony likeness on the church, they showed neither
+relief nor gratification, but began to upbraid the Minor Canon for
+consenting to conduct the creature into the town.
+
+"What could I do?" cried the young man. "If I should not bring him he
+would come himself and, perhaps, end by setting fire to the town with
+his red-hot tail."
+
+Still the people were not satisfied, and a great many plans were
+proposed to prevent the Griffin from coming into the town. Some
+elderly persons urged that the young men should go out and kill him;
+but the young men scoffed at such a ridiculous idea. Then some one
+said that it would be a good thing to destroy the stone image so that
+the Griffin would have no excuse for entering the town; and this
+proposal was received with such favor that many of the people ran for
+hammers, chisels, and crowbars, with which to tear down and break up
+the stone griffin. But the Minor Canon resisted this plan with all
+the strength of his mind and body. He assured the people that this
+action would enrage the Griffin beyond measure, for it would be
+impossible to conceal from him that his image had been destroyed
+during the night. But the people were so determined to break up the
+stone griffin that the Minor Canon saw that there was nothing for him
+to do but to stay there and protect it. All night he walked up and
+down in front of the church-door, keeping away the men who brought
+ladders, by which they might mount to the great stone griffin, and
+knock it to pieces with their hammers and crowbars. After many hours
+the people were obliged to give up their attempts, and went home to
+sleep; but the Minor Canon remained at his post till early morning,
+and then he hurried away to the field where he had left the Griffin.
+
+The monster had just awakened, and rising to his fore-legs and
+shaking himself, he said that he was ready to go into the town. The
+Minor Canon, therefore, walked back, the Griffin flying slowly
+through the air, at a short distance above the head of his guide. Not
+a person was to be seen in the streets, and they proceeded directly
+to the front of the church, where the Minor Canon pointed out the
+stone griffin.
+
+The real Griffin settled down in the little square before the church
+and gazed earnestly at his sculptured likeness. For a long time he
+looked at it. First he put his head on one side, and then he put it
+on the other; then he shut his right eye and gazed with his left,
+after which he shut his left eye and gazed with his right. Then he
+moved a little to one side and looked at the image, then he moved the
+other way. After a while he said to the Minor Canon, who had been
+standing by all this time:
+
+"It is, it must be, an excellent likeness! That breadth between the
+eyes, that expansive forehead, those massive jaws! I feel that it
+must resemble me. If there is any fault to find with it, it is that
+the neck seems a little stiff. But that is nothing. It is an
+admirable likeness,--admirable!"
+
+The Griffin sat looking at his image all the morning and all the
+afternoon. The Minor Canon had been afraid to go away and leave him,
+and had hoped all through the day that he would soon be satisfied
+with his inspection and fly away home. But by evening the poor young
+man was utterly exhausted, and felt that he must eat and sleep. He
+frankly admitted this fact to the Griffin, and asked him if he would
+not like something to eat. He said this because he felt obliged in
+politeness to do so, but as soon as he had spoken the words, he was
+seized with dread lest the monster should demand half a dozen babies,
+or some tempting repast of that kind.
+
+"Oh, no," said the Griffin, "I never eat between the equinoxes. At
+the vernal and at the autumnal equinox I take a good meal, and that
+lasts me for half a year. I am extremely regular in my habits, and do
+not think it healthful to eat at odd times. But if you need food, go
+and get it, and I will return to the soft grass where I slept last
+night and take another nap."
+
+The next day the Griffin came again to the little square before the
+church, and remained there until evening, steadfastly regarding the
+stone griffin over the door. The Minor Canon came once or twice to
+look at him, and the Griffin seemed very glad to see him; but the
+young clergyman could not stay as he had done before, for he had many
+duties to perform. Nobody went to the church, but the people came to
+the Minor Canon's house, and anxiously asked him how long the Griffin
+was going to stay.
+
+"I do not know," he answered, "but I think he will soon be satisfied
+with regarding his stone likeness, and then he will go away."
+
+But the Griffin did not go away. Morning after morning he came to the
+church, but after a time he did not stay there all day. He seemed to
+have taken a great fancy to the Minor Canon, and followed him about
+as he pursued his various avocations. He would wait for him at the
+side door of the church, for the Minor Canon held services every day,
+morning and evening, though nobody came now. "If any one should
+come," he said to himself, "I must be found at my post." When the
+young man came out, the Griffin would accompany him in his visits to
+the sick and the poor, and would often look into the windows of the
+school-house where the Minor Canon was teaching his unruly scholars.
+All the other schools were closed, but the parents of the Minor
+Canon's scholars forced them to go to school, because they were so
+bad they could not endure them all day at home,--griffin or no
+griffin. But it must be said they generally behaved very well when
+that great monster sat up on his tail and looked in at the
+school-room window.
+
+When it was perceived that the Griffin showed no sign of going away,
+all the people who were able to do so left the town. The canons and
+the higher officers of the church had fled away during the first day
+of the Griffin's visit, leaving behind only the Minor Canon and some
+of the men who opened the doors and swept the church. All the
+citizens who could afford it shut up their houses and travelled to
+distant parts, and only the working people and the poor were left
+behind. After some days these ventured to go about and attend to
+their business, for if they did not work they would starve. They were
+getting a little used to seeing the Griffin, and having been told
+that he did not eat between equinoxes, they did not feel so much
+afraid of him as before.
+
+Day by day the Griffin became more and more attached to the Minor
+Canon. He kept near him a great part of the time, and often spent the
+night in front of the little house where the young clergyman lived
+alone. This strange companionship was often burdensome to the Minor
+Canon; but, on the other hand, he could not deny that he derived a
+great deal of benefit and instruction from it. The Griffin had lived
+for hundreds of years, and had seen much; and he told the Minor Canon
+many wonderful things.
+
+"It is like reading an old book," said the young clergyman to
+himself; "but how many books I would have had to read before I would
+have found out what the Griffin has told me about the earth, the air,
+the water, about minerals, and metals, and growing things, and all
+the wonders of the world!"
+
+Thus the summer went on, and drew toward its close. And now the
+people of the town began to be very much troubled again.
+
+"It will not be long," they said, "before the autumnal equinox is
+here, and then that monster will want to eat. He will be dreadfully
+hungry, for he has taken so much exercise since his last meal. He
+will devour our children. Without doubt, he will eat them all. What
+is to be done?"
+
+To this question no one could give an answer, but all agreed that the
+Griffin must not be allowed to remain until the approaching equinox.
+After talking over the matter a great deal, a crowd of the people
+went to the Minor Canon, at a time when the Griffin was not with him.
+
+"It is all your fault," they said, "that that monster is among us.
+You brought him here, and you ought to see that he goes away. It is
+only on your account that he stays here at all, for, although he
+visits his image every day, he is with you the greater part of the
+time. If you were not here, he would not stay. It is your duty to go
+away and then he will follow you, and we shall be free from the
+dreadful danger which hangs over us."
+
+"Go away!" cried the Minor Canon, greatly grieved at being spoken to
+in such a way. "Where shall I go? If I go to some other town, shall I
+not take this trouble there? Have I a right to do that?"
+
+"No," said the people, "you must not go to any other town. There is
+no town far enough away. You must go to the dreadful wilds where the
+Griffin lives; and then he will follow you and stay there."
+
+They did not say whether or not they expected the Minor Canon to stay
+there also, and he did not ask them any thing about it. He bowed his
+head, and went into his house, to think. The more he thought, the
+more clear it became to his mind that it was his duty to go away, and
+thus free the town from the presence of the Griffin.
+
+That evening he packed a leathern bag full of bread and meat, and
+early the next morning he set out on his journey to the dreadful
+wilds. It was a long, weary, and doleful journey, especially after he
+had gone beyond the habitations of men, but the Minor Canon kept on
+bravely, and never faltered. The way was longer than he had expected,
+and his provisions soon grew so scanty that he was obliged to eat but
+a little every day, but he kept up his courage, and pressed on, and,
+after many days of toilsome travel, he reached the dreadful wilds.
+
+When the Griffin found that the Minor Canon had left the town he
+seemed sorry, but showed no disposition to go and look for him. After
+a few days had passed, he became much annoyed, and asked some of the
+people where the Minor Canon had gone. But, although the citizens had
+been so anxious that the young clergyman should go to the dreadful
+wilds, thinking that the Griffin would immediately follow him, they
+were now afraid to mention the Minor Canon's destination, for the
+monster seemed angry already, and, if he should suspect their trick
+he would, doubtless, become very much enraged. So every one said he
+did not know, and the Griffin wandered about disconsolate. One
+morning he looked into the Minor Canon's school-house, which was
+always empty now, and thought that it was a shame that every thing
+should suffer on account of the young man's absence.
+
+"It does not matter so much about the church," he said, "for nobody
+went there; but it is a pity about the school. I think I will teach
+it myself until he returns."
+
+It was the hour for opening the school, and the Griffin went inside
+and pulled the rope which rang the school-bell. Some of the children
+who heard the bell ran in to see what was the matter, supposing it to
+be a joke of one of their companions; but when they saw the Griffin
+they stood astonished, and scared.
+
+"Go tell the other scholars," said the monster, "that school is about
+to open, and that if they are not all here in ten minutes, I shall
+come after them."
+
+In seven minutes every scholar was in place.
+
+Never was seen such an orderly school. Not a boy or girl moved, or
+uttered a whisper. The Griffin climbed into the master's seat, his
+wide wings spread on each side of him, because he could not lean back
+in his chair while they stuck out behind, and his great tail coiled
+around, in front of the desk, the barbed end sticking up, ready to
+tap any boy or girl who might misbehave. The Griffin now addressed
+the scholars, telling them that he intended to teach them while their
+master was away. In speaking he endeavored to imitate, as far as
+possible, the mild and gentle tones of the Minor Canon, but it must
+be admitted that in this he was not very successful. He had paid a
+good deal of attention to the studies of the school, and he
+determined not to attempt to teach them any thing new, but to review
+them in what they had been studying; so he called up the various
+classes, and questioned them upon their previous lessons. The
+children racked their brains to remember what they had learned. They
+were so afraid of the Griffin's displeasure that they recited as they
+had never recited before. One of the boys, far down in his class,
+answered so well that the Griffin was astonished.
+
+"I should think you would be at the head," said he. "I am sure you
+have never been in the habit of reciting so well. Why is this?"
+
+"Because I did not choose to take the trouble," said the boy,
+trembling in his boots. He felt obliged to speak the truth, for all
+the children thought that the great eyes of the Griffin could see
+right through them, and that he would know when they told a
+falsehood.
+
+"You ought to be ashamed of yourself," said the Griffin. "Go down to
+the very tail of the class, and if you are not at the head in two
+days, I shall know the reason why."
+
+The next afternoon this boy was number one.
+
+It was astonishing how much these children now learned of what they
+had been studying. It was as if they had been educated over again.
+The Griffin used no severity toward them, but there was a look about
+him which made them unwilling to go to bed until they were sure they
+knew their lessons for the next day.
+
+The Griffin now thought that he ought to visit the sick and the poor;
+and he began to go about the town for this purpose. The effect upon
+the sick was miraculous. All, except those who were very ill indeed,
+jumped from their beds when they heard he was coming, and declared
+themselves quite well. To those who could not get up, he gave herbs
+and roots, which none of them had ever before thought of as
+medicines, but which the Griffin had seen used in various parts of
+the world; and most of them recovered. But, for all that, they
+afterward said that no matter what happened to them, they hoped that
+they should never again have such a doctor coming to their bed-sides,
+feeling their pulses and looking at their tongues.
+
+As for the poor, they seemed to have utterly disappeared. All those
+who had depended upon charity for their daily bread were now at work
+in some way or other; many of them offering to do odd jobs for their
+neighbors just for the sake of their meals,--a thing which before had
+been seldom heard of in the town. The Griffin could find no one who
+needed his assistance.
+
+The summer had now passed, and the autumnal equinox was rapidly
+approaching. The citizens were in a state of great alarm and anxiety.
+The Griffin showed no signs of going away, but seemed to have settled
+himself permanently among them. In a short time, the day for his
+semi-annual meal would arrive, and then what would happen? The
+monster would certainly be very hungry, and would devour all their
+children.
+
+Now they greatly regretted and lamented that they had sent away the
+Minor Canon; he was the only one on whom they could have depended in
+this trouble, for he could talk freely with the Griffin, and so find
+out what could be done. But it would not do to be inactive. Some step
+must be taken immediately. A meeting of the citizens was called, and
+two old men were appointed to go and talk to the Griffin. They were
+instructed to offer to prepare a splendid dinner for him on equinox
+day,--one which would entirely satisfy his hunger. They would offer
+him the fattest mutton, the most tender beef, fish, and game of
+various sorts, and any thing of the kind that he might fancy. If none
+of these suited, they were to mention that there was an orphan asylum
+in the next town.
+
+"Anything would be better," said the citizens, "than to have our dear
+children devoured."
+
+The old men went to the Griffin, but their propositions were not
+received with favor.
+
+"From what I have seen of the people of this town," said the monster,
+"I do not think I could relish any thing which was prepared by them.
+They appear to be all cowards, and, therefore, mean and selfish. As
+for eating one of them, old or young, I could not think of it for a
+moment. In fact, there was only one creature in the whole place for
+whom I could have had any appetite, and that is the Minor Canon, who
+has gone away. He was brave, and good, and honest, and I think I
+should have relished him."
+
+"Ah!" said one of the old men very politely, "in that case I wish we
+had not sent him to the dreadful wilds!"
+
+"What!" cried the Griffin. "What do you mean? Explain instantly what
+you are talking about!"
+
+The old man, terribly frightened at what he had said, was obliged to
+tell how the Minor Canon had been sent away by the people, in the
+hope that the Griffin might be induced to follow him.
+
+When the monster heard this, he became furiously angry. He dashed
+away from the old men and, spreading his wings, flew backward and
+forward over the town. He was so much excited that his tail became
+red-hot, and glowed like a meteor against the evening sky. When at
+last he settled down in the little field where he usually rested, and
+thrust his tail into the brook, the steam arose like a cloud, and the
+water of the stream ran hot through the town. The citizens were
+greatly frightened, and bitterly blamed the old man for telling about
+the Minor Canon.
+
+"It is plain," they said, "that the Griffin intended at last to go
+and look for him, and we should have been saved. Now who can tell
+what misery you have brought upon us."
+
+The Griffin did not remain long in the little field. As soon as his
+tail was cool he flew to the town-hall and rang the bell. The
+citizens knew that they were expected to come there, and although
+they were afraid to go, they were still more afraid to stay away; and
+they crowded into the hall. The Griffin was on the platform at one
+end, flapping his wings and walking up and down, and the end of his
+tail was still so warm that it slightly scorched the boards as he
+dragged it after him.
+
+When everybody who was able to come was there, the Griffin stood
+still and addressed the meeting.
+
+"I have had a contemptible opinion of you," he said, "ever since I
+discovered what cowards you are, but I had no idea that you were so
+ungrateful, selfish, and cruel, as I now find you to be. Here was
+your Minor Canon, who labored day and night for your good, and
+thought of nothing else but how he might benefit you and make you
+happy; and as soon as you imagine yourselves threatened with a
+danger,--for well I know you are dreadfully afraid of me,--you send
+him off, caring not whether he returns or perishes, hoping thereby to
+save yourselves. Now, I had conceived a great liking for that young
+man, and had intended, in a day or two, to go and look him up. But I
+have changed my mind about him. I shall go and find him, but I shall
+send him back here to live among you, and I intend that he shall
+enjoy the reward of his labor and his sacrifices. Go, some of you, to
+the officers of the church, who so cowardly ran away when I first
+came here, and tell them never to return to this town under penalty
+of death. And if, when your Minor Canon comes back to you, you do not
+bow yourselves before him, put him in the highest place among you,
+and serve and honor him all his life, beware of my terrible
+vengeance! There were only two good things in this town: the Minor
+Canon and the stone image of myself over your church-door. One of
+these you have sent away, and the other I shall carry away myself."
+
+With these words he dismissed the meeting, and it was time, for the
+end of his tail had become so hot that there was danger of its
+setting fire to the building.
+
+The next morning, the Griffin came to the church, and tearing the
+stone image of himself from its fastenings over the great door, he
+grasped it with his powerful fore-legs and flew up into the air.
+Then, after hovering over the town for a moment, he gave his tail an
+angry shake and took up his flight to the dreadful wilds. When he
+reached this desolate region, he set the stone Griffin upon a ledge
+of a rock which rose in front of the dismal cave he called his home.
+There the image occupied a position somewhat similar to that it had
+had over the church-door; and the Griffin, panting with the exertion
+of carrying such an enormous load to so great a distance, lay down
+upon the ground, and regarded it with much satisfaction. When he felt
+somewhat rested he went to look for the Minor Canon. He found the
+young man, weak and half starved, lying under the shadow of a rock.
+After picking him up and carrying him to his cave, the Griffin flew
+away to a distant marsh, where he procured some roots and herbs which
+he well knew were strengthening and beneficial to man, though he had
+never tasted them himself. After eating these the Minor Canon was
+greatly revived, and sat up and listened while the Griffin told him
+what had happened in the town.
+
+"Do you know," said the monster, when he had finished, "that I have
+had, and still have, a great liking for you?"
+
+"I am very glad to hear it," said the Minor Canon, with his usual
+politeness.
+
+"I am not at all sure that you would be," said the Griffin, "if you
+thoroughly understood the state of the case, but we will not consider
+that now. If some things were different, other things would be
+otherwise. I have been so enraged by discovering the manner in which
+you have been treated that I have determined that you shall at last
+enjoy the rewards and honors to which you are entitled. Lie down and
+have a good sleep, and then I will take you back to the town."
+
+As he heard these words, a look of trouble came over the young man's
+face.
+
+"You need not give yourself any anxiety," said the Griffin, "about my
+return to the town. I shall not remain there. Now that I have that
+admirable likeness of myself in front of my cave, where I can sit at
+my leisure, and gaze upon its noble features and magnificent
+proportions, I have no wish to see that abode of cowardly and selfish
+people."
+
+The Minor Canon, relieved from his fears, lay back, and dropped into
+a doze; and when he was sound asleep the Griffin took him up, and
+carried him back to the town. He arrived just before daybreak, and
+putting the young man gently on the grass in the little field where
+he himself used to rest, the monster, without having been seen by any
+of the people, flew back to his home.
+
+When the Minor Canon made his appearance in the morning among the
+citizens, the enthusiasm and cordiality with which he was received
+were truly wonderful. He was taken to a house which had been occupied
+by one of the banished high officers of the place, and every one was
+anxious to do all that could be done for his health and comfort. The
+people crowded into the church when he held services, so that the
+three old women who used to be his week-day congregation could not
+get to the best seats, which they had always been in the habit of
+taking; and the parents of the bad children determined to reform them
+at home, in order that he might be spared the trouble of keeping up
+his former school. The Minor Canon was appointed to the highest
+office of the old church, and before he died, he became a bishop.
+
+During the first years after his return from the dreadful wilds, the
+people of the town looked up to him as a man to whom they were bound
+to do honor and reverence; but they often, also, looked up to the sky
+to see if there were any signs of the Griffin coming back. However,
+in the course of time, they learned to honor and reverence their
+former Minor Canon without the fear of being punished if they did not
+do so.
+
+But they need never have been afraid of the Griffin. The autumnal
+equinox day came round, and the monster ate nothing. If he could not
+have the Minor Canon, he did not care for any thing. So, lying down,
+with his eyes fixed upon the great stone griffin, he gradually
+declined, and died. It was a good thing for some of the people of the
+town that they did not know this.
+
+If you should ever visit the old town, you would still see the little
+griffins on the sides of the church; but the great stone griffin that
+was over the door is gone.
+
+
+
+
+
+ OLD PIPES AND THE DRYAD.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A mountain brook ran through a little village. Over the brook there
+was a narrow bridge, and from the bridge a foot-path led out from the
+village and up the hill-side, to the cottage of Old Pipes and his
+mother. For many, many years, Old Pipes had been employed by the
+villagers to pipe the cattle down from the hills. Every afternoon, an
+hour before sunset, he would sit on a rock in front of his cottage
+and play on his pipes. Then all the flocks and herds that were
+grazing on the mountains would hear him, wherever they might happen
+to be, and would come down to the village--the cows by the easiest
+paths, the sheep by those not quite so easy, and the goats by the
+steep and rocky ways that were hardest of all.
+
+But now, for a year or more, Old Pipes had not piped the cattle home.
+It is true that every afternoon he sat upon the rock and played upon
+his familiar instrument; but the cattle did not hear him. He had
+grown old, and his breath was feeble. The echoes of his cheerful
+notes, which used to come from the rocky hill on the other side of
+the valley, were heard no more; and twenty yards from Old Pipes one
+could scarcely tell what tune he was playing. He had become somewhat
+deaf, and did not know that the sound of his pipes was so thin and
+weak, and that the cattle did not hear him. The cows, the sheep, and
+the goats came down every afternoon as before, but this was because
+two boys and a girl were sent up after them. The villagers did not
+wish the good old man to know that his piping was no longer of any
+use, so they paid him his little salary every month, and said nothing
+about the two boys and the girl.
+
+Old Pipes's mother was, of course, a great deal older then he was,
+and was as deaf as a gate,--posts, latch, hinges, and all,--and she
+never knew that the sound of her son's pipe did not spread over all
+the mountainside, and echo back strong and clear from the opposite
+hills. She was very fond of Old Pipes, and proud of his piping; and
+as he was so much younger than she was, she never thought of him as
+being very old. She cooked for him, and made his bed, and mended his
+clothes; and they lived very comfortably on his little salary.
+
+One afternoon, at the end of the month, when Old Pipes had finished
+his piping, he took his stout staff and went down the hill to the
+village to receive the money for his month's work. The path seemed a
+great deal steeper and more difficult than it used to be; and Old
+Pipes thought that it must have been washed by the rains and greatly
+damaged. He remembered it as a path that was quite easy to traverse
+either up or down. But Old Pipes had been a very active man, and as
+his mother was so much older than he was, he never thought of himself
+as aged and infirm.
+
+When the Chief Villager had paid him, and he had talked a little with
+some of his friends, Old Pipes started to go home. But when he had
+crossed the bridge over the brook, and gone a short distance up the
+hill-side, he became very tired, and sat down upon a stone. He had
+not been sitting there half a minute, when along came two boys and a
+girl.
+
+"Children," said Old Pipes, "I'm very tired tonight, and I don't
+believe I can climb up this steep path to my home. I think I shall
+have to ask you to help me."
+
+"We will do that," said the boys and the girl, quite cheerfully; and
+one boy took him by the right hand, and the other by the left, while
+the girl pushed him in the back. In this way he went up the hill
+quite easily, and soon reached his cottage door. Old Pipes gave each
+of the three children a copper coin, and then they sat down for a few
+minutes' rest before starting back to the village.
+
+"I'm sorry that I tired you so much," said Old Pipes.
+
+"Oh, that would not have tired us," said one of the boys, "if we had
+not been so far to-day after the cows, the sheep, and the goats. They
+rambled high up on the mountain, and we never before had such a time
+in finding them."
+
+"Had to go after the cows, the sheep, and the goats!" exclaimed Old
+Pipes. "What do you mean by that?"
+
+The girl, who stood behind the old man, shook her head, put her hand
+on her mouth, and made all sorts of signs to the boy to stop talking
+on this subject; but he did not notice her, and promptly answered Old
+Pipes.
+
+"Why, you see, good sir," said he, "that as the cattle can't hear
+your pipes now, somebody has to go after them every evening to drive
+them down from the mountain, and the Chief Villager has hired us
+three to do it. Generally it is not very hard work, but to-night the
+cattle had wandered far."
+
+"How long have you been doing this?" asked the old man.
+
+The girl shook her head and clapped her hand on her mouth more
+vigorously than before, but the boy went on.
+
+"I think it is about a year now," he said, "since the people first
+felt sure that the cattle could not hear your pipes; and from that
+time we've been driving them down. But we are rested now, and will go
+home. Good-night, sir."
+
+The three children then went down the hill, the girl scolding the boy
+all the way home. Old Pipes stood silent a few moments, and then he
+went into his cottage.
+
+"Mother," he shouted; "did you hear what those children said?"
+
+"Children!" exclaimed the old woman; "I did not hear them. I did not
+know there were any children here."
+
+Then Old Pipes told his mother, shouting very loudly to make her
+hear, how the two boys and the girl had helped him up the hill, and
+what he had heard about his piping and the cattle.
+
+"They can't hear you?" cried his mother. "Why, what's the matter with
+the cattle?"
+
+"Ah, me!" said Old Pipes; "I don't believe there's any thing the
+matter with the cattle. It must be with me and my pipes that there is
+something the matter. But one thing is certain, if I do not earn the
+wages the Chief Villager pays me, I shall not take them. I shall go
+straight down to the village and give back the money I received
+to-day."
+
+"Nonsense!" cried his mother. "I'm sure you've piped as well as you
+could, and no more can be expected. And what are we to do without the
+money?"
+
+"I don't know," said Old Pipes; "but I'm going down to the village to
+pay it back."
+
+The sun had now set; but the moon was shining very brightly on the
+hill-side, and Old Pipes could see his way very well. He did not take
+the same path by which he had gone before, but followed another,
+which led among the trees upon the hill-side, and, though longer, was
+not so steep.
+
+When he had gone about half-way, the old man sat down to rest,
+leaning his back against a great oak-tree. As he did so, he heard a
+sound like knocking inside the tree, and then a voice distinctly
+said:
+
+"Let me out! let me out!"
+
+Old Pipes instantly forgot that he was tired, and sprang to his feet.
+"This must be a Dryad-tree!" he exclaimed. "If it is, I'll let her
+out."
+
+Old Pipes had never, to his knowledge, seen a Dryad-tree, but he knew
+there were such trees on the hill-sides and the mountains, and that
+Dryads lived in them. He knew, too, that in the summer-time, on those
+days when the moon rose before the sun went down, a Dryad could come
+out of her tree if any one could find the key which locked her in,
+and turn it. Old Pipes closely examined the trunk of the tree, which
+stood in the full moonlight. "If I see that key," he said, "I shall
+surely turn it." Before long he perceived a piece of bark standing
+out from the tree, which appeared to him very much like the handle of
+a key. He took hold of it, and found he could turn it quite around.
+As he did so, a large part of the side of the tree was pushed open,
+and a beautiful Dryad stepped quickly out.
+
+For a moment she stood motionless, gazing on the scene before
+her,--the tranquil valley, the hills, the forest, and the
+mountain-side, all lying in the soft clear light of the moon. "Oh,
+lovely! lovely!" she exclaimed. "How long it is since I have seen any
+thing like this!" And then, turning to Old Pipes, she said: "How good
+of you to let me out! I am so happy and so thankful, that I must kiss
+you, you dear old man!" And she threw her arms around the neck of Old
+Pipes, and kissed him on both cheeks. "You don't know," she then went
+on to say, "how doleful it is to be shut up so long in a tree. I
+don't mind it in the winter, for then I am glad to be sheltered, but
+in summer it is a rueful thing not to be able to see all the beauties
+of the world. And it's ever so long since I've been let out. People
+so seldom come this way; and when they do come at the right time they
+either don't hear me, or they are frightened, and run away. But you,
+you dear old man, you were not frightened, and you looked and looked
+for the key, and you let me out, and now I shall not have to go back
+till winter has come, and the air grows cold. Oh, it is glorious!
+What can I do for you, to show you how grateful I am?"
+
+"I am very glad," said Old Pipes, "that I let you out, since I see
+that it makes you so happy; but I must admit that I tried to find the
+key because I had a great desire to see a Dryad. But if you wish to
+do something for me, you can, if you happen to be going down toward
+the village."
+
+"To the village!" exclaimed the Dryad. "I will go anywhere for you,
+my kind old benefactor."
+
+"Well, then," said Old Pipes, "I wish you would take this little bag
+of money to the Chief Villager and tell him that Old Pipes cannot
+receive pay for the services which he does not perform. It is now
+more than a year that I have not been able to make the cattle hear
+me, when I piped to call them home. I did not know this until
+to-night; but now that I know it, I cannot keep the money, and so I
+send it back." And, handing the little bag to the Dryad, he bade her
+good-night, and turned toward his cottage.
+
+"Good-night," said the Dryad. "And I thank you over, and over, and
+over again, you good old man!"
+
+Old Pipes walked toward his home, very glad to be saved the fatigue
+of going all the way down to the village and back again. "To be
+sure," he said to himself, "this path does not seem at all steep, and
+I can walk along it very easily; but it would have tired me
+dreadfully to come up all the way from the village, especially as I
+could not have expected those children to help me again." When he
+reached home, his mother was surprised to see him returning so soon.
+
+"What!" she exclaimed; "have you already come back? What did the
+Chief Villager say? Did he take the money?"
+
+Old Pipes was just about to tell her that he had sent the money to
+the village by a Dryad, when he suddenly reflected that his mother
+would be sure to disapprove such a proceeding, and so he merely said
+he had sent it by a person whom he had met.
+
+"And how do you know that the person will ever take it to the Chief
+Villager?" cried his mother. "You will lose it, and the villagers
+will never get it. Oh, Pipes! Pipes! when will you be old enough to
+have ordinary common sense?"
+
+Old Pipes considered that as he was already seventy years of age he
+could scarcely expect to grow any wiser, but he made no remark on
+this subject; and, saying that he doubted not that the money would go
+safely to its destination, he sat down to his supper. His mother
+scolded him roundly, but he did not mind it; and after supper he went
+out and sat on a rustic chair in front of the cottage to look at the
+moonlit village, and to wonder whether or not the Chief Villager
+really received the money. While he was doing these two things, he
+went fast asleep.
+
+When Old Pipes left the Dryad, she did not go down to the village
+with the little bag of money. She held it in her hand, and thought
+about what she had heard. "This is a good and honest old man," she
+said; "and it is a shame that he should lose this money. He looked as
+if he needed it, and I don't believe the people in the village will
+take it from one who has served them so long. Often, when in my tree,
+have I heard the sweet notes of his pipes. I am going to take the
+money back to him." She did not start immediately, because there were
+so many beautiful things to look at; but after a while she went up to
+the cottage, and, finding Old Pipes asleep in his chair, she slipped
+the little bag into his coat-pocket, and silently sped away.
+
+The next day, Old Pipes told his mother that he would go up the
+mountain and cut some wood. He had a right to get wood from the
+mountain, but for a long time he had been content to pick up the dead
+branches which lay about his cottage. To-day, however, he felt so
+strong and vigorous that he thought he would go and cut some fuel
+that would be better than this. He worked all the morning, and when
+he came back he did not feel at all tired, and he had a very good
+appetite for his dinner.
+
+Now, Old Pipes knew a good deal about Dryads, but there was one thing
+which, although he had heard, he had forgotten. This was, that a kiss
+from a Dryad made a person ten years younger. The people of the
+village knew this, and they were very careful not to let any child of
+ten years or younger, go into the woods where the Dryads were
+supposed to be; for, if they should chance to be kissed by one of
+these tree-nymphs, they would be set back so far that they would
+cease to exist. A story was told in the village that a very bad boy
+of eleven once ran away into the woods, and had an adventure of this
+kind; and when his mother found him he was a little baby of one year
+old. Taking advantage of her opportunity, she brought him up more
+carefully than she had done before; and he grew to be a very good boy
+indeed.
+
+Now, Old Pipes had been kissed twice by the Dryad, once on each
+cheek, and he therefore felt as vigorous and active as when he was a
+hale man of fifty. His mother noticed how much work he was doing, and
+told him that he need not try in that way to make up for the loss of
+his piping wages; for he would only tire himself out, and get sick.
+But her son answered that he had not felt so well for years, and that
+he was quite able to work. In the course of the afternoon, Old Pipes,
+for the first time that day, put his hand in his coat-pocket, and
+there, to his amazement, he found the little bag of money. "Well,
+well!" he exclaimed, "I am stupid, indeed! I really thought that I
+had seen a Dryad; but when I sat down by that big oak-tree I must
+have gone to sleep and dreamed it all; and then I came home thinking
+I had given the money to a Dryad, when it was in my pocket all the
+time. But the Chief Villager shall have the money. I shall not take
+it to him to-day, but to-morrow I wish to go to the village to see
+some of my old friends; and then I shall give up the money."
+
+Toward the close of the afternoon, Old Pipes, as had been his custom
+for so many years, took his pipes from the shelf on which they lay,
+and went out to the rock in front of the cottage.
+
+"What are you going to do?" cried his mother. "If you will not
+consent to be paid, why do you pipe?"
+
+"I am going to pipe for my own pleasure," said her son. "I am used to
+it, and I do not wish to give it up. It does not matter now whether
+the cattle hear me or not, and I am sure that my piping will injure
+no one."
+
+When the good man began to play upon his favorite instrument he was
+astonished at the sound that came from it. The beautiful notes of the
+pipes sounded clear and strong down into the valley, and spread over
+the hills, and up the sides of the mountain beyond, while, after a
+little interval, an echo came back from the rocky hill on the other
+side of the valley.
+
+"Ha! ha!" he cried, "what has happened to my pipes? They must have
+been stopped up of late, but now they are as clear and good as ever."
+
+Again the merry notes went sounding far and wide. The cattle on the
+mountain heard them, and those that were old enough remembered how
+these notes had called them from their pastures every evening, and so
+they started down the mountain-side, the others following.
+
+The merry notes were heard in the village below, and the people were
+much astonished thereby. "Why, who can be blowing the pipes of Old
+Pipes?" they said. But, as they were all very busy, no one went up to
+see. One thing, however, was plain enough: the cattle were coming
+down the mountain. And so the two boys and the girl did not have to
+go after them, and had an hour for play, for which they were very
+glad.
+
+The next morning Old Pipes started down to the village with his
+money, and on the way he met the Dryad. "Oh, ho!" he cried, "is that
+you? Why, I thought my letting you out of the tree was nothing but a
+dream."
+
+"A dream!" cried the Dryad; "if you only knew how happy you have made
+me, you would not think it merely a dream. And has it not benefited
+you? Do you not feel happier? Yesterday I heard you playing
+beautifully on your pipes."
+
+"Yes, yes," cried he. "I did not understand it before, but I see it
+all now. I have really grown younger. I thank you, I thank you, good
+Dryad, from the bottom of my heart. It was the finding of the money
+in my pocket that made me think it was a dream."
+
+"Oh, I put it in when you were asleep," she said, laughing, "because
+I thought you ought to keep it. Good-by, kind, honest man. May you
+live long, and be as happy as I am now."
+
+Old Pipes was greatly delighted when he understood that he was really
+a younger man; but that made no difference about the money, and he
+kept on his way to the village. As soon as he reached it, he was
+eagerly questioned as to who had been playing his pipes the evening
+before, and when the people heard that it was himself, they were very
+much surprised. Thereupon, Old Pipes told what had happened to him,
+and then there was greater wonder, with hearty congratulations and
+hand-shakes; for Old Pipes was liked by every one. The Chief Villager
+refused to take his money, and, although Old Pipes said that he had
+not earned it, every one present insisted that, as he would now play
+on his pipes as before, he should lose nothing, because, for a time,
+he was unable to perform his duty.
+
+So Old Pipes was obliged to keep his money, and after an hour or two
+spent in conversation with his friends, he returned to his cottage.
+
+There was one individual, however, who was not at all pleased with
+what had happened to Old Pipes. This was an Echo-dwarf, who lived on
+the hills on the other side of the valley, and whose duty it was to
+echo back the notes of the pipes whenever they could be heard. There
+were a great many other Echo-dwarfs on these hills, some of whom
+echoed back the songs of maidens, some the shouts of children, and
+others the music that was often heard in the village. But there was
+only one who could send back the strong notes of the pipes of Old
+Pipes, and this had been his sole duty for many years. But when the
+old man grew feeble, and the notes of his pipes could not be heard on
+the opposite hills, this Echo-dwarf had nothing to do, and he spent
+his time in delightful idleness; and he slept so much and grew so fat
+that it made his companions laugh to see him walk.
+
+On the afternoon on which, after so long an interval, the sound of
+the pipes was heard on the echo hills, this dwarf was fast asleep
+behind a rock. As soon as the first notes reached them, some of his
+companions ran to wake him. Rolling to his feet, he echoed back the
+merry tune of Old Pipes. Naturally, he was very much annoyed and
+indignant at being thus obliged to give up his life of comfortable
+leisure, and he hoped very much that this pipe-playing would not
+occur again. The next afternoon he was awake and listening, and, sure
+enough, at the usual hour, along came the notes of the pipes as clear
+and strong as they ever had been; and he was obliged to work as long
+as Old Pipes played. The Echo-dwarf was very angry. He had supposed,
+of course, that the pipe-playing had ceased forever, and he felt that
+he had a right to be indignant at being thus deceived. He was so much
+disturbed that he made up his mind to go and try to find out whether
+this was to be a temporary matter or not. He had plenty of time, as
+the pipes were played but once a day, and he set off early in the
+morning for the hill on which Old Pipes lived. It was hard work for
+the fat little fellow, and when he had crossed the valley and had
+gone some distance into the woods on the hill-side, he stopped to
+rest, and, in a few minutes, the Dryad came tripping along.
+
+"Ho, ho!" exclaimed the dwarf; "what are you doing here? and how did
+you get out of your tree?"
+
+"Doing!" cried the Dryad; "I am being happy; that's what I am doing.
+And I was let out of my tree by the good old man who plays the pipes
+to call the cattle down from the mountain. And it makes me happier to
+think that I have been of service to him. I gave him two kisses of
+gratitude, and now he is young enough to play his pipes as well as
+ever."
+
+The Echo-dwarf stepped forward, his face pale with passion. "Am I to
+believe," he said, "that you are the cause of this great evil that
+has come upon me? and that you are the wicked creature who has again
+started this old man upon his career of pipe-playing? What have I
+ever done to you that you should have condemned me for years and
+years to echo back the notes of those wretched pipes?"
+
+At this the Dryad laughed loudly.
+
+"What a funny little fellow you are!" she said. "Any one would think
+you had been condemned to toil from morning till night; while what
+you really have to do is merely to imitate for half an hour every day
+the merry notes of Old Pipes's piping. Fie upon you, Echo-dwarf! You
+are lazy and selfish; and that is what is the matter with you.
+Instead of grumbling at being obliged to do a little wholesome work,
+which is less, I am sure, than that of any other echo-dwarf upon the
+rocky hill-side, you should rejoice at the good fortune of the old
+man who has regained so much of his strength and vigor. Go home and
+learn to be just and generous; and then, perhaps, you may be happy.
+Good-by."
+
+"Insolent creature!" shouted the dwarf, as he shook his fat little
+fist at her. "I'll make you suffer for this. You shall find out what
+it is to heap injury and insult upon one like me, and to snatch from
+him the repose that he has earned by long years of toil." And,
+shaking his head savagely, he hurried back to the rocky hill-side.
+
+Every afternoon the merry notes of the pipes of Old Pipes sounded
+down into the valley and over the hills and up the mountain-side; and
+every afternoon when he had echoed them back, the little dwarf grew
+more and more angry with the Dryad. Each day, from early morning till
+it was time for him to go back to his duties upon the rocky
+hill-side, he searched the woods for her. He intended, if he met her,
+to pretend to be very sorry for what he had said, and he thought he
+might be able to play a trick upon her which would avenge him well.
+One day, while thus wandering among the trees, he met Old Pipes. The
+Echo-dwarf did not generally care to see or speak to ordinary people;
+but now he was so anxious to find the object of his search, that he
+stopped and asked Old Pipes if he had seen the Dryad. The piper had
+not noticed the little fellow, and he looked down on him with some
+surprise.
+
+"No," he said; "I have not seen her, and I have been looking
+everywhere for her."
+
+"You!" cried the dwarf, "what do you wish with her?"
+
+Old Pipes then sat down on a stone, so that he should be nearer the
+ear of his small companion, and he told what the Dryad had done for
+him.
+
+When the Echo-dwarf heard that this was the man whose pipes he was
+obliged to echo back every day, he would have slain him on the spot
+had he been able; but, as he was not able, he merely ground his teeth
+and listened to the rest of the story.
+
+"I am looking for the Dryad now," Old Pipes continued, "on account of
+my aged mother. When I was old myself, I did not notice how very old
+my mother was; but now it shocks me to see how feeble and decrepit
+her years have caused her to become; and I am looking for the Dryad
+to ask her to make my mother younger, as she made me."
+
+The eyes of the Echo-dwarf glistened. Here was a man who might help
+him in his plans.
+
+"Your idea is a good one," he said to Old Pipes, "and it does you
+honor. But you should know that a Dryad can make no person younger
+but one who lets her out of her tree. However, you can manage the
+affair very easily. All you need do is to find the Dryad, tell her
+what you want, and request her to step into her tree and be shut up
+for a short time. Then you will go and bring your mother to the tree;
+she will open it, and every thing will be as you wish. Is not this a
+good plan?"
+
+"Excellent!" cried Old Pipes; "and I will go instantly and search
+more diligently for the Dryad."
+
+"Take me with you," said the Echo-dwarf. "You can easily carry me on
+your strong shoulders; and I shall be glad to help you in any way
+that I can."
+
+"Now, then," said the little fellow to himself, as Old Pipes carried
+him rapidly along, "if he persuades the Dryad to get into a
+tree,--and she is quite foolish enough to do it,--and then goes away
+to bring his mother, I shall take a stone or a club and I will break
+off the key of that tree, so that nobody can ever turn it again. Then
+Mistress Dryad will see what she has brought upon herself by her
+behavior to me."
+
+Before long they came to the great oak-tree in which the Dryad had
+lived, and, at a distance, they saw that beautiful creature herself
+coming toward them.
+
+"How excellently well every thing happens!" said the dwarf. "Put me
+down, and I will go. Your business with the Dryad is more important
+than mine; and you need not say any thing about my having suggested
+your plan to you. I am willing that you should have all the credit of
+it yourself."
+
+Old Pipes put the Echo-dwarf upon the ground, but the little rogue
+did not go away. He concealed himself between some low, mossy rocks,
+and he was so much of their color that you would not have noticed him
+if you had been looking straight at him.
+
+When the Dryad came up, Old Pipes lost no time in telling her about
+his mother, and what he wished her to do. At first, the Dryad
+answered nothing, but stood looking very sadly at Old Pipes.
+
+"Do you really wish me to go into my tree again?" she said. "I should
+dreadfully dislike to do it, for I don't know what might happen. It
+is not at all necessary, for I could make your mother younger at any
+time if she would give me the opportunity. I had already thought of
+making you still happier in this way, and several times I have waited
+about your cottage, hoping to meet your aged mother, but she never
+comes outside, and you know a Dryad cannot enter a house. I cannot
+imagine what put this idea into your head. Did you think of it
+yourself?"
+
+"No, I cannot say that I did," answered Old Pipes. "A little dwarf
+whom I met in the woods proposed it to me."
+
+"Oh!" cried the Dryad; "now I see through it all. It is the scheme of
+that vile Echo-dwarf--your enemy and mine. Where is he? I should like
+to see him."
+
+"I think he has gone away," said Old Pipes.
+
+"No he has not," said the Dryad, whose quick eyes perceived the
+Echo-dwarf among the rocks. "There he is. Seize him and drag him out,
+I beg of you."
+
+Old Pipes perceived the dwarf as soon as he was pointed out to him,
+and, running to the rocks, he caught the little fellow by the arm and
+pulled him out.
+
+"Now, then," cried the Dryad, who had opened the door of the great
+oak, "just stick him in there, and we will shut him up. Then I shall
+be safe from his mischief for the rest of the time I am free."
+
+Old Pipes thrust the Echo-dwarf into the tree; the Dryad pushed the
+door shut; there was a clicking sound of bark and wood, and no one
+would have noticed that the big oak had ever had an opening in it.
+
+"There," said the Dryad; "now we need not be afraid of him. And I
+assure you, my good piper, that I shall be very glad to make your
+mother younger as soon as I can. Will you not ask her to come out and
+meet me?"
+
+"Of course I will," cried Old Pipes; "and I will do it without
+delay."
+
+And then, the Dryad by his side, he hurried to his cottage. But when
+he mentioned the matter to his mother, the old woman became very
+angry indeed. She did not believe in Dryads; and, if they really did
+exist, she knew they must be witches and sorceresses, and she would
+have nothing to do with them. If her son had ever allowed himself to
+be kissed by one of them, he ought to be ashamed of himself. As to
+its doing him the least bit of good, she did not believe a word of
+it. He felt better than he used to feel, but that was very common.
+She had sometimes felt that way herself, and she forbade him ever to
+mention a Dryad to her again.
+
+That afternoon, Old Pipes, feeling very sad that his plan in regard
+to his mother had failed, sat down upon the rock and played upon his
+pipes. The pleasant sounds went down the valley and up the hills and
+mountain, but, to the great surprise of some persons who happened to
+notice the fact, the notes were not echoed back from the rocky
+hill-side, but from the woods on the side of the valley on which Old
+Pipes lived. The next day many of the villagers stopped in their work
+to listen to the echo of the pipes coming from the woods. The sound
+was not as clear and strong as it used to be when it was sent back
+from the rocky hill-side, but it certainly came from among the trees.
+Such a thing as an echo changing its place in this way had never been
+heard of before, and nobody was able to explain how it could have
+happened. Old Pipes, however, knew very well that the sound came from
+the Echo-dwarf shut up in the great oak-tree. The sides of the tree
+were thin, and the sound of the pipes could be heard through them,
+and the dwarf was obliged by the laws of his being to echo back those
+notes whenever they came to him. But Old Pipes thought he might get
+the Dryad in trouble if he let any one know that the Echo-dwarf was
+shut up in the tree, and so he wisely said nothing about it.
+
+One day the two boys and the girl who had helped Old Pipes up the
+hill were playing in the woods. Stopping near the great oak-tree,
+they heard a sound of knocking within it, and then a voice plainly
+said:
+
+"Let me out! let me out!"
+
+For a moment the children stood still in astonishment, and then one
+of the boys exclaimed:
+
+"Oh, it is a Dryad, like the one Old Pipes found! Let's let her out!"
+
+"What are you thinking of?" cried the girl. "I am the oldest of all,
+and I am only thirteen. Do you wish to be turned into crawling
+babies? Run! run! run!"
+
+And the two boys and the girl dashed down into the valley as fast as
+their legs could carry them. There was no desire in their youthful
+hearts to be made younger than they were. And for fear that their
+parents might think it well that they should commence their careers
+anew, they never said a word about finding the Dryad-tree.
+
+As the summer days went on, Old Pipes's mother grew feebler and
+feebler. One day when her son was away, for he now frequently went
+into the woods to hunt or fish, or down into the valley to work, she
+arose from her knitting to prepare the simple dinner. But she felt so
+weak and tired that she was not able to do the work to which she had
+been so long accustomed. "Alas! alas!" she said, "the time has come
+when I am too old to work. My son will have to hire some one to come
+here and cook his meals, make his bed, and mend his clothes. Alas!
+alas! I had hoped that as long as I lived I should be able to do
+these things. But it is not so. I have grown utterly worthless, and
+some one else must prepare the dinner for my son. I wonder where he
+is." And tottering to the door, she went outside to look for him. She
+did not feel able to stand, and reaching the rustic chair, she sank
+into it, quite exhausted, and soon fell asleep.
+
+The Dryad, who had often come to the cottage to see if she could find
+an opportunity of carrying out old Pipes's affectionate design, now
+happened by; and seeing that the much-desired occasion had come, she
+stepped up quietly behind the old woman and gently kissed her on each
+cheek, and then as quietly disappeared.
+
+In a few minutes the mother of old Pipes awoke, and looking up at the
+sun, she exclaimed: "Why, it is almost dinner-time! My son will be
+here directly, and I am not ready for him." And rising to her feet,
+she hurried into the house, made the fire, set the meat and
+vegetables to cook, laid the cloth, and by the time her son arrived
+the meal was on the table.
+
+"How a little sleep does refresh one," she said to herself, as she
+was bustling about. She was a woman of very vigorous constitution,
+and at seventy had been a great deal stronger and more active than
+her son was at that age. The moment Old Pipes saw his mother, he knew
+that the Dryad had been there; but, while he felt as happy as a king,
+he was too wise to say any thing about her.
+
+"It is astonishing how well I feel to-day," said his mother; "and
+either my hearing has improved or you speak much more plainly than
+you have done of late."
+
+The summer days went on and passed away, the leaves were falling from
+the trees, and the air was becoming cold.
+
+"Nature has ceased to be lovely," said the Dryad, "and the
+night-winds chill me. It is time for me to go back into my
+comfortable quarters in the great oak. But first I must pay another
+visit to the cottage of Old Pipes."
+
+She found the piper and his mother sitting side by side on the rock
+in front of the door. The cattle were not to go to the mountain any
+more that season, and he was piping them down for the last time. Loud
+and merrily sounded the pipes of Old Pipes, and down the
+mountain-side came the cattle, the cows by the easiest paths, the
+sheep by those not quite so easy, and the goats by the most difficult
+ones among the rocks; while from the great oak-tree were heard the
+echoes of the cheerful music.
+
+"How happy they look, sitting there together," said the Dryad; "and I
+don't believe it will do them a bit of harm to be still younger." And
+moving quietly up behind them, she first kissed Old Pipes on his
+cheek and then his mother.
+
+Old Pipes, who had stopped playing, knew what it was, but he did not
+move, and said nothing. His mother, thinking that her son had kissed
+her, turned to him with a smile and kissed him in return. And then
+she arose and went into the cottage, a vigorous woman of sixty,
+followed by her son, erect and happy, and twenty years younger than
+herself.
+
+The Dryad sped away to the woods, shrugging her shoulders as she felt
+the cool evening wind.
+
+When she reached the great oak, she turned the key and opened the
+door. "Come out," she said to the Echo-dwarf, who sat blinking
+within. "Winter is coming on, and I want the comfortable shelter of
+my tree for myself. The cattle have come down from the mountain for
+the last time this year, the pipes will no longer sound, and you can
+go to your rocks and have a holiday until next spring."
+
+Upon hearing these words the dwarf skipped quickly out, and the Dryad
+entered the tree and pulled the door shut after her. "Now, then," she
+said to herself, "he can break off the key if he likes. It does not
+matter to me. Another will grow out next spring. And although the
+good piper made me no promise, I know that when the warm days arrive
+next year, he will come and let me out again."
+
+The Echo-dwarf did not stop to break the key of the tree. He was too
+happy to be released to think of any thing else, and he hastened as
+fast as he could to his home on the rocky hill-side.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The Dryad was not mistaken when she trusted in the piper. When the
+warm days came again he went to the oak-tree to let her out. But, to
+his sorrow and surprise, he found the great tree lying upon the
+ground. A winter storm had blown it down, and it lay with its trunk
+shattered and split. And what became of the Dryad, no one ever knew.
+
+
+
+
+
+ THE QUEEN'S MUSEUM.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+There was once a Queen who founded, in her capital city, a grand
+museum. This institution was the pride of her heart, and she devoted
+nearly all her time to overseeing the collection of objects for it,
+and their arrangement in the spacious halls. This museum was intended
+to elevate the intelligence of her people, but the result was quite
+disappointing to the Queen. For some reason, and what it was she
+could not imagine, the people were not interested in her museum. She
+considered it the most delightful place in the world, and spent hours
+every day in examining and studying the thousands of objects it
+contained; but although here and there in the city there was a person
+who cared to visit the collection, the great body of the people found
+it impossible to feel the slightest interest in it. At first this
+grieved the Queen, and she tried to make her museum better; but as
+this did no good, she became very angry, and she issued a decree that
+all persons of mature age who were not interested in her museum
+should be sent to prison.
+
+This decree produced a great sensation in the city. The people
+crowded to the building, and did their very best to be interested;
+but, in the majority of cases, the attempt was an utter failure. They
+could not feel any interest whatever. The consequence was that
+hundreds and thousands of the people were sent to prison, and as
+there was not room enough for them in the ordinary jails, large
+temporary prisons were erected in various parts of the city. Those
+persons who were actually needed for work or service which no one
+else could do were allowed to come out in the day-time on parole; but
+at night they had to return to their prisons.
+
+It was during this deplorable state of affairs that a stranger
+entered the city one day. He was surprised at seeing so many prisons,
+and approaching the window in one of them, behind the bars of which
+he saw a very respectable-looking citizen, he asked what all this
+meant. The citizen informed him how matters stood, and then, with
+tears mounting to his eyes, he added:
+
+"Oh, sir, I have tried my best to be interested in that museum; but
+it is impossible; I cannot make myself care for it in the slightest
+degree! And, what is more, I know I shall never be able to do so; and
+I shall languish here for the rest of my days."
+
+Passing on, the Stranger met a mother coming out of her house. Her
+face was pale, and she was weeping bitterly. Filled with pity, he
+stopped and asked her what was the matter. "Oh, sir," she said, "for
+a week I have been trying, for the sake of my dear children, to take
+an interest in that museum. For a time I thought I might do it, but
+the hopes proved false. It is impossible. I must leave my little
+ones, and go to prison."
+
+The Stranger was deeply affected by these cases and many others of a
+similar character, which he soon met with. "It is too bad! too bad!"
+he said to himself. "I never saw a city in so much trouble. There is
+scarcely a family, I am told, in which there is not some uninterested
+person--I must see the Queen and talk to her about it," and with this
+he wended his way to the palace.
+
+He met the Queen just starting out on her morning visit to the
+museum. When he made it known that he was a stranger, and desired a
+short audience, she stopped and spoke to him.
+
+"Have you visited my museum yet?" she said. "There is nothing in the
+city so well worth your attention as that. You should go there before
+seeing any thing else. You have a high forehead, and an intelligent
+expression, and I have no doubt that it will interest you greatly. I
+am going there myself, and I shall be glad to see what effect that
+fine collection has upon a stranger."
+
+This did not suit the Stranger at all. From what he had heard he felt
+quite sure that if he went to the museum, he would soon be in jail;
+and so he hurried to propose a plan which had occurred to him while
+on his way to the palace.
+
+"I came to see your Majesty on the subject of the museum," he said,
+"and to crave permission to contribute to the collection some objects
+which shall be interesting to every one. I understand that it is
+highly desirable that every one should be interested."
+
+"Of course it is," said the Queen, "and although I think that there
+is not the slightest reason why every one should not feel the keenest
+interest in what the museum already contains, I am willing to add to
+it whatever may make it of greater value."
+
+"In that case," said the Stranger, "no time should be lost in
+securing what I wish to present."
+
+"Go at once," said the Queen. "But how soon can you return?"
+
+"It will take some days, at least," said the Stranger.
+
+"Give me your parole to return in a week," said the Queen, "and start
+immediately."
+
+The Stranger gave his parole and left the palace. Having filled a
+leathern bag with provisions from a cook's shop, he went out of the
+city gates. As he walked into the open country, he said to himself:
+
+"I have certainly undertaken a very difficult enterprise. Where I am
+to find any thing that will interest all the people in that city, I
+am sure I do not know; but my heart is so filled with pity for the
+great number of unfortunate persons who are torn from their homes and
+shut up in prison, that I am determined to do something for them, if
+I possibly can. There must be some objects to be found in this vast
+country that will interest every one."
+
+About noon he came to a great mountain-side covered with a forest.
+Thinking that he was as likely to find what he sought in one place as
+another, and preferring the shade to the sun, he entered the forest,
+and walked for some distance along a path which gradually led up the
+mountain. Having crossed a brook with its edges lined with
+water-cresses, he soon perceived a large cave, at the entrance of
+which sat an aged hermit. "Ah," said the Stranger to himself, "this
+is indeed fortunate! This good and venerable man, who passes his life
+amid the secrets of nature, can surely tell me what I wish to know."
+Saluting the Hermit, he sat down and told the old man the object of
+his quest.
+
+"I am afraid you are looking for what you will not find," said the
+Hermit. "Most people are too silly to be truly interested in any
+thing. They herd together like cattle, and do not know what is good
+for them. There are now on this mountain-side many commodious and
+comfortable caves, all of which would be tenanted if people only knew
+how improving and interesting it is to live apart from their
+fellow-men. But, so far as it can be done, I will help you in your
+quest, which I think is a worthy one. I can do nothing for you
+myself, but I have a pupil who is very much given to wandering about,
+and looking for curious things. He may tell you where you will be
+able to find something that will interest everybody, though I doubt
+it. You may go and see him, if you like, and I will excuse him from
+his studies for a time, so that he may aid you in your search."
+
+The Hermit then wrote an excuse upon a piece of parchment, and,
+giving it to the Stranger, he directed him to the cave of his pupil.
+
+This was situated at some distance, and higher up the mountain, and
+when the Stranger reached it, he found the Pupil fast asleep upon the
+ground. This individual was a long-legged youth, with long arms, long
+hair, a long nose, and a long face. When the Stranger awakened him,
+told him why he had come, and gave him the hermit's excuse, the
+sleepy eyes of the Pupil brightened, and his face grew less long.
+
+"That's delightful!" he said, "to be let off on a Monday; for I
+generally have to be satisfied with a half-holiday, Wednesdays and
+Saturdays."
+
+"Is the Hermit very strict with you?" asked the Stranger.
+
+"Yes," said the Pupil, "I have to stick closely to the cave; though I
+have been known to go fishing on days when there was no holiday. I
+have never seen the old man but once, and that was when he first took
+me. You know it wouldn't do for us to be too sociable. That wouldn't
+be hermit-like. He comes up here on the afternoons I am out, and
+writes down what I am to do for the next half-week."
+
+"And do you always do it?" asked the Stranger.
+
+"Oh, I get some of it done," said the Pupil; "but there have been
+times when I have wondered whether it wouldn't have been better for
+me to have been something else. But I have chosen my profession, and
+I suppose I must be faithful to it. We will start immediately on our
+search; but first I must put the cave in order, for the old man will
+be sure to come up while I am gone."
+
+So saying, the Pupil opened an old parchment book at a marked page,
+and laid it on a flat stone, which served as a table, and then placed
+a skull and a couple of bones in a proper position near by.
+
+The two now started off, the Pupil first putting a line and hook in
+his pocket, and pulling out a fishing-rod from under some bushes.
+
+"What do you want with that?" asked the Stranger, "we are not going
+to fish!"
+
+"Why not?" said the Pupil; "if we come to a good place, we might
+catch something that would be a real curiosity."
+
+Before long they came to a mountain brook, and here the Pupil
+insisted on trying his luck. The Stranger was a little tired and
+hungry, and so was quite willing to sit down for a time and eat
+something from his bag. The Pupil ran off to find some bait, and he
+staid away so long that the Stranger had quite finished his meal
+before he returned. He came back at last, however, in a state of
+great excitement.
+
+"Come with me! come with me!" he cried. "I have found something that
+is truly astonishing! Come quickly!"
+
+The Stranger arose and hurried after the Pupil, whose long legs
+carried him rapidly over the mountain-side. Reaching a large hole at
+the bottom of a precipitous rock, the Pupil stopped, and exclaiming:
+"Come in here and I will show you something that will amaze you!" he
+immediately entered the hole.
+
+The Stranger, who was very anxious to see what curiosity he had
+found, followed him some distance along a narrow and winding
+under-ground passage. The two suddenly emerged into a high and
+spacious cavern, which was lighted by openings in the roof; on the
+floor, in various places, were strongly fastened boxes, and packages
+of many sorts, bales and bundles of silks and rich cloths, with
+handsome caskets, and many other articles of value.
+
+"What kind of a place is this?" exclaimed the Stranger, in great
+surprise.
+
+"Don't you know?" cried the Pupil, his eyes fairly sparkling with
+delight. "It is a robber's den! Isn't it a great thing to find a
+place like this?"
+
+"A robber's den!" exclaimed the Stranger in alarm; "let us get out of
+it as quickly as we can, or the robbers will return, and we shall be
+cut to pieces."
+
+"I don't believe they are coming back very soon," said the Pupil,
+"and we ought to stop and take a look at some of these things."
+
+"Fly, you foolish youth!" cried the Stranger; "you do not know what
+danger you are in." And, so saying, he turned to hasten away from the
+place.
+
+But he was too late. At that moment the robber captain and his band
+entered the cave. When these men perceived the Stranger and the
+Hermit's Pupil, they drew their swords and were about to rush upon
+them, when the Pupil sprang forward and, throwing up his long arms,
+exclaimed:
+
+"Stop! it is a mistake!"
+
+At these words, the robber captain lowered his sword, and motioned to
+his men to halt. "A mistake!" he said; "what do you mean by that?"
+
+"I mean," said the Pupil, "that I was out looking for curiosities,
+and wandered into this place by accident. We haven't taken a thing.
+You may count your goods, and you will find nothing missing. We have
+not even opened a box, although I very much wanted to see what was in
+some of them."
+
+"Are his statements correct?" said the Captain, turning to the
+Stranger.
+
+"Entirely so," was the answer.
+
+"You have truthful features, and an honest expression," said the
+Captain, "and I do not believe you would be so dishonorable as to
+creep in here during our absence and steal our possessions. Your
+lives shall be spared, but you will be obliged to remain with us; for
+we cannot allow any one who knows our secret to leave us. You shall
+be treated well, and shall accompany us in our expeditions; and if
+your conduct merits it, you shall in time be made full members."
+
+Bitterly the Stranger now regretted his unfortunate position. He
+strode up and down one side of the cave, vowing inwardly that never
+again would he allow himself to be led by a Hermit's Pupil. That
+individual, however, was in a state of high delight. He ran about
+from box to bale, looking at the rare treasures which some of the
+robbers showed him.
+
+The two captives were fed and lodged very well; and the next day the
+Captain called them and the band together, and addressed them.
+
+"We are now twenty-nine in number," he said; "twenty-seven full
+members, and two on probation. To-night we are about to undertake a
+very important expedition, in which we shall all join. We shall
+fasten up the door of the cave, and at the proper time I shall tell
+you to what place we are going."
+
+An hour or two before midnight the band set out, accompanied by the
+Stranger and the Hermit's Pupil; and when they had gone some miles
+the Captain halted them to inform them of the object of the
+expedition. "We are going," he said, "to rob the Queen's museum. It
+is the most important business we have ever undertaken."
+
+At these words the Stranger stepped forward and made a protest. "I
+left the city yesterday," he said, "commissioned by the Queen to
+obtain one or more objects of interest for her museum; and to return
+now to rob an institution which I have promised to enrich will be
+simply impossible."
+
+"You are right," said the Captain, after a moment's reflection, "such
+an action would be highly dishonorable on your part. If you will give
+me your word of honor that you will remain by this stone until our
+return, the expedition will proceed without you."
+
+The Stranger gave his word, and having been left sitting upon the
+stone, soon dropped asleep, and so remained until he was awakened by
+the return of the band, a little before daylight. They came slowly
+toiling along, each man carrying an enormous bundle upon his back.
+Near the end of the line was the Hermit's Pupil, bearing a load as
+heavy as any of the others. The Stranger offered to relieve him for a
+time of his burden, but the Pupil would not allow it.
+
+"I don't wish these men to think I can't do as much as they can," he
+said. "You ought to have been along. We had a fine time! We swept
+that museum clean, I tell you! We didn't leave a thing on a shelf or
+in a case."
+
+"What sort of things are they," asked the Stranger.
+
+"I don't know," replied the Pupil, "we didn't have any light for fear
+people would notice it, but the moon shone in bright enough for us to
+see all the shelves and the cases; and our orders were not to try and
+examine any thing, but to take all that was there. The cases had
+great cloth covers on them, and we spread these on the floor and made
+bundles of the curiosities. We are going to examine them carefully as
+soon as we get to the den."
+
+It was broad daylight when the robbers reached their cave. The
+bundles were laid in a great circle on the floor, and, at a given
+signal, they were opened. For a moment each robber gazed blankly at
+the contents of his bundle, and then they all began to fumble and
+search among the piles of articles upon the cloths; but after a few
+minutes, they arose, looking blanker and more disappointed than
+before.
+
+"So far as I can see," said the Captain, "there is nothing in the
+whole collection that I care for. I do not like a thing here!"
+
+"Nor I!" "Nor I!" "Nor I!" cried each one of his band.
+
+"I suppose," said the Captain, after musing for a moment, "that as
+these things are of no use to us, we are bound in honor to take them
+back."
+
+"Hold!" said the Stranger, stepping forward; "do not be in too great
+a hurry to do that." He then told the Captain of the state of affairs
+in the city, and explained in full the nature of the expedition he
+had undertaken for the Queen. "I think it would be better," he said,
+"if these things were not taken back for the present. If you have a
+safe place where you can put them, I will in due time tell the Queen
+where they are, and if she chooses she can send for them."
+
+"Good!" said the Captain, "it is but right that she should bear part
+of the labor of transportation. There is a disused cave, a mile or so
+away, and we will tie up these bundles and carry them there; and then
+we shall leave the matter to you. We take no further interest in it.
+And if you have given your parole to the Queen to return in a week,"
+the Captain further continued, "of course you'll have to keep it. Did
+you give your parole also?" he asked, turning to the Pupil.
+
+"Oh, no!" cried that youth; "there was no time fixed for my return.
+And I am sure that I like a robber's life much better than that of a
+hermit. There is ever so much more spice and dash in it."
+
+"The Stranger was then told that if he would promise not to betray
+the robbers he might depart. He gave the promise; but added sadly
+that he had lost so much time that he was afraid he would not now be
+able to attain the object of his search and return within the week.
+
+"If that is the case," said the Captain, "we will gladly assist you."
+"Comrades!" he cried, addressing his band, "after stowing this
+useless booty in the disused cave, and taking some rest and
+refreshment, we will set out again, and the object of our expedition
+shall be to obtain something for the Queen's museum which will
+interest every one."
+
+Shortly after midnight the robbers set out, accompanied by the
+Stranger and the Pupil. When they had walked about an hour, the
+Captain, as was his custom, brought them to a halt that he might tell
+them where they were going. "I have concluded," said he, "that no
+place is so likely to contain what we are looking for as the castle
+of the great magician, Alfrarmedj. We will, therefore, proceed
+thither, and sack the castle."
+
+"Will there not be great danger in attacking the castle of a
+magician?" asked the Stranger in somewhat anxious tones.
+
+"Of course there will be," said the Captain, "but we are not such
+cowards as to hesitate on account of danger. Forward, my men!" And on
+they all marched.
+
+When they reached the magician's castle, the order was given to scale
+the outer wall. This the robbers did with great agility, and the
+Hermit's Pupil was among the first to surmount it. But the Stranger
+was not used to climbing, and he had to be assisted over the wall.
+Inside the great court-yard they perceived numbers of Weirds--strange
+shadowy creatures who gathered silently around them; but not in the
+least appalled, the robbers formed into a body, and marched into the
+castle, the door of which stood open. They now entered a great hall,
+having at one end a doorway before which hung a curtain. Following
+their Captain, the robbers approached this curtain, and pushing it
+aside, entered the room beyond. There, behind a large table, sat the
+great magician, Alfrarmedj, busy over his mystic studies, which he
+generally pursued in the dead hours of the night. Drawing their
+swords, the robbers rushed upon him.
+
+"Surrender!" cried the Captain, "and deliver to us the treasures of
+your castle."
+
+The old magician raised his head from his book, and, pushing up his
+spectacles from his forehead, looked at them mildly, and said:
+
+"Freeze!"
+
+Instantly, they all froze as hard as ice, each man remaining in the
+position in which he was when the magical word was uttered. With
+uplifted swords and glaring eyes they stood, rigid and stiff, before
+the magician. After calmly surveying the group, the old man said:
+
+"I see among you one who has an intelligent brow and truthful
+expression. His head may thaw sufficiently for him to tell me what
+means this untimely intrusion upon my studies."
+
+The Stranger now felt his head begin to thaw, and in a few moments he
+was able to speak. He then told the magician about the Queen's
+museum, and how it had happened that he had come there with the
+robbers.
+
+"Your motive is a good one," said the magician, "though your actions
+are somewhat erratic; and I do not mind helping you to find what you
+wish. In what class of objects do the people of the city take the
+most interest?"
+
+"Truly I do not know," said the Stranger.
+
+"This is indeed surprising!" exclaimed Alfrarmedj. "How can you
+expect to obtain that which will interest every one, when you do not
+know what it is in which every one takes an interest? Go, find out
+this, and then return to me, and I will see what can be done."
+
+The magician then summoned his Weirds and ordered them to carry the
+frozen visitors outside the castle walls. Each one of the rigid
+figures was taken up by two Weirds, who carried him out and stood him
+up in the road outside the castle. When all had been properly set up,
+with the captain at their head, the gates were shut, and the magician
+still sitting at his table, uttered the word, "Thaw!"
+
+Instantly, the whole band thawed and marched away. At daybreak they
+halted, and considered how they should find out what all the people
+in the city took an interest in.
+
+"One thing is certain," cried the Hermit's Pupil, "whatever it is, it
+isn't the same thing."
+
+"Your remark is not well put together," said the Stranger, "but I see
+the force of it. It is true that different people like different
+things. But how shall we find out what the different people like?"
+
+"By asking them," said the Pupil.
+
+"Good!" cried the Captain, who preferred action to words. "This night
+we will ask them." He then drew upon the sand a plan of the
+city,--(with which he was quite familiar, having carefully robbed it
+for many years,)--and divided it into twenty-eight sections, each one
+of which was assigned to a man. "I omit you," the Captain said to the
+Stranger, "because I find that you are not expert at climbing." He
+then announced that at night the band would visit the city, and that
+each man should enter the houses in his district, and ask the people
+what it was in which they took the greatest interest.
+
+They then proceeded to the cave for rest and refreshment; and a
+little before midnight they entered the city, and each member of the
+band, including the Hermit's Pupil, proceeded to attend to the
+business assigned to him. It was ordered that no one should disturb
+the Queen, for they knew that what she took most interest in was the
+museum. During the night nearly every person in the town was aroused
+by a black-bearded robber, who had climbed into one of the windows of
+the house, and who, instead of demanding money and jewels, simply
+asked what it was in which that person took the greatest interest.
+Upon receiving an answer, the robber repeated it until he had learned
+it by heart, and then went to the next house. As so many of the
+citizens were confined in prisons, which the robbers easily entered,
+they transacted the business in much less time than they would
+otherwise have required.
+
+The Hermit's Pupil was very active, climbing into and out of houses
+with great agility. He obtained his answers quite as easily as did
+the others, but whenever he left a house there was a shade of
+disappointment upon his features. Among the last places that he
+visited was a room in which two boys were sleeping. He awoke them and
+asked the usual question. While they were trembling in their bed, not
+knowing what to answer, the Pupil drew his sword and exclaimed:
+"Come, now, no prevarication; you know it's fishing-tackle. Speak
+out!" Each of the boys then promptly declared it was fishing-tackle,
+and the pupil left, greatly gratified. "I was very much afraid," he
+said to himself, "that not a person in my district would say
+fishing-tackle; and I am glad to think that there were two boys who
+had sense enough to like something that is really interesting."
+
+It was nearly daylight when the work was finished; and then the band
+gathered together in an appointed place on the outside of the city,
+where the Stranger awaited them. Each of the men had an excellent
+memory, which was necessary in their profession, and they repeated to
+the Stranger all the objects and subjects that had been mentioned to
+them, and he wrote them down upon tablets.
+
+The next night, accompanied by the band, he proceeded to the castle
+of the magician, the great gate of which was silently opened for them
+by the Weirds. When they were ushered into the magician's room,
+Alfrarmedj took the tablets from the Stranger and examined them
+carefully.
+
+"All these things should make a very complete collection," he said,
+"and I think I have specimens of the various objects in my
+interminable vaults." He then called his Weirds and, giving one of
+them the tablets, told him to go with his companions into the vaults
+and gather enough of the things therein mentioned to fill a large
+museum. In half an hour the Weirds returned and announced that the
+articles were ready in the great court-yard.
+
+"Go, then," said the magician, "and assist these men to carry them to
+the Queen's museum."
+
+The Stranger then heartily thanked Alfrarmedj for the assistance he
+had given; and the band, accompanied by a number of Weirds, proceeded
+to carry the objects of interest to the Queen's museum. It was a
+strange procession. Half a dozen Weirds carried a stuffed mammoth,
+followed by others bearing the skeleton of a whale, while the robbers
+and the rest of their queer helpers were loaded with every thing
+relating to history, science, and art which ought to be in a really
+good museum. When the whole collection had been put in place upon the
+floors, the shelves, and in the cases, it was nearly morning. The
+robbers, with the Hermit's Pupil, retired to the cave; the Weirds
+disappeared; while the Stranger betook himself to the Queen's palace,
+where, as soon as the proper hour arrived, he requested an audience.
+
+When he saw the Queen, he perceived that she was very pale and that
+her cheeks bore traces of recent tears. "You are back in good time,"
+she said to him, "but it makes very little difference whether you
+have succeeded in your mission or not. There is no longer any museum.
+There has been a great robbery, and the thieves have carried off the
+whole of the vast and valuable collection which I have been so long
+in making."
+
+"I know of that affair," said the Stranger, "and I have already
+placed in your museum-building the collection which I have obtained.
+If your Majesty pleases, I shall be glad to have you look at it. It
+may, in some degree, compensate for that which has been stolen."
+
+"Compensate!" cried the Queen. "Nothing can compensate for it; I do
+not even wish to see what you have brought."
+
+"Be that as your Majesty pleases," said the Stranger; "but I will be
+so bold as to say that I have great hopes that the collection which I
+have obtained will interest the people. Will your Majesty graciously
+allow them to see it?"
+
+"I have no objection to that," said the Queen; "and indeed I shall be
+very glad if they can be made to be interested in the museum. I will
+give orders that the prisons be opened, so that everybody can go to
+see what you have brought; and those who shall be interested in it
+may return to their homes. I did not release my obstinate subjects
+when the museum was robbed, because their fault then was just as
+great as it was before; and it would not be right that they should
+profit by my loss."
+
+The Queen's proclamation was made, and for several days the museum
+was crowded with people moving from morning till night through the
+vast collection of stuffed animals, birds, and fishes; rare and
+brilliant insects; mineral and vegetable curiosities; beautiful works
+of art; and all the strange, valuable, and instructive objects which
+had been brought from the interminable vaults of the magician
+Alfrarmedj. The Queen's officers, who had been sent to observe
+whether or not the people were interested, were in no doubt upon this
+point. Every eye sparkled with delight, for every one found something
+which was the very thing he wished to see; and in the throng was the
+Hermit's Pupil, standing in rapt ecstasy before a large case
+containing all sorts of fishing-tackle, from the smallest hooks for
+little minnows to the great irons and spears used in capturing
+whales.
+
+No one went back to prison, and the city was full of re-united
+households and happy homes. On the morning of the fourth day, a grand
+procession of citizens came to the palace to express to the Queen
+their delight and appreciation of her museum. The great happiness of
+her subjects could but please the Queen. She called the Stranger to
+her, and said to him:
+
+"Tell me how you came to know what it was that would interest my
+people."
+
+"I asked them," said the Stranger. "That is to say, I arranged that
+they should be asked."
+
+"That was well done," said the Queen; "but it is a great pity that my
+long labors in their behalf should have been lost. For many years I
+have been a collector of button-holes; and there was nothing valuable
+or rare in the line of my studies of which I had not an original
+specimen or a facsimile. My agents brought me from foreign lands,
+even from the most distant islands of the sea, button-holes of every
+kind; in silk, in wool, in cloth of gold, in every imaginable
+material, and of those which could not be obtained careful copies
+were made. There was not a duplicate specimen in the whole
+collection; only one of each kind; nothing repeated. Never before was
+there such a museum. With all my power I strove to educate my people
+up to an appreciation of button-holes; but, with the exception of a
+few tailors and seamstresses, nobody took the slightest interest in
+what I had provided for their benefit. I am glad that my people are
+happy, but I cannot restrain a sigh for the failure of my efforts."
+
+"The longer your Majesty lives," said the Stranger, "the better you
+will understand that we cannot make other people like a thing simply
+because we like it ourselves."
+
+"Stranger," said the Queen, gazing upon him with admiration, "are you
+a king in disguise?"
+
+"I am," he replied.
+
+"I thought I perceived it," said the Queen, "and I wish to add that I
+believe you are far better able to govern this kingdom than I am. If
+you choose I will resign it to you."
+
+"Not so, your majesty," said the other; "I would not deprive you of
+your royal position, but I should be happy to share it with you."
+
+"That will answer very well," said the Queen. And turning to an
+attendant, she gave orders that preparations should be made for their
+marriage on the following day.
+
+After the royal wedding, which was celebrated with great pomp and
+grandeur, the Queen paid a visit to the museum, and, much to her
+surprise, was greatly delighted and interested. The King then
+informed her that he happened to know where the robbers had stored
+her collection, which they could not sell or make use of, and if she
+wished, he would regain the collection and erect a building for its
+reception.
+
+"We will not do that at present," said the Queen. "When I shall have
+thoroughly examined and studied all these objects, most of which are
+entirely new to me, we will decide about the button-holes."
+
+The Hermit's Pupil did not return to his cave. He was greatly
+delighted with the spice and dash of a robber's life, so different
+from that of a hermit; and he determined, if possible, to change his
+business and enter the band. He had a conversation with the Captain
+on the subject, and that individual encouraged him in his purpose.
+
+"I am tired," the Captain said, "of a robber's life. I have stolen so
+much, that I cannot use what I have. I take no further interest in
+accumulating spoils. The quiet of a hermit's life attracts me; and,
+if you like we will change places. I will become the pupil of your
+old master, and you shall be the captain of my band."
+
+The change was made. The Captain retired to the cave of the Hermit's
+Pupil, while the latter, with the hearty consent of all the men, took
+command of the band of robbers.
+
+When the King heard of this change, he was not at all pleased, and he
+sent for the ex-pupil.
+
+"I am willing to reward you," he said, "for assisting me in my recent
+undertaking; but I cannot allow you to lead a band of robbers in my
+dominions."
+
+A dark shade of disappointment passed over the ex-pupil's features,
+and his face lengthened visibly.
+
+"It is too bad," he said, "to be thus cut short at the very outset of
+a brilliant career. I'll tell you what I'll do," he added suddenly,
+his face brightening, "if you'll let me keep on in my new profession,
+I'll promise to do nothing but rob robbers."
+
+"Very well," said the King, "if you will confine yourself to that,
+you may retain your position."
+
+The members of the band were perfectly willing to rob in the new way,
+for it seemed quite novel and exciting to them. The first place they
+robbed was their own cave, and as they all had excellent memories,
+they knew from whom the various goods had been stolen, and every
+thing was returned to its proper owner. The ex-pupil then led his
+band against the other dens of robbers in the kingdom, and his
+movements were conducted with such dash and vigor that the various
+hordes scattered in every direction, while the treasures in their
+dens were returned to the owners, or, if these could not be found,
+were given to the poor. In a short time every robber, except those
+led by the ex-pupil, had gone into some other business; and the
+victorious youth led his band into other kingdoms to continue the
+great work of robbing robbers.
+
+The Queen never sent for the collection of curiosities which the
+robbers had stolen from her. She was so much interested in the new
+museum that she continually postponed the re-establishment of her old
+one; and, as far as can be known, the button-holes are still in the
+cave where the robbers shut them up.
+
+
+
+
+
+ CHRISTMAS BEFORE LAST;
+
+OR, THE FRUIT OF THE FRAGILE PALM.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The "Horn o' Plenty" was a fine, big, old-fashioned ship, very high
+in the bow, very high in the stern, with a quarter-deck always
+carpeted in fine weather, because her captain could not see why one
+should not make himself comfortable at sea as well as on land.
+Covajos Maroots was her captain, and a fine, jolly, old-fashioned,
+elderly sailor he was. The "Horn o' Plenty" always sailed upon one
+sea, and always between two ports, one on the west side of the sea,
+and one on the east. The port on the west was quite a large city, in
+which Captain Covajos had a married son, and the port on the east was
+another city in which he had a married daughter. In each family he
+had several grandchildren; and, consequently, it was a great joy to
+the jolly old sailor to arrive at either port. The Captain was very
+particular about his cargo, and the "Horn o' Plenty" was generally
+laden with good things to eat, or sweet things to smell, or fine
+things to wear, or beautiful things to look at. Once a merchant
+brought to him some boxes of bitter aloes, and mustard plasters, but
+Captain Covajos refused to take them into his ship.
+
+"I know," said he, "that such things are very useful and necessary at
+times, but you would better send them over in some other vessel. The
+'Horn o' Plenty' has never carried any thing that to look at, to
+taste, or to smell, did not delight the souls of old and young. I am
+sure you cannot say that of these commodities. If I were to put such
+things on board my ship, it would break the spell which more than
+fifty savory voyages have thrown around it."
+
+There were sailors who sailed upon that sea who used to say that
+sometimes, when the weather was hazy and they could not see far, they
+would know they were about to meet the "Horn o' Plenty" before she
+came in sight; her planks and timbers, and even her sails and masts,
+had gradually become so filled with the odor of good things that the
+winds that blew over her were filled with an agreeable fragrance.
+
+There was another thing about which Captain Covajos was very
+particular; he always liked to arrive at one of his ports a few days
+before Christmas. Never, in the course of his long life, had the old
+sailor spent a Christmas at sea; and now that he had his fine
+grandchildren to help make the holidays merry, it would have grieved
+him very much if he had been unable to reach one or the other of his
+ports in good season. His jolly old vessel was generally heavily
+laden, and very slow, and there were many days of calms on that sea
+when she did not sail at all, so that her voyages were usually very,
+very long. But the Captain fixed the days of sailing so as to give
+himself plenty of time to get to the other end of his course before
+Christmas came around.
+
+One spring, however, he started too late, and when he was about the
+middle of his voyage, he called to him Baragat Bean, his old
+boatswain. This venerable sailor had been with the Captain ever since
+he had commanded the "Horn o' Plenty," and on important occasions he
+was always consulted in preference to the other officers, none of
+whom had served under Captain Covajos more then fifteen or twenty
+years.
+
+"Baragat," said the Captain, "we have just passed the Isle of
+Guinea-Hens. You can see its one mountain standing up against the sky
+to the north."
+
+"Aye, aye, sir," said old Baragat; "there she stands, the same as
+usual."
+
+"That makes it plain," said the Captain, "that we are not yet
+half-way across, and I am very much afraid that I shall not be able
+to reach my dear daughter's house before Christmas."
+
+"That would be doleful, indeed," said Baragat; "but I've feared
+something of the kind, for we've had calms nearly every other day,
+and sometimes, when the wind did blow, it came from the wrong
+direction, and it's my belief that the ship sailed backward."
+
+"That was very bad management," said the Captain. "The chief mate
+should have seen to it that the sails were turned in such a manner
+that the ship could not go backward. If that sort of thing happened
+often, it would become quite a serious affair."
+
+"But what is done can't be helped," said the boatswain, "and I don't
+see how you are going to get into port before Christmas."
+
+"Nor do I," said the Captain, gazing out over the sea.
+
+"It would give me a sad turn, sir," said Baragat, "to see you spend
+Christmas at sea; a thing you never did before, nor ever shall do, if
+I can help it. If you'll take my advice, sir, you'll turn around, and
+go back. It's a shorter distance to the port we started from than to
+the one we are going to, and if we turn back now, I am sure we all
+shall be on shore before the holidays."
+
+"Go back to my son's house!" exclaimed Captain Covajos, "where I was
+last winter! Why, that would be like spending last Christmas over
+again!"
+
+"But that would be better than having none at all, sir," said the
+boatswain, "and a Christmas at sea would be about equal to none."
+
+"Good!" exclaimed the Captain. "I will give up the coming Christmas
+with my daughter and her children, and go back and spend last
+Christmas over again with my son and his dear boys and girls. Have
+the ship turned around immediately, Baragat, and tell the chief mate
+I do not wish to sail backward if it can possibly be avoided."
+
+For a week or more the "Horn o' Plenty" sailed back upon her track
+towards the city where dwelt the Captain's son. The weather was fine,
+the carpet was never taken up from the quarter-deck, and every thing
+was going on very well, when a man, who happened to have an errand at
+one of the topmasts, came down, and reported that, far away to the
+north, he had seen a little open boat with some people in it.
+
+"Ah me!" said Captain Covajos, "it must be some poor fellows who are
+shipwrecked. It will take us out of our course, but we must not leave
+them to their fate. Have the ship turned about, so that it will sail
+northward."
+
+It was not very long before they came up with the boat; and, much to
+the Captain's surprise, he saw that it was filled with boys.
+
+"Who are you?" he cried as soon as he was near enough. "And where do
+you come from?"
+
+"We are the First Class in Long Division," said the oldest boy, "and
+we are cast away. Have you any thing to eat that you can spare us? We
+are almost famished."
+
+"We have plenty of every thing," said the Captain. "Come on board
+instantly, and all your wants shall be supplied."
+
+"How long have you been without food?" he asked, when the boys were
+on the deck of the vessel.
+
+"We have had nothing to eat since breakfast," said one of them; "and
+it is now late in the afternoon. Some of us are nearly dead from
+starvation."
+
+"It is very hard for boys to go so long without eating," said the
+good Captain. And leading them below, he soon set them to work upon a
+bountiful meal.
+
+Not until their hunger was fully satisfied did he ask them how they
+came to be cast away.
+
+"You see, sir," said the oldest boy, "that we and the Multiplication
+Class had a holiday to-day, and each class took a boat and determined
+to have a race, so as to settle, once for all, which was the highest
+branch of arithmetic, multiplication or long division. Our class
+rowed so hard that we entirely lost sight of the Multiplicationers,
+and found indeed that we were out of sight of every thing; so that,
+at last, we did not know which was the way back, and thus we became
+castaways."
+
+"Where is your school?" asked the Captain.
+
+"It is on Apple Island," said the boy; "and, although it is a long
+way off for a small boat with only four oars for nine boys, it can't
+be very far for a ship."
+
+"That is quite likely," said the Captain, "and we shall take you
+home. Baragat, tell the chief mate to have the vessel turned toward
+Apple Island, that we may restore these boys to their parents and
+guardians."
+
+Now, the chief mate had not the least idea in the world where Apple
+Island was, but he did not like to ask, because that would be
+confessing his ignorance; so he steered his vessel toward a point
+where he believed he had once seen an island, which, probably, was
+the one in question. The "Horn o' Plenty" sailed in this direction
+all night, and when day broke, and there was no island in sight, she
+took another course; and so sailed this way and that for six or seven
+days, without ever seeing a sign of land. All this time, the First
+Class in Long Division was as happy as it could be, for it was having
+a perfect holiday; fishing off the sides of the vessel, climbing up
+the ladders and ropes, and helping the sailors whistle for wind. But
+the Captain now began to grow a little impatient, for he felt he was
+losing time; so he sent for the chief mate, and said to him mildly
+but firmly:
+
+"I know it is out of the line of your duty to search for island
+schools, but, if you really think that you do not know where Apple
+Island lies, I wish you to say so, frankly and openly."
+
+"Frankly and openly," answered the mate, "I don't think I do."
+
+"Very well," said the Captain. "Now, that is a basis to work upon,
+and we know where we stand. You can take a little rest, and let the
+second mate find the island. But I can only give him three days in
+which to do it. We really have no time to spare."
+
+The second mate was very proud of the responsibility placed upon him,
+and immediately ordered the vessel to be steered due south.
+
+"One is just as likely," he said, "to find a totally unknown place by
+going straight ahead in a certain direction, as by sailing here,
+there, and everywhere. In this way, you really get over more water,
+and there is less wear and tear of the ship and rigging."
+
+So he sailed due south for two days, and at the end of that time they
+came in sight of land. This was quite a large island, and when they
+approached near enough, they saw upon its shores a very handsome
+city.
+
+"Is this Apple Island?" said Captain Covajos to the oldest boy.
+
+"Well, sir," answered the youth, "I am not sure I can say with
+certainty that I truly believe that it is; but, I think, if we were
+to go on shore, the people there would be able to tell us how to go
+to Apple Island."
+
+"Very likely," said the good Captain; "and we will go on shore and
+make inquiries.--And it has struck me, Baragat," he said, "that
+perhaps the merchants in the city where my son lives may be somewhat
+annoyed when the 'Horn o' Plenty' comes back with all their goods on
+board, and not disposed of. Not understanding my motives, they may be
+disposed to think ill of me. Consequently the idea has come into my
+head, that it might be a good thing to stop here for a time, and try
+to dispose of some of our merchandise. The city seems to be quite
+prosperous, and I have no doubt there are a number of merchants
+here."
+
+So the "Horn o' Plenty" was soon anchored in the harbor, and as many
+of the officers and crew as could be spared went on shore to make
+inquiries. Of course the First Class in Long Division was not left
+behind; and, indeed, they were ashore as soon as anybody. The Captain
+and his companions were cordially welcomed by some of the dignitaries
+of the city who had come down to the harbor to see the strange
+vessel; but no one could give any information in regard to Apple
+Island, the name of which had never been heard on those shores. The
+Captain was naturally desirous of knowing at what place he had
+landed, and was informed that this was the Island of the Fragile
+Palm.
+
+"That is rather an odd name," said the old Captain. "Why is it so
+called?"
+
+"The reason is this," said his informant. "Near the centre of the
+island stands a tall and very slender palm-tree, which has been
+growing there for hundreds of years. It bears large and handsome
+fruit which is something like the cocoanut; and, in its perfection,
+is said to be a transcendently delicious fruit."
+
+"Said to be!" exclaimed the Captain; "are you not positive about it?"
+
+"No," said the other; "no one living has ever tasted the fruit in its
+perfection. When it becomes overripe, it drops to the ground, and,
+even then, it is considered royal property, and is taken to the
+palace for the King's table. But on fete-days and grand occasions
+small bits of it are distributed to the populace."
+
+"Why don't you pick the fruit," asked Captain Covajos, "when it is in
+its best condition to eat?"
+
+"It would be impossible," said the citizen, "for any one to climb up
+that tree, the trunk of which is so extremely delicate and fragile
+that the weight of a man would probably snap it; and, of course, a
+ladder placed against it would produce the same result. Many attempts
+have been made to secure this fruit at the proper season, but all of
+them have failed. Another palm-tree of a more robust sort was once
+planted near this one in the hope that when it grew high enough, men
+could climb up the stronger tree and get the fruit from the other.
+But, although we waited many years the second tree never attained
+sufficient height, and it was cut down."
+
+"It is a great pity," said the Captain; "but I suppose it cannot be
+helped." And then he began to make inquiries about the merchants in
+the place, and what probability there was of his doing a little trade
+here. The Captain soon discovered that the cargo of his ship was made
+up of goods which were greatly desired by the citizens of this place;
+and for several days he was very busy in selling the good things to
+eat, the sweet things to smell, the fine things to wear, and the
+beautiful things to look at, with which the hold of the "Horn o'
+Plenty" was crowded.
+
+During this time the First Class in Long Division roamed, in delight,
+over the city. The busy streets, the shops, the handsome buildings,
+and the queer sights which they occasionally met, interested and
+amused them greatly. But still the boys were not satisfied. They had
+heard of the Fragile Palm, and they made up their minds to go and
+have a look at it. Therefore, taking a guide, they tramped out into
+the country, and in about an hour they came in sight of the beautiful
+tree standing in the centre of the plain. The trunk was, indeed,
+exceedingly slender, and, as the guide informed them, the wood was of
+so very brittle a nature that if the tree had not been protected from
+the winds by the high hills which encircled it, it would have been
+snapped off ages ago. Under the broad tuft of leaves that formed its
+top, the boys saw hanging large clusters of the precious fruit; great
+nuts as big as their heads.
+
+"At what time of the year," asked the oldest boy, "is that fruit just
+ripe enough to eat?"
+
+"Now," answered the guide. "This is the season when it is in the most
+perfect condition. In about a month it will become entirely too ripe
+and soft, and will drop. But, even then, the King and all the rest of
+us are glad enough to get a taste of it."
+
+"I should think the King would be exceedingly eager to get some of
+it, just as it is," said the boy.
+
+"Indeed he is!" replied the guide. "He and his father, and I don't
+know how many grandfathers back, have offered large rewards to any
+one who would procure them this fruit in its best condition. But
+nobody has ever been able to get any yet."
+
+"The reward still holds good, I suppose," said the head boy.
+
+"Oh, yes," answered the guide; "there never was a King who so much
+desired to taste the fruit as our present monarch."
+
+The oldest boy looked up at the top of the tree, shut one eye, and
+gave his head a little wag. Whereupon every boy in the class looked
+up, shut one eye, and slightly wagged his head. After which the
+oldest boy said that he thought it was about time for them to go back
+to the ship.
+
+As soon as they reached the vessel, and could talk together freely,
+the boys had an animated discussion. It was unanimously agreed that
+they would make an attempt to get some of the precious fruit from the
+Fragile Palm, and the only difference of opinion among them was as to
+how it should be done. Most of them were in favor of some method of
+climbing the tree and trusting to its not breaking. But this the
+oldest boy would not listen to; the trunk might snap, and then
+somebody would be hurt, and he felt, in a measure, responsible for
+the rest of the class. At length a good plan was proposed by a boy
+who had studied mechanics.
+
+"What we ought to do with that tree," said he, "is to put a hinge
+into her. Then we could let her down gently, pick off the fruit, and
+set her up again.
+
+"But how are you going to do it?" asked the others.
+
+"This is the way," said the boy who had studied mechanics. "You take
+a saw, and then, about two feet from the ground, you begin and saw
+down diagonally, for a foot and a half, to the centre of the trunk.
+Then you go on the other side, and saw down in the same way, the two
+outs meeting each other. Now you have the upper part of the trunk
+ending in a wedge, which fits into a cleft in the lower part of the
+trunk. Then, about nine inches below the place where you first began
+to saw, you bore a hole straight through both sides of the cleft and
+the wedge between them. Then you put an iron bolt through this hole,
+and you have your tree on a hinge, only she wont be apt to move
+because she fits in so snug and tight. Then you get a long rope, and
+put one end in a slipknot loosely around the trunk. Then you get a
+lot of poles, and tie them end to end, and push this slip-knot up
+until it is somewhere near the top, when you pull it tight. Then you
+take another rope with a slip-knot, and push this a little more than
+half-way up the trunk. By having two ropes, that way, you prevent too
+much strain coming on any one part of the trunk. Then, after that,
+you take a mallet and chisel and round off the lower corners of the
+wedge, so that it will turn easily in the cleft. Then we take hold of
+the ropes, let her down gently, pick off the fruit, and haul her up
+again. That will all be easy enough."
+
+This plan delighted the boys, and they all pronounced in its favor;
+but the oldest one suggested that it would be better to fasten the
+ropes to the trunk before they began to saw upon it, and another boy
+asked how they were going to keep the tree standing when they hauled
+her up again.
+
+"Oh, that is easy," said the one who had studied mechanics; "you just
+bore another hole about six inches above the first one, and put in
+another bolt. Then, of course, she can't move."
+
+This settled all the difficulties, and it was agreed to start out
+early the next morning, gather the fruit, and claim the reward the
+King had offered. They accordingly went to the Captain and asked him
+for a sharp saw, a mallet and chisel, an auger, two iron bolts, and
+two very long ropes. These, having been cheerfully given to them,
+were put away in readiness for the work to be attempted.
+
+Very early on the next morning, the First Class in Long Division set
+out for the Fragile Palm, carrying their tools and ropes. Few people
+were awake as they passed through the city, and, without being
+observed, they reached the little plain on which the tree stood. The
+ropes were attached at the proper places, the tree was sawn,
+diagonally, according to the plan; the bolt was put in, and the
+corners of the wedge were rounded off. Then the eldest boy produced a
+pound of butter, whereupon his comrades, who had seized the ropes,
+paused in surprise and asked him why he had brought the butter.
+
+"I thought it well," was the reply, "to bring along some butter,
+because, when the tree is down, we can grease the hinge, and then it
+will not be so hard to pull it up again."
+
+When all was ready, eight of the boys took hold of the long ropes,
+while another one with a pole pushed against the trunk of the Fragile
+Palm. When it began to lean over a little, he dropped his pole and
+ran to help the others with the ropes. Slowly the tree moved on its
+hinge, descending at first very gradually; but it soon began to move
+with greater rapidity, although the boys held it back with all their
+strength; and, in spite of their most desperate efforts, the top came
+to the ground at last with a great thump. And then they all dropped
+their ropes, and ran for the fruit. Fortunately the great nuts
+incased in their strong husks were not in the least injured, and the
+boys soon pulled them off, about forty in all. Some of the boys were
+in favor of cracking open a few of the nuts and eating them, but this
+the eldest boy positively forbade.
+
+"This fruit," he said, "is looked upon as almost sacred, and if we
+were to eat any of it, it is probable that we should be put to death,
+which would be extremely awkward for fellows who have gone to all the
+trouble we have had. We must set up the tree and carry the fruit to
+the King."
+
+According to this advice, they thoroughly greased the hinge in the
+tree with the butter, and then set themselves to work to haul up the
+trunk. This, however, was much more difficult than letting it down;
+and they had to lift up the head of it, and prop it up on poles,
+before they could pull upon it with advantage. The tree, although
+tall, was indeed a very slender one, with a small top, and, if it had
+been as fragile as it was supposed to be, the boys' efforts would
+surely have broken it. At last, after much tugging and warm work,
+they pulled it into an upright position, and put in the second bolt.
+They left the ropes on the tree because, as some of them had
+suggested, the people might want to let the tree down again the next
+year. It would have been difficult for the boys to carry in their
+arms the great pile of fruit they had gathered; but, having noticed a
+basket-maker's cottage on their way to the tree, two of them were
+sent to buy one of his largest baskets or hampers. This was attached
+to two long poles, and, having been filled with the nuts, the boys
+took the poles on their shoulders, and marched into the city.
+
+On their way to the palace they attracted a great crowd, and when
+they were ushered into the presence of the King, his surprise and
+delight knew no bounds. At first he could scarcely believe his eyes;
+but he had seen the fruit so often that there could be no mistake
+about it.
+
+"I shall not ask you," he said to the boys, "how you procured this
+fruit, and thus accomplished a deed which has been the object of the
+ambition of myself and my forefathers. All I ask is, did you leave
+the tree standing?"
+
+"We did," said the boys.
+
+"Then all that remains to be done," said His Majesty, "is to give you
+the reward you have so nobly earned. Treasurer, measure out to each
+of them a quart of gold coin. And pray be quick about it, for I am
+wild with desire to have a table spread, and one of these nuts
+cracked, that I may taste of its luscious contents."
+
+The boys, however, appeared a little dissatisfied. Huddling together,
+they consulted in a low tone, and then the eldest boy addressed the
+King.
+
+"May it please your Majesty," he said; "we should very much prefer to
+have you give each of us one of those nuts instead of a quart of
+gold."
+
+The King looked grave. "This is a much greater reward," he said,
+"than I had ever expected to pay; but, since you ask it, you must
+have it. You have done something which none of my subjects has ever
+been able to accomplish, and it is right, therefore, that you should
+be fully satisfied."
+
+So he gave them each a nut, with which they departed in triumph to
+the ship.
+
+By the afternoon of the next day, the Captain had sold all his cargo
+at very good prices; and when the money was safely stored away in the
+"Horn o' Plenty," he made ready to sail, for he declared he had
+really no time to spare. "I must now make all possible haste," he
+said to old Baragat, "to find Apple Island, put these boys ashore,
+and then speed away to the city where lives my son. We must not fail
+to get there in time to spend last Christmas over again."
+
+On the second day, after the "Horn o' Plenty" had left the Island of
+the Fragile Palm, one of the sailors who happened to be aloft noticed
+a low, black, and exceedingly unpleasant-looking vessel rapidly
+approaching. This soon proved to be the ship of a band of corsairs,
+who, having heard of the large amount of money on the "Horn o'
+Plenty," had determined to pursue her and capture the rich prize. All
+sails were set upon the "Horn o' Plenty," but it soon became plain
+that she could never outsail the corsair vessel.
+
+"What our ship can do better than any thing else," said Baragat to
+the Captain, "is to stop short. Stop her short, and let the other one
+go by."
+
+This manoeuvre was executed, but, although the corsair passed rapidly
+by, not being able to stop so suddenly, it soon turned around and
+came back, its decks swarming with savage men armed to the teeth.
+
+"They are going to board us," cried Baragat. "They are getting out
+their grappling-irons, and they will fasten the two ships together."
+
+"Let all assemble on the quarter-deck," said the Captain. "It is
+higher there, and we shall not be so much exposed to accidents."
+
+The corsair ship soon ran alongside the "Horn o' Plenty," and in a
+moment the two vessels were fastened together; and then the corsairs,
+every man of them, each with cutlass in hand and a belt full of dirks
+and knives, swarmed up the side of the "Horn o' Plenty," and sprang
+upon its central deck. Some of the ferocious fellows, seeing the
+officers and crew all huddled together upon the quarter-deck, made a
+movement in that direction. This so frightened the chief mate that he
+sprang down upon the deck of the corsair ship. A panic now arose, and
+he was immediately followed by the officers and crew. The boys, of
+course, were not to be left behind; and the Captain and Baragat felt
+themselves bound not to desert the crew, and so they jumped also.
+None of the corsairs interfered with this proceeding, for each one of
+them was anxious to find the money at once. When the passengers and
+crew of the "Horn o' Plenty" were all on board the corsair ship,
+Baragat came to the Captain, and said:
+
+"If I were you, sir, I'd cast off those grapnels, and separate the
+vessels. If we don't do that those rascals, when they have finished
+robbing our money-chests, will come back here and murder us all."
+
+"That is a good idea," said Captain Covajos; and he told the chief
+mate to give orders to cast off the grapnels, push the two vessels
+apart, and set some of the sails.
+
+When this had been done, the corsair vessel began to move away from
+the other, and was soon many lengths distant from her. When the
+corsairs came on deck and perceived what had happened, they were
+infuriated, and immediately began to pursue their own vessel with the
+one they had captured. But the "Horn o' Plenty" could not, by any
+possibility, sail as fast as the corsair ship, and the latter easily
+kept away from her.
+
+"Now, then," said Baragat to the Captain, "what you have to do is
+easy enough. Sail straight for our port and those sea-robbers will
+follow you; for, of course, they will wish to get their own vessel
+back again, and will hope, by some carelessness on our part, to
+overtake us. In the mean time the money will be safe enough, for they
+will have no opportunity of spending it; and when we come to port, we
+can take some soldiers on board, and go back and capture those
+fellows. They can never sail away from us on the 'Horn o' Plenty.'"
+
+"That is an admirable plan," said the Captain, "and I shall carry it
+out; but I cannot sail to port immediately. I must first find Apple
+Island and land these boys, whose parents and guardians are probably
+growing very uneasy. I suppose the corsairs will continue to follow
+us wherever we go."
+
+"I hope so," said Baragat; "at any rate we shall see."
+
+The First Class in Long Division was very much delighted with the
+change of vessels, and the boys rambled everywhere, and examined with
+great interest all that belonged to the corsairs. They felt quite
+easy about the only treasures they possessed, because, when they had
+first seen the piratical vessel approaching, they had taken the
+precious nuts which had been given to them by the King, and had
+hidden them at the bottom of some large boxes, in which the Captain
+kept the sailors' winter clothes.
+
+"In this warm climate," said the eldest boy, "the robbers will never
+meddle with those winter clothes, and our precious fruit will be
+perfectly safe."
+
+"If you had taken my advice," said one of the other boys, "we should
+have eaten some of the nuts. Those, at least, we should have been
+sure of."
+
+"And we should have had that many less to show to the other classes,"
+said the eldest boy. "Nuts like these, I am told, if picked at the
+proper season, will keep for a long time."
+
+For some days the corsairs on board the "Horn o' Plenty" followed
+their own vessel, but then they seemed to despair of ever being able
+to overtake it, and steered in another direction. This threatened to
+ruin all the plans of Captain Covajos, and his mind became troubled.
+Then the boy who had studied mechanics came forward and said to the
+Captain:
+
+"I'll tell you what I'd do, sir, if I were you; I'd follow your old
+ship, and when night came on I'd sail up quite near to her, and let
+some of your sailors swim quietly over, and fasten a cable to her,
+and then you could tow her after you wherever you wished to go."
+
+"But they might unfasten the cable, or cut it," said Baragat, who was
+standing by.
+
+"That could easily be prevented," said the boy. "At their end of the
+cable must be a stout chain which they cannot cut, and it must be
+fastened so far beneath the surface of the water that they will not
+be able to reach it to unfasten it."
+
+"A most excellent plan," said Captain Covajos; "let it be carried
+out."
+
+As soon as it became quite dark, the corsair vessel quietly
+approached the other, and two stout sailors from Finland, who swam
+very well, were ordered to swim over and attach the chain-end of a
+long cable to the "Horn o' Plenty." It was a very difficult
+operation, for the chain was heavy, but the men succeeded at last,
+and returned to report.
+
+"We put the chain on, fast and strong sir," they said to the Captain;
+"and six feet under water. But the only place we could find to make
+it fast to was the bottom of the rudder."
+
+"That will do very well," remarked Baragat; "for the 'Horn o' Plenty'
+sails better backward than forward, and will not be so hard to tow."
+
+For week after week, and month after month, Captain Covajos, in the
+corsair vessel, sailed here and there in search of Apple Island,
+always towing after him the "Horn o' Plenty," with the corsairs on
+board, but never an island with a school on it could they find; and
+one day old Baragat came to the Captain and said:
+
+"If I were you, sir, I'd sail no more in these warm regions. I am
+quite sure that apples grow in colder latitudes, and are never found
+so far south as this."
+
+"That is a good idea," said Captain Covajos. "We should sail for the
+north if we wished to find an island of apples. Have the vessel
+turned northward."
+
+And so, for days and weeks, the two vessels slowly moved on to the
+north. One day the Captain made some observations and calculations,
+and then he hastily summoned Baragat.
+
+"Do you know," said he, "that I find it is now near the end of
+November, and I am quite certain that we shall not get to the port
+where my son lives in time to celebrate last Christmas again. It is
+dreadfully slow work, towing after us the 'Horn o' Plenty,' full of
+corsairs, wherever we go. But we cannot cast her off and sail
+straight for our port, for I should lose my good ship, the merchants
+would lose all their money, and the corsairs would go unpunished;
+and, besides all that, think of the misery of the parents and
+guardians of those poor boys. No; I must endeavor to find Apple
+Island. And if I cannot reach port in time to spend last Christmas
+with my son, I shall certainly get there in season for Christmas
+before last. It is true that I spent that Christmas with my daughter,
+but I cannot go on to her now. I am much nearer the city where my son
+lives; and, besides, it is necessary to go back, and give the
+merchants their money. So now we shall have plenty of time, and need
+not feel hurried."
+
+"No," said Baragat, heaving a vast sigh, "we need not feel hurried."
+
+The mind of the eldest boy now became very much troubled, and he
+called his companions about him. "I don't like at all," said he,
+"this sailing to the north. It is now November, and, although it is
+warm enough at this season in the southern part of the sea, it will
+become colder and colder as we go on. The consequence of this will be
+that those corsairs will want winter clothes, they will take them out
+of the Captain's chests, and they will find our fruit."
+
+The boys groaned. "That is true," said one of them; "but still we
+wish to go back to our island."
+
+"Of course," said the eldest boy, "it is quite proper that we should
+return to Long Division. But think of the hard work we did to get
+that fruit, and think of the quarts of gold we gave up for it! It
+would be too bad to lose it now!"
+
+It was unanimously agreed that it would be too bad to lose the fruit,
+and it was also unanimously agreed that they wished to go back to
+Apple Island. But what to do about it, they did not know.
+
+Day by day the weather grew colder and colder, and the boys became
+more and more excited and distressed for fear they should lose their
+precious fruit. The eldest boy lay awake for several nights, and then
+a plan came into his head. He went to Captain Covajos and proposed
+that he should send a flag of truce over to the corsairs, offering to
+exchange winter clothing. He would send over to them the heavy
+garments they had left on their own vessel, and in return would take
+the boxes of clothes intended for the winter wear of his sailors. In
+this way, they would get their fruit back without the corsairs
+knowing any thing about it. The Captain considered this an excellent
+plan, and ordered the chief mate to take a boat and a flag of truce,
+and go over to the "Horn o' Plenty," and make the proposition. The
+eldest boy and two of the others insisted on going also, in order
+that there might be no mistake about the boxes. But when the
+flag-of-truce party reached the "Horn o' Plenty" they found not a
+corsair there! Every man of them had gone. They had taken with them
+all the money-chests, but to the great delight of the boys, the boxes
+of winter clothes had not been disturbed; and in them still nestled,
+safe and sound, the precious nuts of the Fragile Palm.
+
+When the matter had been thoroughly looked into, it became quite
+evident what the corsairs had done. There had been only one boat on
+board the "Horn o' Plenty," and that was the one on which the First
+Class in Long Division had arrived. The night before, the two vessels
+had passed within a mile or so of a large island, which the Captain
+had approached in the hope it was the one they were looking for, and
+they passed it so slowly that the corsairs had time to ferry
+themselves over, a few at a time, in the little boat, taking with
+them the money,--and all without discovery.
+
+Captain Covajos was greatly depressed when he heard of the loss of
+all the money.
+
+"I shall have a sad tale to tell my merchants," he said, "and
+Christmas before last will not be celebrated so joyously as it was
+the first time. But we cannot help what has happened, and we all must
+endeavor to bear our losses with patience. We shall continue our
+search for Apple Island, but I shall go on board my own ship, for I
+have greatly missed my carpeted quarter-deck and my other comforts.
+The chief mate, however, and a majority of the crew shall remain on
+board the corsair vessel, and continue to tow us. The 'Horn o'
+Plenty' sails better stern foremost, and we shall go faster that
+way."
+
+The boys were overjoyed at recovering their fruit, and most of them
+were in favor of cracking two or three of the great nuts, and eating
+their contents in honor of the occasion, but the eldest boy dissuaded
+them.
+
+"The good Captain," he said, "has been very kind in endeavoring to
+take us back to our school, and still intends to keep up the search
+for dear old Apple Island. The least we can do for him is to give him
+this fruit, which is all we have, and let him do what he pleases with
+it. This is the only way in which we can show our gratitude to him."
+
+The boys turned their backs on one another, and each of them gave his
+eyes a little rub, but they all agreed to give the fruit to the
+Captain.
+
+When the good old man received his present, he was much affected. "I
+will accept what you offer me," he said; "for if I did not, I know
+your feelings would be wounded. But you must keep one of the nuts for
+yourselves. And, more than that, if we do not find Apple Island in
+the course of the coming year, I invite you all to spend Christmas
+before last over again, with me at my son's house."
+
+All that winter, the two ships sailed up and down, and here and
+there, but never could they find Apple Island. When Christmas-time
+came, old Baragat went around among the boys and the crew, and told
+them it would be well not to say a word on the subject to the
+Captain, for his feelings were very tender in regard to spending
+Christmas away from his families, and the thing had never happened
+before. So nobody made any allusion to the holidays, and they passed
+over as if they had been ordinary days.
+
+During the spring, and all through the summer, the two ships kept up
+the unavailing search, but when the autumn began, Captain Covajos
+said to old Baragat: "I am very sorry, but I feel that I can no
+longer look for Apple Island. I must go back and spend Christmas
+before last over again, with my dearest son; and if these poor boys
+never return to their homes, I am sure they cannot say it was any
+fault of mine."
+
+"No, sir," said Baragat, "I think you have done all that could be
+expected of you."
+
+So the ships sailed to the city on the west side of the sea; and the
+Captain was received with great joy by his son, and his
+grandchildren. He went to the merchants, and told them how he had
+lost all their money. He hoped they would be able to bear their
+misfortune with fortitude, and begged, as he could do nothing else
+for them, that they would accept the eight great nuts from the
+Fragile Palm that the boys had given him. To his surprise the
+merchants became wild with delight when they received the nuts. The
+money they had lost was as nothing, they said, compared to the value
+of this incomparable and precious fruit, picked in its prime, and
+still in a perfect condition.
+
+It had been many, many generations since this rare fruit, the value
+of which was like unto that of diamonds and pearls, had been for sale
+in any market in the world; and kings and queens in many countries
+were ready to give for it almost any price that might be asked.
+
+When the good old Captain heard this he was greatly rejoiced, and, as
+the holidays were now near, he insisted that the boys should spend
+Christmas before last over again, at his son's house. He found that a
+good many people here knew where Apple Island was, and he made
+arrangements for the First Class in Long Division to return to that
+island in a vessel which was to sail about the first of the year.
+
+The boys still possessed the great nut which the Captain had insisted
+they should keep for themselves, and he now told them that if they
+chose to sell it, they would each have a nice little fortune to take
+back with them. The eldest boy consulted the others, and then he said
+to the Captain:
+
+"Our class has gone through a good many hardships, and has had a lot
+of trouble with that palm-tree and other things, and we think we
+ought to be rewarded. So, if it is all the same to you, I think we
+will crack the nut on Christmas Day and we all will eat it."
+
+"I never imagined," cried Captain Covajos, as he sat, on that
+Christmas Day, surrounded by his son's family and the First Class in
+Long Division, the eyes of the whole party sparkling with ecstasy as
+they tasted the peerless fruit of the Fragile Palm, "that Christmas
+before last could be so joyfully celebrated over again."
+
+
+
+
+
+ PRINCE HASSAK'S MARCH.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+In the spring of a certain year, long since passed away, Prince
+Hassak, of Itoby, determined to visit his uncle, the King of Yan.
+
+"Whenever my uncle visited us," said the Prince, "or when my late
+father went to see him, the journey was always made by sea; and, in
+order to do this, it was necessary to go in a very roundabout way
+between Itoby and Yan. Now, I shall do nothing of this kind. It is
+beneath the dignity of a prince to go out of his way on account of
+capes, peninsulas, and promontories. I shall march from my palace to
+that of my uncle in a straight line. I shall go across the country,
+and no obstacle shall cause me to deviate from my course. Mountains
+and hills shall be tunnelled, rivers shall be bridged, houses shall
+be levelled; a road shall be cut through forests; and, when I have
+finished my march, the course over which I have passed shall be a
+mathematically straight line. Thus will I show to the world that,
+when a prince desires to travel, it is not necessary for him to go
+out of his way on account of obstacles."
+
+As soon as possible after the Prince had determined upon this march,
+he made his preparations, and set out. He took with him a
+few courtiers, and a large body of miners, rock-splitters,
+bridge-builders, and workmen of that class, whose services would,
+very probably, be needed. Besides these, he had an officer whose duty
+it was to point out the direct course to be taken, and another who
+was to draw a map of the march, showing the towns, mountains, and the
+various places it passed through. There were no compasses in those
+days, but the course-marker had an instrument which he would set in a
+proper direction by means of the stars, and then he could march by it
+all day. Besides these persons, Prince Hassak selected from the
+schools of his city five boys and five girls, and took them with him.
+He wished to show them how, when a thing was to be done, the best way
+was to go straight ahead and do it, turning aside for nothing.
+
+"When they grow up they will teach these things to their children,"
+said he; "and thus I shall instil good principles into my people."
+
+The first day Prince Hassak and his party marched over a level
+country, with no further trouble than that occasioned by the tearing
+down of fences and walls, and the destruction of a few cottages and
+barns. After encamping for the night, they set out the next morning,
+but had not marched many miles before they came to a rocky hill, on
+the top of which was a handsome house, inhabited by a Jolly-cum-pop.
+
+"Your Highness," said the course-marker, "in order to go in a direct
+line we must make a tunnel through this hill, immediately under the
+house. This may cause the building to fall in, but the rubbish can be
+easily removed."
+
+"Let the men go to work," said the Prince. "I will dismount from my
+horse, and watch the proceedings."
+
+When the Jolly-cum-pop saw the party halt before his house, he
+hurried out to pay his respects to the Prince. When he was informed
+of what was to be done, the Jolly-cum-pop could not refrain from
+laughing aloud.
+
+"I never heard," he said, "of such a capital idea. It is so odd and
+original. It will be very funny, I am sure, to see a tunnel cut right
+under my house."
+
+The miners and rock-splitters now began to work at the base of the
+hill, and then the Jolly-cum-pop made a proposition to the Prince.
+
+"It will take your men some time," he said, "to cut this tunnel, and
+it is a pity your Highness should not be amused in the meanwhile. It
+is a fine day: suppose we go into the forest and hunt."
+
+This suited the Prince very well, for he did not care about sitting
+under a tree and watching his workmen, and the Jolly-cum-pop having
+sent for his horse and some bows and arrows, the whole party, with
+the exception of the laborers, rode toward the forest, a short
+distance away.
+
+"What shall we find to hunt?" asked the Prince of the Jolly-cum-pop.
+
+"I really do not know," exclaimed the latter, "but we'll hunt
+whatever we happen to see--deer, small birds, rabbits, griffins,
+rhinoceroses, any thing that comes along. I feel as gay as a skipping
+grasshopper. My spirits rise like a soaring bird. What a joyful thing
+it is to have such a hunt on such a glorious day!"
+
+The gay and happy spirits of the Jolly-cum-pop affected the whole
+party, and they rode merrily through the forest; but they found no
+game; and, after an hour or two, they emerged into the open country
+again. At a distance, on a slight elevation, stood a large and
+massive building.
+
+"I am hungry and thirsty," said the Prince, "and perhaps we can get
+some refreshments at yonder house. So far, this has not been a very
+fine hunt."
+
+"No," cried the Jolly-cum-pop, "not yet. But what a joyful thing to
+see a hospitable mansion just at the moment when we begin to feel a
+little tired and hungry!"
+
+The building they were approaching belonged to a Potentate, who lived
+at a great distance. In some of his travels he had seen this massive
+house, and thought it would make a good prison. He accordingly bought
+it, fitted it up as a jail, and appointed a jailer and three
+myrmidons to take charge of it. This had occurred years before, but
+no prisoners had ever been sent to this jail. A few days preceding
+the Jolly-cum-pop's hunt, the Potentate had journeyed this way and
+had stopped at his jail. After inquiring into its condition, he had
+said to the jailer:
+
+"It is now fourteen years since I appointed you to this place, and in
+all that time there have been no prisoners, and you and your men have
+been drawing your wages without doing any thing. I shall return this
+way in a few days, and if I still find you idle I shall discharge you
+all and close the jail."
+
+This filled the jailer with great dismay, for he did not wish to lose
+his good situation. When he saw the Prince and his party approaching,
+the thought struck him that perhaps he might make prisoners of them,
+and so not be found idle when the Potentate returned. He came out to
+meet the hunters, and when they asked if they could here find
+refreshment, he gave them a most cordial welcome. His men took their
+horses, and, inviting them to enter, he showed each member of the
+party into a small bedroom, of which there seemed to be a great many.
+
+"Here are water and towels," he said to each one, "and when you have
+washed your face and hands, your refreshments will be ready." Then,
+going out, he locked the door on the outside.
+
+The party numbered seventeen: the Prince, three courtiers, five boys,
+five girls, the course-marker, the map-maker, and the Jolly-cum-pop.
+The heart of the jailer was joyful; seventeen inmates was something
+to be proud of. He ordered his myrmidons to give the prisoners a meal
+of bread and water through the holes in their cell-doors, and then he
+sat down to make out his report to the Potentate.
+
+"They must all be guilty of crimes," he said to himself, "which are
+punished by long imprisonment. I don't want any of them executed."
+
+So he numbered his prisoners from one to seventeen, according to the
+cell each happened to be in, and he wrote a crime opposite each
+number. The first was highway robbery, the next forgery, and after
+that followed treason, smuggling, barn-burning, bribery, poaching,
+usury, piracy, witchcraft, assault and battery, using false weights
+and measures, burglary, counterfeiting, robbing hen-roosts,
+conspiracy, and poisoning his grandmother by proxy.
+
+This report was scarcely finished when the Potentate returned. He was
+very much surprised to find that seventeen prisoners had come in
+since his previous visit, and he read the report with interest.
+
+"Here is one who ought to be executed," he said, referring to Number
+Seventeen. "And how did he poison his grandmother by proxy? Did he
+get another woman to be poisoned in her stead? Or did he employ some
+one to act in his place as the poisoner?"
+
+"I have not yet been fully informed, my lord," said the jailer,
+fearful that he should lose a prisoner; "but this is his first
+offence, and his grandmother, who did not die, has testified to his
+general good character."
+
+"Very well," said the Potentate; "but if he ever does it again, let
+him be executed; and, by the way, I should like to see the
+prisoners."
+
+Thereupon the jailer conducted the Potentate along the corridors, and
+let him look through the holes in the doors at the prisoners within.
+
+"What is this little girl in for?" he asked.
+
+The jailer looked at the number over the door, and then at his
+report.
+
+"Piracy," he answered.
+
+"A strange offence for such a child," said the Potentate.
+
+"They often begin that sort of thing very early in life," said the
+jailer.
+
+"And this fine gentleman," said the Potentate, looking in at the
+Prince, "what did he do?"
+
+The jailer glanced at the number, and the report.
+
+"Robbed hen-roosts," he said.
+
+"He must have done a good deal of it to afford to dress so well,"
+said the Potentate, passing on, and looking into other cells. "It
+seems to me that many of your prisoners are very young."
+
+"It is best to take them young, my lord," said the jailer. "They are
+very hard to catch when they grow up."
+
+The Potentate then looked in at the Jolly-cum-pop, and asked what was
+his offence.
+
+"Conspiracy," was the answer.
+
+"And where are the other conspirators?"
+
+"There was only one," said the jailer.
+
+Number Seventeen was the oldest of the courtiers.
+
+"He appears to be an elderly man to have a grandmother," said the
+Potentate. "She must be very aged, and that makes it all the worse
+for him. I think he should be executed."
+
+"Oh, no, my lord," cried the jailor. "I am assured that his crime was
+quite unintentional."
+
+"Then he should be set free," said the Potentate.
+
+"I mean to say," said the jailer, "that it was just enough
+intentional to cause him to be imprisoned here for a long time, but
+not enough to deserve execution."
+
+"Very well," said the Potentate, turning to leave; "take good care of
+your prisoners, and send me a report every month."
+
+"That will I do, my lord," said the jailer, bowing very low.
+
+The Prince and his party had been very much surprised and incensed
+when they found that they could not get out of their rooms, and they
+had kicked and banged and shouted until they were tired, but the
+jailer had informed them that they were to be confined there for
+years; and when the Potentate arrived they had resigned themselves to
+despair. The Jolly-cum-pop, however, was affected in a different way.
+It seemed to him the most amusing joke in the world that a person
+should deliberately walk into a prison-cell and be locked up for
+several years; and he lay down on his little bed and laughed himself
+to sleep.
+
+That night one of the boys sat at his iron-barred window, wide awake.
+He was a Truant, and had never yet been in any place from which he
+could not run away. He felt that his school-fellows depended upon him
+to run away and bring them assistance, and he knew that his
+reputation as a Truant was at stake. His responsibility was so heavy
+that he could not sleep, and he sat at the window, trying to think of
+a way to get out. After some hours the moon arose, and by its light
+he saw upon the grass, not far from his window, a number of little
+creatures, which at first he took for birds or small squirrels; but
+on looking more attentively he perceived that they were pigwidgeons.
+They were standing around a flat stone, and seemed to be making
+calculations on it with a piece of chalk. At this sight, the heart of
+the Truant jumped for joy. "Pigwidgeons can do any thing," he said to
+himself, "and these certainly can get us out." He now tried in
+various ways to attract the attention of the pigwidgeons; but as he
+was afraid to call or whistle very loud, for fear of arousing the
+jailor, he did not succeed. Happily, he thought of a pea-shooter
+which he had in his pocket, and taking this out he blew a pea into
+the midst of the little group with such force that it knocked the
+chalk from the hand of the pigwidgeon who was using it. The little
+fellows looked up in astonishment, and perceived the Truant beckoning
+to them from his window. At first they stood angrily regarding him;
+but on his urging them in a loud whisper to come to his relief, they
+approached the prison and, clambering up a vine, soon reached his
+window-sill. The Truant now told his mournful tale, to which the
+pigwidgeons listened very attentively; and then, after a little
+consultation among themselves, one of them said: "We will get you out
+if you will tell us how to divide five-sevenths by six."
+
+The poor Truant was silent for an instant, and then he said: "That is
+not the kind of thing I am good at, but I expect some of the other
+fellows could tell you easily enough. Our windows must be all in a
+row, and you can climb up and ask some of them; and if any one tells
+you, will you get us all out?"
+
+"Yes," said the pigwidgeon who had spoken before. "We will do that,
+for we are very anxious to know how to divide five-sevenths by six.
+We have been working at it for four or five days, and there won't be
+any thing worth dividing if we wait much longer."
+
+The pigwidgeons now began to descend the vine; but one of them
+lingering a little, the Truant, who had a great deal of curiosity,
+asked him what it was they had to divide.
+
+"There were eight of us," the pigwidgeon answered, "who helped a
+farmer's wife, and she gave us a pound of butter. She did not count
+us properly, and divided the butter into seven parts. We did not
+notice this at first, and two of the party, who were obliged to go
+away to a distance, took their portions and departed, and now we can
+not divide among six the five-sevenths that remain."
+
+"That is a pretty hard thing," said the Truant, "but I am sure some
+of the boys can tell you how to do it."
+
+The pigwidgeons visited the next four cells, which were occupied by
+four boys, but not one of them could tell how to divide five-sevenths
+by six. The Prince was questioned, but he did not know; and neither
+did the course-marker, nor the map-maker. It was not until they came
+to the cell of the oldest girl that they received an answer. She was
+good at mental arithmetic; and, after a minute's thought, she said,
+"It would be five forty-seconds."
+
+"Good!" cried the pigwidgeons. "We will divide the butter into
+forty-two parts, and each take five. And now let us go to work and
+cut these bars."
+
+Three of the six pigwidgeons were workers in iron, and they had their
+little files and saws in pouches by their sides. They went to work
+manfully, and the others helped them, and before morning one bar was
+cut in each of the seventeen windows. The cells were all on the
+ground floor, and it was quite easy for the prisoners to clamber out.
+That is, it was easy for all but the Jolly-cum-pop. He had laughed so
+much in his life that he had grown quite fat, and he found it
+impossible to squeeze himself through the opening made by the removal
+of one iron bar. The sixteen other prisoners had all departed; the
+pigwidgeons had hurried away to divide their butter into forty-two
+parts, and the Jolly-cum-pop still remained in his cell, convulsed
+with laughter at the idea of being caught in such a curious
+predicament.
+
+"It is the most ridiculous thing in the world," he said. "I suppose I
+must stay here and cry until I get thin." And the idea so tickled
+him, that he laughed himself to sleep.
+
+The Prince and his party kept together, and hurried from the prison
+as fast as they could. When the day broke they had gone several
+miles, and then they stopped to rest. "Where is that Jolly-cum-pop?"
+said the Prince. "I suppose he has gone home. He is a pretty fellow
+to lead us into this trouble and then desert us! How are we to find
+the way back to his house? Course-marker, can you tell us the
+direction in which we should go?"
+
+"Not until to-night, your Highness," answered the course-marker,
+"when I can set my instrument by the stars."
+
+The Prince's party was now in a doleful plight. Every one was very
+hungry; they were in an open plain, no house was visible, and they
+knew not which way to go. They wandered about for some time, looking
+for a brook or a spring where they might quench their thirst; and
+then a rabbit sprang out from some bushes. The whole party
+immediately started off in pursuit of the rabbit. They chased it
+here, there, backward and forward, through hollows and over hills,
+until it ran quite away and disappeared. Then they were more tired,
+thirsty, and hungry than before; and, to add to their miseries, when
+night came on the sky was cloudy, and the course-marker could not set
+his instrument by the stars. It would be difficult to find sixteen
+more miserable people than the Prince and his companions when they
+awoke the next morning from their troubled sleep on the hard ground.
+Nearly starved, they gazed at one another with feelings of despair.
+
+"I feel," said the Prince, in a weak voice, "that there is nothing I
+would not do to obtain food. I would willingly become a slave if my
+master would give me a good breakfast."
+
+"So would I," ejaculated each of the others.
+
+About an hour after this, as they were all sitting disconsolately
+upon the ground, they saw, slowly approaching, a large cart drawn by
+a pair of oxen. On the front of the cart, which seemed to be heavily
+loaded, sat a man, with a red beard, reading a book. The boys, when
+they saw the cart, set up a feeble shout, and the man, lifting his
+eyes from his book, drove directly toward the group on the ground.
+Dismounting, he approached Prince Hassak, who immediately told him
+his troubles and implored relief. "We will do any thing," said the
+Prince, "to obtain food."
+
+Standing for a minute in a reflective mood, the man with the red
+beard addressed the Prince in a slow, meditative manner: "How would
+you like," he said, "to form a nucleus?"
+
+"Can we get any thing to eat by it?" eagerly asked the Prince.
+
+"Yes," replied the man, "you can."
+
+"We'll do it!" immediately cried the whole sixteen, without waiting
+for further information.
+
+"Which will you do first," said the man, "listen to my explanations,
+or eat?"
+
+"Eat!" cried the entire sixteen in chorus.
+
+The man now produced from his cart a quantity of bread, meat, wine,
+and other provisions, which he distributed generously, but
+judiciously, to the hungry Prince and his followers. Every one had
+enough, but no one too much. And soon, revived and strengthened, they
+felt like new beings.
+
+"Now," said the Prince, "we are ready to form a nucleus, as we
+promised. How is it done?"
+
+"I will explain the matter to you in a few words," said the man with
+the red beard. "For a long time I have been desirous to found a city.
+In order to do this one must begin by forming a nucleus. Every great
+city is started from a nucleus. A few persons settle down in some
+particular spot, and live there. Then they are a nucleus. Then other
+people come there, and gather around this nucleus, and then more
+people come and more, until in course of time there is a great city.
+I have loaded this cart with provisions, tools, and other things that
+are necessary for my purpose, and have set out to find some people
+who would be willing to form a nucleus. I am very glad to have found
+you and that you are willing to enter into my plan; and this seems a
+good spot for us to settle upon."
+
+"What is the first thing to be done?" said the Prince.
+
+"We must all go to work," said the man with the red beard, "to build
+dwellings, and also a school-house for these young people. Then we
+must till some ground in the suburbs, and lay the foundations, at
+least, of a few public buildings."
+
+"All this will take a good while, will it not?" said the Prince.
+
+"Yes," said the man, "it will take a good while; and the sooner we
+set about it, the better."
+
+Thereupon tools were distributed among the party, and Prince,
+courtiers, boys, girls, and all went to work to build houses and form
+the nucleus of a city.
+
+When the jailer looked into his cells in the morning, and found that
+all but one of his prisoners had escaped, he was utterly astounded,
+and his face, when the Jolly-cum-pop saw him, made that individual
+roar with laughter. The jailer, however, was a man accustomed to deal
+with emergencies. "You need not laugh," he said, "every thing shall
+go on as before, and I shall take no notice of the absence of your
+companions. You are now numbered One to Seventeen inclusive, and you
+stand charged with highway robbery, forgery, treason, smuggling,
+barn-burning, bribery, poaching, usury, piracy, witchcraft, assault
+and battery, using false weights and measures, burglary,
+counterfeiting, robbing hen-roosts, conspiracy, and poisoning your
+grandmother by proxy. I intended to-day to dress the convicts in
+prison garb, and you shall immediately be so clothed."
+
+"I shall require seventeen suits," said the Jolly-cum-pop.
+
+"Yes," said the jailer, "they shall be furnished."
+
+"And seventeen rations a day," said the Jolly-cum-pop.
+
+"Certainly," replied the jailer.
+
+"This is luxury," roared the Jolly-cum-pop. "I shall spend my whole
+time in eating and putting on clean clothes."
+
+Seventeen large prison suits were now brought to the Jolly-cum-pop.
+He put one on, and hung up the rest in his cell. These suits were
+half bright yellow and half bright green, with spots of bright red,
+as big as saucers.
+
+The jailer now had doors cut from one cell to another. "If the
+Potentate comes here and wants to look at the prisoners," he said to
+the Jolly-cum-pop, "you must appear in cell number One, so that he
+can look through the hole in the door, and see you; then, as he walks
+along the corridor, you must walk through the cells, and whenever he
+looks into a cell, you must be there."
+
+"He will think," merrily replied the Jolly-cum-pop, "that all your
+prisoners are very fat, and that the little girls have grown up into
+big men."
+
+"I will endeavor to explain that," said the jailer.
+
+For several days the Jolly-cum-pop was highly amused at the idea of
+his being seventeen criminals, and he would sit first in one cell and
+then in another, trying to look like a ferocious pirate, a
+hard-hearted usurer, or a mean-spirited chicken thief, and laughing
+heartily at his failures. But, after a time, he began to tire of
+this, and to have a strong desire to see what sort of a tunnel the
+Prince's miners and rock-splitters were making under his house. "I
+had hoped," he said to himself, "that I should pine away in
+confinement, and so be able to get through the window-bars; but with
+nothing to do, and seventeen rations a day, I see no chance of that.
+But I must get out of this jail, and, as there seems no other way, I
+will revolt." Thereupon he shouted to the jailer through the hole in
+the door of his cell: "We have revolted! We have risen in a body, and
+have determined to resist your authority, and break jail!"
+
+When the jailer heard this, he was greatly troubled. "Do not proceed
+to violence," he said; "let us parley."
+
+"Very well," replied the Jolly-cum-pop, "but you must open the cell
+door. We cannot parley through a hole."
+
+The jailer thereupon opened the cell door, and the Jolly-cum-pop,
+having wrapped sixteen suits of clothes around his left arm as a
+shield, and holding in his right hand the iron bar which had been cut
+from his window, stepped boldly into the corridor, and confronted the
+jailer and his myrmidons.
+
+"It will be useless for you to resist," he said. "You are but four,
+and we are seventeen. If you had been wise you would have made us all
+cheating shop-keepers, chicken thieves, or usurers. Then you might
+have been able to control us; but when you see before you a desperate
+highwayman, a daring smuggler, a blood-thirsty pirate, a wily
+poacher, a powerful ruffian, a reckless burglar, a bold conspirator,
+and a murderer by proxy, you well may tremble!"
+
+The jailer and his myrmidons looked at each other in dismay.
+
+"We sigh for no blood," continued the Jolly-cum-pop, "and will
+readily agree to terms. We will give you your choice: Will you allow
+us to honorably surrender, and peacefully disperse to our homes, or
+shall we rush upon you in a body, and, after overpowering you by
+numbers, set fire to the jail, and escape through the crackling
+timbers of the burning pile?"
+
+The jailer reflected for a minute. "It would be better, perhaps," he
+said, "that you should surrender and disperse to your homes."
+
+The Jolly-cum-pop agreed to these terms, and the great gate being
+opened, he marched out in good order. "Now," said he to himself, "the
+thing for me to do is to get home as fast as I can, or that jailer
+may change his mind." But, being in a great hurry, he turned the
+wrong way, and walked rapidly into a country unknown to him. His walk
+was a very merry one. "By this time," he said to himself, "the Prince
+and his followers have returned to my house, and are tired of
+watching the rock-splitters and miners. How amused they will be when
+they see me come back in this gay suit of green and yellow, with red
+spots, and with sixteen similar suits upon my arm! How my own dogs
+will bark at me! And how my own servants will not know me! It is the
+funniest thing I ever knew of!" And his gay laugh echoed far and
+wide. But when he had gone several miles without seeing any signs of
+his habitation, his gayety abated. "It would have been much better,"
+he said, as he sat down to rest under the shade of a tree, "if I had
+brought with me sixteen rations instead of these sixteen suits of
+clothes."
+
+The Jolly-cum-pop soon set out again, but he walked a long distance
+without seeing any person or any house. Toward the close of the
+afternoon he stopped, and, looking back, he saw coming toward him a
+large party of foot travellers. In a few moments, he perceived that
+the person in advance was the jailer. At this the Jolly-cum-pop could
+not restrain his merriment. "How comically it has all turned out!" he
+exclaimed. "Here I've taken all this trouble, and tired myself out,
+and have nearly starved myself, and the jailer comes now, with a
+crowd of people, and takes me back. I might as well have staid where
+I was. Ha! ha!"
+
+The jailer now left his party and came running toward the
+Jolly-cum-pop. "I pray you, sir," he said, bowing very low, "do not
+cast us off."
+
+"Who are you all?" asked the Jolly-cum-pop, looking with much
+surprise at the jailer's companions, who were now quite near.
+
+"We are myself, my three myrmidons, and our wives and children. Our
+situations were such good ones that we married long ago, and our
+families lived in the upper stories of the prison. But when all the
+convicts had left we were afraid to remain, for, should the Potentate
+again visit the prison, he would be disappointed and enraged at
+finding no prisoners, and would, probably, punish us grievously. So
+we determined to follow you, and to ask you to let us go with you,
+wherever you are going. I wrote a report, which I fastened to the
+great gate, and in it I stated that sixteen of the convicts escaped
+by the aid of outside confederates, and that seventeen of them
+mutinied in a body and broke jail."
+
+"That report," laughed the Jolly-cum-pop, "your Potentate will not
+readily understand."
+
+"If I were there," said the jailer, "I could explain it to him; but,
+as it is, he must work it out for himself."
+
+"Have you any thing to eat with you?" asked the Jolly-cum-pop.
+
+"Oh, yes," said the jailer, "we brought provisions."
+
+"Well, then, I gladly take you under my protection. Let us have
+supper. I have had nothing to eat since morning, and the weight of
+sixteen extra suits of clothes does not help to refresh one."
+
+The Jolly-cum-pop and his companions slept that night under some
+trees, and started off early the next morning. "If I could only get
+myself turned in the proper direction," said he, "I believe we should
+soon reach my house."
+
+The Prince, his courtiers, the boys and girls, the course-marker, and
+the map-maker worked industriously for several days at the foundation
+of their city. They dug the ground, they carried stones, they cut
+down trees. This work was very hard for all of them, for they were
+not used to it. After a few days' labor, the Prince said to the man
+with the red beard, who was reading his book: "I think we have now
+formed a nucleus. Any one can see that this is intended to be a
+city."
+
+"No," said the man with the red beard, "nothing is truly a nucleus
+until something is gathered around it. Proceed with your work, while
+I continue my studies upon civil government."
+
+Toward the close of that day the red-bearded man raised his eyes from
+his book and beheld the Jolly-cum-pop and his party approaching.
+"Hurrah!" he cried, "we are already attracting settlers!" And he went
+forth to meet them.
+
+When the prince and the courtiers saw the Jolly-cum-pop in his bright
+and variegated dress, they did not know him; but the boys and girls
+soon recognized his jovial face, and, tired as they were, they set up
+a hearty laugh, in which they were loudly joined by their merry
+friend. While the Jolly-cum-pop was listening to the adventures of
+the Prince and his companions, and telling what had happened to
+himself, the man with the red beard was talking to the jailer and his
+party, and urging them to gather around the nucleus which had been
+here formed, and help to build a city.
+
+"Nothing will suit us better," exclaimed the jailer, "and the sooner
+we build a town wall so as to keep off the Potentate, if he should
+come this way, the better shall we be satisfied."
+
+The next morning, the Prince said to the red-bearded man: "Others
+have gathered around us. We have formed a nucleus, and thus have done
+all that we promised to do. We shall now depart."
+
+The man objected strongly to this, but the Prince paid no attention
+to his words. "What troubles me most," he said to the Jolly-cum-pop,
+"is the disgraceful condition of our clothes. They have been so torn
+and soiled during our unaccustomed work that they are not fit to be
+seen."
+
+"As for that," said the Jolly-cum-pop, "I have sixteen suits with me,
+in which you can all dress, if you like. They are of unusual
+patterns, but they are new and clean."
+
+"It is better," said the Prince, "for persons in my station to appear
+inordinately gay than to be seen in rags and dirt. We will accept
+your clothes."
+
+Thereupon, the Prince and each of the others put on a prison dress of
+bright green and yellow, with large red spots. There were some
+garments left over, for each boy wore only a pair of trousers with
+the waistband tied around his neck, and holes cut for his arms; while
+the large jackets, with the sleeves tucked, made very good dresses
+for the girls. The Prince and his party, accompanied by the
+Jolly-cum-pop, now left the red-bearded man and his new settlers to
+continue the building of the city, and set off on their journey. The
+course-marker had not been informed the night before that they were
+to go away that morning, and consequently did not set his instrument
+by the stars.
+
+"As we do not know in which way we should go," said the Prince, "one
+way will be as good as another, and if we can find a road let us take
+it; it will be easier walking."
+
+In an hour or two they found a road and they took it. After
+journeying the greater part of the day, they reached the top of a low
+hill, over which the road ran, and saw before them a glittering sea
+and the spires and houses of a city.
+
+"It is the city of Yan," said the course-marker.
+
+"That is true," said the Prince; "and as we are so near, we may as
+well go there."
+
+The astonishment of the people of Yan, when this party, dressed in
+bright green and yellow, with red spots, passed through their
+streets, was so great that the Jolly-cum-pop roared with laughter.
+This set the boys and girls and all the people laughing, and the
+sounds of merriment became so uproarious that when they reached the
+palace the King came out to see what was the matter. What he thought
+when he saw his nephew in his fantastic guise, accompanied by a party
+apparently composed of sixteen other lunatics, cannot now be known;
+but, after hearing the Prince's story, he took him into an inner
+apartment, and thus addressed him: "My dear Hassak: The next time you
+pay me a visit, I beg for your sake and my own, that you will come in
+the ordinary way. You have sufficiently shown to the world that, when
+a Prince desires to travel, it is often necessary for him to go out
+of his way on account of obstacles."
+
+"My dear uncle," replied Hassak, "your words shall not be forgotten."
+
+After a pleasant visit of a few weeks, the Prince and his party (in
+new clothes) returned (by sea) to Itoby, whence the Jolly-cum-pop
+soon repaired to his home. There he found the miners and
+rock-splitters still at work at the tunnel, which had now penetrated
+half-way through the hill on which stood his house. "You may go
+home," he said, "for the Prince has changed his plans. I will put a
+door to this tunnel, and it will make an excellent cellar in which to
+keep my wine and provisions."
+
+The day after the Prince's return his map-maker said to him: "Your
+Highness, according to your commands I made, each day, a map of your
+progress to the city of Yan. Here it is."
+
+The Prince glanced at it and then he cast his eyes upon the floor.
+"Leave me," he said. "I would be alone."
+
+[Illustration: THE MAP OF THE PRINCE'S JOURNEY FROM ITOBY TO YAN.]
+
+
+
+
+
+ THE BATTLE OF THE THIRD COUSINS.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+There were never many persons who could correctly bound the Autocracy
+of Mutjado. The reason for this was that the boundary line was not
+stationary. Whenever the Autocrat felt the need of money, he sent his
+tax-gatherers far and wide, and people who up to that time had no
+idea of such a thing found that they lived in the territory of
+Mutjado. But when times were ordinarily prosperous with him, and
+people in the outlying districts needed protection or public works,
+the dominion of the Autocrat became very much contracted.
+
+In the course of time, the Autocrat of Mutjado fell into bad health
+and sent for his doctor. That learned man prescribed some medicine
+for him; and as this did him no good, he ordered another kind. He
+continued this method of treatment until the Autocrat had swallowed
+the contents of fifteen phials and flasks, some large and some small.
+As none of these were of the slightest benefit, the learned doctor
+produced another kind of medicine which he highly extolled.
+
+"Take a dose of this twice a day," said he, "and you will soon
+find--"
+
+"A new medicine?" interrupted the Autocrat, in disgust. "I will have
+none of it! These others were bad enough, and rather than start with
+a new physic, I prefer to die. Take away your bottles, little and
+big, and send me my secretary."
+
+When that officer arrived, the Autocrat informed him that he had
+determined to write his will, and that he should set about it at
+once.
+
+The Autocrat of Mutjado had no son, and his nearest male relatives
+were a third cousin on his father's side, and another third cousin on
+his mother's side. Of course these persons were in nowise related to
+each other; and as they lived in distant countries, he had never seen
+either of them. He had made up his mind to leave his throne and
+dominions to one of these persons, but he could not determine which
+of them should be his heir.
+
+"One has as good a right as the other," he said to himself, "and I
+can't bother my brains settling the matter for them. Let them fight
+it out, and whoever conquers shall be Autocrat of Mutjado."
+
+Having arranged the affair in this manner in his will, he signed it,
+and soon after died.
+
+The Autocrat's third cousin on his father's side was a young man of
+about twenty-five, named Alberdin. He was a good horseman, and
+trained in the arts of warfare, and when he was informed of the terms
+of his distinguished relative's will, he declared himself perfectly
+willing to undertake the combat for the throne. He set out for
+Mutjado, where he arrived in a reasonable time.
+
+The third cousin on the mother's side was a very different person. He
+was a boy of about twelve years of age; and as his father and mother
+had died when he was very young, he had been for nearly all his life
+under the charge of an elderly and prudent man, who acted as his
+guardian and tutor. These two, also, soon arrived in Mutjado,--the
+boy, Phedo, being mounted on a little donkey, which was his almost
+constant companion. As soon as they reached the territory of the late
+Autocrat, old Salim, the tutor, left the boy at an inn, and went
+forward by himself to take a look at the other third cousin. When he
+saw Alberdin mounted on his fine horse, and looking so strong and
+valiant, his heart was much disturbed.
+
+"I had hoped," he said to himself, "that the other one was a small
+boy, but such does not appear to be the case. There is but one way to
+have a fair fight between these two. They must not now be allowed to
+see each other. If they can be kept apart until my boy grows up, he
+will then be able, with the military education which I intend he
+shall have, to engage in combat with any man. They must not meet for
+at least thirteen years. Phedo will then be twenty-five, and able to
+do worthy combat. To be sure, I am somewhat old myself to undertake
+to superintend so long a delay, but I must do my best to keep well
+and strong, and to attain the greatest possible longevity."
+
+Salim had always been in the habit of giving thirty-two chews to
+every mouthful of meat, and a proportionate number of chews to other
+articles of food; and had, so far, been very healthy. But he now
+determined to increase the number of chews to thirty-six, for it
+would be highly necessary for him to live until it was time for the
+battle between the third cousins to take place.
+
+Having made up his mind on these points, the old tutor introduced
+himself to Alberdin, and told him that he had come to arrange the
+terms of combat.
+
+"In the first place," said Alberdin, "I should like to know what sort
+of a person my opponent is."
+
+"He is not a cavalryman like you," answered Salim; "he belongs to the
+heavy infantry."
+
+At this, Alberdin looked grave. He knew very well that a stout and
+resolute man on foot had often the advantage of one who is mounted.
+He would have preferred meeting a horseman, and fighting on equal
+terms.
+
+"Has he had much experience in war?" asked the young man.
+
+"It is not long," answered the tutor, "since he was almost constantly
+in arms, winter and summer."
+
+"He must be a practised warrior," thought Alberdin. "I must put
+myself in good fighting-trim before I meet him."
+
+After some further conversation on the subject, the old man advised
+Alberdin to go into camp on a beautiful plain not far from the base
+of a low line of mountains.
+
+"Your opponent," said he, "will intrench himself in the valley on the
+other side. With the mountains between you, neither of you need fear
+a surprise; and when both are ready, a place of meeting can be
+appointed.
+
+"Now, then," said Salim to himself when this had been settled; "if I
+can keep them apart for thirteen years, all may be well."
+
+As soon as possible, Alberdin pitched a tent upon the appointed spot,
+and began to take daily warlike exercise in the plain, endeavoring in
+every way to put himself and his horse into proper condition for the
+combat.
+
+On the other side of the mountain, old Salim intrenched himself and
+the boy, Phedo. He carefully studied several books on military
+engineering, and caused a fortified camp to be constructed on the
+most approved principles. It was surrounded by high ramparts, and
+outside of these was a moat filled with water. In the centre of the
+camp was a neat little house which was well provided with books,
+provisions, and every thing necessary for a prolonged stay. When the
+drawbridge was up, it would be impossible for Alberdin to get inside
+of the camp; and, moreover, the ramparts were so high that he could
+not look over them to see what sort of antagonist he was to have. Old
+Salim did not tell the boy why he brought him here to live. It would
+be better to wait until he was older before informing him of the
+battle which had been decreed. He told Phedo that it was necessary
+for him to have a military education, which could very well be
+obtained in a place like this; and he was also very careful to let
+him know that there was a terrible soldier in that part of the
+country who might at any time, if it were not for the intrenchments,
+pounce down upon him, and cut him to pieces. Every fine day, Phedo
+was allowed to take a ride on his donkey outside of the
+fortifications, but during this time, the old tutor kept a strict
+watch on the mountain; and if a horseman had made his appearance,
+little Phedo would have been whisked inside, and the drawbridge would
+have been up in a twinkling.
+
+After about two weeks of this life Phedo found it dreadfully stupid
+to see no one but his old tutor, and never to go outside of these
+great ramparts except for donkey-rides, which were generally very
+short. He therefore determined, late one moonlight night, to go out
+and take a ramble by himself. He was not afraid of the dreadful
+soldier of whom the old man had told him, because at that time of
+night this personage would, of course, be in bed and asleep.
+Considering these things, he quietly dressed himself, took down a
+great key from over his sleeping tutor's head, opened the heavy gate,
+let down the drawbridge, mounted upon his donkey, and rode forth upon
+the moonlit plain.
+
+That night-ride was a very delightful one, and for a long time the
+boy and the donkey rambled and ran; first going this way and then
+that, they gradually climbed the mountain; and, reaching the brow,
+they trotted about for a while, and then went down the other side.
+The boy had been so twisted and turned in his course that he did not
+notice that he was not descending toward his camp, and the donkey,
+whose instinct told it that it was not going the right way, was also
+told by its instinct that it did not wish to go the right way, and
+that the intrenchments offered it no temptations to return. When the
+morning dawned, Phedo perceived that he was really lost, and he began
+to be afraid that he might meet the terrible soldier. But, after a
+time, he saw riding toward him a very pleasant-looking young man on a
+handsome horse, and he immediately took courage.
+
+"Now," said he to himself, "I am no longer in danger. If that
+horrible cut-throat should appear, this good gentleman will protect
+me."
+
+Alberdin had not seen any one for a long time, and he was very glad
+to meet with so nice a little boy. When Phedo told him that he was
+lost, he invited him to come to his tent, near by, and have
+breakfast. While they were eating their meal, Alberdin asked the boy
+if in the course of his rambles he had met with a heavy infantry
+soldier, probably armed to the teeth, and very large and strong.
+
+"Oh, I've heard of that dreadful man!" cried Phedo, "and I am very
+glad that I did not meet him. If he comes, I hope you'll protect me
+from him."
+
+"I will do that," said Alberdin; "but I am afraid I shall not be able
+to help you find your way home, for in doing so I should throw myself
+off my guard, and might be set upon unexpectedly by this fellow, with
+whom I have a regular engagement to fight. There is to be a time
+fixed for the combat, for which I feel myself nearly ready, but I
+have no doubt that my enemy will be very glad to take me at a
+disadvantage if I give him a chance."
+
+Phedo looked about him with an air of content. The tent was large and
+well furnished; there seemed to be plenty of good things to eat; the
+handsome horseman was certainly a very good-humored and agreeable
+gentleman; and, moreover, the tent was not shut in by high and gloomy
+ramparts.
+
+"I do not think you need trouble yourself," said he to his host, "to
+help me to find my way home. I live with my tutor, and I am sure that
+when he knows I am gone he will begin to search for me, and after
+awhile he will find me. Until then, I can be very comfortable here."
+
+For several days the two third cousins of the Autocrat lived together
+in the tent, and enjoyed each other's society very much. Then
+Alberdin began to grow a little impatient.
+
+"If I am to fight this heavy infantry man," he said; "I should like
+to do it at once. I am now quite ready, and I think he ought to be. I
+expected to hear from him before this time, and I shall start out and
+see if I can get any news of his intentions. I don't care about going
+over the mountain without giving him notice, but the capital city of
+Mutjado is only a day's ride to the west, and there I can cause
+inquiries to be made when he would like to meet me, and where."
+
+"I will go with you," said Phedo, greatly delighted at the idea of
+visiting the city.
+
+"Yes, I will take you," said Alberdin. "Your tutor don't seem
+inclined to come for you, and, of course, I can't leave you here."
+
+The next day, Alberdin on his horse, and Phedo on his donkey, set out
+for the city, where they arrived late in the afternoon. After finding
+a comfortable lodging, Alberdin sent messengers to the other side of
+the mountain, where his opponent was supposed to be encamped, and
+gave them power to arrange with him for a meeting. He particularly
+urged them to try to see the old man who had come to him at first,
+and who had seemed to be a very fair-minded and sensible person. In
+two days, however, the messengers returned, stating that they had
+found what they supposed to be the intrenched camp of the heavy
+infantry man they had been sent in search of, but that it was
+entirely deserted, and nobody could be seen anywhere near it.
+
+"It is very likely," said Alberdin, "that he has watched my
+manoeuvres and exercises from the top of the mountain, and has
+concluded to run away. I shall give him a reasonable time to show
+himself, and then, if he does not come forward, I will consider him
+beaten, and claim the Autocracy."
+
+"That is a good idea," said Phedo, "but I think, if you can, you
+ought to find him and kill him, or drive him out of the country.
+That's what I should do, if I were you."
+
+"Of course I shall do that, if I can," said Alberdin; "but I could
+not be expected to wait for him forever."
+
+When his intention had been proclaimed, Alberdin was informed of
+something which he did not know before, and that was that the late
+Autocrat had left an only daughter, a Princess about twenty years
+old. But although she was his daughter, she could not inherit his
+crown, for the laws of the country forbade that any woman should
+become Autocrat. A happy idea now struck Alberdin.
+
+"I will marry the Princess," he said, "and then every one will think
+that it is the most suitable thing for me to become Autocrat."
+
+So Alberdin sent to the Princess to ask permission to speak with her,
+and was granted an audience. With much courtesy and politeness he
+made known his plans to the lady, and hoped that she would consider
+it advisable to marry him.
+
+"I am sorry to interfere with any of your arrangements," said the
+Princess, "but as soon as I heard the terms of my father's will, I
+made up my mind to marry the victor in the contest. As I cannot
+inherit the throne myself, the next best thing is to be the wife of
+the man who does. Go forth, then, and find your antagonist, and when
+you have conquered him, I will marry you."
+
+"And if he conquers me, you will marry him?" said Alberdin.
+
+"Yes, sir," answered the Princess, with a smile, and dismissed him.
+
+It was plain enough that there was nothing for Alberdin to do but to
+go and look for the heavy infantry man. Phedo was very anxious to
+accompany him, and the two, mounted as before, set out from the city
+on their quest.
+
+When old Salim, the tutor of Phedo, awoke in the morning and found
+the boy gone, he immediately imagined that the youngster had ran away
+to his old home; so he set forth with all possible speed, hoping to
+overtake him. But when he reached the distant town where Phedo had
+lived, he found that the boy had not been there; and after taking
+some needful rest, he retraced his steps, crossed the mountains, and
+made his way toward the capital city, hoping to find news of him
+there. It was necessary for him to be very careful in his inquiries,
+for he wished no one to find out that the little boy he was looking
+for was the third cousin of the late Autocrat on the mother's side.
+He therefore disguised himself as a migratory medical man, and
+determined to use all possible caution. When he reached the camp of
+the young horseman, Alberdin, and found that personage gone, his
+suspicions became excited.
+
+"If these two have run off together," he said to himself, "my task is
+indeed difficult. If the man discovers it is the boy he has to fight,
+my poor Phedo will be cut to pieces in a twinkling. I do not believe
+there has been any trouble yet, for the boy does not know that he is
+to be one of the combatants, and the man would not be likely to
+suspect it. Come what may, the fight must not take place for thirteen
+years. And in order that I may still better preserve my health and
+strength to avert the calamity during that period, I will increase my
+number of chews to forty-two to each mouthful of meat."
+
+When old Salim reached the city, he soon found that Alberdin and the
+boy had been there, and that they had gone away together.
+
+"Nothing has happened so far," said the old man, with a sigh of
+relief; "and things may turn out all right yet. I'll follow them, but
+I must first find out what that cavalryman had to say to the
+Princess." For he had been told of the interview at the palace.
+
+It was not long before the migratory medical man was brought to the
+Princess. There was nothing the matter with her, but she liked to
+meet with persons of skill and learning to hear what they had to say.
+
+"Have you any specialty?" she asked of the old man.
+
+"Yes," said he, "I am a germ-doctor."
+
+"What is that?" asked the Princess.
+
+"All diseases," replied the old man, "come from germs; generally very
+little ones. My business is to discover these, and find out all about
+them."
+
+"Then I suppose," said the Princess, "you know how to cure the
+diseases?"
+
+"You must not expect too much," answered the old man. "It ought to be
+a great satisfaction to us to know what sort of germ is at the bottom
+of our woes."
+
+"I am very well, myself," said the Princess, "and, so far as I know,
+none of my household are troubled by germs. But there is something
+the matter with my mind which I wish you could relieve." She then
+told the old man how she had determined to marry the victor in the
+contest for her father's throne, and how she had seen one for the
+claimants whom she considered to be a very agreeable and deserving
+young man; while the other, she had heard, was a great, strong foot
+soldier, who was probably very disagreeable, and even horrid. If this
+one should prove the conqueror, she did not know what she should do.
+"You see, I am in a great deal of trouble," said she. "Can you do any
+thing to help me?"
+
+The pretending migratory medical man looked at her attentively for a
+few moments, and then he said:
+
+"The reason why you intend to marry the victor in the coming contest,
+is that you wish to remain here in your father's palace, and to
+continue to enjoy the comforts and advantages to which you have been
+accustomed."
+
+"Yes," said the Princess; "that is it."
+
+"Well, having discovered the germ of your disorder," said the old
+man, "the great point is gained. I will see what I can do."
+
+And with a respectful bow he left her presence.
+
+"Well," said old Salim to himself, as he went away, "she can never
+marry my boy, for that is certainly out of the question; but now that
+I have found out her motive, I think I can arrange matters
+satisfactorily, so far as she is concerned. But to settle the affair
+between that young man and Phedo is immensely more difficult. The
+first thing is to find them."
+
+Having learned the way they had gone, the old tutor travelled
+diligently, and in two days came up with Alberdin and Phedo. When he
+first caught sight of them, he was very much surprised to see that
+they were resting upon the ground quite a long distance apart, with a
+little stream between them. Noticing that Alberdin's back was toward
+him, he threw off his disguise and hastened to Phedo. The boy
+received him with the greatest delight, and, after many embraces,
+they sat down to talk. Phedo told the old man all that had happened,
+and finished by relating that, as they had that day stopped by this
+stream to rest, Alberdin had taken it into his head to inquire into
+the parentage of his young companion; and after many questions about
+his family, it had been made clear to both of them that they were the
+two third cousins who were to fight for the Autocracy of Mutjado.
+
+"He is very angry," said the boy, "at the tricks that have been
+played upon him, and went off and left me. Is it true that I am to
+fight him? I don't want to do it, for I like him very much."
+
+"It will be a long time before you are old enough to fight," said
+Salim; "so we need not consider that. You stay here, and I'll go over
+and talk to him."
+
+Salim then crossed the stream, and approached Alberdin. When the
+young man saw him, and recognized him as the person who had arranged
+the two encampments, he turned upon him with fury.
+
+"Wretched old man, who came to me as the emissary of my antagonist,
+you are but the tutor of that boy! If I had known the truth at first,
+I would have met him instantly; would have conquered him without
+hurting a hair on his head; and carrying him bound to the capital
+city, would have claimed the Autocracy, and would now have been
+sitting upon the throne. Instead of that, look at the delay and
+annoyance to which I have been subjected. I have also taken such a
+fancy to the boy that rather than hurt him or injure his prospects, I
+would willingly resign my pretensions to the throne, and go back
+contentedly to my own city. But this cannot now be done. I have
+fallen in love with the daughter of the late Autocrat, and she will
+marry none but the victorious claimant. Behold to what a condition
+you have brought me!"
+
+The old man regarded him with attention.
+
+"I wish very much," said he, "to defer the settlement of this matter
+for thirteen years. Are you willing to wait so long?"
+
+"No, I am not," said Alberdin.
+
+"Very well, then," said the old man, "each third cousin must retire
+to his camp, and as soon as matters can be arranged the battle must
+take place."
+
+"There is nothing else to be done," said Alberdin in a troubled
+voice; "but I shall take care that the boy receives no injury if it
+can possibly be avoided."
+
+The three now retraced their steps, and in a few days were settled
+down, Alberdin in his tent in the plain, and Salim and Phedo in their
+intrenchments on the other side of the low mountain. The old man now
+gave himself up to deep thought. He had discovered the germ of
+Alberdin's trouble; and in a few days he had arranged his plans, and
+went over to see the young man.
+
+"It has been determined," said he, "that a syndicate is to be formed
+to attend to this business for Phedo."
+
+"A syndicate!" cried Alberdin. "What is that?"
+
+"A syndic," answered Salim, "is a person who attends to business for
+others; and a syndicate is a body of men who are able to conduct
+certain affairs better than any individual can do it. In a week from
+to-day, Phedo's syndicate will meet you in the large plain outside of
+the capital city. There the contest will take place. Shall you be
+ready?"
+
+"I don't exactly understand it," said Alberdin, "but I shall be
+there."
+
+General notice was given of the coming battle of the contestants for
+the throne, and thousands of the inhabitants of the Autocracy
+assembled on the plain on the appointed day. The Princess with her
+ladies was there; and as everybody was interested, everybody was
+anxious to see what would happen.
+
+Alberdin rode into the open space in the centre of the plain, and
+demanded that his antagonist should appear. Thereupon old Salim came
+forward, leading Phedo by the hand.
+
+"This is the opposing heir," he said; "but as every one can see that
+he is too young to fight a battle, a syndicate has been appointed to
+attend to the matter for him; and there is nothing in the will of the
+late Autocrat which forbids this arrangement. The syndicate will now
+appear."
+
+At this command there came into the arena a horseman heavily armed, a
+tall foot soldier completely equipped for action, an artilleryman
+with a small cannon on wheels, a sailor with a boarding-pike and a
+drawn cutlass, and a soldier with a revolving gun which discharged
+one hundred and twenty balls a minute.
+
+"All being ready," exclaimed Salim, "the combat for the Autocracy
+will begin!"
+
+Alberdin took a good long look at the syndicate ranged before him.
+Then he dismounted from his horse, drew his sword, and stuck it,
+point downward, into the sand.
+
+"I surrender!" he said.
+
+"So do I!" cried the Princess, running toward him, and throwing
+herself into his arms.
+
+The eyes of Alberdin sparkled with joy.
+
+"Let the Autocracy go!" he cried. "Now that I have my Princess, the
+throne and the crown are nothing to me."
+
+"So long as I have you," returned the Princess, "I am content to
+resign all the comforts and advantages to which I have been
+accustomed."
+
+Phedo, who had been earnestly talking with his tutor, now looked up.
+
+"You shall not resign any thing!" he cried. "We are all of the same
+blood, and we will join together and form a royal family, and we will
+all live at the palace. Alberdin and my tutor shall manage the
+government for me until I am grown up; and if I have to go to school
+for a few years, I suppose I must. And that is all there is about
+it!"
+
+The syndicate was now ordered to retire and disband; the heralds
+proclaimed Phedo the conquering heir, and the people cheered and
+shouted with delight. All the virtues of the late Autocrat had come
+to him from his mother, and the citizens of Mutjado much preferred to
+have a new ruler from the mother's family.
+
+"I hope you bear no grudge against me," said Salim to Alberdin; "but
+if you had been willing to wait for thirteen years, you and Phedo
+might have fought on equal terms. As it is now, it would have been as
+hard for him to conquer you, as for you to conquer the syndicate. The
+odds would have been quite as great."
+
+"Don't mention it," said Alberdin. "I prefer things as they are. I
+should have hated to drive the boy away, and deprive him of a
+position which the people wish him to have. Now we are all
+satisfied."
+
+Phedo soon began to show signs that he would probably make a very
+good Autocrat. He declared that if he was to be assisted by ministers
+and cabinet officers when he came to the throne, he would like them
+to be persons who had been educated for their positions, just as he
+was to be educated for his own. Consequently he chose for the head of
+his cabinet a bright and sensible boy, and had him educated as a
+Minister of State. For Minister of Finance, he chose another boy with
+a very honest countenance, and for the other members of his cabinet,
+suitable youths were selected. He also said, that he thought there
+ought to be another officer, one who would be a sort of Minister of
+General Comfort, who would keep an eye on the health and happiness of
+the subjects, and would also see that every thing went all right in
+the palace, not only in regard to meals, but lots of other things.
+For this office he chose a bright young girl, and had her educated
+for the position of Queen.
+
+
+
+
+
+ THE BANISHED KING.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+There was once a kingdom in which every thing seemed to go wrong.
+Everybody knew this, and everybody talked about it, especially the
+King. The bad state of affairs troubled him more than it did any one
+else, but he could think of no way to make them better.
+
+"I cannot bear to see things going on so badly," he said to the Queen
+and his chief councillors. "I wish I knew how other kingdoms were
+governed."
+
+One of his councillors offered to go to some other countries, and see
+how they were governed, and come back and tell him all about it, but
+this did not suit his majesty.
+
+"You would simply return," he said, "and give me your ideas about
+things. I want my own ideas."
+
+The Queen then suggested that he should take a vacation, and visit
+other kingdoms, and see for himself how things were managed in them.
+
+This did not suit the king. "A vacation would not answer," he said.
+"I should not be gone a week before something would happen here which
+would make it necessary for me to come back."
+
+The Queen then suggested that he be banished for a certain time, say
+a year. In that case he could not come back, and would be at full
+liberty to visit foreign kingdoms, and find out how they were
+governed.
+
+This plan pleased the King. "If it were made impossible for me to
+come back," he said, "of course I could not do it. The scheme is a
+good one. Let me be banished." And he gave orders that his council
+should pass a law banishing him for one year.
+
+Preparations were immediately begun to carry out this plan, and in
+day or two the King bade farewell to the Queen, and left his kingdom,
+a banished man. He went away on foot, entirely unattended. But, as he
+did not wish to cut off all communication between himself and his
+kingdom, he made an arrangement which he thought a very good one. At
+easy shouting distance behind him walked one of the officers of the
+court, and at shouting distance behind him walked another, and so on
+at distances of about a hundred yards from each other. In this way
+there would always be a line of men extending from the King to his
+palace. Whenever the King had walked a hundred yards the line moved
+on after him, and another officer was put in the gap between the last
+man and the palace door. Thus, as the King walked on, his line of
+followers lengthened, and was never broken. Whenever he had any
+message to send to the Queen, or any other person in the palace, he
+shouted it to the officer next him, who shouted it to the one next to
+him, and it was so passed on until it reached the palace. If he
+needed food, clothes, or any other necessary thing, the order for it
+was shouted along the line, and the article was passed to him from
+man to man, each one carrying it forward to his neighbor, and then
+retiring to his proper place.
+
+In this way the King walked on day by day until he had passed
+entirely out of his own kingdom. At night he stopped at some
+convenient house on the road, and if any of his followers did not
+find himself near a house or cottage when the King shouted back the
+order to halt, he laid himself down to sleep wherever he might be. By
+this time the increasing line of followers had used up all the
+officers of the court, and it became necessary to draw upon some of
+the under government officers in order to keep the line perfect.
+
+The King had not gone very far outside the limits of his dominions
+when he met a Sphinx. He had often heard of these creatures, although
+he had never seen one before. But when he saw the winged body of a
+lion with a woman's head, he knew instantly what it was. He knew,
+also, that the chief business of a Sphinx was that of asking people
+questions, and then getting them into trouble if the right answers
+were not given. He therefore determined that he would not be caught
+by any such tricks as these, and that he would be on his guard if the
+Sphinx spoke to him. The creature was lying down when the King first
+saw it, but when he approached nearer it rose to its feet. There was
+nothing savage about its look, and the King was not at all afraid.
+
+"Where are you going?" said the Sphinx to him, in a pleasant voice.
+
+"Give it up," replied the King.
+
+"What do you mean by that?" said the other, with an air of surprise.
+
+"I give that up, too," said the King.
+
+The Sphinx then looked at him quite astonished.
+
+"I don't mind telling you," said the King, "of my own free will, and
+not in answer to any questions, that I do not know where I am going.
+I am a King, as you may have noticed, and I have been banished from
+my kingdom for a year. I am now going to look into the government of
+other countries in order that I may find out what it is that is wrong
+in my own kingdom. Every thing goes badly, and there is something
+very faulty at the bottom of it all. What this is I want to
+discover."
+
+"I am much interested in puzzles and matters of that kind," said the
+Sphinx, "and if you like I will go with you and help to find out what
+is wrong in your kingdom."
+
+"All right," said the King. "I shall be glad of your company."
+
+"What is the meaning of this long line of people following you at
+regular distances?" asked the Sphinx.
+
+"Give it up," said the King.
+
+The Sphinx laughed.
+
+"I don't mind telling you," said the King, "of my own free will, and
+not in answer to any question, that these men form a line of
+communication between me and my kingdom, where matters, I fear, must
+be going on worse than ever, in my absence."
+
+The two now travelled on together until they came to a high hill,
+from which they could see, not very far away, a large city.
+
+"That city," said the Sphinx, "is the capital of an extensive
+country. It is governed by a king of mingled sentiments. Suppose we
+go there. I think you will find a government that is rather
+peculiar."
+
+The King consented, and they walked down the hill toward the city.
+
+"How did the King get his sentiments mingled?" asked the King.
+
+"I really don't know how it began," said the Sphinx, "but the King,
+when a young man, had so many sentiments of different kinds, and he
+mingled them up so much, that no one could ever tell exactly what he
+thought on any particular subject. Of course, his people gradually
+got into the same frame of mind, and you never can know in this
+kingdom exactly what people think or what they are going to do. You
+will find all sorts of people here: giants, dwarfs, fairies, gnomes,
+and personages of that kind, who have been drawn here by the mingled
+sentiments of the people. I, myself, came into these parts because
+the people every now and then take a great fancy to puzzles and
+riddles."
+
+On entering the city, the King was cordially welcomed by his brother
+sovereign, to whom he told his story; and he was lodged in a room in
+the palace. Such of his followers as came within the limits of the
+city were entertained by the persons near to whose houses they found
+themselves when the line halted.
+
+Every day the Sphinx went with him to see the sights of this strange
+city. They took long walks through the streets, and sometimes into
+the surrounding country--always going one way and returning another,
+the Sphinx being very careful never to bring the King back by the
+same road or street by which they went. In this way the King's line
+of followers, which, of course, lengthened out every time he took a
+walk, came to be arranged in long loops through many parts of the
+city and suburbs.
+
+Many of the things the King saw showed plainly the mingled sentiments
+of the people. For instance, he would one day visit a great smith's
+shop, where heavy masses of iron were being forged, the whole place
+resounding with tremendous blows from heavy hammers, and the clank
+and din of iron on the anvils; while the next day he would find the
+place transformed into a studio, where the former blacksmith was
+painting dainty little pictures on the delicate surface of
+egg-shells. The king of the country, in his treatment of his visitor,
+showed his peculiar nature very plainly. Sometimes he would receive
+him with enthusiastic delight, while at others he would upbraid him
+with having left his dominions to go wandering around the earth in
+this senseless way. One day his host invited him to attend a royal
+dinner, but, when he went to the grand dining-hall, pleased with
+anticipations of a splendid feast, he found that the sentiments of
+his majesty had become mingled, and that he had determined, instead
+of having a dinner, to conduct the funeral services of one of his
+servants who had died the day before. All the guests were obliged by
+politeness to remain during the ceremonies, which our King, not
+having been acquainted with the deceased servant, had not found at
+all interesting.
+
+"Now," said the King to the Sphinx, "I am in favor of moving on. I am
+tired of this place, where every sentiment is so mingled with others
+that you can never tell what anybody really thinks or feels. I don't
+believe any one in this country was ever truly glad or sorry. They
+mix one sentiment so quickly with another that they never can
+discover the actual ingredients of any of their impulses."
+
+"When this King first began to mingle his sentiments," said the
+Sphinx, "it was because he always desired to think and feel exactly
+right. He did not wish his feelings to run too much one way or the
+other."
+
+"And so he is never either right or wrong," said the King. "I don't
+like that, at all. I want to be one thing or the other."
+
+"I have wasted a good deal of time at this place," remarked the King,
+as they walked on, "and I have seen and heard nothing which I wish to
+teach my people. But I must find out some way to prevent every thing
+going wrong in my kingdom. I have tried plan after plan, and
+sometimes two or three together, and have kept this up year after
+year, and yet nothing seems to do my kingdom any good."
+
+"Have you heard how things are going on there now?" asked the Sphinx.
+
+"Give it up," said the King. "But I don't mind saying of my own
+accord, and not as answer to any question, that I have sent a good
+many communications to my Queen, but have never received any from
+her. So I do not know how things are going on in my kingdom."
+
+They then travelled on, the long line of followers coming after,
+keeping their relative positions a hundred yards apart, and passing
+over all the ground the King had traversed in his circuitous walks
+about the city. Thus the line crept along like an enormous snake in
+straight lines, loops, and coils; and every time the King walked a
+hundred yards a fresh man from his capital city was obliged to take
+his place at the tail of the procession.
+
+"By the way," said the Sphinx, after they had walked an hour or more,
+"if you want to see a kingdom where there really is something to
+learn, you ought to go to the country of the Gaumers, which we are
+now approaching."
+
+"All right," said the King. "Let us go there."
+
+In the course of the afternoon they reached the edge of a high bluff.
+"On the level ground, beneath this precipice," said the Sphinx, "is
+the country of the dwarfs called Gaumers. You can sit on the edge of
+the bluff and look down upon it."
+
+The King and the Sphinx then sat down, and looked out from the edge
+over the country of the little people. The officer of the court who
+had formed the head of the line wished very much to see what they
+were looking at, but, when the line halted, he was not near enough.
+
+"You will notice," said the Sphinx, "that the little houses and huts
+are gathered together in clusters. Each one of these clusters is
+under a separate king."
+
+"Why don't they all live under one ruler?" asked the King. "That is
+the proper way."
+
+"They do not think so," said the Sphinx. "In each of these clusters
+live the Gaumers who are best suited to each other; and, if any
+Gaumer finds he cannot get along in one cluster, he goes to another.
+The kings are chosen from among the very best of them, and each one
+is always very anxious to please his subjects. He knows that every
+thing that he, and his queen, and his children eat, or drink, or
+wear, or have must be given to him by his subjects, and if it were
+not for them he could not be their ruler. And so he does every thing
+that he can to make them happy and contented, for he knows if he does
+not please them and govern them well, they will gradually drop off
+from him and go to other clusters, and he will be left without any
+people or any kingdom."
+
+"That is a very queer way of ruling," said the King. "I think the
+people ought to try to please their sovereign."
+
+"He is only one, and they are a great many," said the Sphinx.
+"Consequently they are much more important. No subject is ever
+allowed to look down upon a king, simply because he helps to feed and
+clothe him, and send his children to school. If any one does a thing
+of this kind, he is banished until he learns better."
+
+"All that may be very well for Gaumers," said the King, "but I can
+learn nothing from a government like that, where every thing seems to
+be working in an opposite direction from what everybody knows is
+right and proper. A king anxious to deserve the good opinion of his
+subjects! What nonsense! It ought to be just the other way. The ideas
+of this people are as dwarfish as their bodies."
+
+The King now arose and took up the line of march, turning away from
+the country of the Gaumers. But he had not gone more than two or
+three hundred yards before he received a message from the Queen. It
+came to him very rapidly, every man in the line seeming anxious to
+shout it to the man ahead of him as quickly as possible. The message
+was to the effect that he must either stop where he was or come home:
+his constantly lengthening line of communication had used up all the
+chief officers of the government, all the clerks in the departments,
+and all the officials of every grade, excepting the few who were
+actually needed to carry on the government, and if any more men went
+into the line it would be necessary to call upon the laborers and
+other persons who could not be spared.
+
+"I think," said the Sphinx, "that you have made your line long
+enough."
+
+"And I think," said the King. "that you made it a great deal longer
+than it need to have been, by taking me about in such winding ways."
+
+"It may be so," said the Sphinx, with its mystic smile.
+
+"Well, I am not going to stop here," said the King, "and so I might
+as well go back as soon as I can." And he shouted to the head man of
+the line to pass on the order that his edict of banishment be
+revoked.
+
+In a very short time the news came that the edict was revoked. The
+King then commanded that the procession return home, tail-end
+foremost. The march was at once begun, each man, as he reached the
+city, going immediately to his home and family.
+
+The King and the greater part of the line had a long and weary
+journey, as they followed each other through the country and over the
+devious ways in which the Sphinx had led them in the City of Mingled
+Sentiments. The King was obliged to pursue all these complicated
+turnings, or be separated from his officers, and so break up his
+communication with his palace. The Sphinx accompanied him.
+
+When at last, he reached his palace, his line of former followers
+having apparently melted entirely away, he hurried up-stairs to the
+Queen, leaving the Sphinx in the court-yard.
+
+The King found, when he had time to look into the affairs of his
+dominions, that every thing was in the most admirable condition. The
+Queen had retained a few of the best officials to carry on the
+government, and had ordered the rest to fall, one by one, into the
+line of communication. The King set himself to work to think about
+the matter. It was not long before he came to the conclusion that the
+main thing which had been wrong in his kingdom was himself. He was so
+greatly impressed with this idea that he went down to the court-yard
+to speak to the Sphinx about it.
+
+"I dare say you are right," said the Sphinx, "and I don't wonder that
+what you learned when you were away, and what you have seen since you
+came back, have made you feel certain that you were the cause of
+every thing going wrong in this kingdom. And now, what do you intend
+to do about your government?"
+
+"Give it up," promptly replied the King.
+
+"That is exactly what I should advise," said the Sphinx.
+
+The King did give up his kingdom. He was convinced that being a King
+was exactly the thing he was not suited for, and that he would get on
+much better in some other business or profession. He determined to be
+a traveller and explorer, and to go abroad into other countries to
+find out things that might be useful to his own nation. His Queen had
+shown that she could govern the country most excellently, and it was
+not at all necessary for him to stay at home. She had ordered all the
+men who had made up his line to follow the King's example and to go
+into some good business; in order that not being bothered with so
+many officers, she would be able to get along quite easily.
+
+The King was very successful in his new pursuit, and although he did
+not this time have a line of followers connecting him with the
+palace, he frequently sent home messages which were of use and value
+to his nation.
+
+"I may as well retire," said the Sphinx to itself. "As the King has
+found his vocation and every thing is going all right it is not
+necessary I should remain where I may be looked upon as a
+questionable personage."
+
+
+
+
+
+ THE PHILOPENA.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+There were once a Prince and a Princess who, when quite young, ate a
+philopena together. They agreed that the one who, at any hour after
+sunrise the next day, should accept any thing from the other--the
+giver at the same time saying "Philopena!"--should be the loser, and
+that the loser should marry the other.
+
+They did not meet as soon as they had expected the next day; and at
+the time our story begins, many years had elapsed since they had seen
+each other, and the Prince and the Princess were nearly grown up.
+They often thought of the philopena they had eaten together, and
+wondered if they should know each other when they met. He remembered
+her as a pretty little girl dressed in green silk and playing with a
+snow-white cat; while she remembered him as a handsome boy, wearing a
+little sword, the handle of which was covered with jewels. But they
+knew that each must have changed a great deal in all this time.
+
+Neither of these young people had any parents; the Prince lived with
+guardians and the Princess with uncles.
+
+The guardians of the Prince were very enterprising and energetic men,
+and were allowed to govern the country until the Prince came of age.
+The capital city was a very fine city when the old king died; but the
+guardians thought it might be much finer, so they set to work with
+all their might and main to improve it. They tore down old houses and
+made a great many new streets; they built grand and splendid bridges
+over the river on which the city stood; they constructed aqueducts to
+bring water from streams many miles away; and they were at work all
+the time upon some extensive building enterprise.
+
+The Prince did not take much interest in the works which were going
+on under direction of his guardians; and when he rode out, he
+preferred to go into the country or to ride through some of the
+quaint old streets, where nothing had been changed for hundreds of
+years.
+
+The uncles of the Princess were very different people from the
+guardians of the Prince. There were three of them, and they were very
+quiet and cosey old men, who disliked any kind of bustle or
+disturbance, and wished that every thing might remain as they had
+always known it. It even worried them a little to find that the
+Princess was growing up. They would have much preferred that she
+should remain exactly as she was when they first took charge of her.
+Then they never would have been obliged to trouble their minds about
+any changes in the manner of taking care of her. But they did not
+worry their minds very much, after all. They wished to make her
+guardianship as little laborious or exhausting as possible, and so,
+divided the work; one of them took charge of her education, another
+of her food and lodging, and the third of her dress. The first sent
+for teachers, and told them to teach her; the second had handsome
+apartments prepared for her use, and gave orders that she should have
+every thing she needed to eat and drink; while the third commanded
+that she should have a complete outfit of new clothes four times a
+year. Thus every thing went on very quietly and smoothly; and the
+three uncles were not obliged to exhaust themselves by hard work.
+There were never any new houses built in that city, and if any thing
+had to be repaired, it was done with as little noise and dirt as
+possible. The city and the whole kingdom were quiet and serene, and
+the three uncles dozed away most of the day in three great
+comfortable thrones.
+
+Everybody seemed satisfied with this state of things except the
+Princess. She often thought to herself that nothing would be more
+delightful than a little noise and motion, and she wondered if the
+whole world were as quiet as the city in which she lived. At last,
+she became unable to bear the dreadful stillness of the place any
+longer; but she could think of nothing to do but to go and try to
+find the Prince with whom she had eaten a philopena. If she should
+win, he must marry her; and then, perhaps, they could settle down in
+some place where things would be bright and lively. So, early one
+morning, she put on her white dress, and mounting her prancing black
+horse, she rode away from the city. Only one person saw her go, for
+nearly all the people were asleep.
+
+About this time, the Prince made up his mind that he could no longer
+stand the din and confusion, the everlasting up-setting and
+setting-up in his native city. He would go away, and see if he could
+find the Princess with whom he had eaten a philopena. If he should
+win, she would be obliged to marry him; and then, perhaps, they could
+settle down in some place where it was quiet and peaceful. So, on the
+same morning in which the Princess rode away, he put on a handsome
+suit of black clothes, and mounting a gentle white horse, he rode out
+of the city. Only one person saw him go; for, even at that early
+hour, the people were so busy that little attention was paid to his
+movements.
+
+About half way between these two cities, in a tall tower which stood
+upon a hill, there lived an Inquisitive Dwarf, whose whole object in
+life was to find out what people were doing and why they did it. From
+the top of this tower he generally managed to see all that was going
+on in the surrounding country; and in each of the two cities that
+have been mentioned he had an agent, whose duty it was to send him
+word, by means of carrier pigeons, whenever a new thing happened.
+Before breakfast, on the morning when the Prince and Princess rode
+away, a pigeon from the city of the Prince came flying to the tower
+of the Inquisitive Dwarf.
+
+"Some new building started, I suppose," said the Dwarf, as he took
+the little roll of paper from under the pigeon's wing. "But no; it is
+very different! 'The Prince has ridden away from the city alone, and
+is travelling to the north.'"
+
+But before he could begin to puzzle his brains about the meaning of
+this departure, another pigeon came flying in from the city of the
+Princess.
+
+"Well!" cried the Dwarf, "this is amazing! It is a long time since I
+have had a message from that city, and my agent has been drawing his
+salary without doing any work. What possibly can have happened
+there?"
+
+When he read that the Princess had ridden alone from the city that
+morning, and was travelling to the south, he was truly amazed.
+
+"What on earth can it mean?" he exclaimed. "If the city of the Prince
+were to the south of that of the Princess, then I might understand
+it; for they would be going to see each other, and that would be
+natural enough. But as his city is to the north of her city, they are
+travelling in opposite directions. And what is the meaning of this? I
+most certainly must find out."
+
+The Inquisitive Dwarf had three servants whom he employed to attend
+to his most important business. These were a Gryphoness, a Water
+Sprite, and an Absolute Fool. This last one was very valuable; for
+there were some things he would do which no one else would think of
+attempting. The Dwarf called to him the Gryphoness, the oldest and
+most discreet of the three, and told her of the departure of the
+Princess.
+
+"Hasten southward," he said, "as fast as you can, and follow her, and
+do not return to me until you have found out why she left her city,
+where she is going, and what she expects to do when she gets there.
+Your appearance may frighten her; and, therefore, you must take with
+you the Absolute Fool, to whom she will probably be willing to talk;
+but you must see that every thing is managed properly."
+
+Having despatched these two, the Inquisitive Dwarf then called the
+Water Sprite, who was singing to herself at the edge of a fountain,
+and telling her of the departure of the Prince, ordered her to follow
+him, and not to return until she had found out why he left his city,
+where he was going, and what he intended to do when he got there.
+
+"The road to the north," he said, "lies along the river bank;
+therefore, you can easily keep him company."
+
+The Water Sprite bowed, and dancing over the dewy grass to the river,
+threw herself into it. Sometimes she swam beneath the clear water;
+sometimes she rose partly in the air, where she seemed like a little
+cloud of sparkling mist borne onward by the wind; and sometimes she
+floated upon the surface, her pale blue robes undulating with the
+gentle waves, while her white hands and feet shone in the sun like
+tiny crests of foam. Thus, singing to herself, she went joyously and
+rapidly on, aided by a full, strong wind from the south. She did not
+forget to glance every now and then upon the road which ran along the
+river bank; and, in the course of the morning, she perceived the
+Prince. He was sitting in the shade of a tree near the water's edge,
+while his white horse was grazing near by.
+
+The Water Sprite came very gently out of the river, and seating
+herself upon the edge of the grassy bank, she spoke to him. The
+Prince looked up in astonishment, but there was nothing in her
+appearance to frighten him.
+
+"I came," said the Water Sprite, "at the command of my master, to ask
+you why you left your city, where you are going, and what you intend
+to do when you get there."
+
+The Prince then told her why he had left his city, and what he
+intended to do when he had found the Princess.
+
+"But where I am going," he said, "I do not know, myself. I must
+travel and travel until I succeed in the object of my search."
+
+The Water Sprite reflected for a moment, and then she said:
+
+"If I were you, I would not travel to the north. It is cold and
+dreary there, and your Princess would not dwell in such a region. A
+little above us, on the other side of this river, there is a stream
+which runs sometimes to the east and sometimes to the south, and
+which leads to the Land of the Lovely Lakes. This is the most
+beautiful country in the world, and you will be much more likely to
+find your Princess there than among the desolate mountains of the
+north."
+
+"I dare say you are right," said the Prince; "and I will go there, if
+you will show me the way."
+
+"The road runs along the bank of the river," said the Water Sprite;
+"and we shall soon reach the Land of the Lovely Lakes."
+
+The Prince then mounted his horse, forded the river, and was soon
+riding along the bank of the stream, while the Water Sprite gayly
+floated upon its dancing ripples.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+When the Gryphoness started southward, in pursuit of the Princess,
+she kept out of sight among the bushes by the roadside; but sped
+swiftly along. The Absolute Fool, however, mounted upon a fine horse,
+rode boldly along upon the open road. He was a good-looking youth,
+with rosy cheeks, bright eyes, and a handsome figure. As he cantered
+gayly along, he felt himself capable of every noble action which the
+human mind has ever conceived. The Gryphoness kept near him, and in
+the course of the morning they overtook the Princess, who was
+allowing her horse to walk in the shade by the roadside. The Absolute
+Fool dashed up to her, and, taking off his hat, asked her why she had
+left her city, where she was going, and what she intended to do when
+she got there.
+
+The Princess looked at him in surprise. "I left my city because I
+wanted to," she said. "I am going about my business, and when I get
+to the proper place, I shall attend to it."
+
+"Oh," said the Absolute Fool, "you refuse me your confidence, do you?
+But allow me to remark that I have a Gryphoness with me who is very
+frightful to look at, and whom it was my intention to keep in the
+bushes; but if you will not give fair answers to my questions, she
+must come out and talk to you, and that is all there is about it."
+
+"If there is a Gryphoness in the bushes," said the Princess, "let her
+come out. No matter how frightful she is, I would rather she should
+come where I can see her, than to have her hiding near me."
+
+The Gryphoness, who had heard these words, now came out into the
+road. The horse of the Princess reared in affright, but his young
+rider patted him on the neck, and quieted his fears.
+
+"What do you and this young man want?" said the Princess to the
+Gryphoness, "and why do you question me?"
+
+"It is not of our own will that we do it," said the Gryphoness, very
+respectfully; "but our master, the Inquisitive Dwarf, has sent us to
+obtain information about the points on which the young man questioned
+you; and until we have found out these things, it is impossible for
+us to return."
+
+"I am opposed to answering impertinent questions," replied the
+Princess; "but in order to rid myself of you, I will tell you the
+reason of my journey." And she then stated briefly the facts of the
+case.
+
+"Ah, me!" said the Gryphoness. "I am very sorry; but you cannot tell
+us where you are going, and we cannot return until we know that. But
+you need not desire to be rid of us, for it may be that we can assist
+you in the object of your journey. This young man is sometimes very
+useful, and I shall be glad to do any thing that I can to help you.
+If you should think that I would injure you, or willingly annoy you
+by my presence, it would grieve me to the heart." And as she spoke, a
+tear bedimmed her eye.
+
+The Princess was touched by the emotion of the Gryphoness.
+
+"You may accompany me," she said, "and I will trust you both. You
+must know this country better than I do. Have you any advice to give
+me in regard to my journey?"
+
+"One thing I would strongly advise," said the Gryphoness, "and that
+is, that you do not travel any farther until we know in what
+direction it will be best to go. There is an inn close by, kept by a
+worthy woman. If you will stop there until to-morrow, this young man
+and I will scour the country round about, and try to find some news
+of your Prince. The young man will return and report to you to-morrow
+morning. And if you should need help, or escort, he will aid and obey
+you as your servant. As for me, unless we have found the Prince, I
+shall continue searching for him. There is a prince in the city to
+the north of my master's tower, and it is not unlikely that it is he
+whom you seek."
+
+"You can find out if it is he," answered the Princess, "by asking
+about the philopena."
+
+"That will I do," said the Gryphoness, "and I will return hither as
+speedily as possible." And, with a respectful salutation, the
+Gryphoness and the Absolute Fool departed by different ways.
+
+The Princess then repaired to the inn, where she took lodgings.
+
+The next morning, the Absolute Fool came back to the inn, and seeing
+the Princess, said: "I rode until after night-fall, searching for the
+Prince, before it occurred to me that, even if I should find him, I
+would not know him in the dark. As soon as I thought of that, I rode
+straight to the nearest house, and slept until daybreak, when I
+remembered that I was to report to you this morning. But as I have
+heard no news of the Prince, and as this is a beautiful, clear day, I
+think it would be extremely foolish to remain idly here, where there
+is nothing of interest going on, and when a single hour's delay may
+cause you to miss the object of your search. The Prince may be in one
+place this morning, and there is no knowing where he will be in the
+afternoon. While the Gryphoness is searching, we should search also.
+We can return before sunset, and we will leave word here as to the
+direction we have taken, so that when she returns, she can quickly
+overtake us. It is my opinion that not a moment should be lost. I
+will be your guide. I know this country well."
+
+The Princess thought this sounded like good reasoning, and consented
+to set out. There were some beautiful mountains to the south-east;
+and among these, the Absolute Fool declared, a prince of good taste
+would be very apt to dwell. They, therefore, took this direction. But
+when they had travelled an hour or more, the mountains began to look
+bare and bleak, and the Absolute Fool declared that he did not
+believe any prince would live there. He therefore advised that they
+turn into a road that led to the north-east. It was a good road; and
+therefore he thought it led to a good place, where a person of good
+sense would be likely to reside. Along this road they therefore
+travelled. They had ridden but a few miles when they met three men,
+well armed and mounted. These men drew up their horses, and
+respectfully saluted the Princess.
+
+"High-born Lady," they said, "for by your aspect we know you to be
+such, we would inform you that we are the soldiers of the King, the
+outskirts of whose dominions you have reached. It is our duty to
+question all travellers, and, if their object in coming to our
+country is a good one, to give them whatever assistance and
+information they may require. Will you tell us why you are come?"
+
+"Impertinent vassals!" cried the Absolute Fool, riding up in a great
+passion. "How dare you interfere with a princess who has left her
+city because it was so dull and stupid, and is endeavoring to find a
+prince, with whom she has eaten a philopena, in order that she may
+marry him. Out of my way, or I will draw my sword and cleave you to
+the earth, and thus punish your unwarrantable curiosity!"
+
+The soldiers could not repress a smile.
+
+"In order to prevent mischief," they said to the Absolute Fool, "we
+shall be obliged to take you into custody."
+
+This they immediately did, and then requested the Princess to
+accompany them to the palace of their King, where she would receive
+hospitality and aid.
+
+The King welcomed the Princess with great cordiality. He had no son,
+and he much wished he had one; for in that case it might be his
+Prince for whom the young lady was looking. But there was a prince,
+he said, who lived in a city to the north, who was probably the very
+man; and he would send and make inquiries. In the mean time, the
+Princess would be entertained by himself and his Queen; and, if her
+servant would make a suitable apology, his violent language would be
+pardoned. But the Absolute Fool positively refused to do this.
+
+"I never apologize," he cried. "No man of spirit would do such a
+thing. What I say, I stand by."
+
+"Very well," said the King; "then you shall fight a wild beast." And
+he gave orders that the affair should be arranged for the following
+day.
+
+In a short time, however, some of his officers came to him and told
+him that there were no wild beasts; those on hand having been kept so
+long that they had become tame.
+
+"To be sure, there's the old lion, Sardon," they said; "but he is so
+dreadfully cross and has had so much experience in these fights, that
+for a long time it has not been considered fair to allow any one to
+enter the ring with him."
+
+"It is a pity," said the King, "to make the young man fight a tame
+beast; but, under the circumstances, the best thing to do will be to
+represent the case to him, just as it is. Tell him we are sorry we
+have not an ordinary wild beast; but that he can take his choice
+between a tame one and the lion Sardon, whose disposition and
+experience you will explain to him."
+
+When the matter was stated to the Absolute Fool, he refused with
+great scorn to fight a tame beast.
+
+"I will not be degraded in the eyes of the public," he said; "I will
+take the old lion."
+
+The next day, the court and the public assembled to see the fight;
+but the Queen and our Princess took a ride into the country, not
+wishing to witness a combat of this kind, especially one which was so
+unequal. The King ordered that every advantage should be given to the
+young man, in order that he might have every possible chance of
+success in fighting an animal which had been a victor on so many
+similar occasions. A large iron cage, furnished with a turnstile,
+into which the Absolute Fool could retire for rest and refreshment,
+but where the lion could not follow him, was placed in the middle of
+the arena, and the youth was supplied with all the weapons he
+desired. When every thing was ready, the Absolute Fool took his stand
+in the centre of the arena, and the door of the lion's den was
+opened. The great beast came out, he looked about for an instant, and
+then, with majestic step, advanced toward the young man. When he was
+within a few paces of him, he crouched for a spring.
+
+The Absolute Fool had never seen so magnificent a creature, and he
+could not restrain his admiration. With folded arms and sparkling
+eyes, he gazed with delight upon the lion's massive head, his long
+and flowing mane, his magnificent muscles, and his powerful feet and
+legs. There was an air of grandeur and strength about him which
+completely enraptured the youth. Approaching the lion, he knelt
+before him, and gazed with wondering ecstasy into his great, glowing
+eyes. "What glorious orbs!" he inwardly exclaimed. "What unfathomable
+expression! What possibilities! What reminiscences! And everywhere,
+what majesty of curve!"
+
+The lion was a good deal astonished at the conduct of the young man;
+and he soon began to suppose that this was not the person he was to
+fight, but probably a keeper, who was examining into his condition.
+After submitting to this scrutiny a few minutes, he gave a mighty
+yawn, which startled the spectators, but which delighted the Absolute
+Fool; for never before had he beheld such a depth of potentiality. He
+knelt in silent delight at this exhibition of the beauty of strength.
+
+Old Sardon soon became tired of all this, however, and he turned and
+walked back to his den. "When their man is ready," he thought to
+himself, "I will come out and fight him."
+
+One tremendous shout now arose from the multitude. "The youth has
+conquered!" they cried. "He has actually frightened the lion back
+into his den!" Rushing into the arena, they raised the Absolute Fool
+upon their shoulders and carried him in triumph to the open square in
+front of the palace, that he might be rewarded for his bravery. Here
+the King, followed by his court, quickly appeared; for he was as much
+delighted as any one at the victory of the young man.
+
+"Noble youth," he exclaimed, "you are the bravest of the brave. You
+are the only man I know who is worthy of our royal daughter, and you
+shall marry her forthwith. Long since, I vowed that only with the
+bravest should she wed."
+
+At this moment, the Queen and the Princess, returning from their
+ride, heard with joy the result of the combat; and riding up to the
+victor, the Queen declared that she would gladly join with her royal
+husband in giving their daughter to so brave a man.
+
+The Absolute Fool stood for a moment in silent thought; then,
+addressing the King, he said:
+
+"Was Your Majesty's father a king?"
+
+"He was," was the answer.
+
+"Was his father of royal blood?"
+
+"No; he was not," replied the King. "My grandfather was a man of the
+people; but his pre-eminent virtue, his great ability as a statesman,
+and the dignity and nobility of his character made him the unanimous
+choice of the nation as its sovereign."
+
+"I am sorry to hear that," said the Absolute Fool; "for it makes it
+necessary for me to decline the kind offer of your daughter in
+marriage. If I marry a princess at all, she must be one who can trace
+back her lineage through a long line of royal ancestors." And as he
+spoke, his breast swelled with manly pride.
+
+For a moment, the King was dumb with rage. Then loudly he shouted:
+"Ho, guards! Annihilate him! Avenge this insult!"
+
+At these words, the sword of every by-stander leaped from its
+scabbard; but, before any one could take a step forward, the Princess
+seized the Absolute Fool by his long and flowing locks, and put spurs
+to her horse. The young man yelled with pain, and shouted to
+her to let go; but she held firmly to his hair, and as he was
+extraordinarily active and fleet of foot, he kept pace with the
+galloping horse. A great crowd of people started in pursuit, but as
+none of them were mounted, they were soon left behind.
+
+"Let go my hair! Let go my hair!" shouted the Absolute Fool, as he
+bounded along. "You don't know how it hurts. Let go! Let go!"
+
+But the Princess never relinquished her hold until they were out of
+the King's domain.
+
+"A little more," cried the indignant youth, when she let him go, "and
+you would have pulled out a handful of my hair."
+
+"A little less," said the Princess, contemptuously, "and you would
+have been cut to pieces; for you have not sense enough to take care
+of yourself. I am sorry I listened to you, and left the inn to which
+the Gryphoness took me. It would have been far better to wait there
+for her as she told me to do."
+
+"Yes," said the Absolute Fool; "it would have been much better."
+
+"Now," said the Princess, "we will go back there, and see if she has
+returned."
+
+"If we can find it," said the other, "which I very much doubt."
+
+There were several roads at this point and, of course, they took the
+wrong one. As they went on, the Absolute Fool complained bitterly
+that he had left his horse behind him, and was obliged to walk.
+Sometimes he stopped, and said he would go back after it; but this
+the Princess sternly forbade.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+When the Gryphoness reached the city of the Prince, it was night; but
+she was not sorry for this. She did not like to show herself much in
+the daytime, because so many people were frightened by her. After a
+good deal of trouble, she discovered that the Prince had certainly
+left the city, although his guardians did not seem to be aware of it.
+They were so busy with a new palace, in part of which they were
+living, that they could not be expected to keep a constant eye upon
+him. In the morning, she met an old man who knew her, and was not
+afraid of her, and who told her that the day before, when he was up
+the river, he had seen the Prince on his white horse, riding on the
+bank of the stream; and that near him, in the water, was something
+which now looked like a woman, and again like a puff of mist. The
+Gryphoness reflected.
+
+"If this Prince has gone off in that way," she said to herself, "I
+believe that he is the very one whom the Princess is looking for, and
+that he has set out in search of her; and that creature in the water
+must be our Water Sprite, whom our master has probably sent out to
+discover where the Prince is going. If he had told me about this, it
+would have saved much trouble. From the direction in which they were
+going, I feel sure that the Water Sprite was taking the Prince to the
+Land of the Lovely Lakes. She never fails to go there, if she can
+possibly get an excuse. I will follow them. I suppose the Princess
+will be tired, waiting at the inn; but I must know where the Prince
+is, and if he is really her Prince, before I go back to her."
+
+When the Gryphoness reached the Land of the Lovely Lakes, she
+wandered all that day and the next night; but she saw nothing of
+those for whom she was looking.
+
+The Princess and the Absolute Fool journeyed on until near the close
+of the afternoon, when the sky began to be overcast, and it looked
+like rain. They were then not far from a large piece of water; and at
+a little distance, they saw a ship moored near the shore.
+
+"I shall seek shelter on board that ship," said the Princess.
+
+"It is going to storm," remarked the Absolute Fool. "I should prefer
+to be on dry land."
+
+"As the land is not likely to be very dry when it rains," said the
+Princess, "I prefer a shelter, even if it is upon wet water."
+
+"Women will always have their own way," muttered the Absolute Fool.
+
+The ship belonged to a crew of Amazon sailors, who gave the Princess
+a hearty welcome.
+
+"You may go on board if you choose," said the Absolute Fool to the
+Princess, "but I shall not risk my life in a ship manned by women."
+
+"It is well that you are of that opinion," said the Captain of the
+Amazons, who had heard this remark; "for you would not be allowed to
+come on board if you wished to. But we will give you a tent to
+protect you and the horse in case it should rain, and will send you
+something to eat."
+
+"While the Princess was taking tea with the Amazon Captain, she told
+her about the Prince, and how she was trying to find him.
+
+"Good!" cried the Captain. "I will join in the search, and take you
+in my ship. Some of my crew told me that yesterday they saw a young
+man, who looked like a prince, riding along the shore of a lake which
+adjoins the one we are on. In the morning we will sail after him. We
+shall keep near the shore, and your servant can mount your horse and
+ride along the edge of the lake. From what I know of the speed of
+this vessel, I think he can easily keep up with us."
+
+Early in the morning, the Amazon Captain called her crew together.
+"Hurrah, my brave girls!" she said. "We have an object. I never sail
+without an object, and it lights me to get one. The purpose of our
+present cruise is to find the Prince of whom this Princess is in
+search; and we must spare no pains to bring him to her, dead or
+alive."
+
+Luckily for her peace of mind, the Princess did not hear this speech.
+The day was a fine one, and before long the sun became very hot. The
+ship was sailing quite near the land, when the Absolute Fool rode
+down to the water's edge, and called out that he had something very
+important to communicate to the Princess. As he was not allowed to
+come on board, she was obliged to go on shore, to which she was rowed
+in a small boat.
+
+"I have been thinking," said the Absolute Fool, "that it is perfectly
+ridiculous, and very uncomfortable, to continue this search any
+longer. I would go back, but my master would not suffer me to return
+without knowing where you are going. I have, therefore, a plan to
+propose. Give up your useless search for this Prince, who is probably
+not nearly so handsome and intellectual as I am, and marry me. We
+will then return, and I will assume the reins of government in your
+domain."
+
+"Follow the vessel," said the Princess, "as you have been doing; for
+I wish some one to take care of my horse." And without another word,
+she returned to the ship.
+
+"I should like to sail as far as possible from shore during the rest
+of the trip," said she to the Captain.
+
+"Put the helm bias!" shouted the Amazon Captain to the steers-woman;
+"and keep him well out from land."
+
+When they had sailed through a small stream into the lake adjoining,
+the out-look, who was swinging in a hammock hung between the tops of
+the two masts, sang out, "Prince ahead!" Instantly all was activity
+on board the vessel. Story books were tucked under coils of rope,
+hem-stitching and embroidery were laid aside, and every woman was at
+her post.
+
+"The Princess is taking a nap," said the Captain, "and we will not
+awaken her. It will be so nice to surprise her by bringing the Prince
+to her. We will run our vessel ashore, and then steal quietly upon
+him. But do not let him get away. Cut him down, if he resists!"
+
+The Prince, who was plainly visible only a short distance ahead, was
+so pleasantly employed that he had not noticed the approach of the
+ship. He was sitting upon a low, moss-covered rock, close to the
+water's edge; and with a small hand-net, which he had found on the
+shore, he was scooping the most beautiful fishes from the lake,
+holding them up in the sunlight to admire their brilliant colors and
+graceful forms, and then returning them uninjured to the water. The
+Water Sprite was swimming near him, and calling to the fish to come
+up and be caught; for the gentle Prince would not hurt them. It was
+very delightful and rare sport, and it is not surprising that it
+entirely engrossed the attention of the Prince. The Amazons silently
+landed, and softly stole along the shore, a little back from the
+water. Then, at their Captain's command, they rushed upon the Prince.
+
+It was just about this time that the Gryphoness, who had been
+searching for the Prince, caught her first sight of him. Perceiving
+that he was about to be attacked, she rushed to his aid. The Amazon
+sailors reached him before she did, and seizing upon him they began
+to pull him away. The Prince resisted stoutly; but seeing that his
+assailants were women, he would not draw his sword. The Amazon
+Captain and mate, who were armed with broad knives, now raised their
+weapons, and called upon the Prince to surrender or die. But at this
+moment, the Gryphoness reached the spot, and catching the Captain and
+mate, each by an arm, she dragged them back from the Prince. The
+other Amazons, however, continued the combat; and the Prince defended
+himself by pushing them into the shallow water, where the Water
+Sprite nearly stifled them by throwing over them showers of spray.
+And now came riding up the Absolute Fool. Seeing a youth engaged in
+combat with the Amazon sailors, his blood boiled with indignation.
+
+"A man fighting women!" he exclaimed. "What a coward! My arm shall
+ever assist the weaker sex."
+
+Jumping from the horse, he drew his sword, and rushed upon the
+Prince. The Gryphoness saw the danger of the latter, and she would
+have gone to his assistance, but she was afraid to loosen her hold of
+the Amazon Captain and mate.
+
+Spreading her wings she flew to the top of a tree where she deposited
+the two warlike women upon a lofty branch, from which she knew it
+would take them a long time to get down to the ground. When she
+descended she found that the Absolute Fool had reached the Prince.
+The latter, being a brave fellow, although of so gentle a
+disposition, had been glad to find a man among his assailants, and
+had drawn his sword to defend himself. The two had just begun to
+fight when the Gryphoness seized the Absolute Fool by the waist and
+hurled him backward into some bushes.
+
+"You must not fight him!" she cried to the Prince. "He is beneath
+your rank! And as you will not draw your sword against these Amazons
+you must fly from them. If you run fast they cannot overtake you."
+
+The Prince followed her advice, and sheathing his sword he rapidly
+ran along the bank, followed by some of the Amazons who had succeeded
+in getting the water out of their eyes and mouths.
+
+"Run from women!" contemptuously remarked the Absolute Fool. "If you
+had not interfered with me," he said to the Gryphoness, "I should
+soon have put an end to such a coward."
+
+The Prince had nearly reached the place opposite to which the ship
+was moored, when the Princess, who had been awakened by the noise of
+the combat, appeared upon the deck of the vessel. The moment she saw
+the Prince, she felt convinced that he was certainly the one for whom
+she was looking. Fearing that the pursuing Amazons might kill him,
+she sprang from the vessel to his assistance; but her foot caught in
+a rope, and instead of reaching the shore, she fell into the water,
+which was here quite deep, and immediately sank out of sight. The
+Prince, who had noticed her just as she sprang, and who felt equally
+convinced that she was the one for whom he was searching, stopped his
+flight and rushed to the edge of the bank. Just as the Princess rose
+to the surface, he reached out his hand to her, and she took it.
+
+"Philopena!" cried the Prince.
+
+"You have won," said the Princess, gayly shaking the water from her
+curls, as he drew her ashore.
+
+At the request of the Princess, the pursuing Amazons forbore to
+assail the Prince, and when the Captain and the Mate had descended
+from the tree, every thing was explained.
+
+Within an hour, the Prince and Princess, after taking kind leave of
+the Gryphoness, and Water Sprite, and of the Amazon sailors, who
+cheered them loudly, rode away to the city of the Princess; while the
+three servants of the Inquisitive Dwarf returned to their master to
+report what had happened.
+
+The Absolute Fool was in a very bad humor; for he was obliged to go
+back on foot, having left his horse in the kingdom where he had so
+narrowly escaped being killed; and, besides this, he had had his hair
+pulled; and had not been treated with proper respect by either the
+Princess or the Gryphoness. He felt himself deeply injured. When he
+reached home, he determined that he would not remain in a position
+where his great abilities were so little appreciated. "I will do
+something," he said, "which shall prove to the world that I deserve
+to stand among the truly great. I will reform my fellow beings, and I
+will begin by reforming the Inquisitive Dwarf." Thereupon he went to
+his master, and said:
+
+"Sir, it is foolish and absurd for you to be meddling thus with the
+affairs of your neighbors. Give up your inquisitive habits, and learn
+some useful business. While you are doing this, I will consent to
+manage your affairs."
+
+The Inquisitive Dwarf turned to him, and said: "I have a great desire
+to know the exact appearance of the North Pole. Go and discover it
+for me."
+
+The Absolute Fool departed on this mission, and has not yet returned.
+
+When the Princess, with her Prince, reached her city, her uncles were
+very much amazed; for they had not known she had gone away. "If you
+are going to get married," they said, "we are very glad; for then you
+will not need our care, and we shall be free from the great
+responsibility which is bearing us down."
+
+In a short time the wedding took place, and then the question arose
+in which city should the young couple dwell. The Princess decided it.
+
+"In the winter," she said to the Prince, "We will live in your city,
+where all is life and activity; and where the houses are so well
+built with all the latest improvements. In the summer, we will come
+to my city, where everything is old, and shady, and serene." This
+they did, and were very happy.
+
+The Gryphoness would have been glad to go and live with the Princess,
+for she had taken a great fancy to her; but she did not think it
+worth her while to ask permission to do this.
+
+"My impulses, I know, are good," she said; "but my appearance is
+against me."
+
+As for the Water Sprite, she was in a truly disconsolate mood,
+because she had left so soon the Land of the Lovely Lakes, where she
+had been so happy. The more she thought about it, the more she
+grieved; and one morning, unable to bear her sorrow longer, she
+sprang into the great jet of the fountain. High into the bright air
+the fountain threw her, scattering her into a thousand drops of
+glittering water; but not one drop fell back into the basin. The
+great, warm sun drew them up; and, in a little white cloud, they
+floated away across the bright blue sky.
+
+
+
+
+
+SCRIBNER'S BOOKS FOR THE YOUNG.
+
+THIRTIETH THOUSAND.
+
+"In 'Little Lord Fauntleroy' we gain another charming child to add to
+our gallery of juvenile heroes and heroines; one who teaches a great
+lesson with such truth and sweetness that we part with him with real
+regret when the episode is over."--Louisa M. Alcott.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+LITTLE LORD FAUNTLEROY.
+
+By FRANCES HODGSON BURNETT.
+
+Beautifully illustrated by R. B. Birch. One volume, square 8vo,
+handsomely bound. $2.00.
+
+In "Little Lord Fauntleroy" the author of "That Lass o' Lowrie's" has
+given us a book which is absolutely certain to become one of the few
+real classics in the literature for children. She has presented a
+picture of child-life such as we have never had before; she has not
+only taken a subject quite new but she has written with such
+exquisite delicacy and sweetness the story of the little American
+boy's career that even were the situations old the story would be a
+notable one.
+
+"Little Lord Fauntleroy," though a book for children, is certainly
+not a "juvenile" in the common use of the word, paradoxical as the
+statement may seem. The hero is a manly little fellow, a child, but
+with all the elements of a man. Mrs. Burnett has made Lord Fauntleroy
+a thoughtful boy, and she is right in believing that the stories
+children like best are those best worth thinking about when they are
+being read.
+
+A NEW EDITION OF AN OLD FAVORITE.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+HANS BRINKER; or, The Silver Skates.
+
+A STORY OF LIFE IN HOLLAND
+
+By MARY MAPES DODGE.
+
+One volume, 12mo, with sixty beautiful illustrations. $1.50.
+
+The cordial appreciation with which "Hans Brinker" was first received
+has increased from year to year, until the original plates have
+become badly worn from constant use. The publishers have therefore
+reissued at half its original price their beautiful Holiday Edition,
+of which on its first appearance the Nation said: "We some time ago
+expressed our opinion that Mrs. Mary Mapes Dodge's delightful
+children's story called 'Hans Brinker; or, The Silver Skates'
+deserved an entirely new dress, with illustrations made in Holland
+instead of America. The publishers have just issued an edition in
+accordance with this suggestion. The pictures are admirable, and the
+whole volume, in appearance and contents, need not fear comparison
+with any juvenile publication of the year or of many years."
+
+
+AMONG THE LAW-MAKERS.
+
+By EDMUND ALTON.
+
+With many illustrations of the Government Buildings, Halls of
+Congress, etc., etc.
+
+One volume, square 8vo. $2.50.
+
+The author of this book was for four years connected with the
+legislative branch of our Government, in the capacity of a Senatorial
+page. His record of the memorable scenes and events which came under
+his observation is enlivened by anecdotes of public men, humorous and
+exciting episodes at the national capitol, and a great variety of
+stirring incidents.
+
+
+THE MAKING OF NEW ENGLAND.
+
+1580--1643.
+
+By SAMUEL ADAMS DRAKE.
+
+With many illustrations and maps. One volume, 12mo. $1.50.
+
+In his preface the author says: "To enhance the interest of this
+story, emphasis has been given to everything that went to make up the
+home-life of the pioneer settlers, or that relates to their various
+avocations." In all history no better examples of manliness, energy,
+and conscientiousness could be found, to be read about and studied by
+a child whose character is just forming. The story is told in such a
+vivid way that it is as interesting and absorbing as a romance.
+
+
+THE OLD-FASHIONED FAIRY BOOK.
+
+By MRS. BURTON HARRISON.
+
+With many quaint illustrations by MISS ROSINA EMMET.
+
+One volume, square 16mo. $1.00.
+
+"The little ones, who so willingly go back with us to 'Jack the
+Giant-Killer,' 'Blue-beard,' and the kindred stories of our
+childhood, will gladly welcome Mrs. Burton Harrison's 'Old-Fashioned
+Fairy Tales,' where the giant, the dwarf, the fairy, the wicked
+princess, the ogre, the metamorphosed prince, and all the heroes of
+that line come into play and action. ...The graceful pencil of Miss
+Rosina Emmet has given a pictorial interest to the book, and the many
+pictures scattered through its pages accord well with the good
+old-fashioned character of the tales."--Frank R. Stockton.
+
+
+BRIC-A-BRAC STORIES.
+
+By MRS. BURTON HARRISON.
+
+Illustrated and Cover designed by WALTER CRANE. One volume, 12mo.
+$2.00.
+
+"Upon the whole it is to be wished that every boy and girl in
+America, or anywhere else, might become intimately acquainted with
+the contents of this book. There is more virtue in one of
+these stories than in the entire library of modern juvenile
+literature."--Julian Hawthorne.
+
+
+THE MERRY ADVENTURES OF ROBIN HOOD,
+Of Great Renown in Nottinghamshire.
+
+Written and Illustrated by HOWARD PYLE.
+
+One volume, quarto, $3.00.
+
+"The Prince of Story-Tellers."--London Times.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+THE WORKS OF JULES VERNE.
+
+Uniform illustrated edition. Nine vols., 8vo, extra cloth, with over
+750 full-page illustrations. Price, per set, in a box, $17.50. Sold
+also in separate volumes.
+
+The most impossible stories of this imaginative writer are told in
+such a realistic manner and with so much scientific knowledge
+ingeniously wrought into them that they possess a fascination that is
+all their own. Their great and continued popularity, among both old
+and young, has led to the publication of this new edition in which
+all the numerous illustrations of the French edition are retained,
+and the volumes are issued in a uniform and attractive binding.
+
+Michael Strogoff; or, The Courier of the Czar..................$2 00
+A Floating City and the Blockade Runners....................... 2 00
+Hector Servadac................................................ 2 00
+Dick Sands..................................................... 2 00
+A Journey to the Center of the Earth........................... 2 00
+From the Earth to the Moon Direct in Ninety-seven Hours, Twenty
+   Minutes; and a Journey Around It............................ 2 00
+The Steam House. Part I.--The Demon of Cawnpore.
+   Part II.--Tigers and Traitors. Complete in one volume....... 2 00
+The Giant Raft. Part I.--Eight Hundred Leagues on the Amazon.
+   Part II.--The Cryptogram. Complete in one volume............ 2 00
+The Mysterious Island. Part I.--Dropped from the Clouds.
+   Part II.--Abandoned. Part III.--The Secret of the Island.
+   The complete work in one volume, with 150 illustrations..... 2 50
+
+
+A NEW AND REVISED EDITION OF THE
+ILLUSTRATED LIBRARY OF WONDERS.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+THE WONDERS OF MAN AND NATURE.
+
+Intelligence of Animals--Mountain Adventures--Bodily Strength and
+Skill--Wonderful Escapes--Thunder and Lightning--Adventures on the
+Great Hunting Grounds--Wonders of the Human Body--The Sublime in
+Nature.
+
+
+THE WONDERS OF SCIENCE.
+
+Wonders of Heat--Wonders of the Heavens--Wonders of Optics--The
+Sun--Wonders of Acoustics--Wonders of Water--Wonders of the
+Moon--Meteors, Aerolites, Storms, and Atmospheric Phenomena.
+
+
+THE WONDERS OF ART AND ARCHAEOLOGY.
+
+Egypt 3,300 Years Ago--Wonders of Sculpture--Wonders of Glass
+Making--Wonders of European Art--Wonders of Pompeii--Wonders of
+Architecture--The Wonders of Italian Art--The Wonders of Engraving.
+
+Twenty-four volumes, containing aver a thousand valuable
+illustrations.
+
+Each set, 8 volumes, in a box, $8.00.
+
+Each volume, 12mo, complete in itself. Sold separately at $1.00 per
+volume.
+
+
+CHILDREN'S STORIES OF AMERICAN PROGRESS.
+
+By HENRIETTA CHRISTIAN WRIGHT.
+
+With twelve full-page illustrations from drawings by J. STEEPLE
+DAVIS. One volume, 12mo. $1.50.
+
+"The 'Stories of American Progress' contain a series of pictures of
+events of the first half of the present century, and the scope of the
+book comprehends all the prominent steps by which we have reached our
+present position both as regards extent of country and industrial
+prosperity. They include an account of the first Steamboat, the
+Railroad, and the Telegraph, as well as of the Purchase of Florida,
+the War of 1812, and the Discovery of Gold. It will be found that no
+event of importance has been omitted, and any child fond of
+story-telling will gain from this book an amount of knowledge which
+may far exceed that which is usually acquired from the rigid
+instruction of the school-room."
+
+
+CHILDREN'S STORIES IN AMERICAN HISTORY.
+
+By HENRIETTA CHRISTIAN WRIGHT.
+
+With twelve full-page illustrations from drawings by J. STEEPLE
+DAVIS. One volume, 12mo. $1.50.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+THE IVORY KING.
+
+A Popular History of the Elephant and Its Allies.
+
+By CHARLES F. HOLDER.
+
+Square 8vo, with twenty-four full-page illustrations. $2.00.
+
+The wonderfully interesting array of facts which Mr. Holder brought
+together in his "Marvels of Animal Life" was the fruit very largely
+of his personal observations. It forms one of the most stimulating
+and delightful contributions to the class of Natural History books
+for the young that has ever been made, and was a fitting forerunner
+to "The Ivory King," which is devoted entirely to the Elephant, and
+has even a more vivid fascination than the first named volume. The
+summary of its contents includes the Natural History of the Elephant,
+its habits and ways and its intelligence, the Mammoth Three and Four
+Tusked Elephants, Hunting and Capturing Wild Elephants, the Elephant
+in Captivity, Rogue Elephants, the White Elephant, Trained Elephants,
+Show Elephants, Ivory, War Elephants, etc., etc. The numerous
+illustrations are especially excellent, being drawn from a great
+variety of sources.
+
+It would be hard to name a book which would be a more welcome and
+valued addition to the library of the average boy or girl just
+beginning to cultivate a love of reading and an interest in the world
+around them.
+
+
+MARVELS OF ANIMAL LIFE.
+
+By CHARLES F. HOLDER.
+
+Square 8vo, with thirty-two full-page illustrations. $2.00.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+SCRIBNER'S STANDARD JUVENILE BOOKS.
+
+THE BOY'S
+
+Library of Legend and Chivalry.
+
+EDITED BY SIDNEY LANIER,
+
+And richly illustrated by FREDERICKS, BENSELL, and KAPPES.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+THE BOY'S KING ARTHUR.   THE BOY'S FROISSART.
+KNIGHTLY LEGENDS OF WALES.   THE BOY'S PERCY.
+
+Four volumes, cloth, uniform binding. Price per set $7.00. Sold
+separately. Price per volume $2.00.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+"Amid all the strange and fanciful scenery of these stories,
+character and the ideals of character remain at the simplest and the
+purest. The romantic history transpires in the healthy atmosphere of
+the open air, on the green earth beneath the open sky.... The figures
+of Right, Truth, Justice, Honor, Purity, Courage, Reverence for Law,
+are always in the background; and the grand passion inspired by the
+book is for strength to do well and nobly in the world."--The
+Independent.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+THE BOY'S
+Library of Pluck and Action.
+
+A JOLLY FELLOWSHIP, By Frank R. Stockton.
+HANS BRINKER; OR, THE SILVER SKATES. A story of life in Holland. By
+   Mrs. Mary Mapes Dodge.
+THE BOY EMIGRANTS, By Noah Brooks.
+PHAETON ROGERS, By Rossiter Johnson.
+
+Four volumes, 12mo, in a box, illustrated, $5.00. Sold separately,
+price per volume $1.50.
+
+In the "Boy's Library of Pluck and Action," the design was to bring
+together the representative and most popular books of four of the
+best known writers for young people. The names of Mary Mapes Dodge,
+Frank R. Stockton, Noah Brooks, and Rossiter Johnson are familiar
+ones in every household, and a set of books, to which each has
+contributed one, forms a present that will delight the heart of every
+boy who likes manly, spirited, and amusing tales. The volumes are
+beautifully illustrated and uniformly bound in a most attractive
+form.
+
+
+SCRIBNER'S LIST OF JUVENILE BOOKS.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+The great legend of the Nibelungen told to boys and girls.
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+THE STORY OF SIEGFRIED.
+
+By JAMES BALDWIN.
+
+With a series of superb illustrations by Howard Pyle. One volume,
+square 12mo. $2.00.
+
+Mr. Baldwin has at last given "The Story of Siegfried" in the way in
+which it most appeals to the boy-reader,--simply and strongly told,
+with all its fire and action, yet without losing any of that strange
+charm of the myth, and that heroic pathos, which every previous
+attempt at a version, even for adult readers, has failed to catch.
+
+
+THE STORY OF ROLAND.
+
+By JAMES BALDWIN.
+
+With a series of illustrations by R.B. Birch. One volume, square
+12mo. $2.00.
+
+This volume is intended as a companion to "The Story of Siegfried."
+As Siegfried was an adaptation of Northern myths and romances to the
+wants and the understanding of young readers, so is this story a
+similar adaptation of the middle-age romances relating to Charlemagne
+and his paladins. As Siegfried was the greatest of the heroes of the
+North, so, too, was Roland the most famous among the knights of the
+Middle Ages.
+
+"We congratulate the boys of the land upon the appearance of this
+book. We commend it to parents who are selecting literature for their
+children, assured, as we are, that it will convince them that books
+may be found which will engage the attention, and stimulate the
+imagination, of the young, without dissipating the mind, or blunting
+the moral sensibilities."--Philadelphia Messenger.
+
+
+THE FIRST REALLY PRACTICAL BOY'S BOOK.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+THE AMERICAN BOY'S HANDY BOOK;
+
+Or, WHAT TO DO AND HOW TO DO IT.
+
+By DANIEL C. BEARD.
+
+With three hundred illustrations by the author. One volume, 8vo.
+$2.00.
+
+Mr. Beard's book is the first to tell the active, inventive, and
+practical American boy the things he really wants to know, the
+thousand things he wants to do, and the ten thousand ways in which he
+can do them, with the helps and ingenious contrivances which every
+boy can either procure or make.
+
+The author divides the book among the sports of the four seasons; and
+he has made an almost exhaustive collection of the cleverest modern
+devices, besides himself inventing an immense number of capital and
+practical ideas.
+
+
+FRANK R. STOCKTON'S POPULAR STORIES.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+THE STORY OF VITEAU.
+
+With sixteen full-page illustrations by R.B. Birch.
+
+One volume, 12mo, extra cloth. $1.50.
+
+In "The Story of Viteau," Mr. Stockton has opened a new vein, and one
+that he has shown all his well-known skill and ability in working.
+While describing the life and surroundings of Raymond, Louis, and
+Agnes at Viteau at the Castle of De Barran, or in the woods among the
+Cotereaux, he gives a picture of France in the age of chivalry, and
+tells, at the same time, a romantic and absorbing story of adventure
+and knightly daring. Mr. Birch's spirited illustrations add much to
+the attraction of the book.
+
+
+A JOLLY FELLOWSHIP.
+
+Illustrated. One volume, 12mo, extra cloth. $1.50.
+
+"'A Jolly Fellowship,' by Mr. Frank Stockton, is a worthy successor
+to his 'Rudder Grange.' Although written for lads, it is full of
+delicious nonsense that will be enjoyed by men and women.... The less
+serious parts are described with a mock gravity that is the
+perfection of harmless burlesque, while all the nonsense has a vein
+of good sense running through it, so that really useful information
+is conveyed to the young and untravelled reader's mind."--Philadelphia
+Evening Bulletin.
+
+
+THE FLOATING PRINCE, AND OTHER FAIRY TALES.
+
+With illustrations by Bensell and others. One volume, quarto, boards.
+$1.50.
+
+"Stockton has the knack, perhaps genius would be a better word, of
+writing in the easiest of colloquial English, without descending to
+the plane of the vulgar or commonplace. The very perfection of his
+work hinders the reader from perceiving at once how good of its kind
+it is.... With the added charm of a most delicate humor,--a real
+humor, mellow, tender, and informed by a singularly quaint and racy
+fancy,--his stories become irresistibly attractive."--Philadelphia
+Times.
+
+
+NEW EDITIONS OF OLD FAVORITES.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+ROUNDABOUT RAMBLES IN LANDS OF FACT AND FICTION.
+
+One volume, quarto, boards, with very attractive lithographed cover,
+three hundred and seventy pages, two hundred illustrations. A new
+edition. Price reduced from $3.00 to $1.50.
+
+
+TALES OUT OF SCHOOL.
+
+One volume, quarto, boards, with handsome lithographed cover, three
+hundred and fifty pages, nearly two hundred illustrations. A new
+edition. Price reduced from $3.00 to $1.50.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Charles Scribner's Sons, Publishers, 743 and 745 Broadway, New York.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Bee-Man of Orn and Other Fanciful
+Tales, by Frank R. Stockton
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BEE-MAN OF ORN AND OTHERS ***
+
+***** This file should be named 12067.txt or 12067.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/1/2/0/6/12067/
+
+Produced by Suzanne Shell, Kevin Field and PG Distributed Proofreaders
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook's
+eBook number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII,
+compressed (zipped), HTML and others.
+
+Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks replace the old file and take over
+the old filename and etext number.  The replaced older file is renamed.
+VERSIONS based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving
+new filenames and etext numbers.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+EBooks posted prior to November 2003, with eBook numbers BELOW #10000,
+are filed in directories based on their release date.  If you want to
+download any of these eBooks directly, rather than using the regular
+search system you may utilize the following addresses and just
+download by the etext year.
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org/etext06
+
+    (Or /etext 05, 04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99,
+     98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90)
+
+EBooks posted since November 2003, with etext numbers OVER #10000, are
+filed in a different way.  The year of a release date is no longer part
+of the directory path.  The path is based on the etext number (which is
+identical to the filename).  The path to the file is made up of single
+digits corresponding to all but the last digit in the filename.  For
+example an eBook of filename 10234 would be found at:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org/1/0/2/3/10234
+
+or filename 24689 would be found at:
+     https://www.gutenberg.org/2/4/6/8/24689
+
+An alternative method of locating eBooks:
+     https://www.gutenberg.org/GUTINDEX.ALL
+
+
diff --git a/old/12067.zip b/old/12067.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5d4fca7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/12067.zip